Extracted text (via pymupdf)
936560 characters
City of Chandler Construction Manager at Risk Construction Services
Page i
Public Works & Utilities Department, Capital Projects Division
Project Name: WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS – GMP 1
Project No.: WW1901.401
Rev.12/1/2020
CITY OF CHANDLER, ARIZONA
WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
IMPROVEMENTS – GMP 1
CITY PROJECT NO. WW1901.401
CONSTRUCTION SERVICES CONTRACT
(CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AT RISK)
__________________________________________________
Andrew Goh, P.E.
CIP City Engineer
City of Chandler Construction Manager at Risk Construction Services
Page ii
Public Works & Utilities Department, Capital Projects Division
Project Name: WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS – GMP 1
Project No.: WW1901.401
Rev.12/1/2020
CITY OF CHANDLER, ARIZONA
WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS – GMP 1
CITY PROJECT NO.: WW1901.401
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARTICIPANTS AND PROJECT ......................................................................................... 1
ARTICLE 1 -
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ................................................................................................ 2
ARTICLE 2 -
PRE-CONSTRUCTION SERVICES ...................................................................................... 2
ARTICLE 3 -
CONSTRUCTION SERVICES .............................................................................................. 2
ARTICLE 4 -
CITY RESPONSIBILITIES ................................................................................................... 4
ARTICLE 5 -
CONTRACT TIME .............................................................................................................. 5
ARTICLE 6 -
CONTRACT PRICE............................................................................................................. 7
ARTICLE 7 -
EXHIBIT A – PROJECT SPECIFIC SPECIAL PROVISIONS ................................................................. SP-1
EXHIBIT B – GENERAL CONDITIONS ............................................................................................. GC-1
EXHIBIT C – TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................... TS-1
EXHIBIT D – ACCEPTED GMP/PRICE PROPOSAL ....................................................................... GMP-1
EXHIBIT E – SUBCONTRACTOR’S LIST FORM .............................................................................. SUB-1
EXHIBIT F – GIS / GPS DATA DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS (IF APPLICABLE) ............................... GIS-1
City of Chandler Construction Manager at Risk Construction Services
C-1 of 17
Public Works & Utilities Department, Capital Projects Division
Project Name: WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS – GMP 1
Project No.: WW1901.401
Rev.12/1/2020
CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AT RISK
CONSTRUCTION SERVICES CONTRACT
PROJECT NO.: WW1901.401
THIS CONTRACT is made and entered into on the ______day of _______________, 2021,
(“Effective Date”) by and between City of Chandler, an Arizona municipal corporation,
hereinafter called “City” and the “Construction Manager at Risk” or “CM@Risk” designated
below (City and CM@Risk may individually be referred to as “Party” and collectively
referred to as “Parties”).
City and CM@Risk agree as follows:
PARTICIPANTS AND PROJECT
ARTICLE 1 -
CITY:
City of Chandler
CIP City Engineer: Andrew Goh
Public Works & Utilities Department
P.O. Box 4008, Mail Stop 407
Chandler, AZ 85244-4008
Phone: 480-782-3343
Email: andrew.goh@chandleraz.gov
CM@Risk:
McCarthy Building Companies, Inc.
6225 N. 24th St., Ste. 200, Phoenix, AZ 85016
Business Organization:
Corporation
State Where Organized:
Missouri
CM@Risk Representative:
Mr. Shane Banks
Phone: 480-389-7612
Email: sbanks@mccarthy.com
PROJECT DESCRIPTION:
Procurement of disc filters and stainless steel gates, demolition and concrete work.
PROJECT LOCATION:
Ocotillo Water Reclamation Facility (OWRF) is located at 3333 South Old Price Road, and
Airport Water Reclamation Facility (AWRF) is located at 905 East Queen Creek Road.
City of Chandler Construction Manager at Risk Construction Services
C-2 of 17
Public Works & Utilities Department, Capital Projects Division
Project Name: WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS – GMP 1
Project No.: WW1901.401
Rev.12/1/2020
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
ARTICLE 2 -
2.1
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The Contract between City and CM@Risk will consist of the following Contract
Documents:
1. This Construction Services Contract and all of its Exhibits, including Project
Plans and Technical Specifications.
2. General Conditions and General Conditions Appendices, incorporated by
reference.
3. Project Specific Special Provisions as set forth in Exhibit A, incorporated by
reference.
4. Accepted GMP/Price Proposal as set forth in Exhibit D, incorporated by reference.
2.2
In the event of any inconsistency, conflict, or ambiguity between or among the
Contract Documents, the Contract Documents will take precedence as described in
Section 14.1.4 of the General Conditions.
2.3
DEFINITIONS
The definitions in Sections 2 and 15 of the General Conditions apply to all the
Contract Documents, including this Agreement. Additional definitions or defined
terms applicable to all the Contract Documents for this Project, if any, include the
following:
N/A
PRE-CONSTRUCTION SERVICES
ARTICLE 3 -
Although CM@Risk has performed Pre-Construction Services pursuant to a separate
Contract between City and CM@Risk, the completion, quality and accuracy of those services
and the deliverables provided by City thereunder directly impact CM@Risk’s performance of
its obligations under this Contract. Therefore, all of CM@Risk’s obligations, duties, and
warranties in relation to Pre-Construction Services and deliverables survive completion of
the Pre-Construction Services Contract and are incorporated herein. Any breach of any of
CM@Risk’s duties, obligations, or warranties under the Pre-Construction Services Contract
will likewise be considered a breach of this Contract.
CONSTRUCTION SERVICES
ARTICLE 4 -
4.1
GENERAL
City of Chandler Construction Manager at Risk Construction Services
C-3 of 17
Public Works & Utilities Department, Capital Projects Division
Project Name: WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS – GMP 1
Project No.: WW1901.401
Rev.12/1/2020
4.1.1
CM@Risk agrees at its own cost and expense, to do all work necessary and required to
fully, timely and properly complete the construction of the Project in strict
accordance with the Contract Documents in a good and workmanlike manner, free
and clear of all claims, liens, and charges whatsoever, in the manner and under the
conditions specified, and within the schedule, stated in attached Exhibit A.
4.1.2
CM@Risk must provide all of the labor and materials, and perform the Work in
accordance with Section 4 of the General Conditions. Some, but not all, of the major
components of the Construction Services and the corresponding subsections of
Section 4 of the General Conditions are set forth below.
4.1.3
This is a contract for complete construction services in accordance with the
Construction Manager at Risk method of delivery of construction services. CM@RISK
has participated in the design process and been an active member of the Project
Design Team and is fully aware of any issues and constraints involved in this
Construction Project.
4.1.4
CM@RISK is the CITY’s fiduciary responsible for undertaking all necessary action
contemplated under the contract documents to construct the Project and ensure
timely and quality completion of the Project at a cost within the Guaranteed Maximum
Price (GMP).
4.1.5
At all times relevant to this Contract and performance of the Work, the CM@Risk must
fully comply with all Laws, Regulations, or Legal Requirements applicable to City, the
Project and the Contract, including, without limitation, those set forth on attached
Exhibit A.
4.1.6
CM@Risk must perform the Work under this Contract using only those firms, team
members and individuals designated by CM@Risk consistent with the Statement of
Qualifications dated December 12, 2019, the GMP Proposal, or otherwise approved by
City pursuant to the General Conditions. No other entities or individuals may be used
without prior approval of the Project Manager
4.1.7
CM@Risk will comply with all terms and conditions of the General Conditions.
4.1.8
In the event of a conflict between this Contract and the General Conditions or an
exhibit hereto or appendix thereto, the terms of this Contract will control.
4.1.9
Ownership of Work Product. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this
Contract, all Work Product prepared or otherwise created in connection with the
performance of this Contract, including the Work, are to be and remain the property of
City. For purposes of this provision, “Work Product” will include all designs, drawings,
plans, specifications, ideas, renderings and other information or matter, in whatever
City of Chandler Construction Manager at Risk Construction Services
C-4 of 17
Public Works & Utilities Department, Capital Projects Division
Project Name: WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS – GMP 1
Project No.: WW1901.401
Rev.12/1/2020
form created (e.g., electronic or printed) and in all media now known or hereinafter
created. All Work Product will be considered Work Made for Hire as defined in the
United States Copyright Act 17 U.S.C. § 101 (Copyright Act). If for any reason, any such
Work is found not to be a Work Made for Hire, CM@Risk hereby transfers and assigns
ownership of the copyright in such Work to City. The rights in this Section are exclusive
to City in perpetuity.
4.2
CM@RISK’S PRE-CONTRACT AND PRE-WORK DELIVERABLES
4.2.1
The CM@Risk must provide the Deliverables in accordance with Section 4.2 of the
General Conditions. Any additional items which CM@Risk must deliver to City prior to
commencing the Work on this Project, if any, include the following:
N/A
4.3
PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
Refer to Section 4.3 of the General Conditions.
4.4
PERFORMANCE
OF
THE
WORK
(INCLUDING
FIELD
MEASUREMENTS,
SUBCONTRACTORS, AND SUPPLIERS)
Refer to Section 4.4 of the General Conditions.
4.5
CONTROL OF THE PROJECT SITE
Refer to Section 4.5 of the General Conditions.
4.6
PROJECT SAFETY
Refer to Section 4.6 of the General Conditions.
4.7
MATERIALS QUALITY, SUBSTITUTIONS AND SHOP DRAWINGS
Refer to Section 4.7 of the General Conditions.
4.8
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Refer to Section 4.8 of the General Conditions.
4.9
WARRANTY AND CORRECTION OF DEFECTIVE WORK
Refer to Section 4.9 of the General Conditions.
CITY RESPONSIBILITIES
ARTICLE 5 -
5.1
City will have the responsibilities, and provide the information specified in, and
subject to the conditions set forth in, Section 5 of the General Conditions.
City of Chandler Construction Manager at Risk Construction Services
C-5 of 17
Public Works & Utilities Department, Capital Projects Division
Project Name: WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS – GMP 1
Project No.: WW1901.401
Rev.12/1/2020
5.2
Additional services to be provided or responsibilities assumed, by City, if any, are listed
below:
N/A
5.3
Additional information to be provided by City, if any, is listed below:
N/A
CONTRACT TIME
ARTICLE 6 -
6.1
GENERAL
6.1.1
The Contract Duration is 250 Calendar Days.
6.1.2
The Contract Time will start with the Notice to Proceed (NTP) and end with Final
Acceptance, as set forth in Article 6.4 below. The Notice to Proceed cannot be issued until
approval and acceptance by City of the GMP or Fixed Price.
6.1.3
The Contract Time will be as set forth in the Project Schedule. CM@Risk agrees that
it will commence performance of the Work and complete the Project through Final
Acceptance within the Contract Time.
6.1.4
Time is of the essence of this Contract for the Project, and for each phase and
designated Milestone thereof.
6.2
PROJECT SCHEDULE
6.2.1
The Project Schedule approved as part of the GMP Proposal and incorporated herein as
part of the attached Exhibit D must be updated and maintained throughout
CM@Risk’s performance under this Contract in accordance with Section 6.2 of the
General Conditions.
6.2.2
Failure on the part of CM@Risk to adhere to the approved Project Schedule will be
deemed a material breach and sufficient grounds for termination of this Contract by
City.
6.2.3
Work must be completed to meet the following milestones after the Notice to Proceed:
Milestone
Time
Liquidated damages for delay
1.
N/A
within
days
$
per calendar day
City of Chandler Construction Manager at Risk Construction Services
C-6 of 17
Public Works & Utilities Department, Capital Projects Division
Project Name: WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS – GMP 1
Project No.: WW1901.401
Rev.12/1/2020
6.3
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
Substantial Completion must be achieved no later than the Substantial Completion
Date set forth in the Project Schedule. Substantial Completion will be determined in
accordance with Section 6.3 of the General Conditions.
6.4
FINAL ACCEPTANCE
6.4.1
Final Acceptance will be obtained within the time period set forth in the Project
Schedule.
6.4.2
Final Acceptance will be issued pursuant to Section 6.5 of the General Conditions.
6.5
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
6.5.1
Substantial Completion Liquidated Damages. CM@Risk acknowledges and agrees
that if CM@Risk fails to obtain Substantial Completion of the Work within the
Contract Time, City will sustain extensive damages and serious loss as a result of such
failure. The exact amount of such damages will be extremely difficult to ascertain.
Therefore, City and CM@Risk agree that if CM@Risk fails to achieve Substantial
Completion of the Work within the Contract Time, City will be entitled to retain or
recover from CM@Risk, as liquidated damages and not as a penalty, the sum per
calendar day as indicated in MAG § 108.9.
6.5.2
Final Acceptance Liquidated Damages. For the same reasons set forth in Article 6.5.1
above, City and CM@Risk further agree that if CM@Risk fails to achieve Final
Acceptance of the Work within the Contract Time, City will be entitled to retain or
recover from CM@Risk, as liquidated damages and not as a penalty, the sum per
calendar day as indicated in MAG § 108.9 commencing from the actual date of
Substantial Completion or Final Acceptance as required under the Contract.
6.5.3
MAG Liquidated Damages. If no liquidated damages are specified in Articles 6.5.1 or
6.5.2 above, then the liquidated damages provisions in MAG § 108.9 will apply.
6.5.4
City may deduct liquidated damages described in this Article 6.5 from any unpaid
amounts then or thereafter due CM@Risk under this Agreement. Any liquidated
damages not so deducted from any unpaid amounts due CM@Risk will be payable to
City at the demand of City, together with interest from the date of the demand at the
highest lawful rate of interest payable by CM@Risk.
6.6
MUTUAL WAIVER OF CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ONLY
City of Chandler Construction Manager at Risk Construction Services
C-7 of 17
Public Works & Utilities Department, Capital Projects Division
Project Name: WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS – GMP 1
Project No.: WW1901.401
Rev.12/1/2020
6.6.1
CM@Risk and City waive claims against each other for consequential damages arising
out of or relating to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes:
6.6.1.1 Damages incurred by City for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit,
financing, business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee
productivity or of the services of such persons; and
6.6.1.2 Damages incurred by CM@Risk for principal office expenses including the
compensation of personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and
reputation, and for loss of profit except anticipated profit arising directly from the
Work.
6.6.2
This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages
due to either Party’s termination of this Contract. Nothing contained in this Article
6 .6 will be deemed to preclude an award of liquidated damages, when applicable, in
accordance with Article 6.5 above.
6.6.3
Nothing herein will be deemed to constitute a waiver of any other remedy available to
City in the event of CM@Risk’s default under this Contract prior to full performance of
the Work including, as applicable, specific performance or completion of the Work on
behalf of CM@Risk, the cost and expense of which will be offset against any monies
then or thereafter due to CM@Risk (if any) and otherwise immediately reimbursed to
City by CM@Risk.
CONTRACT PRICE
ARTICLE 7 -
7.1
CONTRACT PRICE
7.1.1
In exchange for CM@Risk’s full, timely, and acceptable performances and construction of
the Work under this Contract, and subject to all of the terms of this Contract, City
will pay CM@Risk the “Contract Price,” which:
The sum of the CM@Risk’s Fee and reimbursable Cost of the Work, as defined in
Section 15 of the General Conditions, which the CM@Risk guarantees will not
exceed the GMP set forth in Exhibit D in the amount of $5,842,737. Costs which
would cause the GMP to be exceeded must be paid by CM@Risk without
reimbursement from City.
7.1.2
The Contract Price is all-inclusive and specifically includes all fees, cost, insurance and
bond premiums, allowances, construction contingency, owner’s contingency, and taxes
of any type necessary to fully, properly and timely perform and construct Work.
City of Chandler Construction Manager at Risk Construction Services
C-8 of 17
Public Works & Utilities Department, Capital Projects Division
Project Name: WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS – GMP 1
Project No.: WW1901.401
Rev.12/1/2020
7.2
COSTS
For any portion of the Work which, either through this Contract, Change Order or
otherwise, is performed and paid for on a cost, or time and materials basis, the costs
which may be reimbursed to CM@Risk and chargeable against the Contract Price will
be determined as set forth in MAG § 109.5.
SIGNATURE PAGE TO FOLLOW
EXHIBIT A
City of Chandler Construction Manager at Risk Construction Services
SP-1
Public Works & Utilities Department, Capital Projects Division
Project Name: WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS – GMP 1
Project No.: WW1901.401
Rev.12/1/2020
PROJECT SPECIFIC
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
N/A
EXHIBIT B
City of Chandler Construction Manager at Risk Construction Services
GC-1
Public Works & Utilities Department, Capital Projects Division
Project Name: WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS – GMP 1
Project No.: WW1901.401
Rev.12/1/2020
GENERAL CONDITIONS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Approved date: January 22, 2021
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-2 of 75
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 - SCOPE OF THESE GENERAL CONDITIONS ............................................................................... 3
SECTION 2 - GENERAL DEFINITIONS ............................................................................................................ 3
SECTION 3 - STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS AND DETAILS ........................................................................... 7
SECTION 4 - CONT R ACT OR’S R ES PONS IBILIT IES FOR CONST RUCT ION SE RVIC ES .................................. 8
SECTION 5 - CITY RESPONSIBILITIES .......................................................................................................... 27
SECTION 6 - CONTRACT TIME ...................................................................................................................... 29
SECTION 7 - CONTRACT PRICE .................................................................................................................... 35
SECTION 8 - PAYMENT ................................................................................................................................. 35
SECTION 9 - CHANGES TO THE CONTRACT ................................................................................................ 40
SECTION 10 - SUSPENSION AND TERMINATION ...................................................................................... 43
SECTION 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS ..................................................................................................... 44
SECTION 12 - INDEMNIFICATION ............................................................................................................... 49
SECTION 13 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION .......................................................................................................... 49
SECTION 14 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS ............................................................................................ 49
SECTION 15 - PROVISIONS APPLICABLE SOLELY TO GMP AND COST-BASED CONTRACTS, CHANGE
ORDERS, AND JOB ORDERS ......................................................................................................................... 57
SECTION 16 - PROVISIONS APPLICABLE SOLELY TO JOB ORDER CONTRACTS (JOC) ........................... 61
SECTION 17 - PROVISIONS APPLICABLE SOLELY TO PRE-CONSTRUCTION SERVICES FOR
CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AT RISK .......................................................................................................... 66
SECTION 18 - APPENDICES ...................................................................................................... APP-1 of 30
Appendix 1 – Policy Statement for Calculating Delays and Damages
Appendix 2 – Cost Reduction Incentive Proposals for Design Bid Build Contracts
Appendix 3 – Contractor’s Affidavit Regarding Settlement of Claims
Appendix 4 – Forms of Performance Bond
Appendix 5 – Forms of Payment Bond
Appendix 6 – Dispute Resolution
Appendix 7 – Certificate of Completion
Appendix 8 – Construction Sign Detail
Appendix 9 – Cost of the Work (Applicable solely to Construction Manager at Risk and
Job Order Contracting)
Appendix 10 Landscape Establishment Period
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-3 of 75
SECTION 1 - SCOPE OF THESE GENERAL CONDITIONS
These General Conditions encompass provisions that apply, and are incorporated into all
construction contracts entered into by the City of Chandler, unless otherwise specifically excluded in the
executed Contract.
SECTION 2 - GENERAL DEFINITIONS
Allowance : A specific amount for a specific item of Work, if any, that City agrees has not been sufficiently
designed, detailed, or selected (including design changes from 90% to 100% as authorized by and at
the discretion of the City) at the time the Contract Price is agreed to for Contractor to provide a definitive
price.
Alternate Systems Evaluations or Alternative Analysis: Alternatives for design, means and methods or
other scope considerations that are evaluated using value analysis principles and have the potential to
reduce construction costs while still delivering a quality and functional Project that meets City
requirements.
Change Order: A written instrument issued after execution of the Contract Documents signed by City
and Contractor, stating their agreement upon all of the following: the addition, deletion or revision in
the scope of services or deliverables; the amount of the adjustment to the Contract Price, the extent
of the adjustment to the Contract Time, or modifications of other contract terms. The Contract Price
and the Contract Time may be changed only by Change Order.
Consultant: Person or firm that provides professional services.
City (Owner or OWNER): City of Chandler, a municipal corporation, with whom Contractor has entered
into the Contract and for whom the Work or Services are to be provided pursuant to the Contract(s).
Contingent Bid Items: This is a minor bid item which is likely, but not certain, to occur during the course
of work. If the Engineer determines that this work is required, the Contractor will accomplish the work
and payment will be made based on the contingent unit bid price included in the proposal. Since the
quantity listed in the proposal is primarily for bid comparison, the amount of work required by the
Engineer may vary materially from this.
Contract: The written agreement executed between City and Contractor, including all of the Contract
Documents.
Contract Documents: The documents which together form the Contract between City and Contractor,
as identified in Article 2 of the Contract, or are otherwise incorporated into the Contract, including the
Contract, the exhibits thereto, these General Conditions, any Notice to Proceed, and any Job Order
(if applicable), the Plans and Specifications, Project Schedule, written and properly executed Change
Orders, MAG Specifications and City’s amendments thereto, and any other documents so designated in
the Contract.
Contract Price: The agreed-upon price to be paid to Contractor for full, timely, and acceptable completion
of the Work or Services under the terms of the Contract.
Contract Time(s): The number of calendar days or the dates related to the applicable phase, Substantial
Completion, or Final Acceptance as stated in Contract Documents. Contract Time starts with the Notice
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-4 of 75
to Proceed (NTP) and ends with Final Acceptance. The Contract Time is set forth in the Contract and
is based upon the Project Schedule agreed to by City in writing.
Contractor: The person or business association with whom City has entered into an agreement for
construction related Work or Services in relation to the Project at issue.
Contractor Payment Request: The form that is accepted by City and used by Contractor in requesting
progress payments or final payment and which must include such supporting documentation as is
required by the Contract Documents or City.
Construction Budget: The City’s budget for construction of the Project.
Construction Documents: The Plans, Specifications, and Drawings prepared and issued by the Design
Professional and approved by City for construction, meaning the documents are sealed by the
Design Professional (as required), acceptable for permitting and incorporated into the Contract by
this reference. All amendments and modifications to the Construction Documents must be approved in
writing by City prior to incorporation into the Contract.
Cost of the Work: The term Cost of the Work will mean costs necessarily incurred by Contractor in the
proper performance of the Work. Such costs will be at rates not higher than the standard paid at the
place of the Project except with prior consent of City.
Critical Path Method (CPM): A scheduling technique which identifies the logical sequence of the activities
occurring in a Construction Project, the anticipated time required to complete each activity in the
Project, and the activities that must be completed on schedule to finish the Project within the anticipated
time. Typically, activities are arranged in a network that shows both activities and their dependencies.
CPM is also used as a management technique which enables contracting parties to predict when
activities may occur so that resources can be effectively used and limitations can be identified.
Critical Path: Critical Path is the sequence of project network activities which add up to the longest overall
duration. Once established in the Project Schedule, the Critical Path for the Project must not be
changed without prior written approval of City.
Day: Calendar day(s) unless otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents.
Design Professional: The qualified, licensed person, firm or corporation who furnishes design and
construction administration services required under the Contract Documents. These services may
include, but are not limited to: development of Construction Drawings and Documents, review of
Contractor Submittal(s), review of and response to
Requests for Information, approval and
certification of progress payment applications, construction administration, and construction contract
close out.
Differing Site Conditions: Concealed or latent physical conditions or subsurface conditions at the Site
that, (i) materially differ from the conditions indicated in the Contract Documents, or (ii) are of an unusual
nature, differing materially from the conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as
inherent in the Work at the general area of the Site. Caliche, rock, hard-digging or sandy/silty soil
encountered on a project is not considered a “Differing Site Condition.”
Drawings (Plans): Documents, which visually represent the scope, extent and character of the Work to
be furnished and performed by Contractor during the construction phase and which have been prepared
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-5 of 75
or approved by the Design Professional and City. These documents include Drawings that have reached
a sufficient state of completion and released by Design Professional solely for the purposes of review
and use in performing constructability or bid-ability reviews by Contractor and in preparing cost
estimates (e.g. Master Planning and Programming, Schematic Design, Design Development, and
Construction Drawings), but “not for construction.” Shop Drawings are not Drawings as so defined.
Final Acceptance: The City’s acceptance of the facility or project from the Contractor after all Work is
completed, tested, and inspected in accordance with the contract requirements. Final Acceptance results
in a Letter of Acceptance (LOA).
Fixed Price: A fixed price or amount for a Contract Price, Scope of Work, materials, or other item under
a Contract, Change Order, or other agreement, which City agrees, in writing, to pay instead of the actual
cost.
Float: The number of Days by which an activity can be delayed without lengthening the Critical Path and
extending the Contract Time. Unless otherwise expressly agreed in writing, all Float belongs to City.
Laws, Regulations, or Legal Requirements: Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances,
codes and orders applicable to the Project of any and all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities
and courts having jurisdiction and any applicable provisions of the Development Agreement for the
Project (if any), including, without limitation, those provisions relating to the design and construction
of the Project.
Line Item: The individual elements of Work identified on a bid or other schedule and associated with a
price or a unit price and quantity particular to that individual element of the Work. Also refers to
individual items of work within the Schedule of Values.
Liquidated Damages: Designated damages for the City to collect as compensation upon a specific breach
(example: late delivery).
Long-Lead Item: Long-lead item refers to the equipment, product, or system that is identified at the
earliest stage of a project to have a delivery time long enough to affect directly the Critical Path/the overall
lead time of the project.
MAG: The Maricopa Association of Governments.
MAG Specifications: The most current version of the Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works
Construction published by MAG.
MAG Standard Details: The most current version of the Uniform Standard Details as published by MAG.
Minor change: A change in the Work having no impact on cost or time or the City-approved design intent,
as determined by City.
Notice to Proceed (NTP): A written notice given by City to Contractor fixing the date on which
Contractor will start to perform Contractor’s obligations under the Contract.
Project: The Project specified in the Contract (including a Job Order).
Project Manager: The Project Manager designated in Article 1 of the Contract, or any successor thereto
designated by City. The Project Manager has the authority to act on behalf of City, as delineated and
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-6 of 75
limited by the Contract Documents and applicable law. And City will communicate with Contractor
through the Project Manager. However, the Project Manager has no authority to bind City or City
Council in contravention of any City code, State or Federal statute or regulation, or these General
Conditions.
Project Schedule: The schedule for the completion of the Project agreed to and required by City.
Project Specific Conditions: Additional conditions which apply to the specific Project and Scope of Work
which are set forth in Exhibit D of the Contract.
Project Team: The Project Team consisting of the Design Professional, Contractor, Project Manager, and
such others as City may designate.
Punch List: The list initially prepared by Contractor pursuant to the Contract Documents, reviewed and
supplemented by the Project Manager (and at the sole option of the Project Manager, the Design
Professional) and approved by City containing items of incomplete work not impacting Substantial
Completion, if allowed for under the Contract, and to be completed or corrected by Contractor after
Substantial Completion and before Final Acceptance in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Quality Assurance (QA) Testing: Testing performed to verify the accuracy and applicability of the QC
testing results and to ascertain that the materials installed meet the specified levels of quality in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
Quality Control (QC) Testing: Testing performed to assure that the materials installed comply with the
requirements in the Contract Documents.
Requests for Information (RFIs): Formal written request from Contractor to City or Design Professional
for the Project seeking clarification or additional information needed for Contractor to properly
complete the Work or Services under the Contract. City may require RFI’s to be submitted on a specific
form or in a specified format.
Schedule of Values (SOV): The specified document prepared by Contractor, and approved and accepted
by City, which divides the Contract Price into pay items, such that the sum of all pay items equals
the Contract Price for the construction phase Work, or for any portion of the Work having a separate
specified Contract Price.
Scope of Work: The scope of work agreed to or required by City and incorporated into the Contract as
Exhibit A.
Shop Drawings: All drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specifically prepared for the Work
by Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to
illustrate some portion of the Work.
Site: The land or premises on which the Project is located.
Specifications: The part(s) of the Contract Documents for the construction phase consisting of written
technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as
applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto. Where specified, the Project
must be constructed using the current Uniform Standard Specifications and Details for Public Works
Construction as furnished by the Maricopa Association of Governments, as amended by City.
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-7 of 75
Subconsultant: A person, firm or corporation having a Contract with Consultant/Contractor to furnish
services required as its independent professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project.
Subcontractor: An individual or firm having a direct Contract with Contractor or any other individual or firm
having a Contract with the aforesaid contractors at any tier, who undertakes to perform a part of pre-
construction services or construction phase Work at the Site for which Contractor is responsible.
Subcontractors must be selected through the Subcontractor selection process described in the Contract
Documents, if any.
Substantial Completion: The date when the City determines that the Work (or separable units of Phases
as provided in the Contract Documents) is essentially and satisfactorily complete in accordance with the
Contract Documents such that the Project is ready for use by the City for its intended purpose, opening to
the general public, full occupancy or use by City (including, without limitation, all separate units, or
rooms, facilities, access, income-generating areas, and all areas serving the general public, as applicable,
must be ready for full operation without material inconvenience or discomfort), including, to the extent
applicable to the Work, the following: all materials, equipment, systems, controls, features, facilities,
accessories, and similar elements are installed in the proper manner and in operating condition,
inspected, and approved; surfaces have been painted; masonry and concrete cleaned with any sealer
or other finish applied; utilities and systems connected and functioning; site work complete;
permanent heating, ventilation, air conditioning, vertical transportation, and other systems properly
operating with proper controls; lighting and electrical systems installed, operable and controlled; paving
completed, signage installed, and other work as applicable, has been performed to a similar state of
essential and satisfactory completion.
Supplier: A manufacturer, fabricator, distributor, or vendor having a direct Contract with Contractor
or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the construction
phase Work by Contractor or any Subcontractor.
Total Float: Number of Days by which pre-construction services or construction phase Work or any part
of the same may be delayed without necessarily extending a pertinent Contract Time or schedule
milestone in the Project Schedule.
Work: The entire completion of construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof,
required to be furnished during the construction phase. Work includes and is the result of performing
or furnishing labor and furnishing and incorporating materials, resources and equipment into the
construction, and performing or furnishing services and documents as required by the Contract
Documents for the construction phase.
Writing: Typing, printing, photography and other modes of representing or reproducing words in a
visible form, including email, and expressions.
SECTION 3 - STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS AND DETAILS
3.1
City operates under the latest revision of the MAG Specifications and MAG Standard
Details as amended by City. City’s current amendment to the MAG Specifications, part of
the City’s Unified Development Manual, may be found in the downloaded from City’s website
at http://www.chandleraz.gov.
3.2
Copies of the MAG Specifications and MAG Standard Details are available at the
Maricopa Association of Governments office, 302 N. 1st Avenue, Suite 300, Phoenix,
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-8 of 75
Arizona.
They
may
also
be
downloaded
from
their
website
at:
http://www.azmag.gov/Newsroom/Publications
3.3
The MAG Specifications and Standard Details and City’s amendments thereto are
incorporated into the Contract by this reference.
SECTION 4 - CONT R ACT OR’S R ES PONS IBILIT IES FOR CONST RUCT ION SE RVIC ES
4.1
GENERAL
4.1.1
Contractor must construct the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and as
outlined in Exhibit A of the Contract to the satisfaction of City, exercising the degree of
professional care, skill, diligence, quality and judgment that a professional construction
manager engaged, experienced and specializing in the construction management of
construction and facilities of similar scope, function, size, quality, complexity and detail in
urban areas throughout the United States comparable to Chandler, Arizona would exercise
at such time, under similar conditions. Contractor must, at all times, perform the Work in
conformance with sound and generally accepted engineering principles and construction
management and construction contracting practices.
4.1.2
If Contractor observes errors, discrepancies or omissions in the Contract Documents,
Contractor must promptly notify the Design Professional and City and request clarification.
If Contractor, with the exercise of reasonable care, should have recognized such error,
inconsistency, omission or difference and fails to report it to City, and if Contractor
proceeds with the Work affected by such observed errors, discrepancies or omissions,
without receiving such clarifications, Contractor does so at its own risk and will be liable to
City for damages resulting from proceeding without clarification.
4.1.3
Project Team and agents of each of them, testing agencies and governmental agencies with
jurisdictional interests will be provided access to the Work at reasonable times for their
observation, inspection and testing. Contractor must provide proper and safe conditions for
such access.
4.1.4
Contractor must comply with, and require all Subcontractors to comply with, the Arizona
Contractors’ license laws, including all requirements with respect to being duly registered
and licensed.
4.1.5
Contractor must insure that all employees performing any Work for which Contractor is
responsible have a legal right to live and work in the United States. In addition, all
compensation of any such employee must meet all applicable requirements of the Fair Labor
Standards Act (FLSA) and Federal Minimum Wage laws.
4.1.6
Contractor must comply with the Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986 (IRCA).
Contractor understands and acknowledges the applicability of the IRCA activities.
Contractor agrees to comply with the IRCA while performing their work and to permit City
inspection of Contractor personnel records to verify such compliance.
4.1.7
Pursuant to MAG Specifications §§ 107.4, Contractor must report immediately any discovery
of archeological ruins or artifacts. Excavation must stop immediately so that City can decide
on the pertinent steps to follow such discovery.
4.1.8
All property owners that may be affected by the proposed construction activities must be
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-9 of 75
notified of the scope, duration of the construction activities and possible interference with
their day-to-day activities by Contractor prior to start of construction. In addition, individual
residential or commercial interferences, such as driveway restrictions, water outages, and
all other Work adjacent to residence/business, require 48-hour notification in advance of
specific adjoining Work. Notification may be through door hangers or other procedures
approved by the City.
4.1.9
Access must be maintained to adjacent properties at all times during construction. Where
property has more than one point of access, no more than one access will be restricted or
closed at any one time. Access to adjacent private driveways will be maintained during all
non-working hours.
4.1.10
Contractor must furnish and erect construction signs in accordance with Project
Specifications. The signs must be professionally prepared and subject to approval by City,
must be maintained by Contractor for the duration of the project, and must be removed by
Contractor during the final project clean up.
4.1.11
The number of signs required, the size, shape, installation requirements and information to
be included for construction signs is established on the detail sheet, provided, however,
signs must be a minimum of 4 foot by 8 foot and must be installed so that the bottom of
the sign is at least 4 foot above grade. No direct payment will be made for furnishing and
erecting construction signs. The cost thereof must be included in other items for which
direct payment is made. Sign locations will be determined by City.
4.1.12
All required construction signs must be installed by Contractor within 7 Days of Notice to
Proceed.
4.1.13
The Work to be accomplished under these Contract Documents has been designed for City
by a Design Professional retained by City for this purpose. It is understood that normal
construction Administration for the purpose of interpretation of the Contract Documents is
provided by City. Should any services of the Design Professional be required to assist in the
corrections of errors or omissions by Contractor, or services of the Design Professional be
required because of changes in structure or equipment where Contractor has requested
approval of substitute methods or material, or any other items detailed herein below, those
services will be provided by the Design Professional at the standard hourly rates previously
negotiated with City and must be paid for by the Contractor.
4.1.14
Contractor must reimburse City for costs incurred by the Design Professional for additional
services to the Project through no fault of City or the Design Professional including, but not
limited to, the following conditions:
a. Additional Site visits, investigations, inspections, design work or reports by
the Design Professional which are required due to damages to existing
facilities or completed Work caused by the Contractor in his performance,
Contractor’s negligence, or Contractor’s Work which is rejected as defective
or as failing to conform to the Contract Documents;
b. Design Professional construction phase services rendered on the project
during the time the project remains incomplete after the Contract date of
final completion will be charged to Contractor at a rate previously negotiated
City; and
c. All retesting required due to the failure of Contractor’s Work to meet the
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-10 of 75
requirements of the Contract Documents will be at Contractor’s expense. All
standby and travel time by the City’s testing lab, the Design Professional or
City due to Contractor’s inability to be prepared for testing at the agreed
upon time will be at the Contractor’s expense.
4.1.15
City may withhold from any payment otherwise due to Contractor any amounts necessary
to pay the Design Professional for such additional services as provided herein above.
4.1.16
Contractor will not be required to bear additional costs incurred by City due to errors by the
Design Professional.
4.2
CONTRACTOR’S PRE-CONTRACT AND PRE-WORK DELIVERABLES
4.2.1
Prior to award of the Contract, Contractor must execute Contract and deliver to City.
Failure to do so may delay Contract award. Contractor must also provide to City its
Contractor’s License classification and number and its Federal Tax I.D. number.
4.2.2
Before beginning any Work under the Contract, Contract must be fully executed by City.
4.2.3
After Contract award, City will issue to Contractor an award letter. At that time Contractor
must deliver to City such bonds and certificates of insurance with endorsements in such
amounts (and other evidence of insurance requested by City) required under Section 11 of
these General Conditions, and as the Contract requires.
4.2.4
As evidence of Workmen’s Compensation Insurance, Contractor must, upon request,
provide a letter of certification from the Industrial Commission of Arizona that Contractor
is insured by the State Compensation Fund or is an authorized self-insurer or a certificate
of insurance issued by an insurance company authorized by the Insurance Department
of Arizona to write Workmen’s Compensation and Occupational Disease Insurance in the
State of Arizona.
4.2.5
Within 10 Days of the date of the executed Contract letter issued by City, Contractor must
submit to City for review and acceptance the following items:
4.2.5.1
Comprehensive construction Project Schedule including a Critical Path Method (CPM)
diagram schedule as described in Section 6.2. Project Schedule must be in Microsoft Project
standard file format. Within 10 Days of receipt of City’s comments, Contractor must make
all required corrections, adjustments, and additions to complete the Project Schedule and
resubmit to City for review.
4.2.5.2
Preliminary schedule of submittals and Shop Drawings. Within 10 Days of receipt of City’s
comments, Contractor must submit the corrected and completed schedule of Shop
Drawings submissions for approval. Contractor’s schedule of Shop Drawings and sample
submittals will be acceptable to City if it provides a workable arrangement for reviewing and
processing the required submittals.
4.2.5.3
Schedule of Values in a form specified by City reflecting the subcontracts and other
categories that will be used to submit Pay Applications for the Work. The total amount of
the Schedule of Values must not be greater than the Contract Price. The Schedule of Values
will be reviewed at the Pre-Construction Conference and revised by Contractor within 10
Days after Pre-Construction Conference in response to comments and questions from City.
Once accepted by City in writing, the Schedule of Values for the Project must not be changed
without the prior written approval of City.
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-11 of 75
4.2.6
Video Recording Requirement. Prior to performing any Work, Contractor must document
the existing conditions of the Site, all other areas where Work will occur and all adjacent
areas that may be impacted by the Work via digital video format. Contractor must video
record and index all areas, features, buildings and other public and private improvements
that could potentially be impacted by the Work. Video recording must be coordinated with
City. When video recording private property, Contractor must also coordinate the video
recording with the private property owner, if possible. Contractor must provide City with a
copy of said digital video format prior to performing any Work.
4.2.7
Aerial Drone Construction Photography.
4.2.7.1
If Contract duration is greater than 90 calendar days, Contractor must engage a professional
unmanned aerial vehicle (UAV) aerial pilot to photograph the Site prior to construction
mobilization, at three-month intervals during construction, and following final inspection.
Drone camera specifications must meet the following minimum requirements:
a. 1-inch CMOS
b. Pixels: 20M
c. FOV 84 8.8 mm/24 mm (35 mm format equivalent) f/2.8-f/11 auto focus at 1 m-
d. For photographing: 16.9 Aspect Ratio: 5472x3078
e. For video shooting: MP4/MOV/H.264
f.
FHD: 1920x1080 120p @100Mbps
g. File format: High Definition (HD) JPEG for digital photos and HD MPEG 4 for
digital video.
h. All metadata to be recorded including GPS data and preserved with photographs
provided.
Interval
JPEG
3 month intervals
At an altitude (AGL) between
70-90 ft.
3 month intervals
Images to be taken every 50-
100 ft. to be determined based
on project scope.
4.2.7.2
Drone photos to be taken in sequential geographical order and then organized and provided in
the same manner unless otherwise specified.
4.2.7.3
Photos to be provided digitally via an online file share service and/or by a USB drive to contractor.
4.2.7.4
Drone pilots to obey ALL local (city, county, state) UAV regulations as well as FAA UAV
guidelines including, but not limited to, conducting all flights during daylight hours, not exceeding
maximum altitude ceilings (depending on area), not flying over people, yielding to other aircraft.
4.2.7.5
Drone pilots must fly drone within visual line of sight (VSOL) and have visual spotter when
needed. Drone pilots only to operate in favorable weather conditions when minimum visibility is
3 miles or greater.
4.2.7.6
Drone pilots to conduct a preflight checklist and visually inspect the entire flight path prior to flying
to ensure a safe flight.
4.2.7.7
Airspace Authorizations. Operations in Class G airspace are allowed without air traffic control
(ATC) permission. Operations in Class B, C, D and E airspace need ATC authorization. Drone
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-12 of 75
pilots to schedule each flight in advance and based on airspace if required will notify nearby
airports/control towers, etc.
4.2.8
Government Approvals and Permits.
4.2.8.1
Contractor must obtain all necessary permits for the Work and pay all applicable fees,
unless otherwise noted on the Plans and in the Specifications. City permit fees will be paid
internally by City. For bidding purposes, an allowance for all permit fees is included in the
bid schedule under the item “allowance for permit fees.” The Contractor will be paid for
the actual cost of the permit fees upon submitting a receipt showing the fee Contractor
has paid. Excluded from the above allowance are items such as all costs incurred by the
Contractor in securing the permit except for the actual permit fee established by the
agency, cost for all shut downs or outages, cost for pole bracing, cost of permits for
construction water, cost of construction water, cost for any additional insurance
requirements, cost for any licenses, and other similar type costs. Contractor is specifically
notified of the need to obtain the necessary environmental permits or file the necessary
environmental and regulatory permit notices.
4.2.8.2
Copies of all permits and the associated notices must be provided to City prior to starting
the permitted activity.
4.3
PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
4.3.1
Prior to the commencement of any Work, City will schedule a Pre-Construction Conference.
4.3.2
The purpose of this Conference is to establish a working relationship between Contractor,
the utility firms, and various City agencies. The agenda will include critical elements of the
Work schedule, submittal schedule, cost breakdown of major lump sum items, Payment
Requests and processing, coordination with the involved utility firms, and emergency
telephone numbers for all representatives involved in the course of construction.
4.3.3
Minimum attendance by Contractor at any mandatory meeting with City must be (1)
Contractor’s Representative, who is authorized to execute and sign documents on behalf
of the firm, (2) Contractor’s on-site Superintendent, and (3) Contractor’s Safety Office,
or other employee responsible for safety.
4.4
PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK (INCLUDING FIELD MEASUREMENTS,
SUBCONTRACTORS, AND SUPPLIERS)
4.4.1
Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of City or a
separate Contractor, Contractor must provide through itself or Subcontractors the
necessary supervision, labor, inspection, testing, start-up, material, equipment, machinery,
temporary utilities and other temporary facilities to permit Contractor to complete the
Work consistent with the Contract Documents.
4.4.2
Contractor must perform all construction activities efficiently and with the requisite
expertise, skill and competence to satisfy the requirements of the Contract Documents.
Contractor must at all times exercise complete and exclusive control over the means,
methods, safety, sequences and techniques of construction.
4.4.3
Contractor’s Superintendent must be present at the Site at all times that material Work
under this Contract is taking place. Contractor’s Superintendent or designee must be
present at the Site at all times any other Work under this Contract is taking place.
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-13 of 75
Superintendent must not be replaced without written notice to City. Whenever the
Superintendent is not present at a particular part of the Work where the City or Design
Professional may desire to inform the Contractor relative to interpretation of the Drawings
and Specifications or to disapproval or rejection of materials or Work performed, the City
or Design Professional may provide such information in writing to the foreman or other
worker in charge of the particular part of the Work in reference to which the information is
given. Information so given will be as binding as if given to the Superintendent.
4.4.4
All elements of the Work must be under the direct supervision of a foreman or his
designated representative on the Site who must have the authority to take actions required
to properly carry out that particular element of the Work.
4.4.5
Working Hours. Except in connection with the safety or protection of persons or the Work
or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated, all Work at
the Site must be performed during regular working hours, and Contractor will not permit
overtime work or the performance of Work on Saturday, Sunday or any legal holiday without
City’s written consent given after prior written notice to City. If it will become absolutely
necessary to perform Work at night or on Saturdays, Sundays or legal holidays, the City
must be informed at least 24 hours in advance of the beginning of performance of such
Work. Only such Work will be done at night as can be done satisfactorily as determined by
the City. Good lighting and all other necessary facilities for carrying out and inspecting the
Work must be provided and maintained at all points where such Work is being done.
Further, unless such non-normal work hours are performed at City’s request or required by
the Contract Documents, Contractor must pay to City all additional costs incurred by City by
reason of such non-normal working hours. Expenses incurred by City for overtime
compensation must be reimbursed by Contractor as follows: (i) City staff at the rate set forth
in current City Fee Schedule as published on City website, (ii) Design Professional and staff
at the standard hourly rates previously negotiated with City, and (iii) all others at actual cost
plus ten percent administrative overhead. Such costs may be deducted by City from any
payments due to Contractor. Provided, however, if overtime work or work during other
than normal hours is at the request of City and not due to Contractor delay, City will pay the
cost of City overtime expenses.
4.4.6
Where the Contract Documents require that a particular product be installed or applied by
an applicator approved by the manufacturer, it is Contractor’s responsibility to ensure
the Subcontractor employed for such work is approved by the manufacturer. All materials
and equipment must be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and
conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator,
supplier or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents; but no
provisions of any such instructions will be effective to impose on City of Design Professional
responsibility for the means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of
construction or for safety precautions incident thereto.
4.4.7
Before starting the Work, Contractor must carefully study and compare the various
Plans, Drawings, other Contract Documents, and Specifications relative to that portion of
the Work, as well as the information furnished by City, must take field measurements of any
existing conditions related to that portion of the Work and must observe any conditions at
the Site affecting it. The exactness of grades, elevations, dimensions, or locations given
on any Drawings, or the Work installed by other contractors, is not guaranteed by City.
4.4.8
Before ordering materials or doing Work, Contractor and each Subcontractor must verify
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-14 of 75
measurements at the Site and will be responsible for the correctness of such
measurements. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed because of differences
between actual dimensions and the dimensions indicated on the Contract Documents,
including the Drawings.
4.4.9
Ground Level Construction Photography.
4.4.9.1
The Contractor must furnish progress photographs of the project. The photographer
selected by the Contractor must be approved by the City and must be either a commercial
photographer or an individual experienced and equipped for such photography.
4.4.9.2
The Contractor must deliver to City all photographs taken during that period with each
application for payment. If the current photographs do not accompany the application, the
application will not be reviewed and will be returned to the Contractor as incomplete.
4.4.9.3
Photographs must be identified by use of typewritten labels affixed to the back of the
photograph. The label must provide a description of the view, the direction from which the
photograph was taken, the name of the project, City’s project number, the name of
Contractor and the date of the photography. The stationing must also be included for all
pipeline installations.
4.4.9.4
Photographs must be taken during the construction period and must be of aesthetic
composition and depict the progress of the Work from the beginning of construction
through and including the finished product. City may vary the specified frequency so that
significant progress or changes can be recorded on the photographs.
4.4.10
Underground Facilities.
4.4.10.1
The existence and number of facilities as shown on the Plans are estimated from
information furnished by the particular utility. Contractor is responsible for field verification
and location of all utilities prior to the start of construction. No field work will be allowed to
start until Contractor has contacted Arizona 811 and all affected utilities have been located.
In addition Contractor must expose and physically locate all potentially conflicting utilities
prior to construction. The actual locations of the utilities must be compared to locations
shown on the Plans and any required changes in alignment and grade must be made at the
time of construction in consultation with Project Manager. It is generally recognized and
Contractor should anticipate that information from Arizona 811 or information from utility
companies during project design, frequently fails to disclose all underground facilities. The
fact that more utility lines or other underground facilities are located in the Project Site than
shown on the Project Plans does not constitute an “unforeseen Condition” and such
undisclosed underground facilities do not differ materially from the conditions which
Contractor should expect. The provisions of Sections 105.4, 105.6, 107.11 and 109.8.1 of the
MAG Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction apply and are
incorporated herein by this reference.
4.4.10.2
Contractor is responsible for all coordination with utility companies. The provisions of
Sections 105.4, 105.6, 107.11 and 109.8.1 of the MAG Uniform Standard Specifications for
Public Works Construction strictly apply and no additional compensation will be paid to
Contractor for delays due to utility work on the project.
4.4.11
Relocation of Existing Water Meters. When a service line has been extended and a line
setter installed in a meter box, City forces will re-install meter. No compression fittings will
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-15 of 75
be utilized.
4.4.12
Water Turn-On or Turn-Off.
4.4.12.1
Contractor must coordinate all water line turn-ons and turn-offs through the City.
Application must be made to the Municipal Utility Division and Contractor must pay the
established charges. The City will close existing valves, but will not guarantee a bone-dry
Shutdown.
4.4.12.2
Contractor must notify all customers affected by the turn-off not less than 48 hours in
advance. Notification must be in writing, must give the reason for the turn-off and must
give the estimated time and duration that water service will be interrupted. Contractor is
also notified that water turn-off will not be permitted on the Day before and after
Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day.
4.4.12.3
No direct payment will be made to Contractor for turn-ons or turn-offs. Costs associated
therewith will be included in other items for which direct payment is made.
4.4.13
Tests and Inspections.
4.4.13.1
Contractor must give City timely (at a minimum, twenty-four hours) notice of readiness of
the Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals. Contractor must give timely notice
to City in advance of backfilling or otherwise covering any part of the Work so that city
representative may, if desired, observe such part of the Work before it is concealed.
Whenever Contractor varies the normal period during which Work or any portion of it is
carried on each Day, Contractor must give timely notice to City so that city representative
may, if desired, be present to observe the Work in progress. If Contractor fails to give such
timely notice, any Work done in the absence of city representative will be subject to
rejection. If Contractor gives such notice to City, but then is not ready for such inspections,
tests, approvals or observations at the time so noticed, Contractor must reimburse City for
all costs incurred by the attendance of city representatives.
4.4.13.2
If any law, ordinance, rule, regulation, code, or orders of any public body having jurisdiction
requires any Work (or part thereof) to be inspected, tested or approved, Contractor (unless
another party is specified in the Contract Documents) must assume full responsibility
therefor, pay all costs in connection therewith and furnish City the required certificates of
inspection, testing, or approval. Contractor must also be responsible for and must pay all
costs in connection with any inspection or testing required by the Specifications in
connection with City's acceptance of a manufacturer, fabricator, supplier or distributor of
materials or equipment proposed to be incorporated in the Work, or of materials or
equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation
in the Work. The cost of all other inspections, tests and approvals required by the Contract
Documents will be paid by City (unless otherwise specified).
4.4.13.3
All inspections, tests or approvals other than those required by law, ordinance, rule,
regulation, code or order of any public body having jurisdiction must be performed by
organizations acceptable to City and by the Design Professional if so specified.
4.4.13.4
Neither observations by City, the Design Professional nor inspections, tests or approvals by
others will relieve Contractor from their obligations to perform the Work in accordance with
the Contract Documents.
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-16 of 75
4.4.14
Uncovering Work. If any Work that is to be observed, inspected, tested or approved is
covered without written concurrence of City, it must, if requested by City be uncovered for
observation. Unless Contractor has given City timely notice of Contractor's intention to
cover such Work and City has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such
notice, Contractor must furnish all necessary labor, material and bear all the expenses of
such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory
reconstruction, including compensation for additional professional services, and an
appropriate deductive Change Order will be issued.
4.4.15
In all cases of interconnection of its Work with existing or other Work, Contractor must verify
at the Site all dimensions relating to such existing or other Work. Any errors due to
Contractor’s failure to so verify all such grades, elevations, locations or dimensions must
be promptly rectified by Contractor without any increase in the Contract Price. Any design
errors or omissions noted by Contractor during this review must be reported promptly to
City.
4.4.16
Contractor must establish and maintain all construction grades, lines, levels, and
benchmarks, and will be responsible for accuracy and protection of same. This Work
must be performed or supervised by a licensed civil engineer or surveyor in the State of
Arizona.
4.4.17
Contractor must photograph all buried piping of greater than four (4) inches in diameter
prior to backfill.
4.4.18
Contractor is responsible for the proper performance of the work of Subcontractors and any
acts and omissions in connection with such performance. Nothing in the Contract
Documents is intended or deemed to create any legal or contractual relationship
between City and any Subcontractor or Sub-Subcontractor, including but not limited to any
third-party beneficiary rights.
4.4.19
Contractor must coordinate the activities of all Subcontractors. Contractor must
coordinate performance of the Work with City’s Public Works & Utilities Department and
other departments or agencies within City. The Design Professional and other contractors
or parties involved in the Project. If City performs other work on the Project or at the Site with
separate contractors under City’s control, Contractor agrees to cooperate and coordinate
its activities with those of such separate contractors so that the Project can be completed
in an orderly and coordinated manner without unreasonable disruption.
4.4.20
Contractor will not substitute or change any Subcontractor or Supplier without the prior
written approval of City. Any substitute or replacement Subcontractor or Supplier must
be required to meet the same qualifications and selection criteria and process as the
original Subcontractor or Supplier. If a Subcontract/Supplier selection plan has been
approved by City, Contractor will follow that plan unless otherwise approved by City in
writing.
4.4.21
Contractor must not change or replace any members of its Project team, including
Contractor’s Representative, Project Manager, or Superintendent, without an explanation for
the change being given to City, and receiving prior written approval of the change from City,
which approval will not be unreasonably withheld.
4.4.22
Subcontractors whose scope of work has a value greater than 15% of the total Contract Price
are required to furnish performance and payment bonds to Contractor, unless otherwise
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-17 of 75
approved in writing by City.
4.4.23
Contractor must comply with MAG Specification § 108.2 (E) unless otherwise specified in
Contract Documents.
4.5
CONTROL OF THE PROJECT SITE
4.5.1
Throughout all phases of construction, including suspension of Work, Contractor must keep
the Site reasonably free from debris, trash and construction wastes to permit Contractor to
perform its construction services efficiently, safely and without interfering with the use of
adjacent land areas.
Prior to Final Acceptance of the Work, or a portion of the Work,
Contractor must remove all debris, trash, construction wastes, materials, equipment,
machinery and tools arising from the Work or applicable portions thereof to permit City
to occupy the Project or a portion of the Project for its intended use.
4.5.2
Contractor must take whatever steps, procedures or means necessary to prevent dust
nuisance due to construction operations. The dust control measures must be maintained
at all times to the satisfaction of City and in accordance with the requirements of the
Maricopa County Bureau of Air Pollution Control Rules and Regulations.
4.5.3
Contractor must maintain Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and American National
Standards
Institute (ANSI) accessibility requirements during construction activities,
including
without
limitation compliance with the 2010 regulations governing
implementation of the ADA to the extent applicable.
ADA and ANSI accessibility
requirements must include, but not be limited to, parking, building access, areas of refuge,
and emergency exit paths of travel. Contractor i s responsible for the coordination of all
Work to minimize disruption to residents and the public.
4.5.4
Only materials and equipment used directly in the Work will be brought to and stored on the
Site by Contractor. When equipment is no longer required for Work, it must be removed
promptly from the Site. Protection of construction materials and equipment stored at the
Site from weather, theft, damage and all other adversity is solely the responsibility of the
Contractor.
4.5.5
Contractor agrees all persons working on the Site must act at all times in the best interest
of the Project and will comply with all applicable rules and regulations reasonably set forth
by City related to the Site. Notwithstanding the foregoing or anything in this Agreement to
the contrary, City may remove from the Site any individual who City deems in their
reasonable discretion to be creating a disturbance or causing any problem on the Site.
4.5.6
Contractor will be responsible to City for the acts and omissions of Contractor’s employees,
Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and any other person performing any of
the Work under a Contract with Contractor, or claiming by, through or under Contractor, for
all damages, losses, costs and expenses resulting from such acts or omissions.
4.5.7
City may conduct criminal, drive history, and all other requested background checks of
Contractor and Subcontractor personnel performing Work or who have access to City’s
information, data, or facilities in accordance with City’s current background check policies,
or the provisions of the Project Specific Conditions. Any officer, employee or agent that
fails to background check must be replaced immediately.
4.5.8
City will have a final authority, based upon security reasons: (i) to determine when
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-18 of 75
security clearance of Contractor’s and Subcontractor’s personnel is required; (ii) to determine
the nature of the security clearance, up to and including fingerprinting personnel; and
(iii) to determine whether or not any individual or entity may provide Services or perform
Work under the Contract.
4.5.9
If City objects to any personnel for any reasonable cause, then Contractor must, upon notice
from City, remove such individual from the Project.
4.6
PROJECT SAFETY
4.6.1
The Project and all Work performed in relation thereto is governed by applicable provisions
of the federal laws, including but not limited to, the latest amendments of the following:
a. Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety & Health Act of 1970, Public Law, 91-596.
b. Part 1910 and Part 1926 – Occupational Safety and Health Standards,
Chapter XVII of Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations.
c. Part 1518 – Safety and Health Regulations for Construction, Chapter XIII of
Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations.
4.6.2
Contractor is responsible for safety of the job Site for employees of Contractor as well
as for members of the general public and others who may drive or walk through or be at
the Site.
4.6.3
Contractor recognizes the importance of performing the Work in a safe manner so as to
prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i) all individuals at the Site, whether working or visiting;
(ii) the Work, including materials and equipment incorporated into the Work and stored On-
Site or Off-Site; and (iii) all other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees,
shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for
removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction; and (iv) the owners or
tenants of adjacent property and their patrons, employees and invitees.
4.6.4
Contractor assumes responsibility for implementing and monitoring all safety precautions
and programs related to the performance of the Work.
4.6.5
Contractor must provide a “competent person’ as required by O.S.H.A regulations. The
“competent person” must be identified at the Pre-Construction Conference with City
advised in writing of any changes.
4.6.6
The “competent person” must make routine daily inspections of the Site and must hold
weekly safety meetings with Contractor’s personnel, Subcontractors and others as
applicable.
4.6.7
Contractor and Subcontractors must comply with all legal and regulatory requirements
relating to safety, as well as any City specific safety requirements set forth in the Contract
Documents, provided that such City-specific requirements do not violate any applicable
legal and regulatory requirements.
4.6.8
Contractor will immediately report in writing any safety-related injury, loss, damage or
accident arising from the Work to Project Manager and, to the extent mandated by Legal
Requirements, to all government or quasi-government authorities having jurisdiction over
safety-related matters involving the Project or the Work.
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-19 of 75
4.6.9
Contractor’s responsibility for safety under this Section is not intended in any way to
relieve Subcontractors and Sub-Subcontractors of their own contractual and legal
obligations and responsibility for (i) complying with all Legal Requirements, including those
related to health and safety matters, and (ii) taking all necessary measures to implement
and monitor all safety precautions and programs to guard against injury, losses, damages
or accidents resulting from their performance of the Work.
4.6.10
As between City and Contractor, Contractor is responsible to City for any and all the safety
issues relating to the Work on the Project. Contractor must administer and manage the
safety program. This will include, but not necessarily be limited to review of the safety
programs of each Subcontractor. Contractor must monitor the establishment and
execution of compliance with all applicable regulatory and advisory agency construction
safety standards. Contractor’s responsibility for review, monitoring, and coordination of the
Subcontractor’s safety programs will not extend to direct control over execution of the
Subcontractors’ safety programs. Notwithstanding Contractor’s safety obligations to City,
it is agreed and understood that each individual Subcontractor will remain controlling
employer responsible for the safety programs and precautions applicable to its own work
and the activities of other’s work in areas designated to be controlled by such Subcontractor
for purposes of workers compensation insurance coverage.
4.6.11
Nothing in this agreement will relieve Contractor of his responsibility to maintain traffic,
structures, etc., as noted on the Plans, Specifications, and Project Specific Conditions.
Contractor is responsible to provide all necessary shoring, bracing and trench support as
is necessary to maintain traffic structures, etc., as stipulated in the Plans, Specifications, and
Special Provisions. If the stability of adjoining building, walls, roadways, etc., is endangered
by Contractor’s excavation, shoring, bracing, or under pinning must be provided as
necessary to ensure project safety. Cost for shoring, bracing, underpinnings, and trench
support will be included in the appropriate items listed in the Contract Price, and no
additional payment will be made for this work.
4.7
MATERIALS QUALITY, SUBSTITUTIONS, AND SHOP DRAWINGS
4.7.1
Quality Control and Quality Assurance Testing.
4.7.1.1
All construction materials to be used or incorporated in the Project are subject to
inspection, Quality Control & Quality Assurance Testing, and approval or rejection by City.
Any material rejected by City must be removed immediately and replaced in an acceptable
manner to City at no additional cost to City. When QC/QA tests indicate noncompliance
with the Contract Documents, retesting must be performed by the same testing laboratory
that performed the tests that indicated noncompliance.
4.7.1.2
The Contractor must establish, provide, and maintain an effective Quality Control Testing
Program (QCTP). The Contractor must develop his own program or procure the services of
a consultant. In either case, the party performing the tests must be currently certified by the
National Bureau of Standards in the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program
(NVLAP) for construction
services or the AASHTO Accreditation Plan (AAP) for Soils,
Asphalt and Concrete. The Contractor must provide all support necessary to perform QC
and QA testing and sampling (i.e. shoring for testing trench backfill, backhoes, motor
graders, loaders, etc. to facilitate testing and sampling). The City will perform the QA testing.
4.7.1.3
The Contractor must submit a written QCTP to the City as a required submittal. The
Contractor must not begin Work until the Quality Control Program has been reviewed and
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-20 of 75
accepted by the City. Resumes of all personnel that will be associated directly or indirectly
with the QCTP must be included.
4.7.1.4
The QCTP must include, but not be limited to, on-site/field and laboratory testing of all
material delivered to the Site and any existing materials or conditions pertinent to the
project.
4.7.1.5
All testing must be under the direction of a Professional Engineer registered in the State of
Arizona, knowledgeable in Materials Testing. All “Test Report” forms must be stamped by
said Engineer.
4.7.1.6
The written QCTP will set forth the responsibilities of the engineer, project manager,
supervisory personnel and each technician assigned to this project. Substitutions or
replacement of personnel must require prior written approval by the City. All personnel must
be proficient within their assigned duties and possess certification(s) commensurate with
their position and responsibilities. The minimum certification(s) for each technician must
be NICET Level II, Arizona Technical Testing Institute, American Concrete Institute, or other
nationally recognized program applicable to the project and approved by the City of
Chandler. The written QCTP must include a description of the required field and
construction materials laboratory tests, including required frequencies that meet the
minimums established herein.
4.7.1.7
The Contractor must establish a system to record and report all material test results. The
daily test reports must include, but not be limited to:
a. Test designation;
b. Date of test;
c. Name of tester;
d. Location of test/sample (station and offset);
e. Product suppliers and product codes (as applicable);
f.
Depth/elevation of test/sample;
g. Test result;
h. Control requirement(s);
i.
Cause of rejection (if applicable);
j.
Results of retests (if applicable); and
k. Remedial action (if applicable).
4.7.1.8
The Contractor must submit test results to the designated City representative.
4.7.1.9
The Contractor must also submit a weekly report to the City summarizing the testing
and construction activities completed by emailing the report to the email addresses noted
above. All weekly reports must be submitted simultaneously to the Contractor and the
City of Chandler. The report must include individual summary sheets for each utility line,
structure, and portion of the pavement section. Cores must be numbered sequentially
throughout the Project. Re-cores must reference the original core by number and must
contain the averaged values for thickness and density. Total pavement thickness must be
reported. Vertical location of tests for underground utilities must indicate the depth of the
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-21 of 75
excavation at the location of the test (i.e., cut to flow line [if applicable], depth to bottom
or top of pipe, etc.). Density tests must be numbered sequentially. If the minimum number
of tests has not been performed per the written QCTP, this must be stated in the weekly
summary report with an explanation of the circumstances.
4.7.1.10
The City will maintain a copy of the Project test results and weekly reports in the Project
file. In cases where quality control activities do not comply with the contract provisions, the
City may:
a. Order the Contractor to replace ineffective or unqualified quality control
personnel.
b. Order the Contractor to stop operations until appropriate corrective action is
taken.
4.7.1.11
Although minimum testing requirements are specified herein, the Contractor bears full
responsibility for the quality of the materials and their installation and may elect to
perform additional testing beyond the requirements set forth herein to ensure compliance.
4.7.1.12
The Quality Control requirements contained in this Section are in addition to and separate
from Quality Assurance Testing, which will be performed by the City of Chandler or its
representative. If the Quality Assurance test results are not in agreement with the Quality
Control test results, the Contractor will have the option to retain a third party consultant for
referee tests. The third party consultant must meet the same requirements as the
consultant performing the Quality Control Testing. The results of the third party will be
binding. All cost incurred by the referee testing will be the Contractor’s expense. If the
Contractor elects not to retain a third party for referee testing, the City of Chandler test
results will prevail.
4.7.1.13
Except as otherwise noted within this Section, Work or materials required by this Section are
non- pay items. Per MAG Section 101, a non-pay item is an item of Work for which no
separate payment will be made, the cost of which is to be included as an incidental cost
for associated item(s) included on the Bid Schedule or Schedule of Values.
4.7.2
Trade Names and Substitutions.
4.7.2.1
Substitutions prior to bid will only be considered if in compliance with Arizona Revised
Statute § 34-104.
4.7.2.2
Contractor, if requested by City, must submit Samples or any additional information that
may be necessary to evaluate the acceptability of the substitution.
4.7.2.3
City will make the final decision and will notify Contractor in writing as to whether the
substitution has been accepted or rejected.
4.7.2.4
If City does not respond within 15 working days, Contractor must continue to perform the
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and the substitution will be considered
rejected.
4.7.3
Shop Drawings.
4.7.3.1
Contractor must prepare and submit Shop Drawings which show details of all Work to insure
proper installation of the Work using those materials and equipment specified under the
approved Plans and Specifications.
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-22 of 75
4.7.3.2
Contractor must submit a schedule of Shop Drawing submissions, which avoids bulk
submissions to the extent reasonably possible, with the Project Schedule for City approval.
The schedule of Shop Drawing submissions must include all of the items for which Shop
Drawings are required by the Contract Documents, including the Specifications. Unless
otherwise noted, Shop Drawings will not be required for items specified or detailed in
the Uniform Standard Specifications and Details or the Technical Specifications.
4.7.3.3
Shop Drawings must be numbered consecutively for each Specification section and must
accurately and distinctly present the following:
a. All working and erection dimensions.
b. Arrangements and sectional views.
c. Necessary details, including complete information for making connections
between work under this Contract and work under other Contracts.
d. Kinds of materials and finishes.
e. Parts list and description thereof.
4.7.3.4
Each Drawing or page must include:
a. Project Name, City of Chandler Project Number and descriptions.
b. Submittal date and space for revision dates.
c. Identification of equipment, product or material.
d. Name of Contractor and Subcontractor.
e. Name of Supplier and Manufacturer.
f.
Relation to adjacent structure of material.
g. Physical dimensions clearly identified.
h. ASTM and Federal Specifications references.
i.
Identification of and justification for deviations from the Contract Documents.
j.
Contractor’s stamp, initialed or signed, dated and certifying the review
of submittal, certification of field measurements and compliance with
Contract.
k. Location at which the equipment or materials are to be installed.
4.7.3.5
Location will mean both physical location and location relative to other connected or
attached material. City will return unchecked any submittal, which does not contain
complete data on the Work and full information on related matters.
4.7.3.6
Stock or standard drawings will not be accepted for review unless full identification and
supplementary information is shown thereon in ink or typewritten form.
4.7.3.7
Contractor must schedule, prepare and submit all Shop Drawings in accordance with a time-
table that will allow its suppliers and manufacturers sufficient time to fabricate,
manufacture, inspect, test and deliver their respective products to the project Site in a
timely manner so as to not delay the complete performance of the Work.
4.7.3.8
If the Shop Drawings show departures from the Contract requirements, Contractor must
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-23 of 75
make specific mention thereof in the Letter of Transmittal; otherwise review of such
submittals by City will not constitute review of the departure. Review of the Drawings will
constitute review of the specific subject matter for which the Drawings were submitted
and not of any other structure, material, equipment, or apparatus shown on the Drawings.
4.7.3.9
The review of Shop Drawings will be general and will not relieve Contractor of responsibility
for the accuracy of such Drawings, nor for the proper fitting and construction of the Work,
nor for the furnishing of materials or Work required by the Contract. No construction
called for by Shop Drawings will be initiated until such Drawings have been reviewed and
approved by City.
4.7.3.10
The procedure in seeking review of the Shop Drawings will be as follows:
a. Contractor must submit complete sets of Shop Drawings and other
descriptive data as specified in this Section.
b. After Contractor’s submittal or resubmittal of Shop Drawings, if Contractor
has submitted Shop Drawings in accordance with the City-approved
submittal schedule, or upon resubmission, City will be provided with three
(3) calendar weeks for review. Should City require additional review time
above and beyond the three (3) calendar weeks, Contractor may ask for a
time extension or monetary compensation, if they can present valid, factual
evidence that actual damages were incurred by Contractor. City will
determine
the amount of the time extension or the monetary
compensation to be awarded Contractor, if any, in accordance with City’s
Policy Statement for Calculating Delays and Damages, Appendix 1.
4.7.3.11
Contractor will be responsible for all extra costs incurred by City caused by Contractor’s
failure to comply with the procedure outline above.
4.7.4
Long Lead Time Items. Contractor must submit Shop Drawings, as required by the Engineer,
on all long lead items to be furnished and installed as part of the project within 10 Days
after the date of the executed Contract letter issued by City. In addition, Contractor
must order all long lead items to be furnished and installed as part of this Project within 3
Days after receiving approved Shop Drawings. For all long lead times for which Shop
Drawings are not required, Contractor must order said long lead items within 15 Days after
the date of the executed Contract letter issued by City. Within 2 Days after ordering
long lead items, Contractor must supply copies of all purchase orders, along with an
accurate delivery schedule from the supplier.
4.7.5
Construction Water. If Contractor uses water from City’s water system for construction
water, Contractor must obtain a fire hydrant meter from City of Chandler Utility Services
(480-782-2280) and all construction water must be obtained through the hydrant meter.
Contractor must pay all fees related to the hydrant meter and all water bills for construction
water. All cost for meters and construction water will be included in the Contract Price.
4.8
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
4.8.1
During the construction period, Contractor must maintain at the jobsite a full-size set of
prints of the Construction Document Drawings and Shop Drawings for Project Record
Document purposes.
4.8.2
Contractor must mark these Drawings to indicate the actual installation where the installation
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-24 of 75
varies from the original Construction Documents. Contractor must give particular attention
to information on elements that will be concealed, which would be difficult to identify or
measure and record later. Items required to be marked include but are not limited to:
a. Dimensional changes to the Drawings.
b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
c. Locations and depths of underground utilities.
d. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
e. Actual equipment locations.
f.
Changes made by Change Order or Addendum.
g. Details not on original Contract Drawings.
4.8.3
Contractor must mark completely and accurately Project Record Drawing sets of
Construction Documents.
4.8.4
Contractor must mark Project Record Drawings sets with red erasable colored pencil.
4.8.5
Contractor must note Request for Information (RFI) Numbers and Change Order numbers,
etc., as required to identify the source of the change to the Construction Documents.
4.8.6
Contractor must submit Project Record Drawing sets and Shop Drawings to City or its
representative for review and comment.
4.8.7
Upon receipt of the reviewed Project Record Drawings from City, Contractor must correct
any deficiencies and omissions to the Drawings and submit the final original of the Project
Record Drawings to City prior to Final Payment.
4.8.8
Project Manager will review the Project Record Drawings monthly prior to the date
established for the Payment Request and will be the sole judge of acceptance of these
Drawings.
4.9
WARRANTY AND CORRECTION OF DEFECTIVE WORK
4.9.1
Contractor warrants to City that the construction, including all materials and equipment
furnished as part of the Work, will be new unless otherwise specified in the Contract
Documents, of good quality, and free of defects in materials and workmanship. Contractor’s
warranty obligation excludes defects caused by abuse, alterations, or unreasonable failure
to maintain the construction by persons other than Contractor, subcontractors, or others
under Contractor’s control. Nothing in this warranty will limit any manufacturer’s warranty
which provides City with greater warranty rights than set forth herein or in the Contract.
Contractor will provide City with all manufacturers’ warranties and operation and
maintenance manuals upon substantial completion of the Work. Contractor’s warranty
must be for one (1) year, in accordance with MAG Specification § 108.8, and will commence
for all portions of the Work upon Final Acceptance of the entire Work as determined by City
under the Contract. All statutory or other warranties, express or implied, related to latent
defects will remain in force and are not limited by this provision.
4.9.2
City May Stop the Work. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient
skilled workmen or suitable materials or equipment, City may order Contractor to stop the
Work without cost to City, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-25 of 75
eliminated; however, this right of City to stop the Work will not give rise to any duty on the
part of City to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any other party.
4.9.3
Correction or Removal of Defective Work.
4.9.3.1
If required by City, Contractor must promptly, without cost to City and as specified by City,
either correct any defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if
the Work has been rejected by City, remove it from the Site and replace it with non-defective
Work. Contractor must correct any Work which may be displaced in correcting, removing or
replacing defective Work. No compensation will be allowed Contractor for such removal,
replacement or remedial Work. Contractor must reimburse City for costs incurred by City
due to such correction or removal including but not limited to additional expenses for
inspection, testing or observation and for repeated reviews by the City or Design
Professional.
4.9.3.2
Upon failure on the part of the Contractor to comply within a reasonably prompt time with
any written order of City to correct or remove defective Work, City has authority to cause
nonconforming materials or rejected Work to be remedied, removed, or replaced at the
Contractor's expense and to deduct the costs from any moneys due or to become due the
Contractor.
4.9.4
City May Correct Defective Work. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written
notice of City to proceed to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work
as required by City or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents (including any requirements of the progress schedule), City may, after 7 Days'
written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. To the extent
necessary to complete corrective and remedial action, City may exclude Contractor from all
or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, take possession of
Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the Site and
incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which City has
paid Contractor, but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor must allow City, city
representatives, agents and employees such access to the Site as may be necessary to
enable City to exercise City’s rights under this Section. All direct and indirect costs of City in
exercising such rights will be charged against Contractor in an amount verified by City
representative, and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in
the Contract Documents and a reduction in the Contract Price. Such direct and indirect
costs will include, in particular but without limitation, compensation for additional
professional services required and all costs of repair and replacement of Work or others
destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of Contractor's defective
Work. Contractor will not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time because of any delay
in Contractor’s performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by City or City's rights
hereunder.
4.9.5
Correction or Removal of Unauthorized Work.
4.9.5.1
Any Work done beyond the lines and grades shown on the Drawings or established by the
Design Professional or any changes in, additions to, or deductions from the Work done
without written authority will be considered as unauthorized and will not be paid for. Work
so done may be ordered remedied, removed, or replaced at the Contractor's expense.
4.9.5.2
Upon failure on the part of the Contractor to comply promptly with any order of the City,
City will have authority to cause unauthorized Work to be remedied, removed, or replaced
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-26 of 75
at the Contractor's expense and to deduct the costs from any moneys due or to become
due the Contractor.
4.9.6
Correction Period - One Year Guarantee.
4.9.6.1
If, within one year after the date of Final Acceptance, or such longer period of time as may
be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the
Contract Documents, or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is
found to be defective, Contractor must promptly, without cost to City and in accordance
with City's written instructions, either correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected
by City, remove it from the Site and replace it with non-defective Work. If Contractor does
not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay
would cause serious risk of loss or damage, City may have the defective Work corrected or
the rejected Work removed and replaced, and all direct and indirect costs of such removal
and replacement, including compensation for additional professional services, must be paid
by Contractor. Such action by the City will not relieve the Contractor of the guarantees
required by this Section or elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
4.9.6.2
If, in the opinion of the City, defective Work creates a dangerous condition or requires
immediate correction or attention to prevent further loss to the City or to prevent
interruption of operation of the City, the City will attempt to give the notice required by this
Section. If the Contractor cannot be contacted or does not comply with the City's request
for correction within a reasonable time as determined by the City, the City may,
notwithstanding the provisions of this Section, proceed to make such correction or provide
such attention; and the costs of such correction or attention will be charged against the
Contractor. Such action by the City will not relieve the Contractor of the guarantees
required by this Section or elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
4.9.6.3
This Section does not in any way limit the guarantee on any items for which a longer
guarantee is specified or on any items for which a manufacturer or supplier gives a
guarantee for a longer period. The Contractor agrees to act as co-guarantor with such
manufacturer or supplier and must furnish the City all appropriate guarantee or warranty
certificates upon completion of the Project. No guarantee period, whether provided for in
this Section or elsewhere, will in any way limit the liability of Contractor or their sureties or
insurers under the indemnity or insurance provisions of these General Conditions and the
Project Specific Special Conditions.
4.9.7
Acceptance of Defective Work.
4.9.7.1
If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, City may
accept Work when in the best interest of the City to do so with appropriate monetary credit
from Contractor. If any such acceptance occurs prior to final payment, a Change Order will
be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents, including
appropriate reduction in the Contract Price; or, if the acceptance occurs after final payment,
an appropriate amount must be paid by Contractor to City.
4.9.7.2
Alternatively, City may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor's expense, a special
performance guarantee or other surety prior to acceptance of defective work.
4.9.8
The Warranty period begins on the Final Acceptance date noted in the Certificate of
Completion, irrespective of early completion by some Subcontractors of their work.
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-27 of 75
4.9.9
Contractor’s warranty obligation must be in accordance with MAG Specifications.
4.9.10
Nothing in the warranties contained in the Contract Documents are intended to limit any
manufacturer’s warranty which provides City with greater warranty rights than set forth
in this
Section or the Contract Documents. Contractor must provide City with all
manufacturers’ warranties
prior to Substantial Completion, if applicable, or Final
Acceptance.
4.9.11
Contractor agrees that it will be responsible to manage and administer the correction of any
Work that is not in conformance with the Contract Documents during the warranty periods
set forth in this Section, or during any longer periods to the extent required by the Contract
Documents. A progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by City,
will not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents.
4.9.12
When notified of a warranty issue, Contractor must respond in writing within 48-hours and
must perform warranty Work as soon as material for said repairs are available (as judged
solely by City), and in any event Contractor must, take immediate steps to commence and
complete correction of nonconforming Work no later than the time period set forth in
City’s written notification in accordance with the Contract Documents. This includes the
correction, removal or replacement of the nonconforming Work and any damage caused
to other parts of the Work affected by the nonconforming Work. If defects develop which
are determined by City to be an emergency, City will notify Contractor, via the most
expeditious means regarding the nature and condition of the defects. In turn, Contractor
must immediately dispatch necessary forces to correct the defect or the emergency
condition in accordance with Contract Documents.
4.9.13
The time periods referenced in this Section apply only to Contractor’s obligation to
correct nonconforming Work and is not intended to constitute a period of limitations for any
other rights or remedies that City may have regarding Contractor’s other obligations under
the Contract Documents.
4.9.14
Without limiting the foregoing or anything in these General Conditions or the Contract
to the contrary, Contractor must obtain and provide to City all warranties for any portion
of the Project offered by the manufacturer, installer or provider thereof. City and the user
of the facility will have the right to the full value and benefit of all such warranties.
Contractor must ensure all such warranties are fully transferrable to facilitate the full value
of this Section.
4.9.15
Contractor’s warranty excludes damages or defects caused by abuse, alterations to the Work
not executed by or through Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper
operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage.
4.9.16
In the event of any noncompliance with this entire Section 4, City may require Contractor to
stop or suspend the Work in whole or in part.
SECTION 5 - CITY RESPONSIBILITIES
5.1
CITY PROJECT MANAGER AND INSPECTORS
5.1.1
Project Manager is responsible for providing City-supplied information and approvals in a
timely manner to assist Contractor to fulfill its obligations under the Contract Documents.
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-28 of 75
5.1.2
Project Manager will also provide Contractor with prompt notice when it observes any
failure on the part of Contractor to fulfill its contractual obligations, including any default
or defect in the Project or non-conformance with the Drawings and Specifications.
5.1.3
City may utilize Field Inspectors to assist Project Manager during construction in
observing performance of Contractor. City’s use of Inspectors is for the purpose of assisting
Project Manager.
5.1.4
The Inspectors are authorized to inspect all Work and materials furnished. Such inspections
may extend to all or part of the Work and to preparation, fabrication or manufacture of the
materials to be used. The Inspectors have the authority to issue instructions contrary to
the Construction Documents if approved and coordinated with the directions of Project
Manager.
5.1.5
The Inspectors have the authority to reject work or materials until any questions at issue can
be decided by Project Manager.
5.1.6
The use of Inspectors by City will not make City responsible for or give City control
over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures or for safety
precautions or programs or responsibility for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in
accordance with Contract Documents. The Inspectors are not authorized to direct any of
Contractor’s activities, employees or Subcontractors.
5.2
DESIGN PROFESSIONAL SERVICES
City may contract separately with one or more Design Professionals to provide
construction administration of the Project. The Design Professional’s Contract, as well as
other firms hired by City may be furnished to Contractor. Contractor does not have the right
to limit or restrict or reject any Contract modifications that are mutually acceptable to City
and Design Professional.
5.3
CIT Y ’S SEP AR AT E CONT R ACT ORS
City is responsible for all work performed on the Project or at the Site by separate
contractors retained by City. City will contractually require its separate contractors to
reasonably cooperate with, and reasonably coordinate their activities so as not to interfere
with Contractor in order to enable Contractor to timely complete the Work consistent with
the Contract Documents. Contractor must immediately notify the Project manager, and
address the matter in the next monthly status report, if any activities of such separate
contractors are expected to interfere, or are interfering, with Contractor and such
interference will or could result in any delay in Contractor’s performance of the Work.
5.4
PERMIT REVIEW AND INSPECTIONS
5.4.1
If requested by Contractor, Project Manager will provide assistance and guidance in
obtaining necessary reviews, permits and inspections.
5.4.2
The regulating agencies of City, such as Development and Sustainability, Fire and
Planning Departments, enforce legal requirements. The enforcement activities of City are
independent and separate from this Agreement.
5.5
PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS TO THE CONTRACTOR.
Contractor will be provided up to five copies of the Contract Documents as are reasonably
necessary for the execution of the Work. Additional copies will be furnished, upon request,
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-29 of 75
at the cost of reproduction.
SECTION 6 - CONTRACT TIME
6.1
CONTRACT TIME
6.1.1
The Contract Time will start with the Notice to Proceed (“NTP”) and end with Final
Acceptance.
6.1.2
Beginning on the date of the NTP, Contractor must begin to fulfill Contractor’s obligations
under the Contract. Contractor’s obligations include providing City and other agencies
with any submittals required by the Project Specific Special Provisions, including but not
limited to, an approved Project Schedule, Traffic Control Plans, and a Stormwater Pollution
Prevention Plan. Contractor must submit all such required submittals before any physical
construction work commences on the Site. NTP does not authorize construction work
until all contract insurance, bonds, and schedules are submitted to and accepted by the
City.
6.1.3
The Contract Time will be as set forth in the Project Schedule. Contractor agrees that it
will commence performance of the Work and complete the Project through both
Substantial Completion and Final Acceptance within the Contract Time.
6.1.4
Time is of the essence of this Contract, for the Project, for the Work, and for each phase and
designated Milestone thereof.
6.1.5
Failure of Contractor to perform any covenant or condition contained in the Contract
Documents within the time periods specified herein, will constitute a material breach of this
Contract entitling City to terminate the Contract unless Contractor applies for and receives
an extension of time, in accordance with the procedures set forth in the Contract
Documents.
6.1.6
Failure of City to insist upon the performance of any covenant or condition within the time
periods specified herein, will not constitute a waiver of Contractor’s duty to perform every
other covenant or condition within the designated periods, unless a specific waiver is
granted in writing for each such covenant or condition.
6.1.7
City’s agreement to waive a specific time provision or to extend the time for performance
will not constitute a waiver of any other time provisions contained in the Contract
Documents. Failure of Contractor to complete performance promptly within the additional
time authorized in the waiver or extension of time agreement constitutes a material breach
of this Contract entitling City to all the remedies set forth herein or provided by law.
6.2
PROJECT SCHEDULE
6.2.1
The Project Schedule must be in Microsoft Project standard file format, must be updated and
maintained throughout the Contract Time, and must contain the following:
6.2.1.1
Detailed representation of all activities for the project, both on-site construction and major
procurement. All significant activities together with the resource loading requirements for
each and all items appearing on the schedule of values or bid schedule for progress
payments must be shown on the Project Schedule or in attached transmittal letter as
described in Section 6.2.8.
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-30 of 75
6.2.1.2
Dependencies between activities must be indicated so that it may establish as to the effect
the progress of any one activity would have on other activities and on the Schedule.
6.2.1.3
Activities for submission, review, and approval of all required submittals.
6.2.1.4
An amount of time will be established prior to the final completion date for “punch list and
cleanup”. No other activities will be scheduled during this period. Punch list and cleanup
must be shown on the Project Schedule and must be entirely completed prior to the
expiration of the Contract Time.
6.2.2
Within 10 Days of receipt of City’s comments, Contractor must make all required
corrections, adjustments, and additions to complete the Project Schedule and resubmit to
City for review. City’s review of and response to the Project Schedule is for the purpose of:
(1) City planning and staffing for the Project as may be required from time to time; (2)
ensuring Contractor’s general conformance with the scheduling requirements of the
Contract Documents and completion of the Project within the Contract Time; and (3)
monitoring and evaluating the construction status for purposes of approving monthly
progress payments. Acceptance of a submitted schedule by City should in no way be
construed as an affirmation or admission that the schedule is reasonable or workable by
Contractor. The responsibility for completing the Work on the Project within the Contract
Time remains the obligation of Contractor. City’s review does not relieve Contractor from
compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents or be construed as
relieving Contractor of its complete and exclusive control over the means, methods,
sequences and techniques for executing the work.
6.2.3
The Project Schedule must show milestones, including milestones for City-furnished
information, and must include activities for City-furnished material and construction by
other contractors when those activities are interrelated with Contractor activities.
6.2.4
The Project Schedule must be revised as required by conditions and progress of the Work,
but such revisions do not relieve Contractor of its obligations to complete the Work
within the Contract Time, as adjusted in accordance with the Contract Documents. No
modification to the Contract Documents or the Contract Time will be effective unless
approved in advance by City.
6.2.5
For all items of materials and equipment that are critical or may require long lead times to
acquire, the Project Schedule must show dates for submission, review and approval of
submittals, ordering, and delivery.
6.2.6
An updated Project Schedule must be submitted monthly to City as part of the Payment
Request. The monthly submittal must include one full size plot of the entire schedule and
one electronic copy containing the schedule in Microsoft Project standard file format. In
addition, Contractor must, upon request by City, provide a copy of all submitted schedule
data in electronic format which must be clearly labeled with the Project description,
scheduling program name and version number, and schedule print/data date.
6.2.7
Contractor must provide City with a monthly status report with each Project Schedule
detailing the progress of the Work, including: (i) if the Work is proceeding according to
schedule, (ii) any discrepancies, conflicts, or ambiguities found to exist in the Contract
Documents that require resolution, and (iii) other information detailing items that require
resolution so as not to jeopardize the ability to complete the Work in the Contract Time.
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-31 of 75
6.2.8
With each Project Schedule submittal, Contractor must include a transmittal letter
including the following:
a. Description of problem tasks, referenced to field instructions or requests
for information (RFI’s), as appropriate.
b. Current and anticipated delays including:
(i)
Cause of the delay.
(ii)
Corrective action and schedule adjustments to correct the delay.
(iii)
Known or potential impacts and their delay on other activities,
milestones, and their impact on the Substantial Completion and
Final Acceptance dates.
(iv)
Changes in construction sequence.
c. Pending items and status thereof including but not limited to:
(i) Time Extension requests;
(ii)
Substantial Completion date status;
(iii)
Final Acceptance date status.
d. If ahead of schedule, the number of calendar Days ahead.
e. If behind schedule, the number of calendar Days behind.
f.
Other Project or scheduling concerns.
6.2.9
Critical Path Method (CPM).
6.2.9.1
Unless otherwise specified in the Contract, the Project Schedule must include a Critical
Path
Method (CPM) diagram schedule showing the sequence of activities, the
interdependence of each activity and identifies the Critical Path.
6.2.9.2
The CPM diagram schedule must be in calendar Days and indicate duration, earliest and
latest start and finish dates for all activities, and total Float Times for all activities except
critical activities. The CPM diagram must be presented in a time scaled graphical format for
the Project as a whole.
6.2.9.3
The CPM diagram schedule must indicate all relationships between activities.
6.2.9.4
The activities making the Project Schedule must contain sufficient detail to assure that
adequate planning has been done for proper execution of the Work and such that it provides
an appropriate basis for monitoring and evaluation the progress of the Work. Individual
activities must not exceed 30 Days in length, in most cases.
6.2.9.5
The CPM diagram schedule must be based upon activities, which coincide with the Schedule
of Values.
6.2.9.6
The CPM diagram schedule must show all submittals associated with each work activity and
the review time for each submittal.
6.2.10
Float Time.
6.2.10.1
The total Float Time within the overall schedule is for the exclusive use of City, but City
may approve Contractor’s use of Float as needed to meet contract Milestones and
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-32 of 75
the Project completion date.
6.2.10.2
Contractor will not be allowed to sequence, hide, or reallocate Float Time through
such strategies, as extending activity duration estimates to consume available Float, using
preferential logic, or using extensive crew/resource sequencing, tec. No time extensions
will be granted nor delay damages paid until a delay occurs which extends the Work beyond
the Contract Time.
6.2.11
City-Caused Delays. City-caused delays on the Project, if any, may be offset by City-caused
time savings (i.e., Critical Path submittals returned in less time than allowed by the Contract,
approval of substitution requests and credit changes which result in savings of time to
Contractor, etc.) In such an event, Contractor will not be entitled to receive a time extension
or delay damages until all City-caused time savings are exceeded and the Contract Time is
also exceeded.
6.2.12
Rain-Related Delays. Contractor is required, in preparing the Project Schedule to take into
account all relevant weather conditions, including normal rainfall and distribution. No
additional compensation will be given for any rain-related delays or impacts on the Work
or the Project Schedule. No time extension will be granted in the Project Schedule unless
the rainfall during the construction of Work is unusually severe, was not reasonably
anticipated, and the total rainfall was significantly in excess of the normal rainfall for the
Project Site location. Normal rainfall for the Project will be determined from the 10-year
average rainfall for the Site as measured by the National Oceanic and Atmospheric
Administration or comparable source of reliable information for rainfall in Chandler,
Arizona. In addition, the excessive rainfall must have actually impacted Work activities on
the Critical Path and caused delay beyond any remaining Float at the time of the rain- caused
delay. The burden of documenting normal rainfall, the excessive rainfall and the impact on
Critical Path activities is on Contractor. All other provisions in the Contract Documents
relating to claims, including without limitation notice requirements, apply to any claim by
Contractor for a rain delay.
6.2.13
City’s “Policy Statement for Calculating Delays and Damages,” Appendix 1 to these
General Conditions, will apply to all claims of delay and delay damages.
6.2.14
Force Majeure. If Contractor is delayed or prevented from the performance of any Work
required under this Contract by reason of acts of God or other causes beyond the control
and without fault of Contractor (financial inability excepted), performance of that Work will
be excused, but only for the period of the delay. The time for performance of the Work will
be extended for a period equivalent to the period of delay.
6.3
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
6.3.1
When Contractor considers that the Work, phase or a portion thereof, which City agrees in
writing to accept separately, is substantially complete, City will prepare and submit to
Contractor a comprehensive Punch List of items to be completed or corrected prior to Final
Acceptance and Final Payment. Failure to include an item on such Punch List does not alter
the responsibility of Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
6.3.2
Upon receipt of Contractor’s Punch List, Project Manager will make an inspection to
determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete.
Project Manager may, at Project Manager’s sole option, be assisted in such inspection by
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-33 of 75
the Design Professional for the Project. If the inspection by the Project Manager discloses
any item, whether or not included on Contractor’s Punch List, which is not sufficiently
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents so that City can occupy or utilize
the Work, phase or designated portion thereof for its intended use, Contractor must,
before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such
item upon notification by Project Manager. In such case, Contractor must then submit a
request for another inspection by Project Manager to determine Substantial Completion.
6.3.3
Certificate of Substantial Completion.
6.3.3.1
The Project Manager will not issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion unless and until
the Work (or separable units or Phases as provided in the Contract Documents) is
essentially and satisfactorily complete in accordance with the Contract Documents, such
that the Project is ready for use by City for its intended purpose, opening to the general
public, full occupancy or use by City (including, without limitation, all separate units, or
rooms, facilities, access, income-generating areas, and all areas serving the general public,
as applicable, must be ready for full-operation
without material inconvenience or
discomfort), including, to the extent applicable to the Work, the following: all materials,
equipment, systems, controls, features, facilities, accessories and similar elements are
installed in the proper manner and in operating condition, inspected and approved;
surfaces have been painted; masonry and concrete cleaned with any sealer or other finish
applied; utilities and systems connected and functioning; site work complete; permanent
heating,
ventilation, air condition, vertical transportation and other systems properly
operating with proper controls; lighting and electrical systems installed, operable and
controlled; paving completed, signage installed, and other Work as applicable, has
been performed to a similar state of essential and satisfactory completion. A minor
amount of Work, as determined by and at the discretion of the Project Manager, such
as installation of minor accessories or items, a minor amount of painting, minor
replacement of defective work, minor adjustment of controls or sound systems, or
completion or correction of minor exterior work that cannot be completed as a result of
weather conditions, will not delay determination of Substantial Completion. If prior
written approval is obtained from City for purposes of Substantial Completion, specified
areas of the entire Work or Project may be individually certified as Substantially
Complete. In no event will Substantial Completion be deemed to have occurred unless
and until: (i) a temporary certificate of occupancy has been issued by the appropriate
Governmental Authorities (as applicable) and (ii) all terms and Work required under this
Agreement have been fulfilled by Contractor and same will have also been approved and
accepted by City, subject only to the Punch List items.
6.3.3.2
If requested by City, Contractor must complete and turn-over to City the Project on a phased
basis. Each phase will have a separate inspection by the Project Manager, a Punch List
generated, and then an inspection by City with final approval and acceptance only after the
Project Manager’s Punch List.
6.4
PARTIAL UTILIZATION
6.4.1
City at City’s option may use and occupy any substantially completed parts of the Work
which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or which City, the Design
Professional and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of
the Work that can be used by City for its intended purpose, without significant interference
with Contractor’s performance of the remainder of the Work, provided, however, if the
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-34 of 75
portion of the Work to be used or occupied has not been found to be substantially complete,
City must do so in accordance with Section 6.3 prior to such occupancy.
6.4.2
In lieu of the issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion as to part of the Work, City
may take over operation of a facility constituting part of the Work whether or not it is
substantially complete if such facility is functionally and separately usable; provided that
prior to any such takeover, City and Contractor agree in writing as to the division of
responsibilities between City and Contractor for security, operation, safety, maintenance,
correction period, heat, utilities and insurance with respect to such facility.
6.4.3
Substantial Completion of or City's beneficial occupancy of a part of the Project will not alter
the fact that the one-year warranty for the whole Project starts at the date of Final
Completion of the whole Project.
6.5
FINAL ACCEPTANCE
6.5.1
Unless otherwise expressly agreed to in writing by City, Final Acceptance must be obtained
by no later than 30 Days (60 Days for federally funded contracts) after the date of Substantial
Completion. Failure to timely obtain Final Acceptance will be a material breach of the
Contract.
6.5.2
Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance, City
and Contractor will jointly inspect to verify that the remaining items of Work have been
completed. There will be no partial acceptance. Final Acceptance will not occur until all
items of Work, including Punch List Items, have been completed to City’s satisfaction as
reflected in the written Final Acceptance.
6.5.3
Final Payment will not be due, owing, or paid by City until Final Acceptance is issued.
6.5.4
Landscape Establishment Period. Unless otherwise expressly agreed to in writing by City, the
Landscape Establishment Period will begin on the date of Final Acceptance of the Project and
will run 90 Calendar Days thereafter. Landscape Establishment Period requirements are
detailed in General Conditions Appendices, attached herein.
6.6
CONTINUATION OF WORK
6.6.1
Permitting Contractor to continue and finish the Work or any part of it after the time fixed
for its completion (whether milestone, phase, Substantial Completion or Final Acceptance)
or after the date to which the time fixed for any completion may have been extended, does
not operate as a waiver by City of any rights under the Contract Documents, law or equity.
6.6.2
Furthermore, the timely completion of the Work being of the utmost importance under
this Contract, notwithstanding the existence of one or more disputes between the parties
concerning the scope of the Work, the Project Schedule, Contract Time, payments or any
other matter, and further notwithstanding a party’s invocation of the Dispute Resolution
provisions specified in Appendix 6 of these General Conditions, unless City suspends
the Contract or Contractor’s performance pursuant to Section 10 of these General
Conditions, Contractor will continue to prosecute the Work, including any Change Order
work or Extra Work Orders, in a diligent and timely manner and not stop, slow down or
impede by action or inaction the progress of the Work, including commencing performance
of and thereafter completing any additional work called out in any Change Order or Extra
Work Order issued by Project Manager with the approval of City, so long as City makes
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-35 of 75
payment to Contractor in accordance with Section 8 of these General Conditions.
SECTION 7 - CONTRACT PRICE
7.1
UNIT PRICE CONTRACTS
7.1.1
The Contract Price for all Unit Price Contracts will be the amount set forth in the Contract
or Change Order multiplied by the verified quantity provided.
7.1.2
Measurements of quantities to determine the total Contract Price must be in accordance with
MAG Specification §§ 109.1 and 109.2.
7.1.3
The Unit Price may only be changed as set forth in Section 9 below.
7.2
CHANGE ORDERS
7.2.1
Unit Price Change Orders. The Change Order Price for all Unit Price Change Orders will be
the amount set forth in the Change Order multiplied by the verified quantity provided.
7.2.2
Measurements of quantities to determine the total Change Order Price must be in
accordance with MAG Specifications §§ 109.1 and 109.2.
7.2.3
The Unit Price may only be changed as set forth in Section 9 below.
7.2.4
MAG Specification § 109.4.1 is modified as follows: Before § 109.4.1, the following is added:
Any deduction or increase in the Contract Price must be supported by a signed, written
Change Order fully executed by City, and supported by such backup as the Project Manager
may require. No adjustments in any Unit Prices will be allowed. Sections 109.4.1(A) and (B)
and 109.4.2(A) are deleted in their entirety.
7.3
SALES TAX
Contractor is required to pay all applicable sales tax in accordance with the law of the state of
Arizona and this cost must be included in all Contract Prices. When equipment, materials or
supplies generally taxable to Contractor are eligible for a tax exemption due to the nature
of the Project, Contractor must assist City in applying for and obtaining such tax credits and
exemptions which will be paid or credited to City.
SECTION 8 - PAYMENT
8.1
PAYMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION SERVICES
8.1.1
Payment for the Work will be made in accordance with MAG Standard Specification § 109
as amended below.
8.1.2
Contractor must submit to City for review a completed Contractor Payment Request signed
by Contractor, covering the Work completed as of the date of the Request and accompanied
by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents and also as
City may reasonably require. A Contractor Payment Request will not be considered
complete unless it is accompanied by an updated Project Schedule and a certification that
the on-site, red lined, as built Drawings are up to date. If payment is requested on the basis
of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably,
securely stored at the Site or at another location (such as a bonded warehouse) agreed to
in writing, the Contractor Payment Request must also be accompanied by such data,
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-36 of 75
satisfactory to City, as will establish City's title to the material and equipment and protect
City's interest therein, including applicable insurance. Each subsequent Contractor Payment
Request must include an affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments
received on account of the Work have been applied to discharge in full all of Contractor's
obligations reflected in prior Contractor Payment Requests.
8.1.3
The Contracting Agency will retain 10 percent of all estimates as a guarantee for
complete performance of the Contract in accordance with Arizona Revised Statutes Section
34-221 or 34-607, unless the Contractor elects to deposit securities in accordance with
Arizona Revised Statutes Section 34-221, Paragraph C.5. or 34-607, Paragraph B.5.
8.1.4
The payment process functions as follows: Prior to the payment cycle date, Contractor must
send a draft Contractor Payment Request to Project Manager. The Project Team will review
the Request and agree upon any necessary adjustments. Contractor must certify the final
Request by signing and returning to Project Manager.
8.1.5
When construction of the Project is fifty percent (50%) completed, Contractor may
request payment of one-half of the retention pursuant to A.R.S. § 34-609(B)(3), subject to all
of City’s rights to withhold or offset payments, and other rights of City, under the Contract.
8.1.6
City reserves the right under A.R.S. § 34-609(B)(3) to reinstate the ten percent (10%) retention
if City determines that satisfactory progress is not being made.
8.1.7
Contractor’s Warranty of Title.
8.1.7.1
Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered
by any Contractor Payment Request, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass
to City at the time of payment, free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests, and
encumbrances, provided that this will not preclude the Contractor from installing metering
devices or other equipment of utility companies or municipalities, the title of which is
commonly retained by the utility company or municipality.
8.1.7.2
No materials, supplies, or equipment for the Work under this Contract will be purchased
subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contract or other agreement by
which an interest therein, or any part thereof, is retained by the seller or supplier.
8.1.7.3
Nothing contained in this Section will defeat or impair the right of such persons furnishing
materials or labor under any bond given by the Contractor for their protection, or any right
under any law permitting such persons to look to funds due the Contractor in the hands of
the City. The provisions of this Section must be inserted in all subcontracts and material
contracts, and notices of its provision must be given to all persons furnishing materials for
the Work when no formal contract is entered into for such materials.
8.2
PAYMENT UPON SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
8.2.1
No payment will be made upon Substantial Completion, except for a regularly-scheduled
monthly progress payment, as allowed by Section 8.2.2.
8.2.2
No further payments will be made to Contractor until Final Acceptance.
8.3
FINAL PAYMENT
8.3.1
Subject to all of City’s rights to withhold or offset payment, and other rights under the
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-37 of 75
Contract, Final Payment including remaining retainage will be paid only after:
a. Work has been fully completed (including completion of all incorrect or
incomplete work items) and the written Final Acceptance has been issued by
City;
b. Necessary operating manuals, any excess materials and supplies necessary
for matching materials and supplies incorporated into the Work,
acceptable sewer video results (if applicable), and complete “as-built”
Drawings (including the Building Information Model, if required by the
Contract Documents) have been delivered to City, as specified in this
Section 8.4;
c. Full and unconditional lien waivers and releases by Contractor and any
person performing labor or supplying material, machinery, fixtures, or tools
for the Work have been delivered to Contractor;
d. All conditions and requirements imposed by City or any financing entity
for the corresponding disbursement have been met; and
e. Contractor delivers to City a Contractor Payment Request requesting Final
Payment.
8.3.2
Contractor must also submit a signed copy of Contractor’s Affidavit Regarding Settlement
of Claims, Appendix 3 to these General Conditions, and Certificate of Completion, Appendix 7
to these General Conditions, prior to Final Payment.
8.3.3
In addition, if required under the Project Specific Special Provisions, Contractor must
compile a complete equipment list and maintenance manual to be submitted to City
as a precondition to Final Payment. The list must include the following items for all
equipment supplied under the Plumbing, Electrical, Air Conditioning, Elevator, and other
Special Equipment Specifications:
a. Name, Model and Manufacturer.
b. Complete parts lists and Drawings.
c. Local source of supply for replacement parts along with suppliers’ telephone
numbers.
d. Local service organizations serving the equipment and their telephone
numbers.
e. All tags, inspection slips, instruction packages, etc., removed from
equipment must be properly identified as to pieces of equipment from
which they were taken.
8.3.4
Contractor must also deliver to City, prior to Final Payment, one (1) digital (in the format
specified by City), and if requested by City, one (1) hard copy, of any applicable
Maintenance manuals. Each manual must include all manufacturer’s operation and
maintenance instructions and “as-built” Drawings with the list herein specified. It must also
include all other diagrams and instructions necessary to properly operate and maintain the
equipment, the name, address and telephone number of Contractor and all Subcontractors
involved.
8.4
CIT Y ’S RIGHT TO WITHHOLD PAYMENT
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-38 of 75
City may withhold payment to such extent as may be necessary in City’s opinion to protect
City from loss for which Contractor is responsible, including, without limitation, if any of
the following conditions exist:
a. Defective Work not remedied;
b. Third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of
such claims unless security acceptable to City is provided by Contractor;
c. Failure of Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for
labor, materials or equipment;
d. Reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid
balance of the Contract Price;
e. Damage to City or another Contractor;
f.
Reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract
Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or
liquidated damages for the anticipated delay;
g. Failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; or
h. Contractor is in default of any of its other obligations under the Contract
Documents.
8.5
JOINT/DIRECT CHECKS
To promote the timely completion and progress of the Work or when appropriate and
necessary, payments to Contractor may be made jointly to Contractor and its employees,
agents, Subcontractors and suppliers, or any of them. .
8.6
PAYMENT NOT A WAIVER
No payment (nor use or occupancy of the Project by City) will be deemed acceptance or
approval of the Work or as a waiver of any claims, rights, or remedies of City.
8.7
LIENS AND BOND CLAIMS
Contractor must make all payments, in the time required, of all labor and materials
furnished to Contractor in the course of the Work and must promptly furnish evidence of
such payments as City may require. Contractor must pay when due all claims arising out of
performance of the Work covered by this Contract for which a lien may be filed either
against the real estate or leasehold interest of City, or against payments due from City to
Contractor, or for which a claim may be made against any payment or performance bond
or both. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor agrees that no liens or other
claims in the nature of a lien against the real estate, leasehold, or other interest of City,
against payment due from City to Contractor, or against any payment or performance
bond, must be filed or made in connection with the Work by any party who has supplied
professional services, labor, materials, machinery, fixtures, tools, or equipment used in or
in connection with the performance of this Contract, and Contractor agrees to remove or
to cause to be removed any such liens or claims in the nature of a lien or bond claim within
10 Days upon receiving notice or obtaining actual knowledge of the existence of such liens
or claim. In addition, Contractor agrees to defend, indemnify, and hold harmless City
from and against any and all such liens and claims. This paragraph does not apply to claims
and liens of Contractor due to non-payment for work performed.
8.8
FIN AN CI AL R ECORDKE EPI NG AND C IT Y ’S AUD I T RIGHT
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-39 of 75
8.8.1
Records for all Contracts between City and Contractor must, upon reasonable notice, be
open to inspection and subject to audit, scanning, and reproduction during normal
business working hours. Such audits may be performed by any City’s representative or any
outside representative engaged by City for the purpose of examining such records. City or
its designee may conduct such audits or inspections throughout the term of this Contract
and for a period of five years after Final Payment or longer if required by law. City’s
representatives may (without limitation) conduct verifications such as counting employees
at the Site, witnessing the distribution of payroll, verifying information and amounts through
interviews and written confirmations with Contractor employees, field and agency labor,
Subcontractors, and vendors.
8.8.2
Contractor’s “records” must include any and all information, materials and data of every kind
and
character, including without limitation, records, books, papers, documents,
subscriptions, recordings, agreements, purchase orders, leases, contracts, commitments,
arrangements, notes daily diaries, superintendent reports, drawings, receipts, vouchers and
memoranda, and any and all other agreements, sources of information and matters that
may in City’s judgment have any bearing on or pertain to any matters, rights, duties or
obligations under or covered by any Contract Document. Such records must include (hard
copy, as well as computer readable data if it can be made available), written policies and
procedures; time sheets; payroll registers; payroll records; cancelled payroll checks;
subcontract files (including proposals of successful and unsuccessful bidders, bid recaps,
negotiation notes, etc.); original bid estimates; estimating work sheets; correspondence;
Change Order files (including documentation covering negotiated settlements); back-
charge logs and supporting documentation; invoices and related payment documentation;
general ledger, information detailing cash and trade discounts earned, insurance rebates
and dividends; and any other Contractor records which may have a bearing on matters of
interest to City or the Project in connection with Contractor’s dealings with City or the
Project (all foregoing
hereinafter referred to as “records”) to the extent necessary to
adequately permit evaluation and verification of any or all of the following:
a.
Compliance with Contract requirements for deliverables;
b.
Compliance with approved Plans and Specifications;
c.
Compliance with § 14.9 below;
d.
Compliance with Contract provisions regarding the pricing of Change Orders;
e.
Accuracy of Contractor representations regarding the pricing of invoices; or
f.
Accuracy of Contractor representations related to claims submitted by
Contractor or any of their employees.
8.8.3
Contractor must require all payees (examples of payees include Subcontractors, Suppliers,
Insurance Carriers, etc.) to comply with the provisions of this Section by including the
requirements hereof in a written Contract Agreement between Contractor and payee.
Contractor will ensure that all payees (including those entering into lump sum contracts)
have the same right to audit provisions contained in this contract included in their contracts
with Contractor.
8.8.4
City’s authorized representative(s) (including, without limitation, Project Manager) must have
reasonable access to Contractor’s facilities, must be allowed to interview all current or former
employees to discuss matters pertinent to the performance of this contract and must be
provided adequate and appropriate work space, in order to conduct audits in compliance
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-40 of 75
with this Section.
8.8.5
If an audit inspection or examination in accordance with this Section, discloses overpricing
or overcharges to City (of any nature) by Contractor or Contractor’s Subcontractors in excess
of $100,000 in addition to making adjustments for the overcharges, the reasonable actual
cost of City’s audit must be reimbursed to City by Contractor. Any adjustments or payments
which must be made as a result of any such audit or inspection of Contractor’s invoices or
records must be made within a reasonable amount of time (not to exceed 90 Days) from
presentation of City’s findings to Contractor.
8.8.6
In addition to the normal paperwork documentation Contractor typically furnishes to City,
Contractor agrees to furnish, upon written request from City, any of the documentation
necessary for City to exercise its audit rights under this Section 8.8 in computer readable file
formats (Word, Excel, or .pdf), as City may designate.
8.8.7
City, its authorized representative, and the appropriate agency, reserve the right to
audit Contractor’s records in compliance with local, state or federal policies, statutes
or at City’s discretion, within three (3) years of Final Acceptance of the Work.
SECTION 9 - CHANGES TO THE CONTRACT
9.1
FIELD ORDERS
City may authorize minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment in the Contract
Price or the Contract Times, which are consistent with the overall intent of the Contract
Documents. These may be accomplished by a written Field Order on the standard form
approved and executed by City. Such Field Orders must be binding and Contractor must
perform the change promptly. If Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an increase
in the Contract Price or Contract Time, Contractor may make a claim therefor as provided
in Section 7.2.
9.2
EXTRA WORK/CHANGES IN THE WORK
9.2.1
City reserves the right to make such changes in the Plans and Specifications for the Work,
as it may deem appropriate and any such change as set forth in a written Change Order
must be deemed a part of this Contract as if originally incorporated herein.
9.2.2
In the event City and Contractor cannot agree on the terms of a Change Order, or
when circumstances otherwise require, the Project Manager has the authority to direct the
Contractor to perform extra work, if the work in question is an item not provided for in the
Contract as awarded. The Project Manager will have the authority to determine, based
upon factual evidence presented by the Contractor, whether the work in question is an
item not provided for in the Contract as awarded. If the Project Manager directs the
Contractor to perform extra work, the Project Manager’s instructions will include a price
that the Contractor cannot exceed in charging the City for the extra work. Upon receipt of
the Project Manager’s directions to perform extra work, the Contractor must promptly
proceed with the extra work and document the actual cost thereof. Contractor’s right to
payment for extra work will be determined under Subsection 9.2.4 below. The Contractor is
responsible to manage the extra work to ensure that the price limits set by the Project
Manager are not exceeded. Contractor must perform the extra work and submit
documentation for the actual cost of the extra work to the City. A Change Order will be
issued to cover this work.
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-41 of 75
9.2.3
Contractor will not be entitled to payment for extra work unless a written Change Order, in
form and content prescribed by City, has been executed by City. On all requests for Change
Orders, Contractor must specify the increased or decreased costs and whether it
believes any extensions of time will be necessary to complete its Work as modified by the
Change Order. If extra work is performed under Subsection 9.2.2 above, a corresponding
Change Order will be prepared, approved and processed by City before payment can be
made to Contractor.
9.2.4
In general, pricing for Change Orders will include the same mark-up percentages that were
in effect when the Contract was awarded. The cost or credit to the City resulting from a
change in the Work is subject to Appendix 1 (Policy Statement for Calculating Delays and
Damages) and will be determined, based on the type of pricing for the Contract involved, as
follows:
a. By mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized in a form acceptable
to City;
b. By unit prices stated in the Contract Documents;
c. When the City determines that a Unit Price Book Job Order associated with
a Job Order Contract requires a Change Order, by using the same Total Cost
Data and CCI that are in effect when the Change Order is anticipated to be
issued; or
d. By actual cost and a percentage fee covering overhead and profit, as follows:
(i)
Contractor will perform the extra work and be compensated for actual
cost of labor, materials and equipment.
(ii)
Contractor will have the right to add the fee percentage applicable
to the Work under the Contract, or if no such fee has been agreed
to by the parties, not more than five percent (5%) to the
Subcontractor’s prices for authorized extra work performed solely
by Subcontractors. Such percentage will include all of Contractor’s
charges for overhead, profit, administration and supervision.
(iii)
Contractor or Subcontractor will have the right to add the fee
percentage applicable to Work under the Contract for self-performed
extra work, or if no such fee has been agreed to by the parties,
Contractor’s or Subcontractor’s maximum total allowable additions
for overhead, profit, administration and supervision will not exceed
ten percent (10%) of actual verifiable labor, materials and
equipment for such self- performed extra work.
9.2.5
Any agreement which modifies the terms of the Contract (including Change Orders) will
be approved in writing by the Project Manager. Once properly executed by both parties,
these modifications to the Contract will have the same effect as if they had been included in
the original Contract.
9.3
ACCURACY OF CHANGE ORDER PRICING INFORMATION
9.3.1
Subject to Sections 9.3.2 through 9.3.4, signature by the contracting parties constitutes full
accord and satisfaction between City and Contractor for all costs, damages, and expenses
of whatever kind of nature, including delay, impact or acceleration damages, which may be
occasioned by a Change Order of other modification of the Contract agreed to in writing.
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-42 of 75
9.3.2
Accurate Change Order Pricing Information: Contractor agrees that it is responsible for
submitting accurate cost and pricing data to City to support its Fixed Price, Unit Price, or
Cost Plus Change Order Proposals or other Contract Price adjustments under the
Contract. Contractor further agrees to submit Change Order proposals with cost and
pricing data which is accurate, complete, current, and in accordance with the terms of
the Contract with respect to pricing of change orders. Contractor agrees that any “buy-
out savings” on Change Orders will accrue 100% to Owner. “Buy-out savings” are defined
as any savings negotiated by the Contractor with a Subcontractor or a Material Supplier
after receiving approval of a Change Order amount that was designated to be paid to a
specific Subcontractor or Supplier for the Approved Change Order work.
9.3.3
Right to Verify Change Order Pricing Information: Contractor agrees that City, through
its designated representative, will have the right to examine, copy, and scan the records
of the Contractor, Subcontractor or Sub-Subcontractor’s records (during the Contract
period and up to three years after final payment is made on the Contract) to verify the
accuracy and appropriateness of the pricing data used to price all Change Order
proposals or claims. Contractor agrees that if City determines the cost and pricing data
submitted (whether approved or not) was inaccurate, incomplete, not current, or not in
compliance with the terms of the Contract regarding pricing of Change Orders, an
appropriate Contract Price adjustment will be made. Such post-approval Contact Price
adjustments will apply to all levels of contractors and Subcontractors and to all types of
Change Order proposals, specifically including Fixed Price, Unit Price, and Cost Plus Change
Orders.
9.3.4
Requirements for Detailed Change Order Pricing Information: Contractor agrees to
provide a detailed breakdown of allowable labor and labor burden cost (i.e., base wage
rate of applicable classifications of workers, payroll taxes, and insurance and benefits
costs). This information will be used to evaluate the potential cost of labor and labor burden
related to Change Order work. It is intended that this information represent an accurate
estimate of the Contractor’s actual labor and labor burden cost components. Information
is not intended to establish fixed billing or Change Order pricing labor rates. However, at the
time Change Orders are priced, the submitted cost data for labor rates may be used to price
Change Order work. The accuracy of any such agreed upon labor rate cost components
used to price Change Orders will be subject to later audit. Approved Change Order
amounts may be adjusted later to correct the impact of inaccurate labor cost
components if the agreed upon labor cost components are determined to be inaccurate.
9.4
EMERGENCIES
In any emergency affecting the safety of persons or property, Contractor will act, at its
discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Any change in the Contract Price or
Contract Time resulting from emergency work will be determined as provided in this Section.
9.5
DIFFERING SITE CONDITIONS
9.5.1
If Differing Site Conditions are encountered at the Project Site, then notice by the observing
party must be given to the other party promptly before conditions are disturbed (to the extent
practicable) and in no event later than 14 Days after first observance of the conditions.
City will promptly investigate such conditions and, if City determines that Differing Site
Conditions exist and they materially cause an increase in the cost of, or time required for,
performance of any part of the Work, Contractor will be entitled to equitable adjustment
in the Contract Price or Construction Schedule (and other time requirements), or both. If it
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-43 of 75
is determined by City that the conditions at the Project Site are not Differing Site Conditions
and no change is justified, then City will so notify Contractor in writing, stating the reasons.
Claims in opposition to such determination must be made within 14 Days after City has
given notice of its decision. If City and Contractor cannot agree on an adjustment in the
Contract Price or Construction Schedule (and other time requirements), the adjustment
may be submitted to dispute resolution as provided these General Conditions.
9.6
CHANGES IN LAWS, REGULATIONS, OR LEGAL REQUIREMENTS OR TAXES
In the event of a material change in applicable Laws, Regulations, or Legal Requirements, or
taxes subsequent to the date of the Contract by the parties, Contractor may be entitled
to a Change Order, in City’s discretion, to the extent Contractor can document to the
satisfaction of City that such change significantly increases Contractor’s actual cost of
performance of the Work.
SECTION 10 -SUSPENSION AND TERMINATION
10.1
SUSPENSION
City may suspend the Contract and Contractor’s performance in accordance with MAG
Specifications § 105.1 and 108.7.
10.2
TERMINATION BY THE CITY FOR CAUSE
10.2.1
MAG Specifications § 108.11 applies to the Contract.
10.2.2
City may also terminate the Contract if City determines, in its sole discretion that Contractor
has:
a.
After prior written notice, refused or failed to supply enough properly skilled
workers or proper materials;
b.
After prior written notice, failed to make payment to Subcontractors for
materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between
Contractor and the Subcontractors;
c.
After prior written notice, disregards laws, ordinances, or rules, regulations or
orders of a public authority having jurisdiction;
d.
After prior written notice, repeatedly failed to comply with written directives
from City;
e.
Is adjudged as bankrupt or insolvent;
f.
Made a general assignment for the benefit of creditors;
g.
Appointed a trustee or receiver for itself or any of its property;
h.
Filed a petition to take advantage of any debtor's act, or to reorganize under
the bankruptcy or similar laws; or
i.
Otherwise breached a provision of the Contract Documents or any other
contract between City and Contractor.
10.2.3
When any of the above reasons exist, City may terminate the Contract, without prejudice to
any other rights or remedies of City, after giving Contractor and Contractors’ surety, if any,
7 Days written notice of City’s intent to terminate the Contract and Contractor’s failure to
cure any such reasons. Upon such termination, City may: (1) take possession of the Site
and of all materials thereon owned by Contractor; or (2) finish the Work by whatever
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-44 of 75
reasonable method City may deem expedient. When City terminates the Contract for one of
the reasons state above, Contractor will not be entitled to receive further payment until the
Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price existing at the time of such
termination exceeds the costs and expenses of finishing the Work and any other damages
incurred by City, such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such costs, expenses and damages
exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor must pay the difference to City. This obligation
for payment will survive termination of the Contract.
10.3
TERMINATION BY CITY FOR CONVENIENCE
City may also terminate the Contract at any time for its convenience upon 7 Days written
notice to Contractor specifying the termination date. In the event of termination which is
not the fault, in whole or in part, of Contractor, City will pay to Contractor only such
compensation, including reimbursable expenses, due for Work properly performed on
the Project prior to the termination date. Upon any termination of the Contract, no further
payments will be due from City to Contractor.
10.4
A.R.S. § 38-511
The Contract is subject to, and may be terminated by City in accordance with, the provisions
of A.R.S. § 38-511.
SECTION 11 -INSURANCE AND BONDS
11.1
INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
11.1.1
After Contract award, the Contractor must furnish the City a certificate of insurance on a
standard insurance industry ACORD form. The ACORD form must be issued by an insurance
company authorized to transact business in the State of Arizona possessing a current A.M.
Best, Inc. rating of A-7, or better and legally authorized to do business in the State of Arizona
with policies and forms satisfactory to City. Provided, however, the A.M. Best rating
requirement may not be deemed to apply to required Worker’s Compensation coverage.
11.1.2
The Contractor and any of its Subcontractors must procure and maintain, until all of their
obligations have been discharged, including any warranty periods under this Contract are
satisfied, the insurances set forth below.
11.1.3
The insurance requirements set forth below are minimum requirements for this Contract
and in no way limit the indemnity covenants contained in this Contract.
11.1.4
The City in no way warrants that the minimum insurance limits contained in this Contract
are sufficient to protect Contractor from liabilities that might arise out of the performance
of the Contract services under this Contract by Contractor, its agents, representatives,
employees, or Subcontractors and the Contractor is free to purchase any additional
insurance as may be determined necessary.
11.1.5
Failure to demand evidence of full compliance with the insurance requirements in this
Contract or failure to identify any insurance deficiency will not relieve the Contractor from,
nor will it be considered a waiver of its obligation to maintain the required insurance at all
times during the performance of this Contract.
11.1.6
Use of Subcontractors: If any Work is subcontracted in any way, the Contractor must
execute a written agreement with Subcontractor containing the same Indemnification
Clause and Insurance Requirements as the City requires of the Contractor in this Contract.
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-45 of 75
The Contractor is responsible for executing the Contract with the Subcontractor and
obtaining Certificates of Insurance and verifying the insurance requirements.
11.2
MINIMUM SCOPE AND LIMITS OF INSURANCE
11.2.1
The Contractor must provide coverage with limits of liability not less than those stated
below.
11.2.1.1
Commercial General Liability-Occurrence Form. Contractor must maintain “occurrence”
form Commercial General Liability insurance with a limit of not less than $2,000,000 for each
occurrence, $4,000,000 aggregate. Said insurance must also include coverage for products
and completed operations, independent contractors, personal injury and advertising injury.
If any Excess insurance is utilized to fulfill the requirements of this paragraph, the Excess
insurance must be “follow form” equal or broader in coverage scope than underlying
insurance.
11.2.1.2
Automobile Liability-Any Automobile or Owned, Hired and Non-Owned Vehicles. Contractor
must maintain Business/Automobile Liability insurance with a limit of $1,000,000 each
accident on Contractor owned, hired, and non-owned vehicles assigned to or used in the
performance under this Contract. If any Excess or Umbrella insurance is utilized to fulfill
the requirements of this paragraph, the Excess or Umbrella insurance must be “follow
form” equal or broader in coverage scope than underlying insurance.
11.2.1.3
Workers Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance. Contractor must maintain
Workers Compensation insurance to cover obligations imposed by federal and state
statutes having jurisdiction of Contractor employees engaged in the performance of Work
under this Contract and must also maintain Employers’ Liability insurance of not less than
$1,000,000 for each accident and $1,000,000 disease for each employee.
11.2.1.4
Builders’ Risk/Installation Floater Insurance. The Contractor bears all responsibility for loss
to all equipment or Work under construction. Unless waived in writing by the City the
Contractor will purchase and maintain in force Builders’ Risk/Installation Floater insurance
on the entire Work until completed and accepted by the City. This insurance will be Special
Causes of Loss policy form, (minimally including perils of fire, flood, lightning, explosion,
windstorm and hail, smoke, aircraft and vehicles, riot and civil commotion, theft, vandalism,
malicious mischief, and collapse), completed value, replacement cost policy form equal to
the contract price and all subsequent modifications. The Contractor’s Builders’
Risk/Installation Floater insurance must be primary and not contributory.
a. Builders’ Risk/Installation Floater insurance must cover the entire Work
including reasonable compensation for architects and engineers’ services
and expenses and other “soft costs” made necessary by an insured loss.
Builders’ Risk/Installation Floater insurance must provide coverage from the
time any covered property comes under the Contractor’s control and or
responsibility, and continue without interruption during course of
construction, renovation and or installation, including any time during which
any Project property or equipment is in transit, off Site, or while on Site for
future use or installation. Insured property must include, but not be limited
to, scaffolding, false work, and temporary buildings at the Site. This
insurance must also cover the cost of removing debris, including demolition
as may be legally required by operation of any law, ordinance, regulation or
code.
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-46 of 75
b. The Contractor must also purchase and maintain Boiler and Machinery
insurance with the same requirements as Builders’ Risk/Installation Floater
insurance cited above if the Work to be performed involves any exposures
or insurable property normally covered under a Boiler and Machinery
insurance policy or made necessary as required by law or testing
requirements in the performance of this Contract/Agreement. The
Contractor will be responsible for any and all deductibles under these
policies and the Contractor waives all rights of recovery and subrogation
against the City under the Contractor- Builders’ Risk/Installation Floater
insurance described herein.
c. Builders’ Risk/Installation Floater Insurance must be maintained until
whichever of the following first occurs: (i) final payment has been made; or,
(ii) until no person or entity, other than the City, has an insurable interest in
the property required to be covered.
d. The Builders’ Risk/Installation Floater insurance must be endorsed so that
the insurance will not be canceled or lapse because of any partial use or
occupancy by the City.
e. The Builders Risk/Installation Floater insurance must include as named
insureds, the City, the Contractor, and all tiers of Subcontractors and others
with an insurable interest in the Work who will be named as additional
insureds unless they are able to provide the same level of coverage with the
City and Contractor named as additional insureds. Certificates must contain
a provision that the insurance will not be canceled or materially altered
without at least 30 Days advance notice to the City. The City must also be
named as a Loss Payee under the Builders’ Risk/Installation Floater coverage.
f.
The Builders Risk/Installation Floater insurance must be written using the
Special Causes of Loss policy form, replacement cost basis.
g. All rights of subrogation under the Builders Risk/Installation Floater
insurance are, by this Contract/Agreement, waived against the City, its
officers, officials, agents and employees.
h. The Contractor is responsible for payment of all deductibles under the
Builders’ Risk/Installation Floater insurance policy.
11.2.1.5
Pollution Liability Insurance (Including Errors and Omissions). For Job Orders, Pollution
Liability Insurance is only required if applicable and determined on a project specific basis.
Contractor must maintain Pollution Liability Insurance with a limit of not less than
$5,000,000 per loss, $5,000,000 aggregate for losses caused by pollution conditions
including coverage for bodily injury, property damage, defense costs, clean-up costs, and
completed operations that arise from the operations of Contractor as described in this
Contract.
a. The policy must provide for complete professional service coverage,
including coverage for pollution liability that is a result of a breach of
professional duties.
b. The policy must provide for protection again claims for third-party bodily
injury, property damage, or environmental damage caused for pollution
conditions resulting from general contracting activities for which Contractor
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-47 of 75
is legally liable.
c. The policy must provide for cleanup costs when mandated by governmental
entities, when required by law, or as a result of third-party claims.
d. Completed Operations Coverage must be kept in place for up to the statute
of repose.
e. The policy must be endorsed to include the following additional insured
language: “City, its elected officials, trustees, employees, agents, and
volunteers must be named as additional insureds with respect to liability
arising out of the activities performed by, or on behalf of Contractor”.
f.
If Work under this Contract requires the transportation of any hazardous
material or regulated substances, Contractor must carry Auto Liability with a
CA 9948 endorsement or equivalent.
g. If Work under this Contract requires the disposal of any hazardous materials
from the job site, Contractor must obtain a certificate of insurance for
Pollution Legal Liability from the disposal site operator with a limit of not less
than $5,000,000 per loss, $5,000,000 aggregate.
11.3
ADDITIONAL POLICY PROVISIONS REQUIRED
11.3.1
Self-Insured Retentions or Deductibles. Any self-insured retentions and deductibles must
be declared and approved by the City. If not approved, the City may require that the insurer
reduce or eliminate any deductible or self-insured retentions with respect to the City, its
officers, officials, agents, employees, and volunteers.
11.3.2
The Contractor’s insurance must contain broad form contractual liability coverage.
11.3.3
The Contractor's insurance coverage must be primary insurance with respect to the City, its
officers, officials, agents, and employees. Any insurance or self-insurance maintained by
the City, its officers, officials, agents, and employees will be in excess of the coverage
provided by the Contractor and must not contribute to it.
11.3.4
The Contractor's insurance must apply separately to each insured against whom claim is
made or suit is brought, except with respect to the limits of the insurer's liability.
11.3.5
Coverage provided by the Contractor must not be limited to the liability assumed under the
indemnification provisions of this Contract.
11.3.6
The policies must contain a severability of interest clause and waiver of subrogation against
the City, its officers, officials, agents, and employees, for losses arising from Work
performed by the Contractor for the City.
11.3.7
The Contractor, its successors and or assigns, are required to maintain Commercial General
Liability insurance as specified in this Contract for a minimum period of 3 years following
completion and acceptance of the Work. The Contractor must submit a Certificate of
Insurance evidencing Commercial General Liability insurance during this 3 year period
containing all the Contract insurance requirements, including naming the required
Additional Insureds set forth herein.
11.3.8
If a Certificate of Insurance is submitted as verification of coverage, the City will reasonably
rely upon the Certificate of Insurance as evidence of coverage but this acceptance and
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-48 of 75
reliance will not waive or alter in any way the insurance requirements or obligations of this
Contract.
11.3.9
Insurance Cancellation During Contract Term.
11.3.9.1
If any of the required policies expire during the life of this Contract, the Contractor must
forward renewal or replacement Certificates to the City within 10 Days after the renewal
date containing all the required insurance provisions.
11.3.9.2
Each insurance policy required by the insurance provisions of this Contract must provide
the required coverage and must not be suspended, voided or canceled except after 30 Days
prior written notice has been given to the City, except when cancellation is for non-payment
of premium, then 10 Days prior notice may be given. Such notice must be sent directly to
Chandler Law-Risk Management Department, Post Office Box 4008, Mailstop 628, Chandler,
Arizona 85225. If any insurance company refuses to provide the require notice, the
Contractor or its insurance broker must notify the City of any cancellation, suspension, non-
renewal of any insurance within 7 Days of receipt of insurers’ notification to that effect.
11.3.10
City as Additional Insured. The above-referenced policies are to contain, or be endorsed to
contain, the following provisions:
11.3.10.1
The Commercial General Liability and Automobile Liability policies are to contain, or be
endorsed to contain, the following provisions: The City, its officers, officials, agents, and
employees are additional insureds with respect to liability arising out of activities performed
by, or on behalf of, the Contractor including the City's general supervision of the Contractor;
Products and Completed Operations of the Contractor; and automobiles owned, leased,
hired, or borrowed by the Contractor.
11.3.10.2
The City, its officers, officials, agents, and employees must be additional insureds to the full
limits of liability purchased by the Contractor even if those limits of liability are in excess of
those required by this Contract.
11.4
BONDS AND OTHER PERFORMANCE SECURITY
11.4.1
After Contract award, Contractor must provide a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond,
each in an amount equal to the full amount of the Contract Price.
11.4.2
Each such bond must be executed by a surety company or companies holding a Certificate
of Authority to transact surety business in the State of Arizona, issued by the Director of the
Arizona Department of Insurance and must be named in the current list of "Companies
Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable
Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff Bureau of
Accounts, U.S. Treasury Department. A copy of the Certificate of Authority must accompany
the bonds. The Certificate must have been issued or updated within two (2) years prior to
the execution of this Agreement. The bonds must be written or countersigned by an
authorized representative of the surety who is either a resident of the state of Arizona or
whose principal office is maintained in this state, as by law required.
11.4.3
The bonds must be made payable and be acceptable to City. The bond forms for the
performance and payment bonds must be in the forms required under A.R.S. § 34-221, et.
Seq., as in Appendices 4 and 5 of these General Conditions.
11.4.4
Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-49 of 75
covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract Documents, Contractor must
promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or must permit a copy to be made.
11.4.5
All bonds submitted for this Project must be provided by a company which has been rated AM
Best rating of A- or better for the prior four quarters by the latest edition of the ‘Results
Best’s Key Rating Guide (Property/Casualty)” published by the A.M. Best Company.
11.4.6
Personal or individual bonds are not acceptable.
11.4.7
If the surety on any Bond furnished by Contractor is declared a bankrupt or becomes
insolvent, or Contractor’s right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of
the Project is located, or it ceases to meet the requirements of this Section 11.4, Contractor
must within 5 Days thereafter substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be
acceptable to City.
SECTION 12 - INDEMNIFICATION
12.1
To the extent permitted by law, the Contractor and its owners, officers, directors, agents,
employees, and subconsultants (collectively "lndemnitor") must indemnify, save, and hold
harmless the City and its officers, officials, agents, and employees (collectively "lndemnitee")
from any and all claims, actions, liabilities, damages, losses, or expenses (including court
costs, attorneys' fees, and costs of claim processing, investigation, and litigation) (collectively
"Claims") caused or alleged to be caused, in whole or in part, by the negligent, reckless,
wrongful, or willful acts, errors, or omissions of Indemnitor in connection with this
Agreement. This indemnity includes any Claim or amount arising out of or recovered under
workers' compensation laws or on account of Indemnitor's failure to conform to any federal,
state, or local law, statute, ordinance, rule, regulation, or court decree. Indemnitor must
indemnify lndemnitee from and against any and all Claims, except those arising solely from
lndemnitee's own negligent, reckless, wrongful, or willful acts, errors, or omissions.
Indemnitor is responsible for primary loss investigation, defense, and judgment costs where
this indemnification applies. In consideration of the award of this Agreement, Indemnitor
agrees to waive all rights of subrogation against lndemnitee for losses arising from or
related to this Agreement. Indemnitor's obligations under this provision survive the
termination or expiration of this Agreement.
SECTION 13 -DISPUTE RESOLUTION
13.1
All disputes arising out of or relating to the Contract, the Work or the Project, other than
termination under Section 10, will be resolved pursuant to the Dispute Resolution
process set forth in Appendix 6 of these General Conditions, and not pursuant to MAG
Specifications § 110.
13.2
Contractor agrees that during any dispute between the parties, Contractor will continue to
perform its obligations under the Contract until such dispute is resolved.
13.3
Notwithstanding any other provision in this Contract, City has the right to immediately file in
court and pursue an action for a temporary restraining order and injunctive relief against
Contractor if City determines that such action is necessary to protect its interests under the
Contract, to obtain specific performance of any provision of the Contract, to advance the
completion of the Project, or to protect health, welfare and safety.
SECTION 14 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-50 of 75
14.1
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
14.1.1
The Contract Documents are intended to permit the parties to complete the Work
and all obligations required by the Contract Documents within the Contract Times for the
Contract Price. The Contract Documents are intended to be complementary and interpreted
in harmony so as to avoid conflict, with words and phrases interpreted in a manner
consistent with construction and design industry standards.
14.1.2
It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project (or
part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any labor,
documentation, services, materials, or equipment that may reasonably be inferred from the
Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce
the intended result must be provided by Contractor whether or not specifically called for at
no additional cost to City.
14.1.3
The Contract Documents establish the rights and obligations of the parties and include the
Contract, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid or Proposal
(including documentation accompanying the Bid and any post-Bid documentation
submitted prior to Contract award) when attached as an exhibit to the Contract, the
accepted Project Schedule, the Notice to Proceed, the Performance Bond, the Payment
Bond, Project Design, Engineering and Specifications, these General Conditions, the Project
Specific Special Provisions, Technical Specifications, Contract Drawings, as the same may be
more specifically identified in the Contract, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field
Orders and the written interpretations and clarifications of the Design Professional or City
representative and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. Approved Shop
Drawings and the reports and drawings of subsurface and physical conditions are not
Contract Documents.
14.1.4
In the event of any inconsistency, conflict, or ambiguity between or among the Contract
Documents, the Contract Documents will take precedence as follows from highest to lowest:
Change Orders, Addenda, Contract, Project Specific Special Provisions, General Conditions,
Technical Specifications, Drawings/Plans, Chandler Amendments to MAG Standard
Specifications and Chandler Standard Details, and MAG Uniform Standard Specifications
and Details for Public Works Construction. If applicable to this Contract, Federal Provisions
prevail.
14.1.5
On the Drawings, given dimensions will take precedence over scaled measurements and
large scale drawings over small-scale drawings.
14.1.6
Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents will be issued by the Design
Professional through the City.
14.1.7
The headings used in this Agreement or any other Contract Documents, are for ease of
reference only and must not in any way be construed to limit or alter the meaning of any
provision.
14.1.8
The Contract Documents form the entire agreement between City and Contractor. No
oral representations or other agreements have been made by the parties except as
specifically stated in the Contract Documents.
14.1.9
The Contract Documents may not be changed, altered, or amended in any way except in
writing signed by a duly authorized representative of each party in the form of a Change
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-51 of 75
Order.
14.1.10
Re-Use of Documents. Neither Contractor nor any Subcontractor, manufacturer, fabricator,
supplier or distributor will have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the
Drawings, Specifications or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or
bearing the seal of the Design Professional; and they must not re-use any of them on
extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of City and the Design
Professional and specific written verification or adaptation by the Design Professional.
14.2
REFERENCE STANDARDS
14.2.1
Reference to standards, specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society,
organization, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific
or by implication, will mean the standard, specification, manual, code, or Laws or
Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Contract
if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract
Documents.
14.2.2
The provisions of any such standard, specification, manual or code, or any instruction of a
Supplier will not change the duties or responsibilities of City, Contractor, Design
Professional or Project Manager, or any of their Subcontractors, consultants, agents, or
employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents, nor will any such provision or
instruction assign to City, Contractor, Design Professional, or any of their agents, or
employees any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any
duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of the
Contract Documents.
14.3
COMPLIANCE WITH ARIZONA LAW AND FEDERAL LAW
14.3.1
Compliance with A.R.S. § 41-4401. Pursuant to the provisions of A.R.S. § 41-4401, the
Contractor hereby warrants to the City that the Contractor and each of its subcontractors
(“Subcontractors”) must comply with all Federal Immigration laws and regulations that
relate to the immigration status of their employees and the requirement to use E-Verify set
forth in A.R.S. §23-214(A).
14.3.2
A breach of the Contractor Immigration Warranty constitutes a material breach of this
Contract and subject to penalties up to and including termination of this Contract.
14.3.3
The City retains the legal right to inspect the papers of any Contractor or Subcontractor
employee who works on this Contract to ensure that the Contractor or Subcontractor is
complying with the Contractor Immigration Warranty. The Contractor agrees to assist the
City in the conduct of any such inspections.
14.3.4
The City may, at its sole discretion, conduct random verifications of the employment records
of the Contractor and any Subcontractors to ensure compliance with Contractors
Immigration Warranty. The Contractor agrees to assist the City in performing any such
random verifications.
14.3.5
The provisions of this Article must be included in any contract the Contractor enters into
with any and all of its subcontractors who provide services under this Contract or any
subcontract. “Services” are defined as furnishing labor, time or effort in the State of Arizona
by a contractor or subcontractor. Services include construction or maintenance of any
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-52 of 75
structure, building or transportation facility or improvement to real property.
14.4
HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
14.4.1
Contractor will not be responsible for any Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered
or revealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in Drawings or Specifications or
identified in the Contract Document to be within the scope of the Work. Contractor will be
responsible for a Hazardous Environmental Condition created with any materials brought
to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for whom Contractor is
responsible.
14.4.2
If Contractor encounters a Hazardous Environmental Condition or if Contractor or anyone
for whom Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition.
Contractor must immediately:
a. Secure or otherwise isolate such condition;
b. Stop all Work in connection with such condition and in any area affected
thereby; and
c. Notify City and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing.
14.4.3
City will promptly retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective
action, if any.
14.4.4
Contractor will be responsible for any and all civil or criminal penalties, fines, damages, or
other charges imposed by any regulatory agency or court for sewage discharges that are in
violation of applicable statutes and laws and that are a result, direct or indirect, of work
performed under this Contract. Contractor will also be responsible for reimbursement to
City for administration, reporting, and tracking expenses required as a result of any spill
event. In the event the regulatory agency or court imposes a probationary period,
Contractor must post bond for the probationary period to ensure that all such costs are
reimbursed to City. This responsibility will apply whether penalties are imposed directly on
Contractor or any of its Subcontractors, or the City of Chandler. Contractor must defend
and indemnify City against such penalties. Regulatory agencies may include, but are not
limited to, the Arizona Department of Environmental Quality (ADEQ) and the United States
Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA).
14.5
COOPERATION AND FURTHER DOCUMENTATION
Contractor agrees to provide City such other duly executed documents as may be
reasonably requested by City to implement the intent of the Contract Documents.
14.6
ASSIGNMENT
Neither Contractor nor City will, without the written consent of the other assign, transfer or
sublet any portion of this Agreement or part of the Work or the obligations required by
the Contract Documents, any such assignment will be void, will transfer no rights to the
purported assignee, and would be a material breach of the Contract.
14.7
SUCCESSORS
Contractor and City intend that the provisions of the Contract Documents are binding upon
the parties, their employees, agents, heirs, successors and assigns.
14.8
LAWFUL PRESENCE
Pursuant to A.R.S. §§ 1-501 and 1-502, City is prohibited from awarding a contract to any
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-53 of 75
natural person who cannot establish that such person is lawfully present in the United
States. To establish lawful presence, a person must produce qualifying identification and
sign a City-provided affidavit affirming the identification provided is genuine. This
requirement will be imposed at the time of contract award. This requirement does not
apply to business organizations such as corporations, partnerships, or limited liability
companies.
14.9
NO BOYCOTT OF ISRAEL CERTIFICATION
By Contractor's signature on this Contract, Contractor certifies under A.R.S. § 35-393.01 that
Contractor is not currently engaged in and for the duration of this Contract will not engage
in a boycott of Israel.
14.10
NO THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARY
Nothing under the Contract Documents will be construed to give any rights or benefits in
the Contract Documents to anyone other than City and Contractor, and all duties and
responsibilities undertaken pursuant to the Contract Documents will be for the sole and
exclusive benefit of City and Contractor and not for the benefit of any other party, unless
otherwise expressly set forth in the Contract Documents.
14.11
GOVERNING LAW AND VENUE
The Agreement and all Contract Documents will be deemed to be made under, and will
be construed in accordance with and governed by the laws of the State of Arizona without
regard to the conflicts or choice of law provisions thereof. Any court action to enforce any
provision of the Contract or to obtain any remedy with respect hereto must be brought
in the Superior Court, Maricopa County, Arizona, and for this purpose, each party hereby
expressly and irrevocably consents to the jurisdiction and venue of such Court.
14.12
SEVERABILITY
If any provision of the Contract Documents or the application thereof to any person or
circumstance will be invalid, illegal or unenforceable to any extent, the remainder of the
affected provision, the remainder of the Contract Documents, and the application
thereof will not be affected and will be enforceable to the fullest extent permitted by law.
14.13
LEGAL REQUIREMENTS
At all times relevant to its entry into this Contract and performance of the Services and
the Work, Contractor must fully comply with all Laws, Regulations, or Legal Requirements
applicable to City, the Project, and the Contract, including, without limitation, those set
forth on Exhibit C of the Contract.
14.14
PARTIAL INVALIDITY
If any provision of the Contract is held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be invalid,
void or unenforceable, the remaining provisions will nevertheless continue in full force
without being impaired or invalidated in any way.
14.15
ATTORNEYS' FEES
Should either party to the Contract bring an action to enforce any provision of the Contract,
the prevailing party will be entitled to recover reasonable attorneys' fees and costs in
connection therewith.
14.16
CONFLICT OF INTEREST
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-54 of 75
14.16.1
Contractor agrees to disclose any financial or economic interest with the Project property,
or any property affected by the Project, existing prior to the execution of the Contract.
Further, Contractor agrees to disclose any financial or economic interest with the Project
property, or any property affected by the Project, if Contractor gains such interest during
the course of this Contract. If Contractor gains financial or economic interest in the Project
during the course of this Contract, this may be grounds for terminating this Contract. Any
decision to terminate the Contract must be at the sole discretion of City.
14.16.2
Contractor will not engage the services on this Contract of any present City employee who
was involved as a decision maker in the selection or approval processes, or who negotiated
or approved billings or Contract Modifications for this Contract.
14.16.3
Contractor agrees that it will not perform services on this Project for a contractor,
subcontractor, or any supplier, not covered under this Contract.
14.17
INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR
Contractor is and must be an independent contractor. Any provisions in the Contract
Documents that may appear to give City the right to direct Contractor as to the details of
accomplishing the Work or to exercise a measure of control over the Work means that
Contractor must follow the wishes of City as the results of the Work only. These results
must comply with all applicable laws and ordinances.
14.18
NOTICE OF INJURY
Should City or Contractor suffer injury or damage to their person or property because of
any error, omission or act of the other party or of any of the other party's employees or
agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim must be made in
writing to the other party within 7 Days of the first observance of such injury or damage.
14.19
CONFIDENTIALITY
Contractor, for the benefit of City, hereby agrees it will not release or cause or permit
to be released to the public any press notices, publicity (oral or written) or advertising
promotion relating to, any statement regarding, or any other public announcement or
disclosure or cause or permit to be publicly announced or disclosed, in any manner
whatsoever, the specific terms and conditions of this Agreement or any comment relating
to the Project or the Site. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Contractor will be entitled to
disclose the terms of the Agreement to the extent required by law or in the course of
enforcing or defending a claim or action hereunder. Contractor must give City reasonably
prompt notice of any disclosure or statement made pursuant to this provision.
14.20
DATA CONFIDENTIALITY
14.20.1
As used in the Contract, “data” means all information, whether written or verbal, including
plans, specifications, renderings, photographs, studies, investigations, audits, analyses,
samples, reports, calculations, internal memos, meeting minutes, data field notes, work
product, proposals, correspondence and any other similar documents or information
prepared by, obtained by, or transmitted to the City in the performance of this Contract.
14.20.2
Contractor agrees that all data, regardless of form, including originals, images, and
reproductions, prepared by, obtained by, or transmitted to City in connection with the
Contractor’s performance of this Contract is confidential and proprietary information
belonging to City.
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-55 of 75
14.20.3
Except as specifically provided in this Contract, Contractor or its Subcontractors must not
divulge data to any third party without prior written consent of City. Contractor or its
Subcontractors must not use data for any purposes except to perform Work required under
this Contract. These prohibitions will not apply to the following data provided Contractor
has first given the required notice to City:
a. Data which was known to Contractor or its Subcontractors prior to its
performance under this Contract unless such data was acquired in
connection with Work performed for City;
b. Data which was acquired by Contractor or its Subcontractors in its
performance under this Contract and which was disclosed to Contractor or
its Subcontractors by a third party, who to the best of Contractor’s or its
Subcontractor’s knowledge and belief, had the legal right to make such
disclosure and Contractor or its Subcontractors are not otherwise required
to hold such data in confidence; or
c. Data which is required to be disclosed by virtue of law, regulation, or court
order, to which the Contractor or its Subcontractors are subject.
14.20.4
In the event the Contractor or its Subcontractors are required or requested to disclose data
to a third party, or any other information to which the Contractor or its Subcontractors
became privy as a result of any other contract with City, the Contractor must first notify City
as set forth in this Section of the request or demand for the data. The Contractor or its
Subcontractors must give City sufficient facts so that City can be given an opportunity to
first give its consent or take such action that City may deem appropriate to protect such
data or other information from disclosure.
14.20.5
Unless prohibited by law, within 10 Days after completion of services for a third party on
real or personal property owned or leased by City, the Contractor must promptly deliver, as
set forth in this Section, a copy of all data to City. All data will continue to be subject to the
confidentiality agreements of this Contract.
14.20.6
Contractor or its Subcontractors assume all liability for maintaining the confidentiality of
the data in its possession and agree to compensate City if any of the provisions of this
Section are violated by Contractor, its employees, agents, or Subcontractors. Solely for the
purposes of seeking injunctive relief, it is agreed that a breach of this Section will be deemed
to cause irreparable harm that justified injunctive relief in court. Contractor agrees that the
requirements of this Section will be incorporated into all subcontracts entered into by
Contractor. A violation of this Section may result in immediate termination of this Contract
without notice.
14.21
SURVIVAL
All warranties, representations and indemnifications by Contractor must survive the
completion or termination of this Agreement.
14.22
COVENANTS AGAINST CONTINGENT FEES
Contractor warrants that no person has been employed or retained to solicit or secure
this Agreement upon an agreement or understanding for a commission, percentage,
brokerage, or contingent fee, and that no member of City Council, or any employee of
City has any interest, financially, or otherwise, in the firm. For breach or violation of this
warrant, City will have the right to annul the Contract without liability or at its discretion to
deduct from the Contract Price or consideration, the full amount of such commission,
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-56 of 75
percentage, brokerage, or contingent fee.
14.23
NO WAIVER
The failure of either party to enforce any of the provisions of the Contract Documents or to
require performance of the other party of any of the provisions hereof must not be construed
to be a waiver of such provisions, nor will it affect the validity of the Contract Documents or
any part thereof, or the right of either party to thereafter enforce each and every provision.
14.24
NONEXCLUSIVE REMEDIES
The remedies set forth in this Contract are cumulative and not exclusive, and failure to
exercise any remedy (including, without limitation, any right to terminate) will not preclude
any party from exercising any other right in seeking any other remedy available to it at law
or in equity.
14.25
PROJECT COMMUNICATIONS
14.25.1
All communications concerning the performance of the Work or the Project will be provided
to the designated Project Manager and Contractor’s Representative set forth in Article 1
of the Contract. City may change the designated Project Manager and, subject to Section
4.4.20 of these General Conditions, Contractor may change Contractor Representative, by
written notice to the other.
14.25.2
Project communications may be exchanged by e-mail, but email communications cannot
change the terms of the Contract or the Scope of Work, or effectuate any change that
requires a written Change Order.
14.25.3
When any provisions of the Contract Documents requires Contractor or the Design
Professional to give written notice to City, it will be deemed to have been validly given if
delivered in person to the person designated in the Contract Documents as Project
Manager, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the
City Engineer addressed as follows:
To City:
City of Chandler
Public Works & Utilities Department
Attn: City Engineer
P.O. Box 4008, Mail Stop 407
Chandler, AZ 85244-4008
With a Copy to:
Project Manager
City of Chandler
Public Works & Utilities Department
P.O. Box 4008, Mail Stop 407
Chandler, AZ 85244-4008
With a Copy to:
Paul Ahlas, Construction Project Manager
City of Chandler
Public Works & Utilities Department
P.O. Box 4008, Mail Stop 407
Chandler, AZ 85244-4008
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-57 of 75
To Contractor:
14.25.4
When any provisions of the Contract Documents requires City, Project Manager, or the
Design Professional to give written notice to Contractor, it will be deemed to have been
validly given if delivered in person to the person designated in the Contract Documents as
Contractor’s Resident Superintendent, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified
mail, postage prepaid, to Contractor at the last address in the Contract Documents or such
substitute address which Contractor designates in writing, or to the business address
known to the giver of notice.
14.26
DRUG FREE WORKPLACE PROGRAM
14.26.1
City has adopted a policy establishing a drug free workplace for itself and as a requirement
for Contractors doing business with City, to ensure the safety and health of employees
working on City projects.
14.26.2
Contractor must require a drug free workplace for all employees working under the
Contract. Specifically, all employees of Contractor who are working under a Contract with
City must be notified, in writing, by Contractor that they are prohibited from the
manufacture, distribution,
dispensation, possession or unlawful use of a controlled
substance in the workplace.
14.27
Failure to require a drug free workplace in accordance with the City’s policy may result
in termination of the Contract and possible debarment form bidding on future City projects.
SECTION 15 - PROVISIONS APPLICABLE SOLELY TO GMP AND COST-BASED CONTRACTS,
CHANGE ORDERS, AND JOB ORDERS
15.1
ADDITIONAL DEFINITIONS
The definitions set forth in Section 2 apply to GMP and Cost-Based Contracts, Change
Orders, and Job Orders, together with the additional definitions set forth below.
Baseline Cost Model –
A breakdown and estimate of the scope of the Project developed by CM@Risk pursuant to Section 17.5
of these General Conditions.
CM@Risk or Construction Manager at Risk –
The person or firm selected by City to provide pre-construction and/or construction services as
detailed in a Construction Manager at Risk Contract with City. In these General Conditions, the term
“Contractor” includes CM@Risk under both Pre-Construction and Construction Services Contracts.
CM@Risk Fee or Contractor’s Fee –
An agreed to percentage in an accepted GMP that represents the Contractor’s fee for performance of
the Work.
Contract Documents –
Where compensation under the Contract is based upon a GMP accepted by City, the term “Contract
Documents” also includes the accepted GMP Proposal.
Mr. Shane Banks
McCarthy Building Companies, Inc.
6225 N. 24th St., Ste. 200
Phoenix, AZ 85016
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-58 of 75
Contract Price –
Where compensation under the Contract based upon a GMP accepted by City, the term “Contract
Price” refers to the GMP.
Cost-Based Contract, Change Order, or Job Order –
A Contract, Change Order, or Job Order where the Contract Price is based upon the actual cost
of performing the Work, subject to the terms of the Contract Documents, including this Section 15.
These would include those generally referred to as “Cost of the Work plus a Fee with a GMP,”
“Time and Materials,” or “Cost Plus a Fee.”
Cost of the Work –
The direct costs necessarily incurred by Contractor in the proper, timely, and complete performance
on the Work. The Cost of the Work will include only those costs set forth in Section 15.2 of these
General Conditions.
Deliverables –
The work products prepared by Contractor in performing the scope of work described in the Contract.
Some of the major deliverables to be prepared and provided by Contractor during pre-construction
may include but are not limited to: the Baseline Cost Model and Schedule that validate City’s plan and
budget, Construction Management Plan, Detailed Project Schedule, Schedule of Values, alternative
system evaluations, procurement strategies and plans, Detailed Cost Estimates, construction market
surveys, cash flow projections, GMP Proposals, Subcontractor procurement plan, Subcontractor
agreements, Subcontractor bid packages, Supplier agreements, Constructability Review, Cost Control
Log, Traffic control and phasing plans and others as indicated in this Contract or required by the
Project Team.
Pre-Construction Services Contract –
The Contract entered into between City and the CM@Risk for Pre-Construction Services to be provided
by the CM@Risk, including, without limitation, the generation of a GMP Proposal. If the GMP Proposal
is accepted by City and a Construction Contract is entered into between City and CM@Risk, the duties,
obligations and warranties of the CM@Risk under the Pre-Construction Services Contract survive and
are incorporated into the resulting Construction Contract.
Pre-Construction Services –
The services to be provided under the Pre-Construction Services Contract, including Section 17 of
these General Conditions.
Detailed Project Schedule –
The Detailed Project Schedule developed by the CM@Risk for the review and approval of the Project
Manager in accordance with Section 17.3 of these General Conditions, if applicable.
General Conditions Costs –
Those costs set forth in Section 4 of Appendix 9 to these General Conditions.
GMP Plans and Specifications –
The plan and specifications upon which the Guaranteed Maximum price Proposal is based.
GMP Proposal –
The proposal of Contractor submitted pursuant to Section 17.7 of these General Conditions for the
entire Work and/or portion (phases) of the Work.
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-59 of 75
Guaranteed Maximum Price or GMP –
The Guaranteed Maximum Price set forth in the Contract, Change Order, or Job Order if applicable.
15.2
CONTRACT PRICE
15.2.1
The Contract Price for all Contracts, Change Orders, and Job Orders based upon payment
of the Cost of the Work plus a Fee with a GMP, time and materials, or cost-plus a fee will be
the Cost of the Work incurred plus the Fee agreed to in writing by City, limited to the amount
of the GMP, if agreed to. Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract, Change
Order, or Job Order, all Cost Based pricing will be subject to and limited to GMP.
15.2.2
The Contract Price may only be changed as set forth in Section 9 above.
15.2.3
Only costs specifically designated as reimbursable costs are eligible for payment by City or
may be charged against the Contract Price. All other costs will not be paid by City and will
not be chargeable against the Contract Price.
15.2.4
Cost-Based Contracts. For Contracts, Change Orders, or Job Orders, reimbursable costs
must be determined pursuant to Appendix 9 to these General Conditions, Cost of the Work,
and not by MAG Specifications §109.5.
15.3
ALLOWANCES
15.3.1
Contractor must include in the Contract Price all Allowances stated in the Contract
Documents and agreed to in writing by City. Items covered by these Allowances must be
supplied for such amounts and by such persons as City may direct, provided Contractor will
not be required to employ persons against whom Contractor makes a reasonable objection.
Materials, labor, and equipment under an Allowance will be selected by City in accordance
with a schedule to be mutually agreed upon by City, Design Professional and Contractor or
otherwise in reasonably sufficient time to avoid delay in the Work.
15.3.2
Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents:
15.3.2.1
These Allowances must cover the cost to Contractor, less any applicable trade discount, of
the materials, labor, and equipment required by the Allowances, delivered at the Site, and
all applicable taxes;
15.3.2.2
Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation costs, overhead,
profit and other expenses relating to materials, labor, and equipment required by the
Allowance must be included in the Contract Sum and not in the Allowance; and
15.3.2.3
Whenever the cost is more or less than the Allowance, the Contract Sum must be adjusted
accordingly by Change Order, the amount of which will recognize the difference between
actual costs for an Allowance item and the amount of the Allowance item and changes, if
any, in handling costs on the Site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other
expenses.
15.4
CONTINGENCY
An agreed to amount in the GMP that may only be used in accordance with the terms set
forth in these General Conditions and with prior written approval by the City.
15.4.1
Construction Contingency. This GMP includes a dollar amount listed as a Construction
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-60 of 75
Contingency which will be readily available for increased costs for subcontractors, material,
and equipment subject to prior approval of City, which approval will not be withheld
unreasonably. The Construction Contingency may also be used, at the discretion of City, to
reimburse CM@Risk for unexpected costs due to (a) scope gaps between trade
subcontractors; (b) contract default by trade subcontractors; (c) unforeseen field conditions,
but only as defined in Section 9.5 above; (d) work completed to meet the intent of the
design, but which was not indicated on the plans; (e) costs overruns not covered by
allowances; (f) costs of corrective work not provided for elsewhere; and (g) implementation
of any Recovery Plan. Cost for which CM@Risk desires to be paid from the Construction
Contingency must be documented by CM@Risk on a time and materials basis and are
subject to verification by City. If agreed to by City, a “Use of Contingency” form will be
executed by both parties authorizing the actual cost of the work to be paid and included in
the Work Item Direct Costs. The Construction Contingency is not allocated to any particular
item of the Project but may be used for any portion of the work as determined above. Any
amount not used in the Construction Contingency will belong to City and will reduce the
GMP.
15.4.2
Owner’s Contingency. This GMP also includes a dollar amount listed as an Owner’s
Contingency which may be used only by the City (owner department) for upgrades and
changes in scope or other changes not already included within the intent of the Project
Program. City will provide CM@Risk with a Work Change Directive authorizing CM@Risk to
perform the additional work and to transfer funds from the Owner’s Contingency to the
Work Item Direct Costs category to be paid with such direct costs. These additional costs
will be in an amount mutually agreed upon by CM@Risk and City or will be documented by
CM@Risk on a time and materials basis and are subject to verification by City. Any amount
not used in the Owner’s Contingency will belong to the City and will reduce the GMP.
15.5
REDUCTION IN RETENTION
If the Contract Price is based upon a GMP, in order to receive payment of one-half of the
retention as set forth in Section 8.1.5 above, Contractor must also submit to the Project
Manager a complete accounting of the Actual Reimbursable Cost of the Work to date,
including all such documentation (including, without limitation, invoices, subcontract,
subcontractor change orders, purchase orders, records of payment, etc.) as City may require,
to establish whether the payments made to Contractor equal, exceed, or are less than the
actual reimbursable Cost of the Work to date. Any excess payments by City, as determined
by the Project Manager, will be deducted from the one-half retention payment to be made
to Contractor, and any additional excess amounts paid to Contractor will be refunded by
Contractor to City. The Project Manager’s determinations as to Actual Reimbursable Cost
of the Work will be the basis of payment until final Project Closeout and Final Payment
under the Contract.
15.6
FINAL PAYMENT
If the Contract Price is based upon a GMP, as a further condition precedent to Final Payment
by City, Contractor must submit to the Project Manager a complete final accounting of
the Actual Reimbursable Cost of the Work, including all such documentation (including,
without limitation, invoices, subcontracts, subcontractor change orders, purchase orders,
records of payment, etc.) as City may require, to establish whether the payments made to
Contractor equal, exceed, or are less than the Actual Reimbursable Cost of the Work to
date. Any excess payments by City, as determined by the Project Manager, will be deducted
from the one-half retention payment to be made to Contractor, and any additional excess
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-61 of 75
amounts paid to Contractor will be refunded by Contractor to City. Disputes relating to the
Final Cost of the Work will be subject to City’s audit rights under Sections 8.8 above and 15.7
below, and the dispute resolution process under Section 13 above.
15.7
OPEN BOOK
On any GMP-based or Cost-Based Contract, Job Order, or Change Order, City may attend
any and all meetings or discussions pertaining to the Project, including bid openings, and
must have access to all books, invoices, accounts, memoranda, correspondence, and
written communications or records of any kind pertaining to the Project, including without
limitation, those stored in electronic format.
15.8
DIFFERING SITE CONDITIONS AND/OR CHANGE IN LAWS
A Change Order for increased costs under Section 9.5 or 9.6 above will only be considered
or granted by City to the extent such actual, documented costs are justified.
SECTION 16 - PROVISIONS APPLICABLE SOLELY TO JOB ORDER CONTRACTS (JOC)
16.1
ADDITIONAL DEFINITIONS
The definitions set forth in Sections 2 and below will apply to all Job Order Contracts and
Job Orders. In addition, the definitions set forth in Section 15.1 above will apply to all Cost-
Based Job Orders.
Contract –
Includes the Job Order Master Agreement and Job Order Project Agreements issued and agreed to by City
and JOC Contractor.
JOC Contractor’s Coefficient –
A numerical factor that represents JOC Contractor total costs (indirect and direct costs, sales tax,
profit, etc.) and other adjustments for market conditions.
Job Order Request for Proposal (RFP) –
The Request for Proposals issued by City for each Job Order Project Agreement relating to a specific
Project.
Job Order Cost Proposal –
The Proposal submitted by JOC Contractor in response to a Job Order Request for Proposal (RFP) issued
by City to develop a Job Order Project Agreement for a specific Project.
Guaranteed Maximum Price (GMP) Job Order –
Job Order under which JOC Contractor is compensated for actual costs incurred.
Job Order Project Agreement (Job Order) –
The agreement for a specific project, as it may be modified by all Change Orders, executed by the
Parties, which incorporates the terms and conditions of the Job Order Master Agreement.
16.2
ORDERING AND PROCESSING PROCEDURES FOR JOB ORDERS
16.2.1
The process for developing and issuing a Job Order for a particular Project consists of three
(3) procedures: (1) issuance of a RFP by City; (2) JOC Contractor’s response to the RFP in the
form of JOC Contractor’s Job Order Cost Proposal; and (3) Issuance of a Job Order by City, as
set for below.
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-62 of 75
16.2.2
RFP’s For Job Orders
16.2.2.1
City will provide to JOC Contractor RFP with a Scope of Work (SOW) describing the Work to
be performed, which may include special instructions and conditions, material submittal
requirements, and, if applicable, a complete set of sketches, construction drawings and
specifications for the Job Order.
16.2.2.2
Some Job Order RFP’s will be issued by City without detailed sketches, drawing and
specifications and will rely on JOC Contractor to produce them for City review and approval
and is considered to be Pre-Construction and incidental design services included in JOC
Contractor’s overhead for GMP Job Orders. In addition JOC Contractor will not be
reimbursed for any Pre-Job Order costs, including proposal preparation, attendance during
negotiations, or site visits.
16.2.3
JOC Contractor’s Job Order Cost Proposal
16.2.3.1
JOC Contractor must respond within ten (10) calendar days of the RFP date or site visit,
whichever is later or as otherwise indicated on a case-by-case basis, by submitting JOC
Contractor’s Job Order Cost Proposal to the City representative.
16.2.3.2
Unless otherwise required under the terms of the RFP, JOC Contractor’s Job Order Cost
Proposal must include the following.
a. JOC Contractor’s Job Order Cost Proposal in PDF and electronic format;
b. A Project Schedule and schedule of values that reflects the costs of each work
element on the schedule. The schedule must show all milestones (e.g.,
permits, submittals, ordering materials, demolition, work phases, closeout
and completion date); and
c. Necessary documentation will be required to indicate that adequate scoping,
layout, setup and planning to accomplish the Work has been done.
Examples of documentation that might reasonably be expected include
sketches, drawings, calculations, catalog cuts and specifications produced
to a level of detail and skill that could be expected of experienced,
competent Project Managers with five or more periods experience in their
respective trade.
16.2.3.3
JOC Contractor must select Subcontractors based on qualifications alone or on a
combination of qualifications and price and must not select Subcontractors based on
price alone. A qualifications and price selection may be a one-step selection based on
a combination of qualifications and price or two-step selection. In a two-step selection,
the first step must be based on qualifications alone and the second step may be based or
a combination of qualifications and price or on price alone.
16.2.3.4
Upon request, JOC Contractor must provide City with copies of Subcontractor quotes and
the basis for selection of each Subcontractor.
16.2.3.5
If City objects to a selected Subcontractor, City will make the objection and the reasons for
the objection known to the JOC Contractor. JOC Contractor must then present an
acceptable Subcontractor for the applicable discipline. City will not unreasonably object
to or withhold approval of a Subcontractor.
16.2.3.6
For self-performed work, the City retains the right to have the JOC Contractor establish JOC
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-63 of 75
Contractor’s costs by bidding their costs against at least three (3) other interested trade
Contractors. No self- performed work will be allowed to be performed on a lump sum basis.
16.2.4
Issuance of Job Order
16.2.4.1
City Representative will compare the JOC Contractor’s Job Order Cost Proposal with the City’s
estimate,
schedules and other requirements, and then, if the City Representative
determines it is in the best interest of City, arrange a meeting with JOC Contractor, at which
time the JOC Contractor’s Job Order Cost Proposal will be discussed and negotiated.
16.2.4.2
If the City Representative determines that it is in the best interest of the City, City will then
issue a Job Order to JOC Contractor for execution.
16.2.4.3
Specific Job Orders may vary, but unless agreed to by City in writing otherwise, the content
of Job Orders under the Contract will generally be as follow, all of which will be signed
and/or initialed by JOC Contractor’s designated representative:
a. The description of the Scope of the Work and Project Schedule (attached as
Exhibit A to the Job Order);
b. The address or location of the Work;
c. The Contract Price for Work (Construction) included in the Project (attached
as Exhibit B to the Job Order);
d. The name of the JOC Contractor representative for the Project;
e. The Drawings and Specifications for the Project;
f.
If any shop drawings, project date and/or samples are required for the Job
Order, the date for delivery of each required item (included in the Project
Schedule, Exhibit A to the Job order); and
g. Project Specific Provisions, if any, in Exhibit A to the Job Order,
including, without limitation, whether any of the following are required:
Pre-Construction Conference, weekly progress meetings, field office,
storage enclosure, materials and equipment handling facility, submittals,
shop drawings, product data, equipment list, samples, project manual,
schedule of values, Construction progress schedule, narrative reports,
progress report, progress charts, progress photographs, materials status
report, Construction diagram, Construction status report, operation and
maintenance data, operating maintenance instructions and parts list, and
as-build drawings.
16.2.5
Job Order Intent. Each Job Order will be interpreted to include all items reasonably
necessary to complete the Project under that Job Order as described in the scope of the
Work in that Job Order. All Work must be performed in a professional manner and all
materials used must be new and of the highest quality and of the type best adapted to
their purpose, unless otherwise specified. The Notice to Proceed date, and the award date
established therein, will be deemed an integral part of the Job Order the same as if set forth
therein.
16.3
INCIDENTAL DESIGN SERVICES
16.3.1
This effort includes all “extensions of design” for systems that are typically specified in
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-64 of 75
a performance oriented manner by consultants and designers. Examples include: fire
sprinkler systems, fire alarm and sprinkler systems, DDC controls, control systems,
prefabricated metal building and similar situations. These designs are normally provided
under submittals as a shop drawing with engineering backup and as appropriate, seals of
registered engineers specializing in the particular system.
16.3.2
Incidental design includes all documents, sketches, schematic diagrams, floor plan
layouts, equipment schedules and other documents produced by the JOC Contractor to
define the work required for projects that the City does not develop formal or abbreviated
designs requiring a seal by a registered engineer. Incidental design does not include
preparation of designs requiring an architect or engineer seal.
16.3.3
JOC Contractor represents, covenants, and agrees, and contractually assumes the
obligation to furnish, all of the required Design Services through properly licensed and
experienced Design Professionals in complete accordance with all of the duties imposed
on a Design Professional under the Contract Documents, Laws, Regulations, or Legal
Requirements, and the common law.
16.3.4
All Design Documents (and all other Project-related documents, models, computer
drawings and other electronic expression, photographs and other expressions CADD, and
BIM files and images included) that JOC Contractor and/or JOC Contractor’s Design
Professional(s) prepare in connection with a Job Order and the copyrights therein
(collectively, the “Instruments of Service”) will be the property of City. JOC Contractor
covenants and agrees to execute any additional document reasonably requested by City
to confirm such assignment without any additional compensation.
16.4
CONSTRUCTION SERVICES
16.4.1
The following subsections of this Section 16.4 set forth requirements beyond those set forth
in Section 4 above which apply to Construction Services performed under a Job Order.
16.4.2
JOC Contractor must perform the Work using only those firms, team members and
individuals designated by JOC Contractor consistent with each Job Order or otherwise
approved by City pursuant to the General Conditions. No other entities or individuals may
be used without the prior written approval of the Project Manager.
16.4.3
Construction Phasing
16.4.3.1
City use of the facilities is anticipated while the Work is being performed. The Work must
be planned and accomplished so that there will be a minimum of interference and
inconvenience to occupants in the building and agencies in the vicinity and to other
craftsmen who may have to do work in the affected facilities. Any blockage of building
exits or driveways must be coordinated in advance.
16.4.3.2
If applicable, furniture, portable office equipment and wall appurtenances not rigidly
fastened to the walls must be moved by JOC Contractor, protected from damage and
replaced to the original position upon completion of the work. If the work required by
the Job Order will not allow furniture and portable office equipment to be replaced to its
original position, new locations will be designated by City. Incidental costs associated with
moving one-piece furnishings up to approximately 150 pounds to perform such tasks as
painting, carpet or tile replacement, etc., are considered a general cost of building
renovation and must be included in the JOC Contractor’s Coefficient. Costs for large scale
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-65 of 75
or wholesale removal and replacement of large quantities of
desks or modular
workstations, copiers, multiple full file cabinets, etc. to another location or storage outside
the work space, or disassembly and reassembly of modular furniture is not considered
part of the JOC Contractor’s Coefficient and will be priced separately.
16.4.3.3
The work must, so far as practicable, be done in definite sections or divisions and confined
to limited areas which must be completed before work in other sections or divisions are
begun.
16.4.4
Work Site Conflicts. In the event of a conflict between JOC Contractor and others in an
occupied facility or where other Contractors are performing work on the same facility
under other Contracts, City will decide to dispute and that decision will be final.
16.4.5
Ownership of Work Product. Work Product prepared or otherwise created in connection
with the performance of this Contract, including the Work, are to be and remain the
property of City. For purposes of this provision, “Work Product” will include all designs,
drawings, plans, specifications, ideas, renderings and other information or matter, in
whatever form created (e.g., electronic or printed) and in all media now known or
hereinafter created. All Work Product will be considered Work Made for Hire as defined
in the United States Copyright Act 17 U.S.C. §101 (Copyright Act). If for any reason any such
Work is found not to be a work for hire, JOC Contractor hereby transfers and assigns
ownership of the copyright in such Work to City. The rights in this Section are exclusive to
City in perpetuity.
16.5
OPTIONAL LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
16.5.1
Specific Job Orders. City will have the right to assess liquidated damages in relation to
any specific JOC Project Agreement as set forth below.
16.5.2
Substantial Completion Liquidated Damages. JOC Contractor acknowledges and agrees
that if JOC Contractor fails to obtain Substantial Completion of the Work within the Contract
Time, City will sustain extensive damages and serious loss as a result of such failure. The
exact amount of such damages will be extremely difficult to ascertain. Therefore, City and
JOC Contractor agree that if JOC Contractor fails to achieve Substantial Completion of the
Work within the Contract Time, City will be entitled to retain or recover from JOC
Contractor, as liquidated damages and not as a penalty, the sum per calendar day as
indicated in MAG § 108.9.
16.5.3
Final Acceptance Liquidated Damages. For the same reasons set forth in Section 16.5.2
above, City and JOC Contractor further agree that if JOC Contractor fails to achieve Final
Acceptance of the Work within the Contract Time, City will be entitled to retain or recover
from JOC Contractor, as liquidated damages and not as a penalty, the sum per calendar
day as indicated in MAG § 108.9 commencing from the actual date of Substantial
Completion or Final Acceptance as required under any specific JOC Project Agreement.
16.5.4
MAG Liquidated Damages. Liquidated damages provisions in MAG § 108.9 may apply to any
specific JOC Project Agreement.
16.5.5
City may deduct liquidated damages assessed pursuant to this Section 16.5 from any
unpaid amounts then or thereafter due JOC Contractor under the Contract or any specific
JOC Project Agreement between JOC Contractor and City. Any liquidated damages not so
deducted from any unpaid amounts due JOC Contractor must be payable to City at the
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-66 of 75
demand of City, together with interest from the date of the demand at the highest lawful
rate of interest payable to JOC Contractor.
16.6
PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT
16.6.1
Performance Assessment. After the Final Acceptance of Work under each Job Order, City
will complete a written evaluation of the performance of JOC Contractor on the Job Order.
16.6.2
Consideration in Assignment of Work. JOC Contractor’s record of cost, schedule and
quality performance and comparative assessments will be significant considerations in
City’s determination whether to award future Job Orders. JOC Contractor agrees that any
determination by City not to not award future Job Orders or Option periods based on
performance will be at the sole discretion of City.
SECTION 17 - PROVISIONS APPLICABLE SOLELY TO PRE-CONSTRUCTION SERVICES FOR
CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AT RISK
17.1
ADDITIONAL DEFINITIONS
The definitions set forth in Section 2 and 15.1 above will apply to all Pre-Construction
Services Contracts.
17.2
GENERAL
17.2.1
CM@Risk must perform the Services required by, and in accordance with the Contract
Documents and as outlined in Exhibit A of the Contract to the satisfaction of the
Project Manager, exercising the degree of care, skill, diligence and judgment a professional
construction manager experienced in the performance of such services for construction
and/or facilities of similar scope, function, size, quality, complexity and detail to the
Project in urban areas throughout the United States, would exercise at such time, under
similar conditions. CM@Risk must, at all times, perform the required services consistent
with sound and generally accepted engineering principles and construction management
and construction contracting practices.
17.2.2
As a participating member of the Project Team, CM@Risk must provide to City and Design
Professional a written evaluation of City’s Project Program and budget, each in terms of
the other, with recommendations as to the appropriateness of each. CM@Risk must
prepare a Baseline Cost Model that validates City’s budget. The Baseline Cost Model must
include all assumptions and basis of estimates in enough detail so that the Project Team
can compare future detail estimates to the Baseline Cost model for variances. City and
Design Professional will provide all the reasonably required data that is available in
order to reach agreement between the team members that the Baseline Cost Model is an
accurate projection of the costs of the Project.
17.2.3
CM@Risk must attend Project Team meetings, which may include, but are not limited to,
bi- weekly Project management meetings, Project workshops, special Project meetings,
construction document rolling reviews, public meetings and partnering sessions. CM@Risk
attendance at design or other meetings in which CM@Risk is provided the opportunity but
does not actively participate and/or is not properly prepared is not acceptable. Repeated
instances of non-participation and/or lack of preparedness will be grounds for termination
of CM@Risk Contract for default.
17.2.4
CM@Risk must provide Pre-Construction Services, described herein, in a timely manner
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-67 of 75
and consistent with the intent of the most current Drawings and Specifications. CM@Risk
must promptly notify City in writing whenever CM@Risk determines any Drawings or
Specifications are inappropriate for the Project and/or cause changes in the scope of Work
that deviates more than the allowed contingencies within the Baseline Cost Model or
requires an adjustment in the Baseline Cost Model, Detailed Cost Estimate, Detailed
Project Schedule, GMP Proposals and/or in the Contract Time for the Work, to the extent
such as established.
17.2.5
CM@Risk when requested by City, must attend, make presentations and participate as may
be appropriate in public agency and or community meetings, relevant to the Project.
CM@Risk must provide drawings, schedule diagrams, budget charges and other materials
describing the Project when their use is required or appropriate in any such public agency
meetings.
17.2.6
Ownership of Work Product. All Work Product prepared or otherwise created in connection
with the performance of this Contract, including the Work, are to be and remain the property
of City. For purposes of this provision, “Work Product” will include all designs, drawings,
plans, specifications, ideas, renderings and other information or material, in whatever
form created (e.g., electronic or printed) and in all media now know or hereinafter created.
All Work Product will be considered Work Made for Hire as defined in the United States
Copyright Act 17 U.S.C.
§101 (Copyright Act). If for any reason any such Work is found not to be a work for
hire, Contractor hereby transfers and assigns ownership of the copyright in such Work to
City. The rights in this Section are exclusive to City in perpetuity.
17.2.7
CM@Risk represents to City in completing Pre-Construction Services and providing the
reports
and analysis required thereunder, that Work can be properly and timely
constructed within the GMP Proposal, if accepted. CM@Risk does not assume any design
responsibilities unless specifically called for in the scope of work, but CM@Risk will be
responsible for their errors, omissions or inconsistencies included in the Work.
17.3
DETAILED PROJECT SCHEDULE
17.3.1
The fundamental purpose of the Detailed Project Schedule is to identify, coordinate and
record the tasks and activities to be performed by all of the Project Team members and
then for the Project Team to utilize that Deliverable as a basis for managing and
monitoring all member’s compliance with the schedule requirements of the Project.
Each Project Team member is responsible for its compliance with the Detailed Project
Schedule requirements. CM@Risk must, however, develop and maintain the Detailed
Project Schedule on behalf of and to be used by the Project Team based on input from the
other Project Team members. The Baseline Project Schedule must be developed as part
of the Baseline Cost Model. The Detailed Project Schedule must use the Critical Path
method (“CPM”) technique, unless required otherwise, in writing by City. CM@Risk must
use scheduling software acceptable to City to develop the Detailed Project Schedule.
The Detailed Project Schedule must be presented in graphical and tabular reports as
agreed upon by the Project Team. If Project phasing as described below is required, the
Detailed Project Schedule must indicate milestone dates for the phases once
determined. As part of construction phase, City may require CM@Risk to prepare a
“resource loaded” schedule for all work, including work performed by Subcontractors,
detailing each of the project tasks and the required/anticipated number of personnel per
day for each task. CM@Risk must also indicate on the schedule its ability to meet said
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-68 of 75
required/anticipated personnel requirements.
17.3.2
CM@Risk must include and integrate in the Detailed Project Schedule the services and
activities required of City, Design Professional and CM@Risk including all construction
phase activities based on the input received from City and the Design Professional.
The Detailed Project Schedule must define activities as determined by City to the extent
required to show: (a) the coordination between preliminary design and various pre-
construction documents, (b) any separate long-lead procurements, (c) any permitting
issues, (d) any land, right-of-way, or easement acquisition, (e) bid packaging strategy and
awards to Subcontractors and Suppliers, (f) major stages of construction, (g) start-up and
commissioning, and (h) occupancy of the completed Work by City. The Detailed Project
Schedule must include by example and not limitation, proposed activity sequences and
durations for design, procurement, construction and testing activities, milestone dates for
actions and decisions by the Project Team, preparation and processing of shop drawings
and samples, delivery of materials or equipment requiring long-lead time procurement (if
any), milestone dates for various construction phases, Total Float for all activities to the
extent authorized by City, relationships between the activities,
City’s occupancy
requirements showing portions of the Project having occupancy priority, and proposed
dates for Final Acceptance.
17.3.3
A Baseline Project Schedule must be initiated with the project Baseline Cost Model and
agreed to by the project team at the same time. CM@Risk must update and maintain a
detailed Project Schedule throughout pre-construction such that it will not require major
changes at the start of the construction phase to incorporate CM@Risk’s plan for the
performance of the construction phase Work. CM@Risk must provide updates and/or
revisions to the Detailed Project Schedule for use by the Project Team, whenever required,
but no less often than at the Project Team meetings. CM@Risk must include with such
submittals a narrative describing its analysis of the progress achieved to-date vs. the
Baseline Project Schedule, including any concerns regarding delays or potential delays, and
any recommendations regarding mitigating actions.
17.3.4
If phased construction is deemed appropriate at the time of developing the Baseline Cost
Model or during the development of the Detailed Project Schedule, and City approves,
CM@Risk must review the design and make recommendations regarding the phased
issuance of Construction Documents to facilitate phased construction of the Work, with
the objective of reducing the Project Schedule and/or Cost of the Work. CM@Risk must take
into consideration such factors as natural and practical lines of work severability,
sequencing effectiveness, access and availability constraints, total time for completion,
construction market conditions, labor and materials availability, and any other factors
pertinent to saving time and cost.
17.3.5
Long Lead Time Items. As part of developing the Detailed Project Schedule, CM@Risk must
identify all long lead time materials, fabrications, equipment, or other items which may
impact the Project Schedule and may require early action on the part of the Project Team.
Dates for selecting and ordering long lead time items will be included and highlighted
in the Detailed Project Schedule
17.3.6
Equipment Plan. Contractor must develop an Equipment Plan that addresses all rental
and owned equipment, regardless of whether such equipment will be provided by
CM@Risk or subcontractor(s), that will be necessary to construct the Project and the cost
of which will be included as a Cost of the Work in the GMP Proposal. The Equipment Plan
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-69 of 75
will seek to minimize the cost of the equipment to City and maximize the efficient and
coordinated use of the equipment for completion of the Project. The Equipment Plan will
not only include the costs and allowable lease rates for the equipment, but will also include
an equipment schedule that will be incorporated into the Detailed Project Schedule and the
Schedule of Values submitted with the GMP Proposal.
17.4
DESIGN DOCUMENT REVIEWS
17.4.1
CM@Risk must evaluate periodically the availability of labor, materials/equipment, cost-
sensitive aspects of the design; and other factors that may create an unacceptable variance
to the Baseline Cost Model and/or Baseline Project Schedule.
17.4.2
CM@Risk must recommend, in conjunction with the Project Team, those additional surface
and subsurface investigations that, in its professional opinion, are required to provide the
necessary
information for CM@Risk to construct the Project.
These additional
investigations, if agreed to be necessary by the Project Manager and the Design
Professional, will be acquired by City and copies of the reports will be provided to CM@Risk.
17.4.3
CM@Risk must meet with the Project Team as required to review designs during their
development. CM@Risk must familiarize itself with the evolving documents through
pre-
construction. CM@Risk must proactively advise the Project Team and make
recommendations on factors related to construction costs, and concerns pertaining to the
feasibility and practicality
of any proposed means and methods, selected materials,
equipment and building systems, and, labor and material availability. CM@Risk must
furthermore advise the Project Team on proposed site improvements, excavation and
foundation considerations, as well as, concerns that exist with respect to coordination of
the Drawings and Specifications. CM@Risk must use established value analysis principles
in recommending cost effective alternatives.
17.4.4
CM@Risk must routinely conduct constructability and bid-ability reviews of the Drawings
and Specifications as necessary to satisfy the needs of the Project Team. The reviews must
attempt to identify all discrepancies and inconsistencies in the Construction Documents
especially those related to clarity, consistency, completeness and coordination of Work of
Subcontractors and Suppliers.
17.4.4.1
CM@Risk must evaluate whether: (a) the Drawings and Specifications are configured to
enable efficient construction; (b) design elements are standardized; (c) construction
efficiency
is
properly
considered
in
the
Drawings
and
Specifications;
(d)
module/preassembly design is prepared to facilitate fabrication, transport and installation;
(e) sequences of Work required by or inferable from the Drawings and Specifications are
practicable; (f) the design has taken into consideration efficiency issues concerning access
and entrance to the site, laydown and storage
of materials, staging of site facilities,
construction parking, and other similar pertinent issues; and (g) the design maintains
continued operation of the existing City systems and maintains traffic on adjacent
roadways. CM@Risk must also review the Drawings and Specifications to ensure that what
is depicted therein can be constructed as designed and must promptly inform the Project
Team of any issues.
17.4.4.2
CM@Risk must check cross-reference and complementary Drawings and sections within
the Specifications and in general evaluate whether: (a) the Drawings and Specifications
are sufficiently clear and detailed to minimize ambiguity and to reduce scope interpretation
discrepancies; (b) named materials and equipment are commercially available and are
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-70 of 75
performing well, or otherwise, in similar installations; (c) Specifications include alternatives
in the event a requirement cannot be met in the field; and (d) in its professional opinion, the
Project is likely to be subject to Differing Site Conditions.
17.4.4.3
The results of the reviews must be provided to Project Team in formal, written reports
clearly
identifying all reviewed documents and the discovered discrepancies and
inconsistencies in the Drawings and Specifications with notations and recommendations
made on the Drawings, Specifications and other documents. CM@Risk must meet with
Project Team to discuss any findings and review reports.
17.4.4.4
CM@Risk’s reviews must be from a Contractor’s perspective, and though it will serve to
eliminate/reduce the number of RFIs) and changes during the construction phase,
responsibility for the Drawings and Specifications will remain with the Design Professional
and not CM@Risk.
17.4.5
It is CM@Risk’s responsibility to assist the Design Professional in ascertaining that, in
CM@Risk’s professional opinion, the Construction Documents are in accordance with
applicable Laws, Regulations, or Legal Requirements, building codes, sound engineering
principle’s rules and regulations. If CM@Risk recognizes that portions of the Construction
Documents are at variance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes,
sound engineering principle’s rules and regulations, it must promptly notify the Project Team
in writing, describing the apparent variance of deficiency. However, the Design Professional
is ultimately responsible for the compliance of the Drawings and Specifications with those
laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, rules and regulations.
17.4.6
The Project Team will routinely identify and evaluate using value analysis principles and
alternate systems, approaches, design changes that have the potential to reduce Project
costs while still delivering a high quality and fully functional Project consistent with
the Project Program. If the Project Team agrees, CM@Risk in cooperation with the Design
Professional, will perform a cost/benefit analysis of the alternatives and submit such in
writing to the Project Team. City, through the Project Manager, will direct which alternatives
will be incorporated into the Project. The Design Professional will have full design
responsibility for the review and incorporation of CM@Risk suggested alternatives into
the Drawings and Specifications. CM@Risk must analyze the costs and schedule impacts of
the alternatives against the Baseline
Cost Model and Schedule and provide a
recommendation for the Project Team’s consideration and City’s approval prior to the
establishment of the GMP.
17.5
BASELINE COSTS MODEL, DETAILED COST ESTIMATES, AND SCHEDULE OF VALUES
17.5.1
At the conclusion of the Master Planning and Programming, if required, CM@Risk will
review all available information regarding the design and scope of the Project using
CM@Risk’s experience in performing similar work, knowledge of similar projects and
current and projected construction costs and, based upon that review, must develop a
Baseline Cost Model for review by the Project Team and approval by City. Once approved
by City, the Baseline Cost Model will be continually referenced as detailed estimates are
created as the design progresses throughout Pre-Construction until the final GMP for the
entire Project is established. A final GMP for the entire Project must be established and
approved by City prior to the start of construction. It is the responsibility of CM@Risk
to ensure City has sufficient information to evaluate and approve a final GMP prior to
the time necessary to start construction so construction can be completed within the
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-71 of 75
Contract Time. The Project Detailed Cost Estimate will be the best representation from
CM@Risk of what the complete functional Project’s construction costs will be as indicated
by the most current available documents and will be constantly checked against the
Baseline Cost Model. CM@Risk must communicate to the Project Team and assumptions
made in preparing the Baseline Cost Model. The Baseline Cost
Model must support
CM@Risk’s Detailed Cost Estimates and may be broken down initially as dictated by the
available information, as required by City.
17.5.2
After receipt of the Design Professional’s most current documents from certain specified
pre- construction milestones, CM@Risk must provide a draft Detailed Cost Estimate
including a detailed written report detailing any variances to the Baseline Cost Model and
Baseline Project Schedule. The Design Professional and CM@Risk will reconcile any
disagreements on the estimate to arrive at an agreed upon Detailed Cost Estimate for the
construction costs based on the scope of the Project through that specified pre-
construction milestone. Pre-Construction milestones applicable to this paragraph are:
Master Planning and Programming, Schematic Design, 50% Design Development, 100%
Design Development, and 50% Construction Drawings, If no consensus is reached, City will
make the final determination. If the Project Team requires additional updates of the
Detailed Cost Estimate beyond that specified in this paragraph, CM@Risk must provide the
requested information in a timely manner.
17.5.3
If at any point the Detailed Cost Estimate submitted to City exceeds the previously
accepted Baseline Cost Model or previously approved Detailed Cost Estimate agreed to as
set forth in Section 17.5.2 above, CM@Risk must make appropriate recommendations to
project Team on means/methods, materials, and or other design elements that it
believes will reduce the estimated construction costs, such that it is equal to or less than
the established Project Team’s Baseline Cost Model.
17.5.4
Unless other levels of completion are agreed to in writing in the Construction Documents,
at 50% Construction Drawings and included with the associated report, CM@Risk must
also submit to the Project Team for review and approval a Schedule of Values that complies
with the following requirements. The Schedule of Values must be based on City standard
bid schedule and highlight significant variances from any previously submitted Schedule
of Values. The Schedule of Values must be directly related to the breakdowns reflected in
the Detailed Project Schedule and CM@Risk’s Detailed Cost Estimate. In addition, the
Schedule of Values must: (a) detail unit prices and quantity take-offs, (b) detail all other
contingencies and unit price Work shown and specified in the detailed design documents.
17.5.5
CM@Risk is to track, estimate/price and address the Project Team’s overall project cost issues
that arise outside of the Baseline Cost Model and the latest approved Detailed Cost
Estimate such as: City generated changes, Project Team proposed changes, alternate
system analysis, constructability items and value engineering analysis. The system used
to implement this process will be referred to as the Design Evolution Log. This is to be
addressed between the Baseline Cost Model and the Master Planning and Programming
Detailed Cost Estimate, and then (unless other levels of completion are agreed to in writing
in the Construction Documents) between the Detailed Cost Estimates for each of the pre-
construction milestones thereafter, Schematic Design, 50% Design Development, 100%
Design Development, and 50% Construction Documents, and the bid packages for all
Phases.
17.5.6
Upon request by City, CM@Risk must submit to City a cash flow projection for the Project
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-72 of 75
based on the current updated/revised Detailed Project Schedule and the anticipated level of
payments for CM@Risk during the design and construction phases. In addition, if requested
by City and based on information provided by City, CM@Risk must prepare a cash flow
projection for the entire Project based on historical records for similar types of projects
to assist City in the financing process.
17.5.7
Construction Water. CM@Risk must estimate the quantity of water to be used and include
the cost thereof in each Detailed Cost Estimate and GMP Proposal provided by City.
17.6
SUBCONTRACTOR AND MAJOR SUPPLIER SELECTIONS
17.6.1
There are two ways to select Subcontractors and major Suppliers prior to submission of a
GMP Proposal: (1) qualifications-based selection; or (2) a combination of qualifications
and price. Except as noted below, the selection of Subcontractors/Suppliers is the sole
responsibility of CM@Risk. In any case, CM@Risk is solely responsible for the performance
of the selected Subcontractors/Suppliers, and for compliance with the requirements of
Title 34 of the Arizona Revised Statutes in the selection of a Subcontractors/Suppliers,
to the extent applicable. CM@Risk must comply with its Subcontractor Selection Plan
submitted with its Statement of Qualifications.
17.6.2
City may approve the selection of a Subcontractor(s) or Suppliers(s) based only on their
qualifications when CM@Risk can demonstrate it is in the best interest of the Project. All
Work that is performed, after such a qualifications-based selection, for a price that is
negotiated by CM@Risk will be billed in accordance with the GMP for actual costs and may
be subject to audit by City.
17.6.2.1
Qualifications based selection of a Subcontractor(s)/Supplier(s) should only occur prior to
the submittal of the GMP Proposal.
17.6.2.2
If a Subcontractor/Supplier selection plan was submitted and agreed to by City, CM@Risk
must apply the plan in the evaluation of the qualifications of a Subcontractor(s) or
Supplier(s) and provide City with its review and recommendations.
17.6.2.3
CM@Risk must receive written City approval for each selected Subcontractor(s) and
Supplier(s).
17.6.2.4
CM@Risk must negotiate costs for services/supplies from each Subcontractor/Supplier
selected under this method.
17.6.3
All Work must be competitively bid unless a Subcontractor or Supplier was selected pursuant
to Section 17.6.2 above.
17.6.3.1
CM@Risk must develop Subcontractor and Supplier interest, submit the names of a
minimum of three qualified Subcontractors or Suppliers for each trade in the Project for
approval by City and solicit bids for the various Work categories. If there are not three
qualified Subcontractors/Suppliers available for a specific trade or there are extenuating
circumstances warranting such, CM@Risk may request approval by City to submit less
than three names. Without prior written notice to City, no change in the recommended
Subcontractors/Supplies will be allowed.
17.6.3.2
If City objects to any nominated Subcontractor/Supplier or to any self-performed Work for
good
reason, CM@Risk must nominate a substitute Subcontractor/Supplier that is
acceptable to City.
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-73 of 75
17.6.3.3
CM@Risk must distribute Drawings and Specifications, and when appropriate, conduct a
Pre- Bid Conference with prospective Subcontractors and Suppliers.
17.6.3.4
If CM@Risk desires to self-perform certain portions of the Work, it must request to be one of
the approved Subcontractor bidders for those specific bid packages. CM@Risk’s bid will
be evaluated in accordance with the process identified below. If events warrant and City
concurs that it is necessary in order to ensure compliance with the Project Schedule
and/or the most recent Detailed Cost Estimate, CM@Risk may be authorized to self-
perform Work without bidding or rebidding the Work. When CM@Risk self-performs work
without bidding, only the actual costs associated with performing the Work in accordance
with the approved GMP will be billed and may be subject to audit by City.
17.6.3.5
CM@Risk must receive, open, record and evaluate the bids; provided, however, that if
CM@Risk or one of its affiliates is bidding to self-perform the Work that is the subject of the
bid, then the bids must be received, opened, recorded and evaluated by Project Manager
instead of CM@Risk. Bids for each category of Work must be opened and recorded at a
pre-determined time. The apparent low bidders must be interviewed to determine the
responsiveness of their proposals. In evaluating the responsiveness of bid proposals
CM@Risk, in addition to bid price, may consider the following factors: past performance
on similar projects, qualifications and
experience of personnel assigned, quality
management plan, approach or understanding of the
Work to be performed, and
performance
schedule
to
complete
the
Work.
The
final
evaluation
of
Subcontractor/Supplier bids must be done with Project Manager in attendance to observe
and witness the process. CM@Risk must resolve any Subcontractor/Supplier bid withdrawal,
protest or disqualification in connection with the award at no increase in the Cost of Work.
17.6.4
CM@Risk will be required to prepare two different reports on the subcontracting process.
17.6.4.1
Within fifteen days after each major Subcontractor/Supplier bid opening process;
CM@Risk must prepare a report for City’s review and approval identifying the
recommended Subcontractors/Supplier for each category of Work. The report must detail:
(a) the name of the recommended Subcontractor/Supplier and the amount of the
Subcontractor/Supplier bid for each sub-agreement; (b) the sum of all recommended
Subcontractor/Supplier bids received; (c) and trade work and its cost that CM@Risk intends
to self-perform, if any.
17.6.4.2
Upon completion of the Subcontractor/Supplier bidding process, CM@Risk must submit
a summary report to City of the entire Subcontractor/Supplier selection process. The report
must indicate, by bid process, all Subcontractors/Suppliers contacted to determine
interest, the Subcontractors/Suppliers solicited, the bids received and costs negotiated,
and the recommended Subcontractors/Suppliers for each category of Work.
17.6.5
The approved Subcontractors/Suppliers will provide a Schedule of Values with their bid
proposals, which will be used to create the overall Project Schedule of Values.
17.6.6
If after receipt of sub-bids or after award to Subcontractors and Suppliers, City objects to
any nominated Subcontractor/Supplier or to any self-performed Work without any
reasonable basis, CM@Risk must nominate a substitute Subcontractor or Supplier,
preferably if such option is still available, from those who submitted Subcontractor bids
for the Work affected. Once such substitute Subcontractors and Suppliers are consented
to by City, CM@Risk’s proposed GMP for the Work or portion thereof must be
correspondingly adjusted to reflect any higher or lower costs form any such substitution.
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-74 of 75
17.7
GMP PROPOSAL
17.7.1
When a GMP Proposal is submitted for a phase of the Work, the GMP will have a Detailed Cost
Estimate of the Costs of the Work (as set forth in Section 15.2) in each phase of the Work
that is being proposed plus the current estimate for all other Work. City will not approve
the GMP for the phase of work without a total estimate for the complete Project. City may
request a GMP Proposal for all or any portion of the Project and at any time during pre-
construction. Any GMP Proposals submitted by CM@Risk must be based on and consistent
with Baseline Cost Model and the current update/revised Detailed Cost Estimate at the
time of the request and include any clarifications or assumptions upon which the GMP
Proposal(s) are based.
17.7.2
A GMP Proposal for the entire Project will be the sum of the Cost of the Work, CM@Risk Fee,
and General Conditions Cost. CM@Risk guarantees to complete the Project at or less than
the final GMP Proposal amount plus approved Change Orders. CM@Risk will be responsible
for any costs for expenses that would cause the Cost of the Work actually incurred,
including the Construction Fee and General Conditions Costs, to exceed the GMP.
17.7.3
CM@Risk must prepare its GMP Proposal in accordance with City’s request for GMP Proposal
requirements based on the most current completed Drawings and Specifications at that
time, which unless otherwise directed by City in writing, will be at 100% Construction
Drawings. CM@Risk must mark the face of each document of each set upon which its GMP
Proposal is based.
These documents must be identified as the GMP Plans and
Specifications. CM@Risk must send one set of those documents to the Project Manager,
keep one set and return the third set to the Design Professional.
17.7.4
An updated/revised Detailed Project Schedule, Equipment Plan, and Schedule of Values
must be included in any GMP Proposal(s), all of which must reflect the GMP Plans and
Specifications the Detailed Project Schedule must be shown in relationship to the Project
Schedule and identify any variance to the Baseline Project Schedule. Any such Detailed
Project Schedule updates/revisions must continue to comply with the requirements of
Section 17.3.1 through 17.3.5.
17.7.5
GMP Proposals(s) Review and Approval
17.7.5.1
CM@Risk must meet with the Project Team to review the GMP Proposal(s) and the written
statement of its basis. In the event the Project Team discovers inconsistencies or
inaccuracies
in the information presented, CM@Risk must make adjustments as
necessary to the GMP Proposal.
17.7.5.2
If during the review and negotiation of GMP Proposals design changes are required, City
may authorize and cause the Design Professional to revise the GMP Plans and Specifications
to the extent necessary to reflect the agreed-upon assumptions and clarifications contained
in the final approved GMP Proposal. Such revised GMP Plans and Specification will be
furnished to CM@Risk. CM@Risk must promptly notify the Project Team in writing if any
such revised
GMP Plans and Specifications are inconsistent with the agreed upon
assumptions and clarifications.
17.7.6
All portions of or items comprising the GMP Proposal are subject to audit by City, as
deemed appropriate by City, including, without limitation, any based upon unit prices or
Work to be self- performed by CM@Risk, or its affiliates.
General Conditions
Revised: 1/22/2021
GC-75 of 75
17.8
PAYMENT PROCEDURE FOR PRE-CONSTRUCTION SERVICES
17.8.1
Requests for monthly payments by CM@Risk for Pre-Construction Services must be
submitted monthly and must be accompanied by a progress report, detailed invoices
and receipts, if applicable. Any requests for payment must include, as a minimum, a
narrative description of the tasks accomplished during the billing period, a listing of any
Deliverables submitted, and copies of any Subconsultants’ requests for payment, plus
similar narrative and listings of Deliverables associated with their Work. Payment for
services negotiated as a lump sum will be made in accordance with the percentage of work
completed during the preceding month.
17.8.2
In no event will City pay more than seventy-five (75%) of the Contract Price until acceptance
of ALL Pre-Construction Services and award of the final approved Construction Services
Contract for the entire Project by City Council. If CM@Risk does not prepare a GMP
Proposal that is acceptable to City, or the GMP Proposal exceeds the City’s Construction
Budget, then CM@Risk understands and acknowledges that it will forfeit any right to
receive the 25% of the Contract Price being retained by City.
17.8.3
CM@Risk agrees that no charges or claims for costs or damages of any type will be made by
it for any delays or hindrances beyond the reasonable control of City during the progress of
any portion of Pre-Construction Services specified in this Contract. Such delays or
hindrances, if
any, will be solely compensated for by an extension of time for such
reasonable period and may be mutually agreed between the parties. It is understood
and agreed, however, that permitting CM@Risk to proceed to complete any such Services,
in whole or in part after the date to which the time of completion may have been extended,
will in no way act as a waiver on the part of City of any of their respective legal rights herein.
17.8.4
No compensation to CM@Risk will be allowed contrary to Article I, Chapter I, Title 34 of the
Arizona Revised Statutes.
17.8.5
If any service(s) executed by CM@Risk is abandoned or suspended in whole or in part, for
a period of more than 180 days through no fault of CM@Risk, CM@Risk is to be paid for
the services performed prior to the abandonment or suspension.
17.9
SURVIVAL OF THE DESIGN SERVICES CONTRACT, DUTIES, OBLIGATIONS AND
WARRANTIES
If the GMP Proposal is accepted by City and a Construction Contract is entered into
between City and CM@Risk, the duties, obligations and warranties of CM@Risk under the
Pre- Construction Services Contract survive and are incorporated into the resulting
Construction Contract.
App’d 1/8/21
APP-1 of 33
General Conditions Appendices
SECTION 15 – APPENDICES
The following Appendices attached hereto are referenced in the General Conditions and
are incorporated herein.
Appendix 1 – Policy Statement for Calculating Delays and Damages
Appendix 2 – Cost Reduction Incentive Proposals for Design Bid Build Contracts
Appendix 3 – Contractor’s Affidavit Regarding Settlement of Claims
Appendix 4 – Forms of Performance Bond
Appendix 5 – Forms of Payment Bond
Appendix 6 – Dispute Resolution
Appendix 7 – Certificate of Completion
Appendix 8 – Construction Sign Detail
Appendix 9 – Cost of the Work (Applicable solely to Construction Manager at Risk and
Job Order Contracting)
Appendix 10 Landscape Establishment Period
App’d 1/8/21
APP-2 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 1
CALCULATING DELAYS AND DAMAGES
The purpose of this policy statement is to establish guidelines and procedures for negotiation
between the Contractor and City of Chandler relating to compensation for delays pursuant to
Arizona Revised Statutes (A.R.S.) 34-221(F). This policy statement contains notice requirements in
addition to those set forth in the Contractor Documents, and will be the Contract Provision
contemplated by that statute.
NOTE: As used herein, the term “Engineer” will refer to the City of Chandler City Engineer or
his/her designated representative. Nothing in this Policy Statement will be construed to void any
provision in the Contract which requires timely notice of delays or provides for arbitration or
any other procedure for settlement or provides for liquidated damages.
I.
TYPES OF DELAYS:
For the purposes of this document, there are essentially four types of delays encountered by
City of Chandler Construction Contractors; excusable/compensable, excusable/non-
compensable, non- excusable, and concurrent. Only delays that extend Contract
Completion Time set forth in the Contract Document will be considered for issues
relating to Contract extensions or additional compensation. All other delays are
considered to be activity delays and do not entitle the Contractor to either time
extensions or additional compensation. Contract Completion Time will be defined as the
date set forth in Maricopa Association of Governments (MAG) Uniform Standard Specification
Section 101 and as may be modified by the Contract Documents.
A.
Excusable/Compensable:
These are delays caused solely by the City’s actions or inactions, are unreasonable
under the circumstances, and which were not within the contemplation of the
parties to the Contract at or prior to the time of execution of the Contract.
Since the Contractor presumably has no control over the events causing the delay,
he may be entitled to both contract time extensions and additional compensation for
delay damages. Further, he/she may be entitled to additional compensation from
the impact of that delay on other work. Examples of excusable/compensable (E/C)
delays include: failure to properly locate an underground City-owned utility within
2 feet of the actual location; failure to relocate City-owned utilities far enough in
advance of construction in an area where the Contractor is scheduled to work
that it delays start or completion of the Contractor’s regularly scheduled work;
failure to provide City-furnished equipment or materials in a timely manner if
required by the Contract; failure to acquire necessary Right-of-Way or Public Utility
Easements prior to the Contractor beginning Work in the area; failure to timely return
Shop Drawings or other Contract Submittals in accordance with the Contract;
unreasonable delay by the City in making decisions which affect critical activities;
surveying errors when the City is contractually responsible for providing Project
Surveying. This list is not meant to be all inclusive, but is intended merely as examples
of the type of City action or inaction which can result in a Contractor’s claim for
additional time and compensation.
App’d 1/8/21
APP-3 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 1
B.
Excusable/Non-compensable:
These are delays over which neither the City nor the Contractor had control. Since
both parties to the Contract have been potentially damaged by the delay, but
neither have caused it, only Time Extensions are warranted. Examples of excusable,
non-compensable (E/N) delays include: unusually severe weather; fire; acts of God;
failure of non-City owned utilities (SRP, CenturyLink, Cable TV, Southern Pacific
Railroad, and Southwest Gas, etc.) to properly or timely locate accurately; failure of
non-City owned utilities to relocate in advance of construction; the voluntary or
involuntary filing for Bankruptcy protection by a Supplier or Subcontractor which
causes the Supplier/Subcontractor to fail to meet a contractual deadline provided
the Contractor can provide documentation that he/she executed the required
Purchase Orders/Subcontract Agreements and received delivery schedules which,
if met, would have eliminated the delay; delays as a result of an incomplete
shutdown of a City or non-City owned utility main (the City does not guarantee a
complete shutdown). This list also is not necessarily all inclusive but merely
indicative of type and class of E/N delays.
C.
Non-excusable/Non-compensable:
These are delays caused by the actions or inactions of Contractor or an officer,
employee, agent, Subcontractor, Supplier or any other party for whom the
Contractor is responsible. Since the Contractor has assumed responsibility for the
risks associated with the events that caused the delay, he/she are not entitled to
either time extensions or monetary delay damages. All non-excusable delays are
also non-compensable. Examples of non- excusable, non-compensable (N/N)
delays include: failure to perform by the Contractor, its Subcontractors and/or
Suppliers (except as noted in section I.B above); failure to provide adequate
labor,
materials,
and/or
equipment
on
the
Project;
failure
to
perform
contractually-required coordination with utilities, agencies and other Contractors;
failure to notify the Engineer, in writing, of delay impacts within two working days,
as required by MAG 104.2.3, or the next work day, as required by MAG 109.8.2;
failure to timely submit Shop Drawings; failure to pothole or otherwise visually locate
utilities sufficiently ahead of the Work to allow the Engineer to direct corrective
action when necessary; delays due to retesting of previously failed work, re-
inspection, and/or restaking resulting from faulty workmanship, poor quality
control, or lack of compliance with Contract Specifications. Again, this list is not
necessarily all inclusive.
D.
Concurrent:
When two or more delays occur simultaneously or overlap, each delay is
analyzed separately to determine its impact on the overall project completion date
based on when that delay started. Once again, only those delays which actually
extend the contract completion time are considered as delays. The concurrent
delay is considered an additional delay only to the extent it prolongs the delay to
the Contract Completion Time beyond the date that the one it is concurrent with
had already delayed that date. For example, if two delays are concurrent, and one
is five days long and the second is seven days long, the second concurrent delay will
App’d 1/8/21
APP-4 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 1
only extend the Contract Completion Time by two days. The same method of analysis
is used when there are multiple concurrent delays. Only those extending the Project
Completion Date are considered to be delays for the purposes of this policy. The
portion of each concurrent delay that delays the completion of the work is classified
in the same manner as described previously for individual delays and being either
E/C, E/N or N/N.
An example of a concurrent delay is where the City delays furnishing material,
but the Contractor could not have installed it anyway due to unusually severe
weather. The effect of the first delaying activity will extend for the full duration
and will be considered controlling on the Contractor’s schedule. A subsequent,
concurrent delay will thereafter only be considered to effect the project completion
(if at all) once the first delaying activity has ceased to impact the project completion.
In this case, if the unusually severe weather continued and delayed the work after
the material was delivered, the first portion of the delay would be classified E/C
(delay for material) and the second as E/N (delay due to unusually severe weather).
Using the procedure set forth above, the entire concurrent portion would be
considered E/C as shown in the chart which follows.
Example of a Concurrent Delay:
E/C Delay
E/N Delay
City Related Material Delay
Rain Delay
II.
ANALYZING THE DELAY:
The Contractor must provide all documents required or requested by the Engineer to analyze the
delay(s). It is important to understand that, prior to the delay analysis, delays and their impacts are
alleged issues. The information the Contractor provides will be compared with the Inspector’s Daily
Log, Schedules and other available Project information and together they will support or refute that
delays occurred and, if so, how they impact other work and the overall project completion. The
Contractor’s delay in providing these documents will be considered prima facie evidence that either
the delay did not occur or it did not impact the Project Completion Date and any claim for time
extension or damages will be denied.
The Engineer will accept delay analyses in CPM format, as these may demonstrate to his/her
satisfaction whether or not Project Completion has been impacted by a specific event. If the
Contractor chooses not to use CPM scheduling procedures, then the burden will be on the
Contractor to prove to the Engineer’s satisfaction that the Project Completion has been
impacted. The procedures below assume that the Contractor is using CPM scheduling methods.
App’d 1/8/21
APP-5 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 1
As a minimum the Contractor must provide the following materials to the Engineer:
A.
As-Planned Schedule. The initial construction schedule, required by the Contract
Documents, will be considered the baseline schedule. It is to the Contractor’s
advantage that the As-Planned (baseline) Schedule be as detailed as possible in
order for delays, as they occur, to be incorporated into the schedule in
representative locations. It is also to the Contractor’s advantage to use a computer
software program to generate the schedule since updated schedules are required
monthly by the Contract Documents and since updated schedules are required
to support delays and requests for additional compensation for delays. The As-
Planned (baseline) Schedule must be presented in network format which clearly
shows the interrelationships of the activities. The Contractor must also provide a
printout of the activities showing early start, early finish, late start, late finish,
duration and float. The activity list printout must also indicate predecessor and
successor activities.
B.
As-Built Schedules. The as planned (baseline) schedule must be updated with
complete progress-to-date information (actualized) up to the date of the start of the
alleged delay. Each updated schedule will serve as the as-built schedule for analyzing
the alleged delay and provide a new baseline as-planned schedule for the next delay.
This process must be repeated for each alleged delay as it occurs. In updating the
baseline schedule, the alleged delay must be treated as an activity and inserted into
the schedule as a predecessor to the impacted activity (ies). When an activity that
has already started is impacted, it is preferable to divide this activity into two
parts and show the impact affecting the second part. For schedules which
incorporate a time line (or data date), the delay activity must be inserted at the time
it actually occurred. Some software scheduling programs have a PAUSE-RESUME
feature that can be used to facilitate the requirements. The updated schedule must
also be accompanied by a listing of activities as with the baseline schedule. This
activities list must contain the alleged delay as an activity showing the duration and
the activities which are predecessors and successors to it. When computer
generated schedules are used, the Contractor must provide, in electronic media
format, the complete data files for the updated schedule that included the delay
activity, preferably either in Suretrak or in Microsoft Project. Each electronic media
must contain a label identifying the Project name, Contractor’s name, program
name and version number, data date and project finish date.
C.
Other Documents: In order to determine the amount of the alleged delay and if
it is compensable, the Contractor must provide all backup documentation relevant to
the issue and as required by the Engineer. This documentation must include copies
of such items as: purchase orders; delivery schedules; correspondence; memoranda
of telephone calls; force account daily worksheets (initialed by the Inspector);
payroll data; estimating (bid) worksheets; and any other materials which may be
requested by the Engineer.
D.
Procedure: Only after receipt of sufficient documentation will the Engineer analyze
each alleged delay and determine if it is supported or refuted. If supported, the
Engineer will determine if it is excusable or non-excusable, compensable or non-
compensable. If the Engineer determines that the delay did not affect the Project
Completion, the as-planned schedule, which has been updated to the date of the
alleged delay, must be revised to indicate this. If the Engineer determines the delay
App’d 1/8/21
APP-6 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 1
did occur but was N/N, then no time extension will be granted. It is imperative that
an actualized schedule be submitted as soon as the occurrence of the alleged delay
is known. In no event will the Contractor submit an actualized updated schedule
later than 60 days after the occurrence of the alleged delay becomes known.
If the Engineer determines the delay did occur and was excusable but, due to a
reason listed in section I.B. is non-compensable, he/she will determine the length
of the E/N delay and prepare a Change Order to add that time to the Contract. The
Engineer’s decision will be final.
If the Engineer determines the delay was excusable and compensable, he/she will
determine the length of the E/C delay and proceed to review the Contractor’s
damage calculations in accordance with Section III. The Engineer will check the
Contractor’s calculations, review the backup documentation provided, and prepare a
Change Order to cover both the additional compensation and the time extension.
The Engineer’s decision on both the time extension and additional compensation for
the delay will be final.
If the issue involves a concurrent delay, the Engineer will analyze available data
to determine the portions which are E/C, E/N, and/or N/N as described above. The
Engineer will proceed to determine the length of E/C delay and verify the Contractor’s
delay damage calculations, if any are provided. Upon completion of this review, the
Engineer will prepare a Change Order for the Contractor’s review and signature.
The Engineer’s decision regarding excusable delay and additional compensation for
the delay is final.
The amount of time the Engineer will require to analyze the alleged delay(s) will
depend upon the Engineer’s workload, the complexity of the delay analysis,
availability of supporting data, extent of cooperation by the Contractor, and other
factors beyond the Engineer’s control. It is entirely possible other delay(s) may
occur while the Engineer is analyzing particular claim for delay(s). The Engineer’s
failure to respond to the Contractor in a set period of time will not be used as the
basis for a further delay claim or as justification for extending and existing delay
claim. The time required for delay analysis by the Engineer will not be counted
against the time allotted for processing Final Payment as required by (MAG Section
109.7(B)) or the release of retention and Final Payment as prescribed by A.R.S.
Arizona Revised Statutes §34-221.
III.
CALCULATING MONETARY DELAY DAMAGES:
Additional compensation for delay, when authorized by the Engineer, will be calculated in accordance
with MAG Section 109.5 ACTUAL COST WORK with the following exceptions:
A.
No additional compensation or other monetary damages will be awarded or paid for
any loss of anticipated profits by the Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers.
B.
No additional compensation or other monetary damages will be awarded for home
office overhead or non-project general conditions of the Contractor, Subcontractors
or Suppliers.
C.
Equipment:
App’d 1/8/21
APP-7 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 1
1.
Contractor-owned equipment rate calculations must be computed in
accordance with Section 109.04(D)(3), Arizona Department of Transportation
“Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction,” 2008 or latest
edition and as modified herein. Year and regional adjustment factors must
be based on the most recent publications of the Rental Rate Blue Book for
Construction
Equipment, published
by
the
Equipment
Guide-Book
Company, San Jose, CA, same as provided by ADOT and in print as of the
date of alleged delay. In no event will the compensation for Contractor-
owned equipment exceed the purchase price, including tax, paid by the
Contractor for the equipment. Compensation will not be allowed for small
tools or equipment that show a daily equipment rental rate of less than $5.00
per day or for unlisted equipment that has a value of less than for
hundred dollars ($400.00).
2.
For leased and rented equipment or equipment not otherwise listed in the
Blue Book, rental contracts, or other supporting data will be used to establish
the hourly rate. No hourly operating expense will be allowed for delay on
standby equipment. In no case will equipment be considered for rental which
exceeds the hourly rate for the first eight hours and the daily rate
divided by eight for all additional hours as compared with similar
equipment listed in the Blue Book. The hourly standby rate must be
computed as the lesser of:
a.
Dividing the monthly invoice or rental value by 176 hours
per month when the equipment is utilized by the Contractor
for more than three weeks;
b.
Dividing the monthly invoice or rental value by 40 hours per
week when the equipment is utilized by the Contractor for
more than three days.
In no event will compensation be paid for delay at more than
8 hours per day or 40 hours per week.
3.
Except for vehicles used by supervisory personnel, all equipment will be paid
at the “standby” rate during the delay period.
4.
Equipment brought solely to mitigate the delay (such as pumps, light plants,
etc.) may be paid in accordance with ADOT section 109.04(D) (3).
5.
The Blue Book regional adjustment will apply in determining rental rates.
D.
Material:
Allowable material charges may include, in addition to material incorporated in the
work material used to mitigate the delay such as barricades, plates, shoring, cold
mix, etc. Except in emergencies the Contractor will not employ such material
without the prior written approval of the Engineer.
E.
Labor:
1.
Except for Supervisory Personnel (Superintendent, Project Engineer, and
Foremen), labor wages will not be paid after the first one-half day of
App’d 1/8/21
APP-8 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 1
claimed delay or impact. It is expected the Contractor will reassign or
layoff unneeded employees.
2.
For Foreman wages to be included, that Foreman must have been
actively employed on the project prior to the commencement of the delay
and be directly responsible for the activity being delayed.
3.
Labor burden must be actual amounts incurred but must not exceed the
ADOT approved rate.
F.
All costs (equipment, material, and labor) must be substantiated by the City of
Chandler’s Daily Work Reports.
IV.
DOCUMENT REQUIRED FOR CLAIM ANALYSIS:
For purposes of reviewing the Contractor’s request for additional compensation, it will be required
that the Contractor submit the following listed information. Information requested must be prepared
on forms which are substantially similar to the City of Chandler’s Daily Work Report form, a copy of
which is attached as an exhibit.
A.
Labor:
For each employee, laborer, and foreman, for which compensation is requested:
Name, classification, dates of work performed, daily hours worked, total hours worked,
labor rates, labor burden rates, overtime or premium time charges. Further, the
Contractor must make available for inspection and copying to the Engineer the
following listed documentation.
1.
Certified payroll reports for the period of work claimed.
2.
Accounting of Fringe Benefits – certified by a CPA.
3.
Contractor’s and Subcontractor’s daily field reports and daily diaries.
B.
Materials:
For all materials for which compensation is requested, if any, total quantities of
materials, prices, extensions and transportation costs must be provided on a daily
basis. Further, the Contractor must make available for inspection and copying to the
Engineer the following listed documentation.
1.
Invoices for all materials incorporated.
2.
Weigh tickets.
3.
Purchase orders.
4.
Delivery schedules.
5.
Quotes or proposals from manufacturers or supplier.
6.
Freight bills, Bills of Lading, or other documentation to show transportation
costs.
7.
Restocking charges-invoices from vendor.
C.
Equipment:
For all equipment, the Contractor must provide the Engineer with the designation,
dates and hours of usage, dates and hours of standby, if any, daily hours, total hours,
App’d 1/8/21
APP-9 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 1
rental rates and extension for each unit of equipment and machinery. Rental
rates will be as established in Section III. Further, the Contractor must make
available for inspection and copying to the Engineer the following listed
documentation.
1.
Owned:
a.
Purchase contracts(s).
b.
Depreciation schedule(s).
c.
Invoices for fuel, lube, repairs and other operating costs.
2.
Leased:
a.
Lease agreement with hourly rate, overtime rate, double shift rate, etc.
b.
Invoices or other documentation showing hours worked on a daily
basis.
D.
Subcontractors/Owner-Operators:
In the event the Contractor submits a claim which includes requests for
compensation for Subcontractors of Owner-Operators, the same information
requested of the Contractor must be provided by the Subcontractor/Owner-
Operator. Further, the Contractor must make available for inspection and copying
to the Engineer the following listed documentation.
1.
Bid/Estimate work sheets and/or spreadsheets.
2.
Subcontract Agreements or Agreements with Owner-Operator.
3.
All invoices and billing statements received from the Subcontractor/Owner-
Operator which relates to the amount requested.
E.
Miscellaneous:
Further, the Contractor must make available for inspection and copying to the
Engineer the following listed documentation.
1.
Evidence of payment for bonds and insurance premiums (MAG 109.5.6).
2.
Taxes – unless the Contractor can show otherwise, taxes are reimbursable at
65% of the total cost (less bonds and insurance).
V.
TIME LIMIT ON SUBMISSIONS OF CLAIM FOR DELAY OR IMPACT DAMAGES:
No claims for delay or impact damages will be considered or allowed more than 45 days after the
event or occurrence which the Contractor claims gives rise to the delay or impact. In no event will
a claim for delay or impact damages be considered after submission by the Contractor of the Final
Payment Request.
App’d 1/8/21
APP-10 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 2
COST REDUCTION INCENTIVE PROPOSALS
FOR DESIGN BID BUILD CONTRACTS
The Contractor may submit to the Engineer proposals for modifying the Plans, Specifications, or
other requirements of the Contract for the sole purpose of reducing the total cost of Project
construction. The proposals must not impair in any manner the essential functions or characteristics
of the project; including but not limited to service life, economy of operations, ease of maintenance,
desired appearance, compatibility with existing or planned equipment, standardization of
systems, or design and safety standards.
It must not be inferred from this Policy that the Engineer is required to consider any proposal
submitted.
Submissions that propose changes in the basic design of a bridge, propose changes in pipe line
size, materials, bedding conditions, pipe specifications; or that propose any change in pavement
design will not be considered.
Proposals submitted pursuant to this Policy will be identified as Cost Reduction Incentive Proposals.
They must be submitted in writing and, at a minimum, contain the following.
1.
Complete the attached or similar cost reduction incentive proposal form.
2.
A description of both the existing Contract Requirements for performing the work
and the proposed changes.
3.
All Engineering Drawings and computations necessary for the thorough and
expeditious evaluation.
4.
An itemization of the existing Contract Requirements that must be changed if the
Proposal is adopted and a recommendation as to the manner in which the change
should be made.
5.
A detailed estimate of the cost of performing the Work under the existing Contract
and under the proposed changes, including the cost of developing and
implementing the changes.
6.
The Contract items affected by the proposed changes and any variations in
quantities resulting from the changes.
7.
An objective estimate of any effects the proposal will have on collateral cost to the
City, costs of related items, and cost of maintenance and operation.
8.
A statement as to the effect that the Proposal will have on the time for the
completion of the Project.
9.
A statement as to the time by which a Change Order adopting the Proposal must
be executed or when the Engineer must have given verbal approval.
Proposals will be processed expeditiously; however, the City will not be liable for any delay in acting
upon any Proposal nor for any failure to accept any Proposal pursuant to this Special Provision.
App’d 1/8/21
APP-11 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 2
The Engineer will be the sole judge of the acceptability of a Proposal and of the estimated net
savings in construction costs from the adoption of all or any part of the Proposal. The Contractor
will be notified in writing by the Engineer as to whether his/her Proposal has been accepted. The
decision by the Engineer is final.
When the City deems such action to be appropriate, it reserves the right to require the Contractor to
share equally in the cost to the City of investigating, evaluating, and processing the proposal as a
condition for the consideration of such Proposal. Such cost must be shared whether the Proposal is
accepted or rejected. When such a condition is imposed, the City will estimate these costs and the
Contractor must indicate his acceptance thereof in writing. Such acceptance will authorize the City
to deduct the Contractor’s share of the costs from any monies due or that may become due to the
Contractor under the Contract.
If the Contractor’s Proposal is accepted in whole or in part, the necessary Contract Modifications
and Contract Price Adjustments will be affected by the execution of a Change Order which will
specifically state that it is executed pursuant to this Special Provision.
The Contractor must continue to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the
Contract until a Change Order incorporating the Proposal has been executed or until he/she has
been given verbal approval by the Engineer that his/her Proposal has been accepted. If the
Change Order has not been executed or he/she has not been given verbal approval on or before the
date specified on the attached cost reduction incentive proposal form or on or before such other date
as the Contractor may have subsequently specified in writing, the Proposal may be deemed to be
rejected.
The executed Change Order will incorporate the changes in the Plans, Specifications, or other
requirements of the Contract which are necessary to permit the Proposal, or such part of it which has
been accepted, to be put into effect, and will include any condition – upon which the City’s approval
thereof is based, if such approval is conditional. The executed Change Order may also extend
the time for the completion of the Contract if such an extension has been deemed to be
warranted by the Engineer as a result of his evaluation of the Proposal.
The executed Change Order will also establish the estimated net savings in the cost of performing
the Work attributable to the Proposal effectuated by the Change Order. In determining the net
savings, the right is reserved to the Engineer to disregard the Contract bid prices if, in his/her
judgment, such prices do not represent a fair measure of the value of the Work to be performed or
to be deleted. The net savings will be established by determining the Contractor’s cost of performing
the Work, taking into account his/her cost of developing the Proposal and implementing the
change, and reducing this amount by any ascertainable collateral costs to the City. The executed
Change Order may provide that the Contractor be paid 50 percent of the estimated net savings
amount.
The executed Change Order may also provide for the adjustment in Contract prices. Contract prices
may be adjusted by subtracting the City’s share of the accrued net savings.
The amount specified to be paid to the Contractor in the executed Change Order which effectuates a
Cost Reduction Proposal will constitute full compensation to the Contractor for the Cost Reduction
Proposal and the performance of the work thereof pursuant to the said Change Order.
Upon acceptance of a Cost Reduction Incentive Proposal, any restrictions imposed by the
App’d 1/8/21
APP-12 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 2
Contractor on its use or on disclosure of the information will become void, and the City thereafter
will have the right to use all or any part of the Proposal without obligation or compensation of any
kind to the Contractor.
App’d 1/8/21
APP-13 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 2
COST REDUCTION INCENTIVE PROPOSAL FORM
TO:
CIP City Engineer
FROM:
PROJECT NAME:
WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS – GMP 1
PROJECT NUMBER:
WW1901.401
DATE:
Summary of Change (Brief description of proposed change including advantages and disadvantages):
ESTIMATED COST SUMMARY (Attached detailed estimate):
A.
Original Cost:
$
B.
Proposed Cost:
$
C.
Construction Savings (A-B):
$
D.
Gross Savings (Included OH
%, Bond
%)
$
E.
Contractor Implementing
$_
F.
City Implementing Cost:
$_
Reduction in Contract Price (C+D-E-F) x 50%:
$
Date by which a Change Order must be issued so as to obtain maximum cost reduction:
App’d 1/8/21
APP-14 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 3
CITY OF CHANDLER, ARIZONA
PUBLIC WORKS & UTILITIES DEPARTMENT
CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT REGARDING SETTLEMENT OF CLAIMS
________________________, Arizona
Date ____________________________
Project Name: WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS – GMP 1
City Project No.: WW1901.401
To the City of Chandler, Arizona
Gentlemen:
This is to certify that all lawful claims for materials, rental of equipment and labor used in connection
with the construction of the above project, whether by subcontractor or claimant in person, have been
duly discharged.
The undersigned, for the consideration of $________________________, as set out in the final pay estimate,
as full and complete payment under the terms of the contract, hereby waives and relinquishes any and
all further claims or right of lien under, in connection with, or as a result of the above described
project. The undersigned further agrees to indemnify and save harmless the City of Chandler against
any and all liens, claims or liens, suits, actions, damages, charges and expenses whatsoever, which said
City may suffer arising out of the failure of the undersigned to pay for all labor performances and
materials furnished for the performance of said installation.
Signed and dated at ________________, this _________ day of _______________ 20_____.
__________________________________
CONTRACTOR
By _______________________________
STATE OF ARIZONA
)
) SS
COUNTY OF MARICOPA
)
The foregoing instrument was subscribed and sworn to before me this __________ day of
__________________ 20 _________.
___________________________________
Notary Public
___________________________________
My Commission Expires
App’d 1/8/21
APP-15 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 4
PERFORMANCE BOND
ARIZONA STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND
PURSUANT TO TITLES 28, 34, AND 41, ARIZONA REVISED STATUTES
(Penalty of this bond must be 100% of the Contract amount)
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS THAT:___________________________________________________
(hereinafter "Principal"), and __________________________________________________________ (hereinafter "Surety"), a
corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of ______________ with its principal office in the City
of _____________________________, holding a certificate of authority to transact surety business in Arizona issued by
the Director of Insurance pursuant to Title 20, Chapter 2, Article 1, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto
__________________________(hereinafter "Obligee") in the amount of __________________________________________
(Dollars) ($___________), for the payment whereof, Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs,
administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated
the ____________ day of _______________________, 20___ for construction of WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
IMPROVEMENTS – GMP 1, WW1901.401 which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and
to the same extent as if copies at length herein.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the Principal faithfully performs
and fulfills all the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions and agreements of the contract during the original
term of the contract and any extension of the contract, with or without notice of the Surety, and during the life of
any guaranty required under the contract, and also performs and fulfills all the undertakings, covenants, terms,
conditions, and agreements of all duly authorized modifications of the contract that may hereafter be made,
notice of which modifications to the Surety being hereby waived, the above obligation is void. Otherwise it
remains in full force and effect.
PROVIDED, HOWEVER that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Title 34, Chapter 2, Article 2,
Arizona Revised Statutes, and all liabilities on this bond will be determined in accordance with the provisions of
Title 34, Chapter 2, Article 2, Arizona Revised Statutes, to the same extent as if it were copied at length in this
Contract.
The prevailing party in a suit on this bond may recover as part of the judgment reasonable attorney fees
that may be fixed by a judge of the court.
Witness our hands this ________________ day of ____________________, 20__.
____________________________________
PRINCIPAL
SEAL
___________________________________
AGENT OF RECORD
By _________________________________
____________________________________
SURETY
SEAL
___________________________________
AGENT ADDRESS
App’d 1/8/21
APP-17 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 5
PAYMENT BOND
ARIZONA STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND
PURSUANT TO TITLES 28, 34, AND 41, OF THE ARIZONA REVISED STATUTES
(Penalty of this Bond must be 100% of the Contract amount)
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS THAT:________________________________________________
(hereinafter "Principal"), as Principal, and _________________________________________(hereinafter "Surety"), a
corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of __________________ with its principal office in the
City of __________________, holding a certificate of authority to transact surety business in Arizona issued by the
Director of the Department of Insurance pursuant to Title 20, Chapter 2, Article 1, as Surety, are held and firmly
bound
unto
________________________
(hereinafter
"Obligee")
in
the
amount
of
______________________________________________ (Dollars) ($___________), for the payment whereof, the Principal and
Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally,
firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the _________ day of
_______________________, 20___ for construction of WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS – GMP 1,
WW1901.401 which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if
copied at length herein.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the Principal promptly pays all
moneys due to all persons supplying labor or materials to the Principal or the Principal's subcontractors in the
prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, this obligation is void. Otherwise it remains in full force and
effect.
PROVIDED, HOWEVER that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Title 34, Chapter 2, Article 2
Arizona Revised Statutes, and all liabilities on this bond will be determined in accordance with the provisions,
conditions and limitations of Title 34, Chapter 2, Article 2, Arizona Revised Statutes, to the same extent as if it were
copied at length in this Contract.
The prevailing party in a suit on this bond may recover as part of the judgment reasonable attorney fees
that may be fixed by a judge of the court.
Witness our hands this ________________ day of ____________________, 20__.
____________________________________
PRINCIPAL
SEAL
___________________________________
AGENT OF RECORD
By _________________________________
____________________________________
SURETY
SEAL
___________________________________
AGENT ADDRESS
App’d 1/8/21
APP-18 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 6
DISPUTE RESOLUTION
A.
INFORMAL DISPUTE RESOLUTION
The parties to the Contract agree that time is of the essence in relation to
performance of the Contract and completion of the Project, therefore any and all
disputes in relation to the Contract will initially be referred to the Project Manager,
the Design Professional Representative and/or the Contractor Representative as
applicable to the dispute, for immediate resolution. If, after good faith efforts to
reach a resolution, none is reached, any party to the dispute may submit the
dispute to the Dispute Resolution Representative (“DRR”) process set forth below,
which is intended to be an expedited process.
B.
DISPUTE RESOLUTION REPRESENTATIVE (“DRR”) PROCESS
1.
The Parties under the Contract agree that all claims and disputes in relation to
the Project which are not resolved in the ordinary course of the Project
(“Claim” or “Claims”) will, as a prerequisite to any mediation, or litigation of
the Claim, first be submitted for resolution between the designated
Dispute Resolution Representatives of the Parties as set forth herein (the
“DRR Process”).
2.
The DRR Process will be initiated through service of a DRR Notice as set
forth below:
a.
For claims by the Contractor or the Design Professional, the DRR
Process will be initiated by the party asserting the claim serving
written notice on the City setting forth in detail: (i) the basis for the
claim; (ii) the effect of the Claim upon the construction of, and/or
Project Schedule for, the Project;
(iii) the specific relief requested, the amount thereof, and how such
was calculated; (iv) the parties involved in the Claim, and how
they are involved; (v) the specific contract provisions in the Contract
Documents (including, if applicable, drawings and specifications)
which apply; and (vi) efforts made to date to resolve the Claim.
b.
For claims by the City, the DRR process will be initiated by the
City providing written notice to the other parties of the basis and
amount of its claim, the parties involved in the Claim, and how they
are involved, the provisions in the Contract Documents that apply,
and the relief requested.
c.
The DRR Notice will be hand-delivered and e-mailed to the other
parties’ designated Dispute Resolution Representatives.
3.
The other parties will respond in writing to the DRR Notice (“DRR
Response”) within ten (10) calendar days of receipt of the DRR Notice, setting
forth those items set forth in the DRR Notice that they agree with, dispute,
and/or have questions concerning. The DRR Response will be hand-delivered
and e-mailed to the other parties’ Dispute Resolution Representatives.
App’d 1/8/21
APP-19 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 6
4.
The designated Dispute Resolution Representatives for the Parties to the
claim will then meet as soon as possible and in any event within twenty (20)
calendar days of submission of the DRR Notice (regardless of whether a
DRR Response has been submitted by all parties involved in the dispute), at
a mutually agreed upon time and place, to attempt to resolve the Claim
based upon the DRR Notice and DRR Response.
5.
At any time after the first meeting required above, either party may
terminate the DRR Process by written notice to the other party.
6.
The parties may agree, in writing, to extend or modify the time limits or
other provisions of the DRR process in relation to a specific pending Claim.
7.
Unless otherwise designated in a written notice to the other parties, the City
and the representatives of the Contractor and of the Design Professional will
act as the parties’ designated Dispute Resolution Representatives.
8.
If a resolution of the Claim is reached, that resolution must be set forth in
writing and must be signed by the Parties’ designated Dispute Resolution
Representative. If the resolution involves a change in any Contract
Documents, the Contract Price, the Project Schedule, or any other change
requiring a written Change Order or Amendment, the parties must execute
an appropriate written Change Order or Amendment pursuant to the terms
of the Contract Documents.
C.
MEDIATION
1.
Unless extended by written agreement of the parties involved in the dispute,
any Claim not resolved through the DRR process set forth above within
five (5) calendar days after the meeting required under B (4) above, or after
the DRR is terminated pursuant to ¶ B (5) above, whichever is earlier, will be
submitted to mediation as a condition precedent to litigation by either party.
2.
The mediation will be commenced by written demand upon the other party
for mediation. If the parties cannot agree upon a mediator within ten (10)
calendar days of the written demand, either party may make a request to the
Civil Presiding Judge of the Maricopa County Superior Court to appoint a
mediator. The mediation will occur within forth (40) calendar days of the
written demand for mediation, unless the parties agree, in writing, to a
longer period of time.
3.
The qualifications for the mediator will be that he/she be: (a) an
experienced mediator, arbitrator or litigator of construction disputes; and (b)
having engaged a significant portion of his/her time involving and/or
resolving construction disputes for at least the past five (5) years.
4.
Each party will provide to the other party and the mediator all of the
information and documentation required under B(1) and (2) above, together
with any additional information and documentation which the party believes
relevant. In addition, the parties will exchange, and provide to the mediator
such additional memoranda, information and/or documentation, as the
App’d 1/8/21
APP-20 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 6
mediator may request, and in the form and at such times, as the mediator
may direct.
5.
The parties will share the mediator’s fee and any filing fees equally. The
mediation will be held in Chandler, Arizona, unless another location is
mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in mediation will be specifically
enforceable in any court having jurisdiction thereof.
D.
LITIGATION
Any claim arising out of or related to the Contract, except Claims relating to aesthetic
effect and except those claims waived as provided for in the Contract
Documents, must be resolved through litigation in the Maricopa County, Arizona
Superior Court.
App’d 1/8/21
APP-21 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 7
CITY OF CHANDLER, ARIZONA
PUBLIC WORKS & UTILITIES DEPARTMENT
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION
PROJECT NAME:
WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS – GMP 1
CITY PROJECT NO.:
WW1901.401
If Federally Funded:
FEDERAL NO.:
WW1901.401
TRACS NO:
WW1901.401
(This section to be completed by Prime)
I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT ALL GOODS AND/OR SERVICES REQUIRED BY CITY OF CHANDLER FOR THIS
PROJECT HAVE BEEN DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND BID
SPECIFICATIONS AND ALL ACTIVITIES REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACTOR UNDER THE CONTRACT HAVE
BEEN COMPLETED AS OF THE COMPLETION DATE LISTED HERE:
COMPLETION DATE:
PRIME
FIRM NAME:
PRINCIPAL:
TITLE:
SIGNATURE:
DATE:
CERTIFIED BY ENGINEER/CONSULTANT:
FIRM NAME:
SIGNATURE:
DATE:
PROJECT ACCEPTED BY CITY OF CHANDLER:
FIRM NAME:
SIGNATURE:
DATE:
App’d 1/8/21
APP-22 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 8
CONSTRUCTION SIGN DETAIL
8'
3"
CITY OF CHANDLER
5"
3"
PUTTING YOUR FUNDS TO WORK
5"
3"
PROJECT TITLE:
5"
4'
3"
PROJECT NUMBER:
3"
2"
PROJECT COST:
3"
2"
CONTRACTOR:
3"
2"
MANAGED BY:
PUBLIC WORKS & UTILITIES DEPARTMENT
3"
CAPITAL PROJECTS DIVISION
3"
<--- 4" X 4" POSTS --->
NOTES:
SIGN(S) MUST BE FURNISHED AND ERECTED PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF CONSTRUCTION. POSTS
MUST BE ANCHORED A MINIMUM OF TWO FEET INTO THE GROUND. BOTTOM OF SIGN MUST BE A
MINIMUM OF FOUR FEET ABOVE THE GROUND.
TYPICAL PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN FOR GENERAL PROJECTS MUST BE NON-REFLECTORIZED
GREEN BACKGROUND, AND NON-REFLECTORIZED WHITE LETTERS AND NUMERALS.
ONE SIGN MUST BE ERECTED FOR BUILDINGS AND OTHER LIMITED AREA SINGLE SITES. FOR MULTIPLE
SITES, ONE SIGN MUST BE ERECTED AT EACH SITE.
FOR LINEAR PROJECTS ONE HALF MILE OR LONGER, PLACE ONE SIGN AT EACH END OF THE PROJECT.
App’d 1/8/21
APP-23 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 9 – CM@Risk & JOC
COST OF THE WORK
(APPLICABLE SOLELY TO CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AT RISK AND JOB ORDER CONTRACTING)
SECTION 1 – COSTS TO BE REIMBURSED
1.1 Cost of the Work
The term Cost of the Work will mean costs necessarily incurred by Contractor in the proper
performance of the Work. Such costs must be at rates not higher than the standard paid at the place
of the Project except with prior consent of City. The Cost of the Work will include only the items set
forth in this Section 1.
1.2 Labor Costs
1.2.1
Wages of construction workers directly employed by the Contractor to perform the
construction of the Work at the site or, with City’s approval, at off-site workshops. Cost to
be reimbursed will be the actual wages paid to the individuals performing the work.
1.2.2
Wages or salaries of the Contractor’s supervisory and administrative personnel when
stationed at the site with City’s approval. No Contractor personnel stationed at the
Contractor’s home or branch offices will be charged to the Cost of the Work. Non-field
office based Contractor management and support personnel are expected to provide
service and advice from time to time throughout the job and his/her time devoted to
Project matters is considered to be covered by the Contractor’s Fee.
1.2.3
Wages and salaries of Contractor’s supervisory or administrative personnel who would
normally be stationed at the field office in accordance with Section 1.2.2 but who become
engaged, at factories,
workshops or on the road, in expediting the production or
transportation of materials or equipment required for the Work, but only for that portion
of his/her time required for the Work. Employee bonuses and/or costs associated with
Employee Stock Ownership Plans (“ESOP”) will not be considered reimbursable labor or
labor burden costs and will be considered non-reimbursable costs considered to be covered
by the Contractor’s Fee.
1.2.4
Costs paid or incurred by Contractor for taxes, insurance, contributions, assessments and
benefits required by law or collective bargaining agreements and, for personnel not
covered by such agreements, customary benefits such as sick leave, medical and health
benefits, holiday, vacations and pensions, provided such costs are based on wages and
salaries included in the Cost of the Work under Subparagraphs 1.2.1 through 1.2.3.
1.2.4.1 Cost of the Work will include the actual net cost to Contractor for worker’s
compensation insurance attributable to the wages chargeable to the Cost of Work per this
Agreement. The actual net cost of worker’s compensation must take into consideration
all cost adjustments due to experience modifiers, premium discounts, policy dividends,
retrospective rating plan premium
adjustments, assigned risk pool rebates, any
applicable weekly maximums, etc. Contractor may charge an estimated amount for
worker’s compensation insurance costs, but will make appropriate cost adjustments to
actual costs within 45 days of receipt of actual cost adjustments from the insurance
carrier.
App’d 1/8/21
APP-24 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 9 – CM@Risk & JOC
1.2.4.3 Overtime wages paid to salaried personnel (if approved in advance in writing by City)
will be reimbursed at the actual rate of overtime pay paid to the individual. No time
charges for overtime hours worked on the Project will be allowed if the individual is not paid
for the overtime worked.
1.2.4.4 Any overtime premium or shift differential expense to be incurred by Contractor for hourly
workers will require City’s advance written approval before the incremental cost of the
overtime premium or shift differential will be considered a reimbursable cost. If the
Contractor is required to work overtime as a result of an inexcusable delay or other
coordination problems caused by the Contractor or anyone he/she is responsible for,
the overtime premium and/or shift differential expense portion of the payroll expense
and related labor burden costs will be considered as cost not to be reimbursed.
1.2.4.5 Reimbursable labor burden costs will be limited to payroll taxes, worker’s compensation
insurance, the employer’s portion of union benefit costs for union employees working on the
Project, and the actual verifiable fringe benefit costs incurred by Contractor for non-union
individuals working on the Project subject to the following maximum percentages for the
following reimbursable non-union fringe benefit costs. The following maximums (as a
percentage of reimbursable actual wages by individual) will apply for each of the following
types of fringe benefit costs specifically attributable to each of the non-union personnel
working on the Project:
•
Medical Insurance, Dental, Life & AD&D Insurance:
12.00%
•
Holiday, vacation and other paid time not worked:
10.00%
•
Pension Plan Contributions to Vested Employee Account,
Simplified Employee Pension Plans, or 401K matching plans
(Note: ESOP related costs are covered by the Contractor Fee)
10.00%
For non-union personnel, no other fringe benefit costs (other than the three specific
categories listed immediately above, will be considered reimbursable Cost of Work. Any
labor burden costs that are in excess of the amounts considered reimbursable or are
otherwise not considered reimbursable under the terms of this agreement are intended to
be covered by the Contractor Fee.
1.3
Subcontract Costs
1.3.1
Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors in accordance with the requirements of
the subcontracts.
1.3.2
For Scope of Work Bid Packages typically performed by Subcontractors, Contractor may
“self- perform” such work on an actual cost basis subject to an agreed upon Guaranteed
Maximum Price for the “self-performed work”. The Contractor must, unless agreed to by City
in writing, bid his/her proposed guaranteed Maximum Price for the work to be “self-
performed” against at least three other interested trade Contractors. All savings under
any such Subcontract for “self-performed work” must be applied to reduce the Cost of Work
under the Contract and the Guaranteed Maximum Price. For purposes of defining “self-
performed work” subject to this provision, any division of Contractor, or any separate
Contractor or Subcontractor that is partially owned or wholly owned by the Contractor or
any of his/her employees or employee’s relatives will be considered a related party entity
App’d 1/8/21
APP-25 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 9 – CM@Risk & JOC
and will be subject to this provision regarding “self-performed work”. No self-performed work
will be allowed to be performed on a Fixed Price basis.
1.3.3
Contractor (with respect to its Suppliers, Subcontractors and all lower tier Subcontractors)
must provide City advance written notice and must obtain City’s approval for any proposed
Subcontract Change Order, Material Purchase Order, or other financial commitment in an
amount in excess of $5,000 prior to placing such order or entering into such agreement
(regardless of whether or not any such commitment will affect the prime contract
Guaranteed Maximum Cost). It is agreed that sums applicable to any Subcontract Change
Order, Purchase Order or other financial commitment entered into in violation of the above
notice and approval requirement will not be included in the amounts owning to Contractor,
Subcontractors or Suppliers whether as Costs of the Work or as reasonable termination
costs in the event of termination.
1.4
Costs of Material and Equipment Incorporated in the Completed Construction
1.4.1
Costs, including transportation and storage, of materials and equipment incorporated or
to be incorporated in the completed construction.
1.4.2
Costs of materials described in the preceding Subparagraph 1.4.1 in excess of those
actually installed to allow for reasonable waste and spoilage. Unused excess materials, in
any, will become City’s property at the completion of the Work or, at City’s option, may be
sold by the Contractor. Any amounts realized from such sales must be credited to City as a
deduction from the Cost of Work.
1.4.3
Proceeds from the sale of recyclable materials, scrap, waste, etc. will be credited to job cost.
1.5
Costs of Other materials and Equipment, Temporary Facilities and Related Items
1.5.1
Costs, including transportation and storage, installation, maintenance, dismantling and
removal of materials, supplies, temporary facilities, machinery, equipment and hand tools
not customarily owned by construction workers, that are provided by the Contractor at the
site and fully consumed in the performance of the Work; and cost (less salvage value) of such
items if not fully consumed, whether sold to others or retained by Contractor. Cost for
items previously used by Contractor will mean fair market value.
1.5.2
Rental charges for temporary facilities, machinery, equipment, and hand tools not
customarily owned by construction workers that are provided by Contractor at the site,
whether rented from Contractor or others, and costs of transportation, installation, minor
repairs and replacements, dismantling and removal thereof. Rates and quantities of
equipment rented will be subject to City’s prior written approval.
1.5.2.1 The Projected usage for each piece of equipment to be rented for use on the Project and
the estimated total rentals must be considered by Contractor before the piece of
equipment is rented so that an appropriate rent versus buy decision can be made.
Purchased equipment must be considered “job owned”. At the completion of the Project,
Contractor must transfer title and possession of all remaining job-owned equipment to
City, or Contractor may keep any such equipment for an appropriate fair market value
credit to job cost, which will be mutually agreed to by City and Contractor.
App’d 1/8/21
APP-26 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 9 – CM@Risk & JOC
1.5.2.2 Each piece of equipment to be rented must have hourly, daily, weekly and monthly rates
and the most economical rate available will be reimbursed based on the circumstances of
actual need and usage of the piece of equipment while it is stationed at the jobsite.
When the piece of equipment is no longer needed for the work, no rental charges will be
reimbursed if the piece of equipment remains at the jobsite for the convenience of
Contractor.
1.5.2.3 Equipment Rental Rates
1.5.2.3.1 Compensation for equipment used on the Project will be paid in accordance with the
Equipment Plan submitted by Contractor in the accepted GMP Proposal and no payments
will be made in excess of the rates set forth in the Equipment Plan, or actual
documented costs, whichever is less.
1.5.2.3.2 All equipment rental rates and costs are subject to City’s right to audit when submitted as
part of Equipment Plan and/or at any time during the Project.
1.5.2.4 The aggregate rentals chargeable for each piece of Contractor owned tools or equipment
must not exceed 50% of the fair market value of such equipment at the time of its
commitment to the Work. The original purchase price and date of purchase of the equipment
will be documented with a copy of the purchase invoice for the piece of equipment. Such
aggregate limitations will apply and no further rentals will be charged even if a piece of
equipment is taken off the job and is later replaced by a similar piece of equipment. For
purposes of computing the aggregate rentals applicable to aggregate rental limitations,
rental charges for similar pieces of equipment will be combined if the pieces of equipment
were not used at the same time.
1.5.2.5 Fair market value for used material and equipment as referred to in the Contract Documents
will mean the estimated price a reasonable purchaser would pay to purchase the used
material or equipment at the time it was initially needed for the job. Note: This is usually
lower than the price a reasonable purchaser would pay for similar new construction material
or construction equipment.
1.5.2.6 All losses resulting from lost, damaged or stolen tools and equipment will be the sole
responsibility of Contractor, and not City, and the cost of such losses will not be
reimbursable under the Contract.
1.5.2.7 Contractor will be required to maintain a detailed equipment inventory of all job-owned
equipment (either purchased and charged to job cost or job-owned through aggregate
rentals) and such inventory must be submitted to City each month. For each piece of
equipment, such inventory should contain at a minimum (1) original purchase price or
acquisition cost (2) acquisition date (3) approved Fair Market Value at the time the piece of
equipment was first used on the job and (4) final disposition.
1.5.2.8 All costs incurred for minor maintenance and repairs will be reimbursed at actual cost. Such
costs include routine and preventative maintenance, minor repairs and other incidental
costs. Repairs and/or replacement of a capital nature are considered to be covered by the
rental rates. Major repairs and overhauls are not considered routine and ordinary;
consequently such costs are not reimbursable and are intended to be covered by the rental
App’d 1/8/21
APP-27 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 9 – CM@Risk & JOC
rates.
1.5.3
Costs of removal of debris from the Site.
1.5.4
Costs of document reproductions, facsimile transmissions and long-distance telephone
calls, postage and parcel delivery charges, telephone service at the site and reasonable
petty cash expenses of the site office.
1.5.5
That portion of the reasonable expenses of Contractor’s personnel incurred while
traveling in discharge of duties connected with the Work.
1.5.5.1 No travel expenses will be reimbursed to Contractor’s representatives unless Project related
travel required them to travel to a destination more than 100 miles from the Project
location. Any travel involving airfare will require advance written approval by an authorized
City’s representative.
1.5.6
Costs of materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a mutually acceptable
location, if approved in advance by the City.
1.5.7
Reproduction costs will be the actual costs of reproduction subject to a maximum of five
cents ($.05) per square foot for prints and a maximum of five cents ($.05) per 8 ½ by 11-
inch page for offset print or photo copied contract documents, specifications, etc.
Telephone costs will be the actual costs paid to the third party telephone company for the
field office telephone.
1.6
Miscellaneous Costs
1.6.1
That portion of insurance and bond premiums that can be directly attributed to the Contract.
The City will reimburse Contractor for contractually required bond at time of first pay
application for GMP and Cost-Based contracts upon receipt of proof of payment from
the Contractor. If the Contractor completes Work for less than the Contract Price,
Contractor must credit the City a pro- rated amount for the unused portion of the bond
payment
1.6.1.1 Contractor’s actual cost for insurance will be considered to be included within the Maximum
limit for General Conditions Costs. All premiums for any insurance and bonds required for
the Project must reflect the net actual costs to Contractor after taking into consideration cost
adjustments due
to experience modifiers, premium discounts, policy dividends,
retrospective rating plan premium adjustments, assigned risk pool rebates, refunds, etc.
1.6.1.2 The amount to be reimbursed to Contractor for all contractually required insurance will be
actual costs not to exceed a total of 2% of the Contract Value, unless Contractor
establishes to City’s satisfaction that the actual cost is higher and City agrees to such actual
higher cost in writing. If Contractor’s cost of contractually required insurance is greater
than the amount agreed to be reimbursed per this Contract Provision, the difference will
be considered to be covered by the Contractor’s Fee. The City will reimburse Contractor
for contractually required insurance on a monthly basis for GMP and Cost-Based
contracts. If Contractor can demonstrate substantial savings by paying for all insurance in
advance, the City may agree to reimburse all insurance costs at time of first pay application
App’d 1/8/21
APP-28 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 9 – CM@Risk & JOC
for GMP and Cost-Based contracts with proof of payment from Contractor.
1.6.2
Sales, use or similar taxes imposed by a governmental authority that are related to the Work.
1.6.3
Fees and assessments for the building permit and for other permits, licenses and
inspections for which Contractor is required by the Contract Documents to pay.
1.6.4
Fees of laboratories for tests required by the Contract Documents, except those related to
defective or nonconforming Work and which do not fall within the scope of ¶ 1.7.3 below.
1.6.5
Royalties and license fees paid for the use of a particular design, process or product
required by
the Contract Documents; the cost of defending suites or claims for
infringement of patent rights arising from such requirement of the Contract Documents; and
payments made in accordance with legal judgments against Contractor resulting from such
suites or claims and payments of settlements made with City’s consent. However, such
costs of legal defenses, judgments and settlements must not be included in the calculation
of the Contractor’s Fee or subject to the Guaranteed Maximum Price.
1.6.6
Data processing costs related to the Work. However, any such data processing costs will be
limited to the cost of personal computer hardware used at the field office in the
normal day to day administration, management and control of the Project. The
aggregate charges for any such hardware must not exceed the Fair Market Value of the
hardware at the time it was brought to the field office. If the total charges for any particular
piece of hardware reach an amount equal to the Fair Market Value, that particular piece of
hardware must be turned over to City whenever it is no longer needed for the Project. If
Contractor elects to keep the particular piece of hardware, the job costs must be credited
with a mutually agreeable amount which will represent the Fair Market Value of the
particular piece of hardware at the time it was no longer needed for the job. Software or
other costs associated with the use of computer programs will not be considered to be a
reimbursable cost and will be considered to be covered by the Contractor’s Fee.
1.6.7
Deposits lost for causes other than Contractor’s negligence or failure to fulfill a specific
responsibility to City as set forth in the Contract Documents.
1.6.8
Legal, mediation and arbitration costs, including attorneys’ fees, other than those arising
from disputes between City and Contractor, reasonably incurred by Contractor in the
performance of the Work and with City’s prior written approval; which approval will not be
unreasonably withheld.
1.6.9
Expenses incurred in accordance with Contractor’s standard personnel policy for relocation
and temporary living allowances of personnel required for the Work, if pre-approved by City
in writing. If City authorizes the reimbursement of relocation costs, the reimbursable
relocation expenses will be limited to a maximum of $50,000 per person. Any relocation
cost incurred by Contractor in excess of the amount reimbursed by City will be considered to
be covered by the Contractor’s Fee.
1.7
Other Costs and Emergencies
1.7.1
Other costs incurred in the performance of the Work if and to the extent approved in
App’d 1/8/21
APP-29 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 9 – CM@Risk & JOC
advance in writing by City.
1.7.2
Costs due to emergencies incurred in taking action to prevent threatened damage, injury or
loss in case of an emergency affecting the safety of persons and property.
1.7.3
Costs of repairing or correcting damaged or nonconforming Work executed by Contractor,
Subcontractors or Suppliers, provided that such damaged or nonconforming Work was not
caused by negligence or failure to fulfill a specific responsibility of Contractor and only to the
extent that the cost of repair or correction is not recoverable by Contractor from
insurance, sureties, Subcontractors or Suppliers.
1.8
Related Party Transactions
1.8.1
The term “related party” will mean a parent, subsidiary, affiliate or other entity having
common ownership or management with Contractor; any entity in which any stockholder in,
or management employee of, Contractor owns any interest in excess of ten percent in the
aggregate; or any person or entity which has the right to control the business or affairs of
Contractor. The term “related party” includes any member of the immediate family of any
person identified above.
1.8.2
If any of the costs to be reimbursed arise from a transaction between Contractor and a
related party, Contractor must notify City in writing of the specific nature of the
contemplated transaction, including the identity of the related party and the anticipated
cost to be incurred, before any such transaction is consummated or cost incurred. If City,
after such notification, authorizes in writing
the proposed transaction, then the cost
incurred will be included as a cost to be reimbursed, and Contractor must procure the Work,
equipment, goods or service from the related party, as a Subcontractor. If City fails to
authorize the transaction, Contractor must procure the Work, equipment, goods or
service from some person or entity other than a related party.
SECTION 2 – COSTS NOT TO BE REIMBURSED
2.1
The Cost of Work must not include:
2.1.1
Salaries and other compensation of Contractor’s personnel stationed at Contractor’s principal
office or offices other than the site office, except as specifically provided in Subparagraphs
1.2.2 and 1.2.3.
2.1.2
Expenses of Contractors’ principal office and offices other than the site office.
2.1.3
Overhead and general expenses, except as may be expressly included in Section 1.
2.1.3.1 Costs of Contractor’s home office computer services or other outside computer processing
services will be considered overhead and general expense. Accordingly, Contractor should
not plan to perform any such computer related services or alternatives at the field office
when such services or functions can be performed at Contractor’s home or branch offices,
or other outside service locations.
2.1.4
Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on Contractor’s capital employed for the Work.
App’d 1/8/21
APP-30 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 9 – CM@Risk & JOC
2.1.5
Rental costs of machinery and equipment, except as specifically provided in subparagraph
1.5.2.
2.1.6
Except as provided in Subparagraph 1.7.3 of the Agreement, costs due to the negligence or
failure to fulfill a specific responsibility of Contractor, Subcontractors and Suppliers or
anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts of them may be
liable.
2.1.7
Any cost not specifically and expressly described in Section 1.
2.1.8
Costs, other than costs included in Change Orders approved by City that would cause the
GMP to be exceeded.
SECTION 3 – DISCOUNTS, REBATES, REFUNDS AND SAVINGS
3.1
Cash discounts obtained on payments made by Contractor will accrue to City if (1) before
making the payment, Contractor included them in an Application for Payment and
received payment therefore from City, or (2) City has deposited funds with Contractor with
which to make payments; otherwise, cash discounts will accrue to Contractor. Trade
discounts, rebates, refunds and amounts received from sales or surplus materials and
equipment will accrue to City, and Contractor must make provisions so that they can be
secured.
3.1.1
Cost of the Work will be credited with all insurance policy discounts, performance and
payment bond rebates or refunds, refunds or return premiums from any Subcontractor
default insurance, refunds or rebates from any Contractor controlled insurance programs
applicable to the Project, merchandise rebates of any nature, refunds of any nature,
insurance dividends; and a portion of any volume rebates or free material credits earned
with purchase of material or other goods and services charged to the job.
3.1.2
“Cash” discounts which may accrue to Contractor will be limited to a maximum of 1.5% of
invoice cost. Any portion of “Cash” discounts greater than 1.5% will automatically accrue
to City if Contractor is eligible to take advantage of the discounts.
3.2
Amounts that accrue to City in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 3.1 will be
credited to City as a deduction from the Cost of the Work.
3.3
Any and all savings on the GMP, or any separately guaranteed items comprising the GMP,
will belong to City, subject to any express right in the Contract for Contractor to share in
savings. Savings are subject to City’s right to audit, and may be audited separately.
SECTION 4 – GENERAL CONDITIONS COSTS
4.1
General Conditions Costs may include, but are not limited to, the following types of costs
incurred by Contractor during construction of the Work to the extent they are reimbursable
Costs of the Work as delineated above: payroll costs for Work conducted at the site, payroll
costs for the superintendent and full-time general foremen, payroll costs for management
App’d 1/8/21
APP-31 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 9 – CM@Risk & JOC
personnel resident and working on the site workers not included as direct labor costs
engaged in support (e.g. loading/unloading, clean-up, etc.), administrative office personnel,
costs of offices and temporary facilities including office materials, office supplies, office
equipment, minor expenses, utilities, fuel, sanitary facilities and telephone services at the
site, costs of liability insurance premiums not included in labor burdens for direct labor
costs, costs of bond premiums, costs of consultants not in the direct employ of Contractor
or Subcontractors, fees for permits and licenses.
4.2
General Conditions Costs may be paid on a percentage of the Contract Price or on a
lump/stipulate sum basis as set forth in the Contract. All costs included in the General
Conditions Costs will not be separately invoiced to or paid by City.
4.3
The total amount of General Conditions Costs for the Work may be divided by the number of
days allowed for performance of the Work, to determine a fixed daily rate for General
Conditions Costs that may be used in computing the General Conditions Costs allocated to
any period of time, or for any adjustments in the General Conditions Costs agreed to in
writing by City.
App’d 1/8/21
APP-32 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 10
LANDSCAPE ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD
Section 1 – Description and General
Contractor is in direct control of work performed under the Landscape Establishment Period. If work
is subcontracted, a representative of the Contractor will be present at the site of the work for all
hours that the subcontractor works. Subcontracting of Landscape Establishment work will be
permitted for weed eradication with herbicides, because of special licensing. A licensed temporary
service may be used to supply labor to Contractor if Contractor has received approval from City
Representatives. Contractor will submit the required subcontract documentation.
Contractor must provide adequate personnel to accomplish the required maintenance of the plant
materials at intervals acceptable to City Representatives.
If not healthy at the end of the maintenance period, the maintenance must be continued until the
plant material is approved by City.
1.1 Time and Schedule
Unless otherwise expressly agreed to in writing by City, the Landscape Establishment Period will be
per General Conditions Section 6.5.4.
1.2 Planted Stock and Seeding Establishment
1.2.1
Tree planting and staking must be per City of Chandler Standard Detail C-801.
1.2.2
All trees will stand erect on their own without stakes when brought to this site. If the tree
cannot stand on its own when nursery stakes are removed, the tree will be removed and
replaced.
1.3 Pre-Emergent Herbicide and Weed Control
1.3.1
Contractor will provide three applications of an approved pre-emergent herbicide on all
unpaved areas of the project, as directed by City Representatives, to control weed growth in
all areas of the project. The number of applications may be increased as directed by the City
Representative, and at no additional cost to City, if the City Representative deems additional
applications are required to control weed growth.
1.3.2
Application sequence will be approved in advance by City. The first application of pre-
emergent will be completed prior to the application of Decomposed Granite and will be
included with the cost of the Decomposed Granite as specified and part of the Construction
Phase portion of work. The second application of pre-emergent will be completed after
installation of the Decomposed Granit and no later than half-way through the Landscape
Establishment Period. The third and final application of pre-emergent will be applied 15
days prior to completion of the Landscape Establishment portion of the project. The second
and third pre-emergent applications will be included with the cost of Landscape
Establishment. Watering will be completed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations, as included and as related to each application.
1.3.3
The pre-emergent herbicide will be applied in accordance with the Technical Specifications
and the recommendations of the pre-emergent herbicide manufacturer, as approved by
City Representatives.
App’d 1/8/21
APP-33 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 10
1.3.4
The control of weeds will be accomplished by the use of herbicides. Manual removal of
weeds will be required, after herbicides have taken affect.
1.3.5
Contractor is responsible for the removal and disposal of all trash and debris that during
the Landscape Establishment Period. Contractor will keep the project in a neat and orderly
manner during the duration of the Landscape Establishment Period.
1.4 Water
The water used during Landscape Establishment to properly maintain the plant material will be
furnished by City, at designated sources from within the project limits, at no charge to Contractor.
Contractor will be responsible for all equipment, materials and labor necessary to load, transport and
unload water for watering purposes.
1.5 Plant Material Replacements
The plant material replacement will be considered as included in the work for Landscape
Establishment, and will be made at no charge to the City.
1.5.1
Shrub and Plant Replacement - During the second half of the Landscaping Establishment
period, Contractor will provide, where required, plant replacements as follows:
Original Size
Replacement Size
1 gallon
5 gallon
5 gallon
15 gallon
15 gallon
24-inch box
36-inch box
48-inch box
1.5.2
Tree Replacement – During the second half of the Landscape Establishment Period,
Contractor will provide plant material replacements for existing plants that die as follows:
Existing Plant Material Sizes
Replacement Size
Trees:
2-inch Caliper
24-inch box
4-inch Caliper
36-inch box
6-inch Caliper and greater
54-inch box
Shrubs:
All Existing Shrubs
15 gallon
1.6 Measurement and Payment
See Technical Specifications for Measurement Payment provisions.
EXHIBIT C
City of Chandler Construction Manager at Risk Construction Services
TS-1
Public Works & Utilities Department, Capital Projects Division
Project Name: WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS – GMP 1
Project No.: WW1901.401
Rev.12/1/2020
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
GMP 1 12/20
SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
WRF IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT
GUARANTEED MAXIMUM PRICE (GMP) 1
CITY OF CHANDLER PUBLIC WORKS AND UTILITIES
DEPARTMENT
DECEMBER 10, 2020
The attention of the contractor submitting GMP for the above referenced project is called to
the following plans & specifications. The items set forth herein, whether of omission, addition,
substitution, or clarification, are all to be included as a procurement package as part of the
proposed work. Along with the specifications, preliminary drawings and
Process/Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs) of the filtration system are included for vendor
review. The vendor shall review the attached information and acknowledge/confirm
conformance of their proposal to the P&IDs and the layout of the equipment. Any modifications
required for the proper functioning of the proposed equipment shall be included along with the
proposal. If no information is provided in the bid package, it is assumed that the proposed
equipment will operate as specified within the reference layout and P&IDs provided with this
GMP. The vendor shall also include the duration required for shop drawing preparation and the
duration from the time of approved shop drawings to delivery of equipment on-site with the
bid package. In addition, the vendor shall provide expedited durations for shop drawing
preparation and equipment delivery from time of approved shop drawings along with
associated costs in the bid package as a separate line item.
Include the following Specification Sections and Figures in the Contract Documents.
I. CONTRACT AND SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 01010 – Summary of Work
Include Section 01010 – Summary of Work attached as Attachment One of this
Procurement Package.
SECTION 01300 – Submittals
Include Section 01300 – Submittals attached as Attachment One of this
Procurement Package.
GMP 1 12/20
SECTION 01640 – Materials and Equipment
Include Section 01640 – Materials and Equipment attached as Attachment One of
this Procurement Package.
SECTION 01650 – Starting of Systems
Include Section 01650 – Starting of Systems attached as Attachment One of this
Procurement Package.
SECTION 01660 – Field Tests of Equipment
Include Section 01660 – Field Tests of Equipment attached as Attachment One of
this Procurement Package.
SECTION 01730 – Operation and Maintenance Data
Include Section 01730 – Operation and Maintenance Data attached as
Attachment One of this Procurement Package.
SECTION 01750 – Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials
Include Section 01750 – Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials attached as
Attachment One of this Procurement Package.
SECTION 01821 – Instruction of Operations and Maintenance Personnel
Include Section 01821 – Instruction of Operations and Maintenance Personnel
attached as Attachment One of this Procurement Package.
SECTION 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete
Include Section 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete attached as Attachment One of
this Procurement Package.
SECTION 09900 – Painting
Include Section 09900 – Painting attached as Attachment One of this
Procurement Package.
SECTION 11285 – Hydraulic Gates and Stop Logs
Include Section 11285 – Hydraulic Gates and Stop Logs attached as Attachment
One of this Procurement Package.
GMP 1 12/20
SECTION 11400 – Disc Filters
Include Section 11400 – Disc Filters attached as Attachment One of this
Procurement Package.
SECTION 13447 – Electric Motor Actuators
Include Section 13447 – Electric Motor Actuators attached as Attachment One of
this Procurement Package.
SECTION 16160 – Enclosures
Include Section 16160 – Enclosures attached as Attachment One of this
Procurement Package.
SECTION 16161 – Control Panels
Include Section 16161 – Control Panels attached as Attachment One of this
Procurement Package.
SECTION 16170 – Grounding and Bonding
Include Section 16170 – Grounding and Bonding attached as Attachment One of
this Procurement Package.
SECTION 16225 – Electric Motors 250 HP or Less
Include Section 16225 – Electric Motors 250 HP or Less attached as Attachment
One of this Procurement Package.
SECTION 16474 – Motor Control Equipment
Include Section 16474 – Motor Control Equipment attached as Attachment One of
this Procurement Package.
SECTION 16476 – Low Voltage Circuit Breakers
Include Section 16476 – Low Voltage Circuit Breakers attached as Attachment
One of this Procurement Package.
SECTION 16482 – Solid State Motor Controllers
Include Section 16482 – Solid State Motor Controllers attached as Attachment
One of this Procurement Package.
GMP 1 12/20
SECTION 16951 – Short Circuit, Coordination, and Arc-Flash Hazard Report
Include Section 16951 – Short Circuit, Coordination, and Arc-Flash Hazard Report
attached as Attachment One of this Procurement Package.
SECTION 17325 – Turbidity and TSS Analyzer
Include Section 17325 – Turbidity and TSS Analyzer attached as Attachment One
of this Procurement Package.
SECTION 17454 – Operations and Control Description
Include Section 17454 – Operations and Control Description attached as
Attachment One of this Procurement Package.
II. FIGURES (PRELIMINARY – FOR RFERENCE ONLY)
FIGURE 1 – Airport WRF Filters Overall Plan
Figure 1 – Airport WRF Filters Overall Plan attached as Attachment Two of this
Procurement Package.
FIGURE 2 – Airport WRF Filter Basin 5 Plan
Figure 2 – Airport WRF Filter Basin 5 Plan attached as Attachment Two of this
Procurement Package.
FIGURE 3 – Airport WRF Filter Pump Gallery
Figure 3 – Airport WRF Filter Pump Gallery Plan attached as Attachment Two of
this Procurement Package.
FIGURE 4 – Airport WRF Filter Section 1
Figure 4 – Airport WRF Filter Section 1 attached as Attachment Two of this
Procurement Package.
FIGURE 5 – Airport WRF Filter DS1 P&ID – Sheet 1 of 3
Figure 5 – Airport WRF Filter Section 1 attached as Attachment Two of this
Procurement Package.
FIGURE 6 – Airport WRF Filter DS1 P&ID – Sheet 2 of 3
Figure 6 – Airport WRF Filter Section 1 attached as Attachment Two of this
Procurement Package.
GMP 1 12/20
FIGURE 7 – Airport WRF Filter DS1 P&ID – Sheet 3 of 3
Figure 7 – Airport WRF Filter Section 1 attached as Attachment Two of this
Procurement Package.
FIGURE 8 – Ocotillo WRF Filters Overall Plan
Figure 8 – Ocotillo WRF Filters Overall Plan attached as Attachment Two of this
Procurement Package.
FIGURE 9 – Ocotillo WRF Filter Basin 4 Plan
Figure 9 – Ocotillo WRF Filter Basin 4 Plan attached as Attachment Two of this
Procurement Package.
FIGURE 10 – Ocotillo WRF Filter Pump Gallery
Figure 10 – Ocotillo WRF Filter Pump Gallery Plan attached as Attachment Two of
this Procurement Package.
FIGURE 11 – Ocotillo WRF Filter Section 1
Figure 11 – Ocotillo WRF Filter Section 1 attached as Attachment Two of this
Procurement Package.
FIGURE 12 – Ocotillo WRF Filter DS1 P&ID – Sheet 1 of 3
Figure 12 – Ocotillo WRF Filter Section 1 attached as Attachment Two of this
Procurement Package.
FIGURE 13 – Ocotillo WRF Filter DS1 P&ID – Sheet 2 of 3
Figure 13 – Ocotillo WRF Filter Section 1 attached as Attachment Two of this
Procurement Package.
FIGURE 14 – Ocotillo WRF Filter DS1 P&ID – Sheet 3 of 3
Figure 14 – Ocotillo WRF Filter Section 1 attached as Attachment Two of this
Procurement Package.
GMP 1 12/20
ATTACHMENT ONE
GMP 1 - Specifications
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01010-1
GMP 1
SECTION 01010
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - UGENERAL
1.1 USUMMARY
A. The Work to be accomplished under the Pre-Procurement Package Contract
Documents consists of procuring the equipment required to install:
1.
Six Disc Filters and all accessories at the Airport WRF.
2.
Four Disc Filters and all accessories at the Ocotillo WRF.
3.
Gates and actuators for the Chandler WRF improvements Project.
B. The following work/notes pertain to both Airport WRF and Ocotillo WRF:
a.
Provide minimum of one year warranty on all warranted materials and
labor.
b.
Provide one year warranty on start-up assistance.
c.
Provide on-site, hands-on operator training.
d.
All other miscellaneous work as specified in the Contract Documents.
C. A subsequent package of Contract Documents will include the remainder of the
Work for the Chandler WRF Improvements Project including installation of
equipment procured as part of this package.
1.2 UACCESS TO AND FROM THE SITE
A. The address for the Chandler Airport WRF is 905 East Queen Creek Road.
1.
The CONTRACTOR'S personnel shall ingress and egress the site utilizing
the existing west entrance to the site.
B. The address for the Chandler Ocotillo WRF is 3315 South Old Price Road.
1.
The CONTRACTOR'S personnel shall ingress and egress the site utilizing
the existing southwest entrance to the site.
1.3 UDESCRIPTION OF SITE
A. The Airport WRF site is located southwest of the Chandler Airport. The property
is bounded by Queen Creek Road on the north, McQueen Road on the east, and
Appleby Road (a dirt road) on the south. The Consolidated Canal passes through
the southeast corner of the property.
B. The Ocotillo WRF site is bounded by Queen Creek Road on the north, S. Price Rd
Road on the east, and Old Price Rd on the west.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01010-2
GMP 1
1.4 UPROXIMITY TO CHANDLER MUNICIPAL AIRPORT
A. The proximity of the Airport WRF site to the Chandler Municipal Airport, as a
minimum, can create the following concerns:
1.
Aircraft noise levels.
2.
Obstructions to air navigation.
3.
Radio Telemetry Interference.
4.
Bird strike hazards to aircraft.
B. Obstructions to Air Navigation:
1.
Part 77 of the Federal Aviation Regulations (FAR) relates to potential
obstructions to air navigation. Due to this Project's proximity to an airport,
the FAR requires that a Notice of Proposed Construction be filed with the
Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) for this Project. The FAA may
require obstruction marking or lighting on construction equipment or may
limit the height of construction equipment that can be used on this site.
2.
The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for notifying the appropriate
agencies, obtaining all required permits, and complying with applicable
regulations.
C. Radio Telemetry Interference:
1.
The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for coordination of construction
site communications to prevent interference with aircraft communications
and navigation.
D. Bird Strike Hazards to Aircraft:
1.
There is a potential for serious damage to an aircraft if the aircraft strikes a
bird. The potential for bird strikes is increased by open bodies of water,
refuse piles, or other activities which may attract birds.
2.
The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for mitigation of all such activities
associated with the Project.
E. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for public safety related to all Work at
the WRF site.
F. CONTRACTOR shall provide copies of all documentation/correspondence
referenced in this section to the ENGINEER for reference.
1.5 UPROXIMITY TO CHANDLER MUNICIPAL TRANSFER STATION
A. The City of Chandler Municipal Transfer Station is located adjacent to the Airport
WRF. Construction activities shall not interfere with operation of the transfer
station.
B. City of Chandler Solid Waste Management Department utilizes the northwest
portion of the site for storage and as a work yard. Construction activities shall not
hinder normal operations.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01010-3
GMP 1
PART 2 - UPRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - UEXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01300-1
GMP 1
SECTION 01300
SUBMITTALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The CONTRACTOR shall include a completed transmittal form for all
submittals. Transmittal forms will be furnished to CONTRACTOR by
ENGINEER at the pre-construction conference. Submittals shall be sent to the
ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR shall deliver and pick up submittals from
ENGINEER'S office located at 1620 W. Fountainhead Pkwy, Suite 501, Tempe,
AZ 85282, between the hours of 7:00 a.m. and 4:00 p.m. All submittals shall be
addressed to Sreeram Rengaraj.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Shop Drawings.
B. Material and equipment record.
C. Samples.
D. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals.
E. Progress Schedule.
F. Progress reports.
G. Daily reports.
H. Testing results.
I.
Pre-construction video.
J.
Construction photographs.
K. Record Drawings.
L. Spare parts lists.
M. List of spare parts furnished.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01300-2
GMP 1
1.3 DATA REFERENCE SYMBOLS AND DESCRIPTIONS
A. The submittal data required for Shop Drawings and operations manuals shall
contain, but not necessarily be limited to, that data and material as defined by the
coded legend set forth below. The submittal data required shall be as indicated
and specified under various headings of the Specifications.
1.
Letters of Certification of Compliance on materials, equipment, etc.
2.
Samples.
3.
Final Certified Drawings showing outline dimensions, foundation layout or
mounting information, and other pertinent dimensions.
4.
Field erection instructions, assembly drawings and/or diagrams, detailed
reference drawing lists, lists of erection details, and list of spare parts
supplied with equipment.
5.
Shop Detail Drawings showing individual sub- assemblies and fabricated
pieces with material specifications and other applicable data.
6.
Installation instructions, operating and/or service manuals, and all other data
pertinent to operating or servicing the complete apparatus. Preventative
maintenance instructions and recommended frequency.
7.
Schematic and wiring diagrams of power, control, and piping systems. A
detailed description of operation shall be included for each diagram to
describe all modes of operation of the system indicated. Where the integrated
system requires interlocking and control of other components in normal
operation, these components shall be included in the description of operation.
8.
General bulletins and catalog cuts describing complete apparatus, including
operating principles and fundamentals.
9.
Service data sheets showing design performance, utility requirements, etc., as
applicable to the specific duty for which the equipment is furnished.
10. Certified head and capacity curves for pumps. Impeller size furnished and
maximum size available shall be noted on these data sheets.
11. Curves and/or data for overall range of operation from minimum to
maximum capacity or load, showing capacity or load, utilities motive
medium required, total or incremental differential head, and other pertinent
information applicable to the equipment or its component assemblies.
12. Materials of construction of all components.
13. Renewal parts list with diagrammatic or cross-section drawings showing part
identification. Material analysis or trades designation for each significant
part is to be noted on parts lists or on a separate sheet.
14. Stuffing box sizes; packing sizes; specifications and arrangement; and
mechanical seal details, specifications, etc., if furnished in equipment.
15. Bearing manufacturer's standard identification and/or interchangeable number
for all anti-friction bearings in the equipment proper and its accessory items.
16. Material gradation, design mix, job mix formula, and/or material analysis.
17. Concrete reinforcement drawings, details, and calculations. Reinforcement
drawings shall be redrawn by the CONTRACTOR to allow for clarity and
scale necessary for easy review by the ENGINEER.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01300-3
GMP 1
18. Competed equipment data sheets.
B. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all
referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each
paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to
indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks ()
shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the
specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the CONTRACTOR, each
deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right
of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the
reasons for requesting the deviation. The ENGINEER shall be the final authority
for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The CONTRACTOR shall
furnish equipment and/or services as specified if an exception and/or deviation is
rejected. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify
compliance on the part of the CONTRACTOR with the specifications. Failure to
include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s)
for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal
shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further
consideration.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall submit the preventive maintenance information
package as part of the shop drawing submittal package to the ENGINEER for
review and approval. SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL PACKAGE WILL
NOT BE APPROVED WITHOUT ACCEPTANCE OF PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION.
1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. A minimum of 1 hard copy of Shop Drawings is required for each submittal.
Each submittal shall also include one electronic copy in the latest version of
Adobe Acrobat (PDF Extension). Hard copies will not be returned. Disposition
of the Shop Drawings will be in accordance with the following schedule:
Action by
ENGINEER
Retained by
ENGINEER
Returned to
CONTRACTOR
No. Required
for Resubmittal
Approved
1
0
0
Approved as Corrected
1
0
0
Approved as Corrected, Resubmit
1
0
1
Revise and Resubmit
0
1
1
Rejected
0
1
1
No Action Taken
1
0
0
B. The ENGINEER shall return Shop Drawings to the CONTRACTOR within 35
days of receipt by the ENGINEER.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01300-4
GMP 1
C. One copy of returned Shop Drawings shall be marked with red line comments.
D. Only one copy of "Revise and Resubmit", "Rejected", and "No Action Taken"
Shop Drawings will be stamped.
E. If the CONTRACTOR requires additional copies of "No Exceptions Noted",
"Exceptions Noted", or "No Action Taken" Shop Drawings, additional copies
shall be included in original submittal.
F. The CONTRACTOR may request submittals be reviewed up to two times for
each equipment or construction material item, regardless of manufacturer or
supplier, by the ENGINEER. For additional reviews, CONTRACTOR will
reimburse the ENGINEER for additional labor as specified in Section 01013,
Engineering Services.
G. The CONTRACTOR will be held responsible for any delay in progress of the
Work due to resubmittal of Shop Drawings. Time for completion of the Contract
will not be extended due to the CONTRACTOR'S failure to promptly submit
complete and acceptable Shop Drawings, product data, and samples.
H. Do not execute Work required by Shop Drawings until accepted Shop Drawings
are received from the ENGINEER.
I.
Before submitting Shop Drawings for review, the CONTRACTOR shall check
Shop Drawings for accuracy, ascertain that all Work contiguous with and having
bearing on other Work shown on Shop Drawings is accurately drawn, and that
Work shown is in conformity with Contract requirements. The CONTRACTOR
is responsible for all submittals from subcontractors and suppliers.
J.
All such Drawings and details, when submitted, must bear the stamp of approval
of the CONTRACTOR, bearing checked data, as evidence that such Drawings and
details have been checked by him. Said "stamp" shall clearly state that the
CONTRACTOR has checked the Drawings and, by his signature, he so certifies.
Any Drawings submitted without such executed stamp of approval, or whenever it
is evident (despite the stamp) that the Drawings have not been checked, they will
be returned to the CONTRACTOR for resubmission and will not be considered.
In such event, it will be deemed that the CONTRACTOR has not complied with
this provision and the CONTRACTOR shall bear risk of all delays to the same
extent as if no Drawings or details had been submitted.
K. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare composite Drawings and installation layouts,
when required to solve tight field conditions. Such Drawings shall consist of
dimensioned plans and elevations, and must give complete information
particularly as to size and location of sleeves, inserts, attachments, openings,
conduits, ducts, boxes, structural interferences, etc. These composite Drawings
and installation layouts shall be coordinated in the field by the CONTRACTOR
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01300-5
GMP 1
and his subcontractors for proper relationship to the work of other trades, based on
field conditions, and shall be checked and approved by them before submission to
the ENGINEER for his final review. The CONTRACTOR shall have competent
technical personnel readily available for such coordinating and checking, as well
as for supervision of field installation of work as per the Drawings and installation
layouts, which have been previously determined by him to be correct and carry the
ENGINEER'S review stamp.
L. Submission of Shop Drawings (in either original submission or when resubmitted
with corrections) constitute evidence that the CONTRACTOR has checked all
information thereon, and that he accepts and is willing to perform the Work as
shown in a workmanlike manner and in accordance with best standard practice.
M. Cost of any changes in construction due to improper checking and coordination by
the CONTRACTOR shall be paid for by the CONTRACTOR, and the
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all additional costs, including
coordination.
N. Shop Drawings shall clearly delineate the following information:
1.
ENGINEER'S name and Project number; Project name and address.
2.
Drawing title, number, date, and scale.
3.
Names of CONTRACTOR, Subcontractor, and fabricator.
4.
Working and erection dimensions.
5.
Arrangements and sectional views.
6.
Necessary details, including complete information for making connections
with other work.
7.
Kinds of materials and finishes.
8.
Show descriptive names of materials and equipment, classified item numbers,
and locations at which materials or equipment are to be installed in the Work.
Use same reference identification as shown on Contract Drawings.
O. If Shop Drawings show variations from Contract Documents because of standard
shop practice or other reasons, make specific mention of such variations in a
separate memo attached to information listed in Paragraph 1.3.B of this Section.
P. Shop drawing review will be general. It shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of
responsibility for accuracy of such Shop Drawings, nor proper fitting, construction
of Work, furnishing of materials, or Work required by Contract Documents and
not indicated on Shop Drawings. Shop drawing review shall not be construed as
approving departures from Contract Documents.
Q. Review of Shop Drawings and schedules shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR
from responsibility for any violation indicated on such Drawings or schedules of
local, County, State, or Federal laws, rules, ordinances, or rules and regulations of
commissions, boards, or other authorities or utilities having jurisdiction.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01300-6
GMP 1
R. When product data, consisting of manufacturer's printed literature, is required to
be submitted to the ENGINEER, it shall be submitted in original form. Any
fading type of reproduction will not be accepted. Pertinent information shall be
indicated and irrelevant information shall be crossed out.
S. Action taken by ENGINEER shall apply to entire submittal. ENGINEER shall
not approve portions of a submittal while disapproving other portions.
T. Resubmitted submittal shall contain entirety of information to review.
U. The following is a list of anticipated submittals for this project, however it may
not be a complete list. This list does not alleviate Contractor from obligations of
requirements of each individual Technical Specification that may require
additional information. See individual Technical Specification Sections for
additional requirements.
CHANDLER WRF IMPROVEMENTS – PROCUREMENT SUBMITTAL LISTING
ITEM
NO.
SPEC
SECT
DESCRIPTION OF SUBMITTAL
1
01650
STARTING OF SYSTEMS
2
01730
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
3
01750
SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
4
01821
INSTRUCTION OF O & M PERSONNEL
5
03300
CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
6
09900
PAINTING
7
11285
HYDRAULIC GATES
8
11295
HYDRAULIC VALVES
9
11400
DISC FILTERS
10
13447
ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS
11
16160
EMCLOSURES
12
16161
CONTROL PANELS
13
16170
GROUNDING AND BONDING
14
16225
ELECTRIC MOTORS 250 HORSEPOWER OR LESS
15
16474
MOTOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT
16
16476
LOW VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
17
16482
SOLID STATE MOTOR CONTROLLERS
18
16951
SHORT CIRCUIT, COORDINATION, AND ARC-FLASH HAZARD REPORT
19
17325
TURBIDITY AND TSS ANALYZER
20
17454
OPERATIONS AND CONTROL DESCRIPTION
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01300-7
GMP 1
1.5 PROCEDURE
A. A letter of transmittal shall accompany each submittal. If data for more than one
Section of the Specifications is submitted, a separate transmittal letter shall
accompany the data submitted for each Section.
B. All letters of transmittal shall be submitted in duplicate.
C. At the beginning of each letter of transmittal, provide a reference heading indicating
the following:
1.
OWNER'S Name City of Chandler
2.
Project Name
WRF Improvements Project
3.
Contract No.
4.
Transmittal No.
5.
Section No.
D. If any portion of a Shop Drawing deviates from the requirements of the Contract
Documents, CONTRACTOR shall specifically note each variation in his letter of
transmittal.
E. All Shop Drawings submitted for approval shall have a title block with complete
identifying information satisfactory to ENGINEER.
F. All Shop Drawings submitted shall bear the stamp of approval and signature of
CONTRACTOR as evidence that they have been reviewed and verified to the
completeness of the submittal by CONTRACTOR. Submittal without this stamp of
approval will not be reviewed by ENGINEER and will be returned to
CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR'S stamp shall contain the following minimum
information:
Project Name: WRF Improvements Project
CONTRACTOR'S Name:
Date:
---------------------Reference----------------------
Item:
Specifications:
Section:
Page No.:
Para. No.:
Drawing No.: ____________________ of
Location:
Submittal No.:
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01300-8
GMP 1
Approved By:
G. In order to identify and track all submittals as separate and unique items,
CONTRACTOR shall utilize the submittal identification numbering system as
follows:
1.
The Submittal Number shall be a separate and unique number correlating to
each individual submittal that is required to be tracked as a separate and unique
item. The Submittal Number shall be a two part, nine character, alpha/numeric
number assigned by CONTRACTOR in the following manner:
a.
The first part of the Submittal Number shall consist of five characters that
pertain to the applicable Specification Section number.
b.
The second part of the Submittal Number shall consist of three numbers.
The first digit identifies the Submittal type as follows:
1) 0 - Shop Drawing.
2) 1 - Operations and Maintenance Manual.
3) 2 - Training Manual.
c.
The second and third digits (numbers 01 to 99) number each separate and
unique Submittal submitted under each Specification Section.
d.
A dash shall separate the two parts of the Submittal Number.
e.
A typical Submittal Number for the third Working Shop Drawing
submitted under Section 11400, Disc Filter System, would be 11400-0.03.
f.
A typical Submittal Number for the first Working Operations and
Maintenance Manual submitted under Section 11285, Hydraulic Gates,
would be 11285-1.01.
1.6 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT RECORD
A. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain an up-to-date record of all materials and
equipment furnished by him and any subcontractors to be incorporated in the
Work.
1.
The ENGINEER will furnish the CONTRACTOR a master of the materials
and equipment form. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain the records on
reproductions of this form in the field office.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the following information on these forms:
1.
The Specification Paragraph and Section Number where material or
equipment are called for.
2.
Date ordered.
3.
Date required.
4.
The CONTRACTOR'S purchase order number.
5.
Supplier's purchase order number.
6.
Date promised.
7.
Date received.
8.
Supplier's name and address.
9.
Remarks.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01300-9
GMP 1
10. Shop Drawings and samples with approval date.
11. Physical dimensions and ratings.
12. Where submittal sheet describes items in addition to that item being
submitted, the submitted item shall be clearly marked on the sheet and
superfluous information shall be crossed out.
C. Three copies of the materials and equipment record shall be submitted to the
ENGINEER with each Application for Payment. If the current record has not
been submitted, the Application shall not be reviewed and shall be returned to the
CONTRACTOR as incomplete.
D. The CONTRACTOR shall permit free access to these records, including
information on items recently received and not yet posted to the record by the
ENGINEER or authorized representative of the OWNER at any time.
1.7 SAMPLES
A. Deliver no material to the building site prior to receipt of the ENGINEER'S
written approval. Furnish materials equal in every respect to approved samples
and execute Work in conformity therewith. Samples shall be provided with
respective Shop Drawings.
B. The approval or acceptance of samples will not preclude the rejection of any
material upon the discovery of defects in same prior to the Final Acceptance of the
completed Work.
C. After a material has been approved, no change in brand or make will be permitted
unless satisfactory written evidence is presented to and approved by the
ENGINEER that the manufacturer cannot make scheduled delivery of approved
material, or that material delivered has been rejected and substitution of suitable
material is an urgent necessity, or that other conditions are apparent which
indicate approval of such substitute materials to be in best interest of the
OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall provide complete Shop Drawings for
replacement product.
D. All samples of materials requiring laboratory tests shall be submitted to laboratory
for testing not less than 90 days before such materials are required to be used in
the work. Submit all other samples for approval within 30 days after signing of
the Contract.
E. Submit samples in duplicate, except where greater or lesser number is specifically
required by these Specifications. Submittal shall be made only by the
CONTRACTOR, unless he has authorized his subcontractor to submit them and
has notified the ENGINEER to this effect.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01300-10
GMP 1
F. Each sample shall be accompanied by a Shop Drawing form and an itemized
transmittal form. The transmittal shall contain list of samples, Project,
CONTRACTOR, manufacturer, brand, quarry, quality, etc.; also Project number,
Specifications reference, ASTM number (if any), and material being furnished.
Enclose copies of transmittal with samples. Any deviation from Contract
requirements shall be so stated in the transmittal.
G. Label each sample by a securely attached label giving the Project,
CONTRACTOR, subcontractor or supplier, manufacturer's name, product trade
name and number, material type, Specification Section and Paragraph reference
etc.; also Project name and number and ASTM number (if any).
H. Samples shall be of adequate size to permit proper evaluation. The samples
submitted shall show the full range of colors, textures and dimensions, and other
variable characteristics expected. Samples of different items that must match or
whose finish relates shall be delivered at the same time to facilitate coordination.
Samples which are rejected by the ENGINEER must be resubmitted as soon as
possible after notification of rejection, and shall be marked "Resubmitted Sample"
in addition to other information required.
I.
The right is reserved to require submission of samples of any material, any
material lists, or any information whether or not specifically specified in the
Specifications.
1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. One hard copy and one electronic copy in PDF format of an Operations and
Maintenance (O&M) Manual containing the following items, in addition to any
instructions packed with the equipment, are required for each individual item of
equipment:
1.
Specifications.
2.
Drawings.
3.
Description of each individual item of equipment.
4.
Manufacturer name, model number, and serial numbers.
5.
Name address and phone number of both the manufacturer's customer service
department and the local manufacturer's representative.
6.
Installation instructions.
7.
Operation and maintenance instructions, including lubrication schedule and
lubricant specification.
8.
Parts list and part numbers.
9.
Additional data to be included in the manual shall be as required in these
Specifications.
10. Temporary storage recommendations.
11. Warranty information.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01300-11
GMP 1
B. O&M Manuals are to be submitted to the ENGINEER upon delivery of the
equipment to the site. Overall Project substantial completion will not be
scheduled until all manuals are approved. Training shall not be scheduled until
O&M Manuals are approved. Training shall not be scheduled until 30 days
following delivery of approved O&M Manuals to the OWNER. Training shall be
scheduled based on draft O&M Manuals upon approval of ENGINEER.
C. The respective manuals for the individual items of equipment shall be combined
into bound volumes covering the complete operating installation with individual
equipment items tabled separately. Information for equipment subassemblies not
manufactured by the major supplier shall also be included with the respective
equipment item.
D. Manuals for particular items of equipment which are in the same area (i.e., IMLR
Pumps and Submersible Mixers) should be bound in the same volume where
practicable.
E. Upon completion of the installation of each item of equipment, the
CONTRACTOR shall provide As-Built Drawings of the local control panel to be
added to the O&M Manual, as well as set-up parameters such as those required for
VFDs, instrumentation, calibration, etc. Manuals for particular items of
equipment which are in the same area (i.e., belt press, belt press feed pumps, and
conveyors) should be bound in the same volume where practicable.
F. O&M Manuals shall be submitted in 3-ring binders meeting the following criteria:
1.
Binders shall be Wilson Jones Custom View Organization, D-Ring, white,
non-stick, back mounted, binder models 362-13W, 386-14W, 386-34W, 386-
44W, 386-49W, or 386-54W; or approved equal.
2.
Binder cover insert shall be created using a Microsoft word template supplied
by ENGINEER. Modifications to the template shall be approved by the
ENGINEER prior to submission of the O&M Manuals. The binder cover
insert shall include the Specification number and title as presented within the
Contract Documents, manufacturer name, year of purchase, year and month
that equipment was placed into operation.
3.
Binder spine insert shall be created using a Microsoft word template supplied
by ENGINEER. Modifications to the template shall be approved by the
ENGINEER prior to submission of the O&M Manuals. The spine insert shall
include the Specification number and title as presented within the Contract
Documents, manufacturer name, year of purchase, year and month that
equipment was placed into operation. Spine insert shall read top to bottom.
1.9 PROGRESS SCHEDULE
A. Progress Schedule as defined in Section 01310, Progress Schedule.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01300-12
GMP 1
1.10 DAILY REPORTS
A. The CONTRACTOR will provide to the ENGINEER a daily report on a form
provided by the ENGINEER indicating the Work in progress, Work completed,
equipment used, numbers and category of personnel, and such other pertinent
information as applicable. The daily reports shall be compiled and submitted
monthly with the Application for Payment. The Application for Payment will not
be reviewed and shall be returned to the CONTRACTOR as incomplete if the
reports do not accompany it.
1.11 TESTING RESULTS
A. CONTRACTOR shall furnish to the ENGINEER copies of all testing results for
all tests required in the Specifications.
1.12 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Construction photographs as defined in Section 01380, Construction Photographs.
1.13 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Drawings as defined in Section 01700, Contract Closeout. The
CONTRACTOR shall update Record Drawings Monthly and make available for
review to the ENGINEER monthly one week prior to the Application for Payment
submittal. Failure of the CONTRACTOR to maintain updated Record Drawings
can be justification for refusal of Application for Payment.
1.14 UNIT RESPONSIBILITY
A. This Section contains the required Unit Responsibility Form for the
CONTRACTOR to use in documenting Work required under this Contract.
B. The Unit Responsibility Form provided in Appendix A to this Section is
referenced from other Sections in the Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR
shall submit it with the applicable equipment as required in those Sections.
1.15 CONTRACTOR'S FORMS
A. This Section contains the required forms for CONTRACTOR use in documenting
testing Work and other Work required under this Contract. This Section
supplements, but does not supersede, specific testing requirements found
elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
B. The forms listed below are included in this Section are referenced from other
Sections in the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR may utilize standard forms
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01300-13
GMP 1
when authorized by ENGINEER. Forms will include, but will not necessarily be
limited to, the following.
Form Designation
Title
A
Schedule of Values
B
Shop Drawings, Product Data and Sample Transmittal
Schedule
C
Request for Change Order Proposal
D
Change Order Proposal
E
Request for Information
F
Request for Alteration
G
CONTRACTOR'S Daily Construction Report
H
Equipment Information Form
I
Manufacturer's Installation Certification Form
J
Equipment Test Report Form
K
Operation and Maintenance Transmittal Form
L
Manufacturer's Instruction Certification Form
M
Motor Data Form
N
Wire and Cable Resistance Test Data Form
O
Installed Motor Test Data Form
P
Dry Transformer Test Data Form
Q
Motor Control Center Test Form
R
Medium Voltage Motor Starter Test Form
S
Medium Voltage Switchgear Test Form
T
Protective Relay Test Form
U
Low Voltage Switchgear Test Form
V
Medium Voltage Load Interrupter Switch Test Form
W
Liquid-Filled Transformer Test Form
X
Automatic Transfer Switch Test Form
Y
Neutral Grounding Resistor Test
Z
Conduit and Wire Termination Sheet (not included)
AA
Loop Wiring and Insulation Resistance Test Data Form
BB
Control Circuit Piping Leak Test Form
CC
Controller Calibration Test Data Form
DD
Panel Indicator Calibration Test Data Form
EE
Recorder Calibration Test Data Form
FF
Signal Trip Calibration Test Data Form
GG
Field Switch Calibration Test Data Form
HH
Transmitter Calibration Test Data Form
II
Miscellaneous Instrument Calibration Test Data Form
JJ
Individual Loop Test Data Form
KK
Loop Commissioning Test Data Form
LL
Pipe Test Report
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01300-14
GMP 1
C. CONTRACTOR shall complete the above referenced forms prior to start-up of
each piece of equipment, as listed in the Equipment and Valve Schedule. Each
form shall pertain to each equipment number.
D. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for approval one month after
completion of start-up, 3-ring binders with tabs for each process area and include
all the forms completed prior to start-up. The forms shall be further tabbed within
each process area of each form designation as listed above. For example, the
Chemical Facilities tab (22) shall include separate tabs for forms H, J, K, and etc.
The CONTRACTOR shall submit five copies of all 3-ring binders to the
ENGINEER for approval.
E. All forms are provided in Appendix B of this Section.
1.16 ADDITIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. All additional submittals as required by the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01300-15
GMP 1
APPENDIX A - Unit Responsibility Form
(Job Title)
CERTIFICATE OF UNIT RESPONSIBILITY
for Specification Section
(Section title)
In accordance with Paragraph 01600.1.2.B of the Contract Documents,
the undersigned manufacturer accepts unit responsibility for all
components of equipment furnished under specification
Section . We hereby certify that these components are
compatible and comprise a functional unit suitable for the specified
performance and design requirements.
Notary Public
Name of Corporation
Commission expiration date
Address
Seal:
By:
Duly Authorized Official
Legal Title of Official
Date:
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01640-1
GMP 1
SECTION 01640
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all materials and equipment and perform all
operations required to completely install and place in operation the various
mechanical apparatus and systems indicated on the Drawings and as specified
herein. It is not the intention to mention herein each and every item required.
However, all installations shall be complete and operable in the methods intended.
These general equipment requirements apply, in general, to all equipment. They
shall supplement the detailed Equipment Specifications, but in case of conflict,
the Equipment Specifications shall govern.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01300, Submittals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Materials and equipment shall be of new, of first quality and best grade,
essentially the standard catalog products of reputable manufacturers, and shall be
of the type, size, and capacity, and for the type of service specified. It is the intent
of these Specifications that the highest quality equipment shall be provided for the
intended service. Units proposed shall be carefully matched to the particular
hydraulic and mechanical requirements for each installation, and the
CONTRACTOR shall submit complete hydraulic and mechanical data for
approval of the ENGINEER. Where two or more units of the same class of
equipment are required, these units shall be the products of a single manufacturer;
however, the component parts of the system need not be the products of the same
manufacturer unless otherwise specified.
1.
Materials and Workmanship. Materials used in the manufacture of the
equipment shall be of the best quality used for the purpose in commercial
practice. Materials shall be suitable for service conditions. Iron castings
shall be tough, close-grained gray iron free from blowholes, flaws, or
excessive shrinkage, and shall conform to ASTM A48. Except where
otherwise specified, structural and miscellaneous fabricated steel used in
items of equipment shall conform to the Standards of the American Institute
of Steel Construction. All structural members shall be considered as subject
to shock or vibratory loads. Unless otherwise specified, all steel which will
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01640-2
GMP 1
be submerged, all or in part, during normal operation of the equipment shall
have a minimum nominal thickness of 1/4-inch. Equipment shall be installed
in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer and the best
standard practice for each type of equipment.
2.
Approval of Materials, Equipment, and Shop Drawings. Detailed Shop
Drawings shall be prepared for the equipment to be furnished under this
Project. General Drawings for equipment will not be acceptable. Approval
of equipment under this provision shall not be construed as authorizing any
deviations from the Specification unless the attention of the ENGINEER has
been directed to the specific deviation.
a.
The decision of the ENGINEER on any questions concerning the
acceptability of materials, equipment, or installation shall be final and
binding. The Shop Drawing material required for the various submittals
shall be in accordance with the coded legend set forth in Section 01300,
Submittals, and as indicated and specified under various headings of
these specifications.
3.
Nameplates: Equipment shall be furnished with nameplates of bronze,
monel, or stainless steel. Aluminum will not be acceptable. Each nameplate
shall include pertinent hydraulic and mechanical data. Information shown
shall be permanently stamped or cast into each nameplate and shall include
the manufacturer's name and model number.
4.
ASME Stamp: Where materials and equipment are specified to be
constructed in accordance with the standard of the American Society of
Mechanical Engineers Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels, the
CONTRACTOR shall submit proof that the items furnished under this
Section of the Specifications conform to such requirements. The ASME
stamp, label, or listing will be acceptable as sufficient evidence that the items
conform to these requirements and shall be provided on all pressure vessels
falling within the ASME Code jurisdiction.
B. Electric Motors:
1.
General: Unless otherwise required by the detailed equipment specifications,
motors furnished with equipment shall be rated for continuous duty at 50° C
ambient temperature with a 1.15 service factor. Motors designated for use
with variable speed drives and where indicated shall be derated to
accommodate the application. Where frequent starting occurs, motors shall
be designed for frequent starting duty equivalent to the duty service required
by the driven equipment. The horsepower rating of each motor shall be as
required to drive the equipment under full load, including all losses in speed
reducers and power transmission, and to be non-overloading over the entire
range of equipment head capacity curves without the use of motor service
factors. It is the intent of this general specification to allow the
manufacturer's standard motor on integrally constructed motor driven
equipment such as appliances, hand tools, etc., that is specified by model
number in which a redesign of the complete unit would be required for a
motor with other features as may be specified herein. All motors furnished
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01640-3
GMP 1
under these Specifications shall be of recognized manufacture, of adequate
capacity for the loads involved, and wound to the current characteristics
noted. All motors shall conform to the standards of manufacture and
performance of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association as shown
in their latest publications.
2.
Enclosures: Unless otherwise required by the detailed equipment
specifications, the enclosures for motors shall be as indicated below:
a.
Motors installed outdoors shall be totally enclosed or totally enclosed
fan-cooled except that vertically mounted motors may be weather
protected Type I.
b.
Motors installed indoors may be open drip-proof unless otherwise
indicated.
3.
Motor horsepower requirements in the equipment specifications are
estimated. If the horsepower requirements for the equipment furnished vary
from the estimated horsepower, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for
making all necessary revisions to wiring, conduit, motor starters, circuit
breaker, and other electrical equipment at no additional cost to OWNER.
4.
Anchor Bolts: Equipment suppliers shall furnish suitable anchor bolts of
specified metallurgy for each item of equipment. Anchor bolts, together with
templates or setting drawings, shall be delivered sufficiently early to permit
setting the anchor bolts when the structural concrete is placed. Two nuts
shall be furnished for each bolt. Unless otherwise shown or specified, anchor
bolts for items of equipment mounted on baseplates shall be long enough to
permit 1-1/2-inch of grout beneath the base plant and to provide adequate
anchorage into structural concrete.
5.
Equipment Bases: A cast iron or welded steel baseplate shall be provided for
each pump and other item of equipment which is to be installed on a concrete
base. Each baseplate shall support the unit and its drive assembly, and shall
be of a neat design with pads for anchoring the units. Baseplates shall be
anchored to the concrete base with suitable anchor bolts and grouted in place.
6.
Equipment Guards: All belts or chain drives, fan blades, couplings, and other
moving or rotating parts shall be covered on all sides by a safety guard. All
safety guards in outdoor locations shall be designed to prevent the entrance
of rain and dripping water.
7.
Special Tools and Accessories: Equipment requiring periodic repair and
adjustment shall be furnished complete with all special tools, instruments,
and accessories required for proper maintenance. Equipment requiring
special devices for lifting or handling shall be furnished complete with those
devices.
8.
Standard specifications prepared by recognized organizations mentioned
elsewhere shall govern except as provided otherwise by these specifications
and/or its accompanying drawings. Special care shall be exercised in
requests for quotations and in orders, to refer to the standard specifications
and to all modifications thereof.
9.
Standard Codes, Regulations, and Specifications: Unless indicated or
specified otherwise, all materials and workmanship for the mechanical trades
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01640-4
GMP 1
shall conform to the editions of the various standards, codes, manuals, and
specifications in effect on the date of advertisement for bids, which are
referred to in the various sections herein.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT
A. General. All equipment shall be boxed, crated, or otherwise completely enclosed
and protected during shipment, handling, and storage. All equipment shall be
protected from exposure to the elements and shall be kept thoroughly dry at all
times.
B. Painted surfaces shall be protected against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and
other damage. All painted surfaces which are damaged prior to acceptance of
equipment shall be repainted to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER.
C. Electrical equipment, controls, and insulation shall be protected against dust,
moisture, or water damage.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Installation of materials and equipment specified herein shall be performed in a
workmanlike manner by mechanics skilled in their particular trade. Piping and
equipment shall be installed square and plumb and accessible for proper operation
and service. Installations shall be consistent in completeness and appearance
whether enclosed or exposed. Any item which does not present a neat and
workmanlike appearance shall be replaced without additional cost to OWNER.
3.3 ELECTRIC WIRING
A. The CONTRACTOR shall do all electric wiring of every type for both power
supply and for instrumentation and control in accordance with the provisions
specified herein, except for such items as are normally wired at their point of
manufacture and so delivered, and unless specifically noted to the contrary herein.
The CONTRACTOR shall erect all motors and shall mount all starters and
controls, furnishing the supporting structures.
3.4 GUARANTEE
A. The CONTRACTOR shall guarantee all equipment against:
1.
Faulty or inadequate design.
2.
Improper assembly or erection.
3.
Defective workmanship or materials.
4.
Leakage, breakage, or other failure.
5.
The guarantee period shall be as defined in the General Conditions.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01640-5
GMP 1
END OF SECTION
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01650-1
GMP 1
SECTION 01650
STARTING OF SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Description:
1.
This Section contains requirements for CONTRACTOR'S performance in
documenting testing work required under this Contract. In addition, this
Section contains requirements for CONTRACTOR'S starting of systems,
performance testing during startup, performance testing of all mechanical,
electrical, instrumentation, HVAC equipment and systems, and training.
This Section supplements, but does not supersede specific testing
requirements, found elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01300, Submittals.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Descriptive submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01300,
Submittals. Submit for approval the following:
1.
A complete description of CONTRACTOR'S plan for documenting the
results from the test program in conformance with the requirements of
Paragraph 2.1.A., below, including:
a.
Proposed plan for documenting the calibration of all test instruments.
b.
Proposed plan for calibration of all instrument systems, including
flow/level meters and all temperature, pressure, weight, and analysis
systems.
c.
Sample forms for documenting the results of field pressure and
performance tests.
2.
The credentials and certification of the testing laboratory proposed by
CONTRACTOR for calibration of all test equipment.
3.
Pre-start-up check-out procedures reviewed and approved by the respective
equipment manufacturers.
4.
Detailed testing plans, setting forth step-by-step descriptions of the
procedures proposed by CONTRACTOR for the systematic startup and
performance testing of all equipment and systems installed under this
Contract.
5.
A schedule and subsequent updates, presenting CONTRACTOR'S plan for
startup and performance testing the equipment and systems installed under
this Contract.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01650-2
GMP 1
6.
A schedule establishing the expected time period (calendar dates) when
CONTRACTOR plans to commence performance testing of the completed
systems, along with a description of the temporary systems and installations
planned to allow operational testing to take place.
7.
All records produced during the startup and testing program.
8.
Systems or unit process or any piece of equipment shall not be started up
without the approved Operation and Maintenance Manuals being turned over
to the OWNER.
9.
Written notice to ENGINEER a minimum of 72 hours prior to beginning of
any test.
B. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all
referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each
paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to
indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks ()
shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the
specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the CONTRACTOR, each
deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right
of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the
reasons for requesting the deviation. The ENGINEER shall be the final authority
for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The CONTRACTOR shall
furnish equipment and/or services as specified if an exception and/or deviation is
rejected. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify
compliance on the part of the CONTRACTOR with the specifications. Failure to
include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s)
for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal
shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further
consideration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DOCUMENTATION
A. Documentation Plans
1.
CONTRACTOR shall develop a records keeping system to document
compliance with the requirements of this Section. Calibration documentation
shall include identification (by make, manufacturer, model, and serial
number) of all test equipment, date of original calibration, subsequent
calibrations, calibration method, and test laboratory.
2.
Equipment and system documentation shall include date of test, equipment
number or system name, nature of test, test objectives, test results, test
instruments employed for the test and signature spaces for the OWNER'S and
ENGINEER'S witnesses. A separate file shall be established for each system
and item of equipment. These files shall include the following information as
a minimum:
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01650-3
GMP 1
a.
Metallurgical tests.
b.
Factory performance tests.
c.
Accelerometer recordings made during shipment.
d.
Field calibration tests1.
e.
Field pressure tests1.
f.
Field performance tests1.
g.
Field operational tests1.
(1 Each of these tests are required even though not specifically noted in
detailed Specification Section.)
B. Test Plans:
1.
CONTRACTOR shall develop test plans detailing the coordinated, sequential
testing of each item of equipment and system installed under this Contract.
Each test plan shall be specific to the item of equipment or system to be
tested. Test plans shall identify by specific equipment or tag number each
device or control station to be manipulated or observed during the test
procedure and the specific results to be observed or obtained. Test plans
shall also be specific as to support systems required to complete the test
work, temporary systems required during the test work, subcontractors and
manufacturers' representatives to be present and expected test duration. As a
minimum, the test plans shall include the following features:
a.
Step-by-step proving procedure for all control and electrical circuits by
imposing low voltage currents and using appropriate indicators to affirm
that the circuit is properly identified and connected to the proper device.
b.
Calibration of all analysis instruments and control sensors.
c.
Performance testing of each individual item of mechanical, electrical,
and instrumentation equipment. Performance tests shall be selected to
duplicate the operating conditions described in the Contract Documents.
d.
System performance tests designed to duplicate, as closely as possible,
operating conditions described in the Contract Documents.
2.
Test plans shall contain a complete description of the procedures to be
employed to achieve the desired test environment.
3.
As a condition precedent to receiving progress payments in excess of 75% of
the Contract amount, or in any event, progress payments due to
CONTRACTOR eight weeks in advance of the proposed date the
CONTRACTOR intends to begin any testing work (whichever occurs earliest
in the Project Schedule), CONTRACTOR shall have submitted all test plans
required for the systematic field performance and operational tests for all
equipment and systems installed under this Contract. Once the ENGINEER
has reviewed and approved CONTRACTOR'S test plans, CONTRACTOR
shall reproduce the plans in sufficient number for CONTRACTOR'S
purposes and an additional 10 copies for delivery to the ENGINEER. No test
work shall begin until the CONTRACTOR has delivered the specified
number of final test plans to the ENGINEER.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01650-4
GMP 1
C. Testing Schedule: CONTRACTOR shall provide a startup and testing schedule
setting forth the sequence contemplated for performing the test work. The
schedule shall be a CPM format, plotted against calendar time, shall detail the
equipment and systems to be tested, and shall be coordinated with
CONTRACTOR'S Progress Schedule specified in Section 01310, Progress
Schedule. The schedule shall show the contemplated start date, duration of the
test and completion of each test. The test schedule shall be submitted no later
than four weeks in advance of the date testing is to begin. The ENGINEER will
not witness any testing work for the purpose of acceptance until CONTRACTOR
has submitted a test schedule and the ENGINEER approves. The test schedule
shall be updated weekly, showing actual dates of test work, indicating systems
and equipment testing completed satisfactorily and meeting the requirements of
the Contract Documents.
2.2 SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT PERFORMANCE TESTS
A. Each item of mechanical, electrical, instrumentation and HVAC equipment
installed under this Contract shall be tested to demonstrate compliance with the
performance requirements of the Contract Documents. Each electrical,
instrumentation, mechanical, piping, and HVAC system installed or modified
under this Contract shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of this
Section.
B. Once all equipment and systems have been tested individually, CONTRACTOR
shall proceed with performance testing in accordance with the requirements of
Paragraph 3.3, below, simulating actual operating conditions to the greatest extent
possible. CONTRACTOR shall install temporary connections, bulkheads and
make other provisions to re-circulate process fluids or otherwise simulate
anticipated operating conditions. During the operational testing period,
CONTRACTOR'S Quality Assurance Manager and testing team shall monitor the
characteristics of each machine and system and report any unusual conditions to
the ENGINEER.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. CONTRACTOR shall organize teams made up of qualified representatives of
equipment suppliers, subcontractors, CONTRACTOR'S independent testing
laboratory, and others, as appropriate, to efficiently and expeditiously calibrate
and test the equipment and systems installed and constructed under this Contract.
The objective of the testing program shall be to demonstrate, to the OWNER'S
and ENGINEER'S complete satisfaction, that the structures, systems, and
equipment constructed and installed under this Contract meets all performance
requirements and the facility is Substantially Complete and ready for the
commissioning process to commence. In addition, the testing program shall
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01650-5
GMP 1
produce baseline-operating conditions for the OWNER to use in a Preventive
Maintenance Program. The Preventive Maintenance Program shall be provided
as part of the vendor supplied equipment Operations and Maintenance Manual as
required by Specification Section 01300 Submittals.
3.2 CALIBRATION OF FIXED INSTRUMENTS
A. Calibration of analysis instruments, sensors, gauges, and meters installed under
this Contract shall proceed on a system-by-system basis. No equipment or system
performance test shall be performed until all instruments, gauges, and meters to
be installed in that particular system have been calibrated and the calibration work
has been witnessed by the OWNER and ENGINEER.
3.3 PERFORMANCE TESTS
A. General: Performance tests shall consists of the following:
1.
Pressure or leakage tests.
2.
Electrical testing as specified in Division 16, Electrical.
3.
Wiring and piping, individual component, loop, loop commissioning and
tuning testing, as specified in Division 17, Instrumentation.
4.
Pre-startup check out for all mechanical and HVAC equipment specified in
Division 15, Mechanical. Pre-startup check out procedures shall be reviewed
and accepted by the respective equipment manufacturer.
5.
Individual and system tests of all mechanical, electrical, HVAC, and
instrumentation equipment and systems shall demonstrate compliance with
the performance requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Performance tests for any individual system shall be performed in the order listed
above. The order may be altered only on the specific written authorization of the
ENGINEER after receipt of a written request, complete with justification for the
change in sequence.
C. Pressure and Leakage Tests: Pressure and leakage tests shall be conducted in
accordance with applicable Sections. All acceptance tests shall be witnessed by
the ENGINEER. Evidence of successful completion of the pressure and leakage
tests shall be the ENGINEER'S signature on the test forms prepared by
CONTRACTOR.
D. Equipment Checkout: Prior to energization (in the case of electrical systems and
equipment), all circuits shall be rung out and tested for continuity and shielding in
accordance with the requirements of Division 16, Electrical.
E. Component Calibration and Loop Testing: Prior to energization (in the case of
instrumentation system and equipment), all loops and associated instruments shall
be calibrated and tested, as specified in Division 17, Instrumentation.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01650-6
GMP 1
F. Electrical Resistance: Electrical resistance testing shall be in accordance with the
requirements of Division 16, Electrical.
G. Pre-Start-up Tests: Pre-start-up tests shall include the following
1.
Alignment of equipment using reverse dial indicator method.
2.
Pre-operation lubrication.
3.
Tests in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations for pre-start
preparation and pre-operational check out procedures.
3.4 DISINFECTION
A. CONTRACTOR shall disinfect all new portions of the plant that are located
downstream of, and including, reclaimed water pump station, backwash piping,
non-potable water system, potable water system, and reclaimed water system.
Disinfection shall be completed prior to bringing the specific process or
component on-line. All disinfection shall be done in accordance with AWWA C-
653.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all chemicals, materials, equipment, and
utilities to perform the disinfection.
3.5 EQUIPMENT START-UP
A. The CONTRACTOR in the presence of OWNER and ENGINEER shall place the
newly installed equipment and facilities into operation and test, observe, and
adjust all items until the units are properly adjusted and operating in accordance
with the requirements of the manufacturer's data and the Contract Documents.
After the new equipment has been put into operation, CONTRACTOR,
ENGINEER, and Plant Operator shall go over in detail the standard operating
procedures of the equipment. The work performed by CONTRACTOR shall
include, but not be limited to, the following items:
1.
Marking and numbering all valves, gates, and equipment which have been
numbered in the Contract Documents. All valves and gates shall be labeled
with the appropriate equipment identification tag as shown on the Drawings
and specified in Section 10400, Equipment Identification Plates.
2.
Labeling switches.
3.
Testing of pumps and equipment for proper operation and verifying
alignment and capacity.
4.
Checking all electrical, electronic, and remotely controlled equipment for
proper operation as specified under Section 01400, Quality Control.
5.
Marking all new and existing exposed pipelines for identification as specified
in Section 09900, Painting, and as labeled on the Drawings for pipe material,
size, service, and direction of flow.
6.
Testing of unit processes for proper operations.
7.
Making all equipment adjustments required.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01650-7
GMP 1
3.6 SUPERVISION OF INSTALLATION AND START-UP BY
MANUFACTURER
A. An experienced, competent, and factory-employed representative of the
equipment manufacturer shall visit the site of the work and inspect, check, adjust
if necessary, and approve the equipment installation and shall be present when the
equipment is placed in operation. The equipment manufacturer's representative
shall revisit the job site as often as necessary until any trouble is corrected and the
equipment installation and operation is satisfactory to the OWNER. The
equipment manufacturer's representative shall furnish to OWNER a written report
certifying that the equipment:
1.
Has been properly installed and lubricated.
2.
Is in accurate alignment.
3.
Is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts.
4.
Has been operated under full load conditions and that it operated
satisfactorily.
B. A resume of each factory personnel assigned to supervise installation and train
OWNER'S personnel shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval prior to
scheduling training and installing the equipment.
3.7 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TESTS
A. General: Once all affected equipment has been subjected to the required pre-
operational check out procedures and the ENGINEER has witnessed and has not
found deficiencies in that portion of the Work, individual items of equipment and
systems may be started and operated under simulated operating conditions to
determine, as nearly as possible, whether the equipment and systems meet the
requirements of these Specifications.
B. For each system performance test phase, the equipment shall be operated a
sufficient period of time to determine machine operating characteristics, including
noise, temperatures and vibration; to observe performance characteristics; and to
permit initial adjustment of operating controls and shall last no less than seven
continuous days. When testing requires the availability of auxiliary systems such
as looped piping, electrical power, compressed air, control air, or instrumentation
which have not yet been placed in service, CONTRACTOR shall provide
acceptable substitute sources, capable of meeting the requirements of the
machine, device, or system, at no additional cost to the OWNER. Disposal
methods for test media shall be subject to review and approval by the OWNER
and ENGINEER. During the performance test period, CONTRACTOR shall
obtain baseline-operating data on all equipment with motors greater than one
horsepower to include amperage, bearing temperatures, and vibration. The
baseline data shall be collected for the OWNER to enter in a Preventive
Maintenance Program.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01650-8
GMP 1
C. Test results shall be within the tolerances set forth in the detailed Specification
Sections of the Contract Documents. If no tolerances have been specified, test
results shall conform to tolerances established by recognized industry practice.
Where, in the case of an otherwise satisfactory performance test, any doubt,
dispute, or difference should arise between the ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR
regarding the test results or the methods or equipment used in the performance of
such test, then the ENGINEER may order the test to be repeated. If the repeat
test, using such modified methods or equipment as the ENGINEER may require,
confirms the previous test, then all costs in connection with the repeat test will be
paid by the OWNER. Otherwise, the costs shall be borne by CONTRACTOR.
Where the results of any performance test fail to comply with the contract
requirements for such test, then such repeat tests as may be necessary to achieve
the contract requirements shall be made by CONTRACTOR at his expense.
D. CONTRACTOR shall provide, at no expense to the OWNER, all power, fuel,
compressed air supplies, water, and chemicals, all labor, temporary piping,
heating, ventilating, and air conditioning for any areas where permanent facilities
are not complete and operable at the time of functional tests, and all other items
and work required to complete the functional tests. Temporary facilities shall be
maintained until permanent systems are in service.
E. Should the testing period be halted for any reason, the operational testing program
shall be repeated, until the specified continuous period has been accomplished
without interruption. All process units shall be brought to full operating
conditions, including temperature, pressure, flow and level.
F. Record Documents shall conform to the requirements of Section 01300,
Submittals, of facilities involved shall be accepted and ready for turnover to the
OWNER 72 hours prior to operational testing.
G. Phase Retesting: If under test, any portion of the Work should fail to fulfill the
Contract requirements and is adjusted, altered, renewed, or replaced, tests on that
portion when so adjusted, altered, removed, or replaced, together with all other
portions of the Work as are affected thereby, shall, unless otherwise directed by
the ENGINEER, be repeated within reasonable time and in accordance with the
specified conditions. CONTRACTOR shall pay to the OWNER all reasonable
expenses incurred by the OWNER, including the costs of the ENGINEER, as a
result of repeating such tests.
H. Post-Test Inspection: Once testing has been completed, all machines shall be
rechecked for proper alignment and realigned, as required. All equipment shall be
checked for loose connections, unusual movement, or other indications of
improper operating characteristics. Any deficiencies shall be corrected to the
satisfaction of the ENGINEER. All machines or devices which exhibit unusual or
unacceptable operating characteristics shall be disassembled and inspected. Any
defects found during the course of the inspection shall be repaired or the specific
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01650-9
GMP 1
part or entire equipment item shall be replaced to the complete satisfaction of the
ENGINEER, at no additional cost to the OWNER.
3.8 TRAINING
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide experienced, competent factory employed,
trained, and certified manufacturers' employees to train OWNER'S personnel in
operation and maintenance procedures for equipment items specified below
during the start-up period at no additional cost to OWNER. The lesson plans for
these sessions shall be reviewed with the OWNER and the ENGINEER in one
meeting prior to initiating training. Lesson plans shall be submitted to the
ENGINEER not less than one week prior to this meeting. CONTRACTOR will
record the manufacturers' training sessions and provide OWNER with DVD
format professional quality DVDs of the training sessions. The representatives
shall present training programs and on-site demonstrations designed to fully
acquaint plant personnel with all equipment features, routine scheduled
maintenance procedures, alternative operational modes, emergency procedures,
spare parts inventories, and demonstrate performance requirements of the
specifications. Representatives shall remain on-site to observe operation of the
equipment and further advise plant personnel for a minimum number of days as
specified below, unless specified otherwise in Equipment Specifications. The
following table is not a complete list of equipment training. See individual
Specifications for additional training. Sales representatives shall not be acceptable
to perform start-up and training functions.
Equipment
Additional Training Days
(Day = 8 hrs minimum)
Disc Filter System
2 (1 day at each plant)
Hydraulic Gates
1 (½ day at each plant)
Actuators
1 (½ day at each plant)
Turbidity Instrument
1 (½ day at each plant)
B. A complete schedule of representatives and dates for operator training shall be
submitted to OWNER prior to commencement of the start-up period. This
schedule shall be prepared to accommodate the plant staff's work schedules,
including training on all shifts and staffs' flex time.
END OF SECTION
City of Chandler
December
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01660-1
GMP 1
SECTION 01660
FIELD TESTS OF EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. In addition to testing required by this Section, CONTRACTOR shall perform all
other tests required by detailed Equipment Specifications.
B. No system or subsystem shall be started up for continuous operation unless all
components, including instrumentation and monitoring systems, of that system or
subsystem has been tested and proven to be operable as intended by the Contract
Documents.
1.2 PRELIMINARY TESTS
A. CONTRACTOR shall make preliminary field tests of all equipment as soon as
conditions permit.
B. Purpose of tests is to determine if equipment is:
1.
Properly installed.
2.
In compliance with operating cycles.
3.
Operational and free from overheating, overloading, vibration, or other
operating problems.
C. CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, instruments, fuel, incidentals,
and expendables required, unless otherwise provided.
D. CONTRACTOR shall make all changes, adjustments, and replacements required
to place equipment in service and test it.
E. ENGINEER and OWNER shall be given sufficient notice prior to witness tests.
A minimum 48 hour notice shall be given.
1.3 FINAL TESTS
A. To the maximum extent possible, CONTRACTOR shall perform final field tests
of equipment prior to initial start-up and operation of the Project.
B. Purpose of the tests is to demonstrate that equipment is:
1.
Properly installed.
2.
Completely ready for operation by the OWNER.
3.
In compliance with design conditions, material specifications, and all other
requirements of the Contract Documents.
City of Chandler
December
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01660-2
GMP 1
C. CONTRACTOR shall furnish all fuel and energy, labor, materials, instruments,
chemicals, lubricants, and expendables required for the tests, except where
otherwise specified.
D. Until final field tests are completed and approved, CONTRACTOR shall make all
necessary changes, adjustments, and replacements.
E. Systems or unit process, or any piece of equipment, shall not be started up without
the approved Operation and Maintenance Manuals being turned over to the
OWNER.
F. CONTRACTOR shall notify ENGINEER at least 48 hours prior to beginning of
tests. CONTRACTOR shall keep notes and data on tests, and submit copy to the
ENGINEER. ENGINEER and OWNER'S operating personnel shall witness all
tests.
1.4 MANUFACTURERS' AND SUPPLIERS' FIELD AND TEST DATA
A. An experienced, competent, and authorized representative of the manufacturer or
supplier of each item of equipment, as required in these Specifications, shall visit
the site of the Work and inspect, check, and approve the equipment installation.
In each case, the equipment supplier's representative shall be present when the
equipment is placed in operation. The equipment supplier's representative shall
revisit the job site as often as necessary until all trouble is corrected and the
equipment installation and operation is satisfactory to the ENGINEER. Sales
representatives shall not be acceptable to perform start-up and training functions.
B. Six copies of all test and field data collected by the manufacturers/suppliers of
equipment during installation supervision and start-up services shall be submitted
to the ENGINEER within 14 calendar days after the start-up services are
complete. The test and field data shall be submitted, whether specified or not, in
the detailed Equipment Specifications and shall include, but are not limited to,
tolerance and alignment measurements where applicable to verify equipment has
been satisfactorily installed, and all other information collected by the
manufacturers/suppliers to satisfy themselves that equipment has been properly
installed. The manufacturer shall submit to the ENGINEER a certification on the
manufacturer's letterhead stating that the equipment has been properly installed
and lubricated, is in accurate alignment, is free from any undue stress imposed by
connecting piping or anchor bolts; and has been operated under full load
conditions
and
it
operated
satisfactorily.
In
cases
where
the
manufacturer/supplier's representative believes equipment is not properly installed
he shall include with this submittal a punch list detailing the problems noted
which require correction. The information required under this Section shall be
furnished for all equipment and devices requiring installation and start-up
services, as specified in these Specifications, including the detailed Mechanical,
Electrical, and Instrumentation Specifications.
City of Chandler
December
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01660-3
GMP 1
C. The costs for this Work shall be included in the prices quoted by equipment
suppliers. CONTRACTOR shall perform all Work required to install and place
into operation the equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01730-1
GMP 1
SECTION 01730
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide Operation and Maintenance Data in the form of instructional manuals for
use by the OWNER'S personnel for:
1.
All equipment and systems.
2.
All valves, pumps, and related accessories.
3.
All instruments and control devices.
4.
All electrical gear.
B. Training or start-up on any system, process, or piece of equipment shall not be
allowed until Operation and Maintenance Manuals and Lesson Training Plans are
approved by the ENGINEER, and the approved Operation and Maintenance
Manuals have been turned over to the OWNER.
C. Definitions:
1.
Operation and Maintenance Data:
a.
The term "Operation and Maintenance Data" includes all product related
information and documents which are required for preparation of the
station Operation and Maintenance Manual. It also includes all data
which shall accompany said manual as directed by current regulations of
any participating government agency.
b.
Required Operation and Maintenance Data includes, but is not limited
to, the following:
1) Complete, detailed written operating instructions for each product
or piece of equipment including equipment function; operating
characteristics; limiting conditions; operating instructions for start
up, normal, and emergency conditions; regulation and control; and
shut down.
2) Complete, detailed written preventive maintenance instructions as
defined below.
3) Recommended spare parts lists, by generic title and identification
number, and local sources of supply for parts.
4) Written explanations of all safety considerations relating to
operation and maintenance procedures.
5) Name, address, and phone number of manufacturer, manufacturer's
local service representative, and subcontractor or installer.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01730-2
GMP 1
6) Copy of all approved Shop Drawings, and a copy of the warranty
bond and service contract as applicable, including circuit diagrams,
schematics, and functional Drawings.
7) Control Diagrams: Internal and connection wiring, including logic
diagrams, wiring diagrams for control panels, ladder logic for
computer based systems, and connections between existing systems
and new additions, and adjustments such as calibrations and set
points for relays, and control or alarm contact settings. Provide all
programming/wiring documentation needed for "in-house"
troubleshooting and customizing.
8) Final test data, where applicable, shall be submitted as an appendix
when completed.
9) Disassembly, reassembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and
checking instructions.
2.
Preventive Maintenance Instructions:
a.
The term "Preventive Maintenance Instructions" includes all information
and instructions required to keep a product or piece of equipment
properly lubricated, adjusted, and maintained so that the item functions
economically throughout its full design life.
b.
Preventive Maintenance Instructions include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1) A written explanation with illustrations for each preventive
maintenance task.
2) Recommended schedule for execution of preventive maintenance
tasks.
3) Lubrication charts.
4) Table of alternative lubricants.
5) Trouble shooting instructions.
6) List of required maintenance tools and equipment.
D. Submittals:
1.
General: Submit operations and maintenance data to the ENGINEER within
60 days after approval of Shop Drawings, unless noted otherwise.
2.
Number of Copies: One hard copy of each item.
a.
One preliminary copy of each O&M Manual shall be submitted to the
ENGINEER for approval within 30 days of the approval of the Shop
Drawing, which indicated further submittals are not required. The O&M
Manual shall conform to the requirements as specified herein.
b.
60 days prior to placing the equipment into service, submit one hard
copies and one soft copy of the approved O&M Manual (except for field
test data) to the ENGINEER.
c.
Soft copy shall be in CD format and shall include all information
provided in hard copy. Text shall be in “.pdf” format. Drawings and
figures shall be in AutoCAD ".dwg", or bitmap ".bmp", tiff ".tif", ipeg
".jpg", gif ".gif", or pc paint brush ".pcx".
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01730-3
GMP 1
3.
Letter of Transmittal: Provide a letter of transmittal with each submittal and
include the following in the letter:
a.
Date of submittal.
b.
Contract title and number.
c.
CONTRACTOR'S name and address.
d.
A list of the attachments and the Specification Sections to which they
relate.
e.
Reference to or explanation of related submittals already made or to be
made at a future date.
4.
Format Requirements:
a.
Use 8-1/2-inch by 11-inch paper of high rag content and quality. Larger
Drawings or illustrations are acceptable if neatly folded to the specified
size in a manner which will permit easy unfolding without removal from
the binder. Provide reinforced punched binder tab, or provide flyleaf for
each product.
b.
All text must be legible typewritten or machine printed originals or high
quality copies of same.
c.
Each page shall have a binding margin of approximately 1-1/2-inches
and be punched for placement in a 3-ring loose-leaf binder. Provide
binders. Identify each binder with the following:
1) Title "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS".
2) Title of Project.
3) Identity of building or structure as applicable.
4) Identity of general subject matter covered.
d.
Use divides and indexed tabs between major categories of information
such as operating instructions, preventive maintenance instructions, or
other. When necessary, place each major category in a separate binder.
e.
Provide a Table of Contents for each binder.
f.
Identify products by their functional names in the table of contents and at
least once in each Chapter or Section. Thereafter, abbreviations and
acronyms may be used if their meaning is explained in a table in the
back of each binder. Use of model or catalog numbers or letters for
identification is not acceptable.
g.
Upon completion of the installation of each item of equipment, the
CONTRACTOR shall provide Drawings of the local control panel to be
added to the O&M Manual.
h.
Indicate all components of the equipment on catalog pages by
highlighting or some other clearly definable medium for ease of
identification.
i.
Final test data determined after installation of the equipment shall be
submitted as an appendix to the Operations and Maintenance Manuals.
E. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all
referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each
paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01730-4
GMP 1
indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks ()
shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the
specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the CONTRACTOR,
each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the
right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of
the reasons for requesting the deviation. The ENGINEER shall be the final
authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The
CONTRACTOR shall furnish equipment and/or services as specified if an
exception and/or deviation is rejected. The remaining portions of the paragraph
not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the CONTRACTOR with
the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification
sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the
specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for
rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.
F. The CONTRACTOR shall submit the preventive maintenance information
package as part of the shop drawing submittal package to the ENGINEER for
review and approval. SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL PACKAGE WILL
NOT BE APPROVED WITHOUT ACCEPTANCE OF PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01750-1
GMP 1
SECTION 01750
SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. 60 days after approval of the Shop Drawing of the equipment specified in the
individual Sections, CONTRACTOR shall furnish spare parts data and
maintenance material for equipment. The data shall include a complete list of
parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source or sources of supply.
B. Spare parts and materials required to be supplied in the Contract Documents shall
be furnished in manufacturer’s unopened cartons, boxes, crates or other protective
covering suitable for preventing corrosion or deterioration for the maximum
length of storage that may be normally anticipated. They shall be clearly marked
and identified as to the name of manufacturer or supplier, applicable equipment,
part number, description and location in the equipment. All parts shall be
protected and packaged for a shelf life of at least 10 years.
C. During construction, store parts in buildings or trailers with floor, roof, and closed
sides and in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations. Protect from
weather, condensation, and humidity.
D. Parts and materials shall be delivered to the OWNER upon Substantial
Completion of the Work or start-up. CONTRACTOR shall then place them in
permanent storage rooms or areas approved by the OWNER. The turnover
procedures shall be developed by the ENGINEER.
E. Provide a Letter of Transmittal and Spare Parts Receiver Form including the
following:
1.
Date of letter and transfer of parts and material.
2.
Contract title and number.
3.
CONTRACTOR’S name and address.
4.
Transmittal should list applicable Specification Sections for each set of spare
parts supplied.
5.
Spare Parts Receiver Form.
F. CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for loss or damage to parts and
materials until they are transmitted to the OWNER.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01750-2
GMP 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
(The remainder of this page left intentionally blank).
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01750-3
GMP 1
SPARE PARTS RECEIVER
SPECIFICATION SECTION 01750
CONTRACTOR PLEASE FILL OUT:
MANUFACTURER:
ITEM DESCRIPTION:
COST:
MANUFACTURER PART NUMBER:
SUPPLIER:
CROSS REFERENCE NUMBER:
VENDOR INFORMATION:
VENDOR ORDER PART NUMBER:
PART TO BE USED ON
WHAT EQUIPMENT:
EQUIPMENT NUMBER:
SPECIFICATION SECTION:
CITY PERSONNEL FILL IN:
BIN NUMBER:
AIMS NUMBER:
LOCATION IN STORES:
RECEIVED BY:
END OF SECTION
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01821-1
GMP 1
SECTION 01821
INSTRUCTION OF OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. CONTRACTOR shall provide the services of factory-trained maintenance
specialists to instruct OWNER'S operations and maintenance personnel in the
recommended operation and the preventive maintenance procedures for
equipment specified in the equipment Sections.
B. The qualifications of specialists shall be subject to approval by ENGINEER.
C. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate these services at times acceptable to OWNER
and ENGINEER, with a minimum of 14 days prior notice.
D. Manufacturer shall provide a combination of classroom and field training. All
training shall be conducted at the facility, unless otherwise stated in the
Equipment Sections. Class size shall be limited to no more than 15 trainees.
Manufacturer shall provide training for all plant shifts, or as approved by
OWNER.
E. Manufacturer shall allow any and all training sessions to be videotaped by
OWNER.
F. Section 01640, Materials and Equipment; Section 01650, Starting of Systems;
Section 01660, Field Tests of Equipment; and, additional requirements for
manufacturer's and supplier's field and test data.
G. Instruction of OWNER'S personnel shall commence only after the equipment has
been started, approved Operation and Maintenance Manuals have been turned
over to the OWNER, and acceptance tests have been completed according to the
provisions in Section 01650, Starting of Systems.
H. CONTRACTOR shall submit a copy of this Section 01821, Instruction of
Operations and Maintenance Personnel, to all manufacturers of equipment for this
Contract.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer shall submit for approval the following:
1.
Proposed Lesson Plan for each scheduled instruction 28 days prior to
commencement of training. Lesson plans shall be approved a minimum of
14 days prior to scheduled instruction.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01821-2
GMP 1
2.
Credentials of their designated operations and maintenance instructor.
Credentials shall include a brief resume and specific details of the instructor's
experience pertaining to operation of, maintenance of, and training for the
equipment specified.
3.
Training Request Form: CONTRACTOR shall submit the Training Request
Form to the ENGINEER 28 days prior to the requested training date.
4.
There shall be separate "Operations" and "Maintenance" staff training.
1.3 INSTRUCTION LESSON PLAN
A. Manufacturer's proposed Lesson Plan shall include the elements presented in the
outline of Instruction Lesson Plan in Paragraph 1.3.D., below, of this Section.
Specific components and procedures shall be identified in the proposed Lesson
Plan.
B. Manufacturer's proposed Lesson Plan shall detail specific instruction topics.
Training aids to be utilized in the instruction shall be referenced and attached
where applicable to the proposed Lesson Plan. "Hands-On" demonstrations
planned for the instruction shall be described in the Lesson Plan.
C. The manufacturer shall indicate the estimated duration of each segment of the
training Lesson Plan.
D. Instruction Lesson Plan shall include the following as a minimum:
1.
Equipment Operation:
a.
Describe equipment's operating (process) function.
b.
Describe equipment's fundamental operating principals and dynamics.
c.
Identify equipment's mechanical, electrical and electronic components
and features.
d.
Identify all support equipment associated with the operation of subject
equipment (e.g., air intake filters, valve actuators, motors).
e.
Recommend standard operating procedures to cover start-up, routine
monitoring and shutdown of the equipment.
2.
Detailed Component Description:
a.
Identify and describe in detail each component's function.
b.
Where applicable, group related components into subsystems. Describe
subsystem functions and their interaction with other subsystems.
c.
Identify and describe in detail equipment safeties and control interlocks.
3.
Equipment Preventive Maintenance (PM):
a.
Describe PM inspection procedures required to:
1) Perform an inspection of the equipment in operation.
2) Spot potential trouble symptoms and anticipate breakdowns.
3) Forecast maintenance requirements (predictive maintenance).
b.
Define the recommended PM intervals for each component.
c.
Provide lubricant and replacement part recommendations and
limitations.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01821-3
GMP 1
d.
Describe appropriate cleaning practices and recommend intervals.
e.
Identify and describe the use of special tools required for maintenance of
the equipment.
f.
Describe component removal/installation and disassembly/assembly
procedures.
g.
Perform at least two "hands-on" demonstrations of preventive
maintenance procedures.
h.
Describe recommended measuring instruments and procedures, and
provide instruction on interpreting alignment measurements, as
appropriate.
i.
Define recommended torquing, mounting, calibration and/or alignment
procedures and settings, as appropriate.
j.
Describe recommended procedures to check/test equipment following a
corrective repair.
4.
Equipment Troubleshooting:
a.
Define recommended systematic troubleshooting procedures.
b.
Provide component specific troubleshooting checklists.
c.
Describe applicable equipment testing and diagnostic procedures to
facilitate troubleshooting.
1.4 TRAINING AIDS
A. The manufacturer's instructor shall incorporate training aids as appropriate to
assist in the instruction. As a minimum, the training aids shall include text and
figure handouts. Other appropriate training aids are:
1.
Audio-Visual Aids (e.g., films, slides, videotapes, overhead transparencies,
posters, blueprints, diagrams, catalogue sheets).
2.
Equipment cutaways and samples (e.g., spare parts and damaged equipment).
3.
Tools (e.g., repair tools, customized tools, measuring and calibrating
instruments).
B. The manufacturer's instructor shall utilize descriptive class handouts during the
instruction. Photocopied class handouts shall be good quality reproductions.
Class handouts should accompany the instruction with frequent reference made to
them. Customized handouts developed especially for the instruction are
encouraged. Handouts planned for the instruction shall be attached with the
manufacturer's proposed Lesson Plan.
1.5 "HANDS-ON" DEMONSTRATIONS
A. The manufacturer's instructor shall present "hands-on" demonstrations of
operations and maintenance of the equipment for each scheduled group. The
proposed "hands-on" demonstrations should be described in the manufacturer's
proposed Lesson Plan.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01821-4
GMP 1
1.6 TRAINING SCHEDULE
A. Each manufacturer shall provide as a minimum the following hours of training.
Travel time and expenses are responsibility of manufacturer and are not included
in training schedule time.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide experienced, competent manufacturers'
representatives to train OWNER'S personnel in operation and maintenance
procedures for equipment items specified below during the start-up period at no
additional cost to OWNER. The Lesson Plans for these sessions shall be
reviewed with the OWNER and the ENGINEER in one meeting prior to initiating
training. Lesson Plans shall be submitted to the ENGINEER not less than one
week prior to this meeting. CONTRACTOR will video tape the manufacturers'
training sessions and provide OWNER with DVD format professional quality
discs of the training sessions. The representatives shall present training programs
and on-site demonstrations designed to fully acquaint plant personnel with all
equipment features, routine scheduled maintenance procedures, alternative
operational modes, emergency procedures, spare parts inventories, and
demonstrate performance requirements of the Specifications. Representatives
shall remain on-site to observe operation of the equipment and further advise
plant personnel for a minimum number of hours as specified below:
Equipment
Additional Training Days
(Day = 8 hrs minimum)
Disc Filter System
2 (1 day at each plant)
Hydraulic Gates
1 (½ day at each plant)
Actuators
1 (½ day at each plant)
Turbidity Instrument
1 (½ day at each plant)
C. A complete schedule of representatives and dates for operator training shall be
submitted to OWNER prior to commencement of the start-up period. This
schedule shall be prepared to accommodate the plant staff's work schedules,
including training on all three shifts and staff flex time.
D. The plant operators work on a shift schedule. Develop the training schedule to
account for training classes for each shift.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
01821-5
GMP 1
TRAINING REQUEST FORM
CITY OF CHANDLER
WRF IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT
SPECIFICATION SECTION 01821
INSTRUCTION OF OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL
Equipment Name:
Equipment Tag Number:
Equipment Description:
Specification Section:
Operations and Maintenance Data Submitted/Approved:
Start-up and Testing Complete/Date:
Lesson Plan Submitted/Approved:
Training Aids Submitted/Approved:
Hands-on Demonstration:
Training Schedule (Dates, Time, No. of Sessions):
END OF SECTION
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
03300-1
GMP 1
SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope:
1.
CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and
incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install cast-in-
place concrete.
2.
The Work includes providing concrete consisting of Portland cement, fine
and coarse aggregate, water, and approved admixtures; combined, mixed,
transported, placed, finished, and cured. The Work also includes:
a.
Providing openings in concrete to accommodate the Work under this and
other Sections and building into the concrete all items such as sleeves,
frames, anchor bolts, inserts, and all other items to be embedded.
B. Coordination:
1.
Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate the
installation of items that must be installed in the concrete.
C. Classes of Concrete:
1.
6,000 psi (at 28 days) concrete shall be steel reinforced and shall be used for
the Ocotillo Wastewater Reclamation Facility – Reservoir.
2.
5,000 psi (at 28 days) concrete shall be steel reinforced and shall be used for
the following pre-cast applications:
a.
Manholes and vaults.
3.
Class "A" (5,000 psi at 28 days) concrete shall be steel reinforced and shall
be used for the following applications:
a.
All concrete, unless indicated otherwise.
4.
Class "B" concrete (3,000 psi at 28 days) shall be placed without forms or
with simple forms, with little or no reinforcing, and includes the following:
a.
Duct banks.
b.
Unreinforced encasements.
c.
Curbs and gutters.
d.
Sidewalks.
e.
Thrust blocks.
5.
Class "C" (2,000 psi at 28 days) concrete shall be placed without forms or
with simple forms, with little or no reinforcing.
D. Related Sections:
1.
Section 02315, Earthwork, Excavation, and Backfill.
2.
Section 03100, Concrete Formwork.
3.
Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
03300-2
GMP 1
4.
Section 03251, Concrete Joints.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Comply with the applicable provisions and
recommendations of the following, except as otherwise shown or specified.
1.
ACI 211.1, Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal,
Heavyweight and Mass Concrete.
2.
ACI 214, Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Strength Test Results of
Concrete.
3.
ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings, (includes
ASTM Standards referred to herein).
4.
ACI 304, Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete.
5.
ACI 305, Hot Weather Concreting.
6.
ACI 309, Guide for Consolidation of Concrete.
7.
ACI 311, Guide for Concrete Inspection.
8.
ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
9.
ACI 350R, Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures.
10. AASHTO M182, Burlap Cloth Made From Jute or Kenaf.
B. Concrete Testing Service:
1.
CONTRACTOR shall employ, at his own expense, a testing laboratory
experienced in design and testing of concrete materials and mixes to perform
material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes.
a.
Testing agency shall meet the requirements of ASTM E329.
b.
Selection of a testing laboratory is subject to ENGINEER'S approval.
c.
Submit a written description of the proposed concrete testing laboratory
giving qualifications of personnel, laboratory facilities and equipment,
and other information which may be requested by ENGINEER.
2.
Materials and installed Work may require testing and retesting, as directed by
ENGINEER, at any time during the progress of the Work. Allow free access
to material stockpiles and facilities at all times. Tests not specifically
indicated to be done at OWNER'S expense, including the retesting of rejected
materials and installed Work, shall be done at CONTRACTOR'S expense.
C. Qualifications of Water-Reducing Admixture Manufacturer:
1.
Water-reducing admixtures shall be manufactured under strict quality control
in facilities operated under a quality assurance program. CONTRACTOR
shall furnish copy of manufacturer's quality assurance handbook to document
the existence of the program. Manufacturer shall maintain a concrete testing
laboratory which has been approved by the Cement and Concrete Reference
Laboratory at the Bureau of Standards, Washington, D.C.
2.
Provide a qualified concrete technician employed by the admixture
manufacturer to assist in proportioning the concrete for optimum use of the
admixture. The concrete technician shall advise on proper addition of the
admixture to the concrete and on adjustment of the concrete mix proportions
to meet changing job site conditions.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
03300-3
GMP 1
D. Tests for Concrete Materials:
1.
Submit written reports to ENGINEER, for each material sampled and tested,
prior to the start of Work.
2.
Provide the Project identification name and number, date of report, name of
CONTRACTOR, name of concrete testing service, source of concrete
aggregates, material manufacturer and brand name for manufactured
materials, values specified in the referenced specification for each material,
and test results. Indicate whether or not material is acceptable for intended
use.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Submit samples of materials as specified and as otherwise may be
requested by ENGINEER, including names, sources, and descriptions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following:
1.
Manufacturer's specifications with application and installation instructions
for proprietary materials and items, including admixtures and bonding agents.
2.
List of concrete materials and concrete mix designs proposed for use.
Include the results of all tests performed to qualify the materials and to
establish the mix designs.
3.
The following information, if ready-mixed concrete is used.
a.
Physical capacity of mixing plant.
b.
Trucking facilities available.
c.
Estimated average amount which can be produced and delivered to the
site during a normal eight hour day, excluding the output to other
customers.
C. Laboratory Test Reports: Submit copies of laboratory test reports for concrete
cylinders, materials and mix design tests. ENGINEER'S review will be for
general information only. Production of concrete to comply with specified
requirements is the responsibility of CONTRACTOR.
D. Submit notarized certification of conformance to referenced standards when
requested by ENGINEER.
E. Delivery Tickets: Furnish to ENGINEER copies of all delivery tickets for each
load of concrete delivered to the site. Provide items of information as specified in
ASTM C94, Section 16.
1.
Provide batch tickets for each batch of job site mixed concrete, as specified.
F. The CONTRACTOR shall submit Portland cement submittals to the ENGINEER
by a well known manufacturer and supplied by one plant.
G. CONTRACTOR may provide Portland cement from a second plant to be used in
emergency situations only. CONTRACTOR must provide second submittal
within 30 days of receipt of first submittal.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
03300-4
GMP 1
H. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all
referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each
paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to
indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks ()
shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the
specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the CONTRACTOR, each
deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right
of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the
reasons for requesting the deviation. The ENGINEER shall be the final authority
for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The CONTRACTOR shall
furnish equipment and/or services as specified if an exception and/or deviation is
rejected. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify
compliance on the part of the CONTRACTOR with the specifications. Failure to
include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s)
for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal
shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further
consideration.
I.
The CONTRACTOR shall submit the preventive maintenance information
package as part of the shop drawing submittal package to the ENGINEER for
review and approval. SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL PACKAGE WILL
NOT BE APPROVED WITHOUT ACCEPTANCE OF PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. All materials used for concrete must be kept clean and free from all foreign matter
during transportation and handling and kept separate until measured and placed in
the mixer. Bins or platforms having hard clean surfaces shall be provided for
storage. Suitable means shall be taken during hauling, piling, and handling to
insure that segregation of the coarse and fine aggregate particles does not occur
and the grading is not affected.
1.5 CONCRETE COORDINATION MEETING
A. Concrete Coordination Meeting shall be held to review the detailed requirements
of CONTRACTOR'S proposed concrete design mixes, to determine the
procedures for producing proper concrete construction, and to clarify the roles of
the parties involved shall be held no later than 14 days after the Notice to Proceed.
B. All parties involved in the concrete Work shall attend the conference, including
but not limited to the following:
1.
CONTRACTOR'S representative.
2.
Testing laboratory representative.
3.
Concrete subcontractor.
4.
Reinforcing steel subcontractor and detailer.
5.
Concrete supplier.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
03300-5
GMP 1
6.
Admixture manufacturer's representative.
7.
ENGINEER.
C. The Concrete Coordination Meeting shall be held at a mutually agreed upon time
and place. The ENGINEER shall be notified no less than five days prior to the
date of the Concrete Coordination Meeting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement:
1.
Portland cement, ASTM C150, Type II.
2.
Use Portland cement made by a well-known acceptable manufacturer and
produced by not more than one plant.
3.
Do not use cement which has deteriorated because of improper storage or
handling.
B. Aggregates: ASTM C33 and as herein specified.
1.
Do not use aggregates containing soluble salts or other substances such as
iron sulfides, pyrite, marcasite, ochre, or other materials that can cause stains
on exposed concrete surfaces.
2.
Fine Aggregate: Clean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay, lumps, or
other deleterious substances.
a.
Dune sand, bank run sand, and manufactured sand are not acceptable.
3.
Coarse Aggregate: Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate containing no clay,
mud, loam, or foreign matter as follows:
a.
Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone.
b.
Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of slag and pit or bank
run gravel is not permitted.
c.
Coarse Aggregate Size: Size to be ASTM C33, Nos. 57 or 67, except
that No. 467 may be used for footings, foundation mats, and walls 16-
inches or greater in thickness.
C. Water: Clean, free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, organic
materials, or other substances that may be deleterious to concrete or steel.
2.2 CONCRETE ADMIXTURES
A. Provide admixtures produced by established reputable manufacturers and use in
compliance with the manufacturer's printed instruction. Do not use admixtures
which have not been incorporated and tested in the accepted mixes, unless
otherwise authorized in writing by ENGINEER.
B. Air-Entraining Admixtures: ASTM C 260.
1.
Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a.
SIKA AER or SIKA AEA-15, as manufactured by Sika Corporation.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
03300-6
GMP 1
b.
MB-VR, as manufactured by Master Builders, Inc.
c.
Daravair, as manufactured by W.R. Grace & Company.
d.
Or approved equal.
C. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A.
1.
Proportion all Class "A" and Class "B" concrete with non-air entraining,
normal setting, water-reducing, aqueous solution of a modification of the salt
of polyhydroxylated organic acids. The admixture shall not contain any
lignin, nitrates, or chlorides added during manufacture.
2.
Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a.
Eucon WR-75, as manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Company.
b.
Pozzolith, as manufactured by Master Builders, Inc.
c.
WRDA-15, as manufactured by W.R. Grace & Conn.
d.
Or approved equal.
D. Pozzolanic Admixtures:
1.
Mineral admixtures, when used, shall meet the requirements of ASTM C618,
Class F, except as follows:
a.
The loss on ignition shall be a maximum of 4%.
b.
The maximum percent of sulfur trioxide (SO3) shall be 4.0.
2.
A substitution by weight, of the Portland cement, by pozzolan, so that the
total tricalcium aluminate content of the resulting cement plus pozzolan is not
greater than 8%, will be considered. However, the pozzolan shall not exceed
20% by weight of the cement, plus pozzolan.
E. Set-Control Admixtures: ASTM C494, as follows:
1.
Type B, Retarding.
2.
Type C, Accelerating.
3.
Type D, Water-reducing and Retarding.
4.
Type E, Water-reducing and Accelerating.
F. Calcium Chloride: Do not use calcium chloride in concrete, unless otherwise
authorized in writing by ENGINEER. Do not use admixtures containing calcium
chloride where concrete is placed against galvanized steel.
2.3 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES
A. Prepare concrete design mixes subject to the following limitations:
Class
Coarse Aggregate1
Minimum
Maximum
Slump2
Air
Min. Comp
Size A
Size
B
Cementitious
W/C
%
Strength3
(lbs/cu yd)
(psi)
6000 psi
#57 or #67
846
0.40
4” Max.
6000
5000 psi
#57 or #67
705
0.40
4" Max.
3 max
5000
Class "A"
#57 or #67
564
0.45
4" Max.
4+/-1
4000
Class "B"
#57 or #67
517
0.55
4" Max.
4+/-1
3000
Class "C"
Any ASTM C33
No requirements
2000
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
03300-7
GMP 1
1.
Coarse aggregate size numbers refer to ASTM C33. Where a size A and B
are listed, it is intended that the smaller size B aggregate is to be added,
replacing a portion of the coarse and /or fine aggregate, in the minimum
amount necessary to make a workable and pumpable mix with a sand content
not exceeding 41% of total aggregate.
2.
The slumps listed are prior to the addition of high range water reducer (super
plasticizer).
3.
Mix designs shall be made for all but Class "C", which does not require a
trial batch, so that the compressive strength achieved for the laboratory trial
batches will be no less than 125% of the specified design strength. This is to
assure meeting the design strength for all concrete batched during the Project.
4.
The quantity of water to be used in the determination of the water-
cementitious materials ratio shall include free water on aggregates in excess
of SSD and the water portion of admixtures.
B. Use an independent testing facility acceptable to ENGINEER for preparing and
reporting proposed mix designs.
1.
The testing facility shall not be the same as used for field quality control
testing.
C. Proportion mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods,
using materials to be employed on the Project for concrete required. Comply with
ACI 211.1 and report to ENGINEER the following data:
1.
Complete identification of aggregate source of supply.
2.
Tests of aggregates for compliance with specified requirements.
3.
Scale weight of each aggregate.
4.
Absorbed water in each aggregate.
5.
Brand, type, and composition of cement.
6.
Brand, type, and amount of each admixture.
7.
Amounts of water used in trial mixes.
8.
Proportions of each material per cubic yard.
9.
Gross weight and yield per cubic yard of trial mixtures.
10. Measured slump.
11. Compressive strength developed at 7 days and 28 days, from not less than
three test cylinders cast for each 7 day and 28 day test, and for each design
mix.
D. Submit written reports to ENGINEER of proposed mix of concrete at least 15
days prior to start of Work.
E. Laboratory Trial Batches: When laboratory trial batches are used to select
concrete proportions, prepare test specimens and conduct strength tests as
specified in ACI 301, Section 4 - Proportioning.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
03300-8
GMP 1
F. Field Experience Method: When field experience methods are used to select
concrete proportions, establish proportions as specified in ACI 301, Section 4.
G. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by
CONTRACTOR when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test
results, or other circumstances warrant; at no additional cost to the OWNER and
as accepted by ENGINEER. Laboratory test data for revised mix designs and
strength results must be submitted to and accepted by ENGINEER before using
the revised mixes.
H. Admixtures:
1.
Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacturer for
climatic conditions prevailing at the time of placing. Adjust quantities and
types of admixtures as required to maintain quality control.
I.
Slump Limits:
1.
A slump of up to 5-inches will be allowed for Class "C'' concrete. See the
General Structural Notes in the Drawings for allowable slumps for other
mixes.
2.
Slump tolerances for all concrete shall meet the requirements of ACI 301 and
ACI 117.
J.
Red Dye:
1.
Add red dye to all concrete used for electrical duct bank encasement.
2.4 EPOXY BONDING AGENT
A. Provide an epoxy-resin bonding agent, two-component type.
B. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
1.
Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod LPL, as manufactured by Sika Corporation.
2.
Eucopoxy LPL, as manufactured by the Euclid Chemical Company.
3.
Or approved equal.
2.5 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS
A. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 10 ounces per square yard and complying with AASHTO M182,
Class 3.
B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: Comply with ASTM C171.
1.
Transguard 4000 or approved equal.
C. Curing Compound: ASTM C309 Type 1-D (water retention requirements):
1.
Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
2.
Super Aqua Cure VOX, as manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Company.
3.
Sealtight 1100, as manufactured by W.R. Meadows, Incorporated.
4.
MasterKure, as manufactured by Master Builders, Inc.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
03300-9
GMP 1
5.
Or approved equal.
6.
Provide fugitive dye when requested by ENGINEER.
2.6 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Items such as plates, angles, inserts, bolts, and similar items not specified
elsewhere shall be provided and installed under this Section. All embedded items
shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. After galvanizing, coat with zinc
chromate paint. Stainless steel items shall not be galvanized.
2.7 CRACK INJECTION MATERIALS
A. Epoxy:
1.
Epoxy for injection shall be a low viscosity, high modulus moisture
insensitive type.
2.
Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following:
a.
Sikadur 35, Hi-Mod L.V. and Sikadur 31, Hi-Mod Gel, as manufactured
by Sika Corporation.
b.
Eucopoxy Injection Resin, as manufactured by The Euclid Chemical
Company.
c.
Or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. CONTRACTOR and his installer shall examine the substrate and the conditions
under which Work is to be performed and notify ENGINEER in writing of
unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER.
3.2 CONCRETE MIXING
A. General:
1.
Concrete may be produced at batch plants or it may be produced by the
ready-mixed process. Batch plants shall comply with the recommendations
of ACI 304 and shall have sufficient capacity to produce concrete of the
qualities specified, in quantities required to meet the construction schedule.
All plant facilities are subject to testing laboratory inspection and acceptance
of ENGINEER.
2.
Mixing:
a.
Mix concrete with an approved rotating type batch machine, except
where hand mixing of very small quantities may be permitted.
b.
Remove hardened accumulations of cement and concrete frequently
from drum and blades to assure acceptable mixing action.
c.
Replace mixer blades when they have lost 10% of their original height.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
03300-10
GMP 1
d.
Use quantities such that a whole number of bags of cement is required,
unless otherwise permitted.
3.
Job Site Mixing: Is not permitted.
B. Ready-Mix Concrete:
1.
Comply with the requirements of ASTM C94 and as herein specified.
Proposed changes in mixing procedures, other than herein specified, must be
accepted by ENGINEER before implementation.
a.
Plant Equipment and Facilities: Conform to National Ready-Mix
Concrete Association "Plant and Delivery Equipment Specification".
b.
Mix concrete in revolving type truck mixers which are in good condition
and which produce thoroughly mixed concrete of the specified
consistency and strength.
c.
Do not exceed the proper capacity of the mixer.
d.
Mix concrete for a minimum of two minutes after arrival at the job site
or as recommended by the mixer manufacturer.
e.
Mix at proper speed until concrete is discharged.
f.
Maintain adequate facilities at the job site for continuous delivery of
concrete at the required rates.
g.
Provide access to the mixing plant for ENGINEER at all times.
2.
Provide a batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work,
indicating the Project identification name and number, date, mix type, mix
time, quantity, and amount of water introduced.
C. Maintain equipment in proper operating condition, with drums cleaned before
charging each batch. Schedule rates of delivery in order to prevent delay of
placing the concrete after mixing, or holding dry-mixed materials too long in the
mixer before the addition of water and admixtures.
3.3 TRANSPORTING CONCRETE
A. Transport and place concrete not more than 90 minutes after water has been added
to the dry ingredients.
B. Take care to avoid spilling and separation of the mixture during transportation.
C. Do not place concrete in which the ingredients have been separated.
D. Do not retemper partially set concrete.
E. Use suitable and approved equipment for transporting concrete from mixer to
forms.
3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. General: Place concrete continuously so that no concrete will be placed on
concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or
planes of weakness within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously,
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
03300-11
GMP 1
provide construction joints as specified in Section 3.4.E of these Specifications
only as approved by ENGINEER. Deposit concrete as nearly as practical in its
final location to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Do not subject
concrete to any procedure which will cause segregation.
1.
Screed concrete which is to receive other construction to the proper level to
avoid excessive skimming or grouting.
2.
Do not use concrete which becomes non-plastic and unworkable, or does not
meet the required quality control limits, or which has been contaminated by
foreign materials. Do not use retempered concrete. Remove rejected
concrete from the job site and dispose of it in an acceptable location.
3.
Do not place concrete until all forms, bracing, reinforcement, and embedded
items are in final and secure position.
4.
Unless otherwise approved, place concrete only when ENGINEER is present.
5.
Allow a minimum of 48 hours before placing concrete against a slab or wall
already in place.
B. Concrete Conveying:
1.
Handle concrete from the point of delivery and transfer to the concrete
conveying equipment and to the locations of final deposit as rapidly as
practical by methods which will prevent segregation and loss of concrete mix
materials.
2.
Provide mechanical equipment for conveying concrete to ensure a continuous
flow of concrete at the delivery end. Provide runways for wheeled concrete
conveying equipment from the concrete delivery point to the locations of
final deposit. Keep interior surfaces of conveying equipment, including
chutes, free of hardened concrete, debris, water, snow, ice, and other
deleterious materials.
3.
Do not use chutes for distributing concrete unless approved in writing by
ENGINEER.
a.
Provide sketches showing methods by which chutes will be employed
when requesting such approval.
b.
Design chutes, if permitted, with proper slopes and supports to permit
efficient handling of the concrete.
4.
Pumping concrete is permitted, however do not use aluminum pipe for
conveying.
C. Placing Concrete into Forms:
1.
Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 18-inches and
in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists
of several layers, place concrete at such a rate that concrete which is being
integrated with fresh concrete is still plastic.
2.
Do not permit concrete to free-fall within the form from a distance exceeding
6 feet. Use "elephant trunks" to prevent free fall and excessive splashing on
forms and reinforcement.
3.
Remove temporary spreaders in forms when concrete placing has reached the
elevation of such spreaders.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
03300-12
GMP 1
4.
Consolidate concrete placed in forms by mechanical vibrating equipment
supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and
procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with the applicable
recommended practices of ACI 309. Vibration of forms and reinforcing will
not be permitted, unless otherwise accepted by ENGINEER.
5.
Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside of forms. Insert and
withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than
the visible effectiveness of the machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate
the layer of concrete and at least 6-inches into the preceding layer. Do not
insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each
insertion, limit the duration of vibration to the time necessary to consolidate
the concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded
items without causing segregation of the mix.
6.
Do not place concrete in beam and slab forms until the concrete previously
placed in columns and walls is no longer plastic.
7.
Force concrete under pipes, sleeves, openings, and inserts from one side until
visible from the other side to prevent voids.
D. Placing Concrete Slabs:
1.
Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within the
limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is
completed.
2.
Consolidate concrete during placing operations using mechanical vibrating
equipment, so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and
other embedded items and into corners.
3.
Consolidate concrete placed in beams and girders of supported slabs, and
against bulkheads of slabs on ground, as specified for formed concrete
structures.
4.
Bring slab surfaces to the correct level. Smooth the surface, leaving it free of
humps or hollows. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface. Do not
disturb the slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations.
E. Bonding for Next Concrete Pour: Roughen surfaces of set concrete at all joints,
except where bonding is obtained by use of a concrete bonding agent.
Construction joints shown on the Drawings are specified in Section 03251,
Concrete Joints, of these Specifications. Clean surfaces of laitance, coatings,
loose particles, and foreign matter. Roughen surfaces in a manner to expose
bonded aggregate uniformly and to not leave laitance, loose particles of
aggregate, or damaged concrete at the surface.
1.
Prepare for bonding of fresh concrete to new concrete that has set but is not
fully cured, as follows:
a.
Thoroughly wet the surface but allow no freestanding water.
b.
For horizontal surfaces, place a 2-inch layer of mortar, one part sand and
one part cement with water, over the hardened concrete surface.
c.
Place fresh concrete before the mortar has attained its initial set.
2.
Bonding of fresh concrete to fully-cured hardened concrete or existing
concrete and horizontal surfaces which will receive a topping shall be
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
03300-13
GMP 1
accomplished by using an epoxy-resin bonding agent as specified in Section
03251, Concrete Joints, of these Specifications.
F. Quality of Concrete Work:
1.
Make all concrete solid, compact and smooth, and free of laitance, cracks,
and cold joints.
2.
All concrete for liquid retaining structures, and all concrete in contact with
earth, water, or exposed directly to the elements shall be watertight.
3.
Cut out and properly replace to the extent ordered by ENGINEER, or repair
to the satisfaction of ENGINEER, surfaces which contain cracks or voids, are
unduly rough, or are in any way defective. Thin patches or plastering will
not be acceptable.
4.
All leaks through concrete and cracks, holes, or other defective concrete in
areas of potential leakage, shall be repaired and made watertight by
CONTRACTOR.
5.
Repair, removal, and replacement of defective concrete as ordered by
ENGINEER shall be at no additional cost to OWNER.
G. Hot Weather Placing:
1.
When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair the quality
and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as
herein specified.
2.
Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of
placement below 80° F when the temperature is rising and below 85° F when
the temperature is falling. Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice or
liquid nitrogen may be used to control the concrete temperature provided the
water equivalent of the ice is calculated in the total amount of mixing water.
3.
Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so
that the steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature
immediately before embedment in concrete.
4.
Wet forms thoroughly before placing concrete.
5.
Do not place concrete at a temperature so as to cause difficulty from loss of
slump, flash set, or cold joints.
6.
Do not use set-control admixtures unless approved by ENGINEER in mix
designs.
7.
Obtain ENGINEER'S approval of other methods and materials proposed for
use.
3.5 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough Form Finish:
1.
Standard rough form finish shall be the concrete surface having the texture
imparted by the form material used, with tie holes and defective areas
repaired and patched with mortar of one part cement to 1-1/2 parts sand and
all fins and other projections exceeding 1/4-inch in height rubbed down or
chipped off.
2.
Use rough form finish for the following:
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
03300-14
GMP 1
a.
Exterior vertical surfaces up to 1 foot below grade.
b.
Interior exposed vertical surfaces of liquid containers up to 1 foot below
liquid level.
c.
Interior and exterior exposed beams and undersides of slabs.
d.
Other areas shown.
B. Smooth Form Finish:
1.
Produce smooth form finish by selecting form materials which will impart a
smooth, hard, uniform texture. Arrange panels in an orderly and symmetrical
manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas as above
with all fins or other projections completely removed and smoothed.
2.
Use smooth form finish for surfaces that are to be covered with a coating
material. The material may be applied directly to the concrete or may be a
covering bonded to the concrete such as waterproofing, damp proofing,
painting or other similar system.
C. Smooth Rubbed Finish:
1.
Provide smooth rubbed finish to concrete surfaces which have received
smooth form finish as follows:
a.
Rubbing of concrete surfaces not later than the day after form removal.
b.
Moistening of concrete surfaces and rubbing with carborundum brick or
other abrasive until a uniform color and texture is produced. Do not
apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.
2.
Except where surfaces have been previously covered as specified above, use
smooth rubbed finish as follows:
a.
Repair all defects and patch all tie holes prior to rubbed finish.
b.
Grind all form finish and joint lines, smooth. Remove all curing
compound and form oil.
c.
Combine one part Portland cement to 1-1/2 parts fine sand by volume
and mix with water to a consistency of thick paint. Blend standard
Portland cement with white Portland cement in amounts determined by
trial patches. Final color of dried grout to match color of adjacent
concrete surfaces.
d.
Thoroughly wet concrete surface with bonding agent and water mix.
Apply grout uniformly by rubber or cork float. Fill all surface holes.
Remove excess grout by rubbing with clean wet burlap to remove any
visible grout film.
e.
Provide sample panel for approval, prior to start of Work.
D. Related Unformed Surfaces:
1.
At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces occurring
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture
matching the adjacent formed surfaces. Continue the final surface treatment
of formed surfaces uniformly across the adjacent unformed surfaces, unless
otherwise shown.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
03300-15
GMP 1
3.6 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES
A. Float Finish:
1.
After placing concrete slabs, do not work the surface further until ready for
floating. Begin floating when the surface water has disappeared or when the
concrete has stiffened sufficiently. Check and level the surface plane to a
tolerance not exceeding 1/4-inch in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot
straightedge placed on the surface at not less than two different angles. Cut
down high spots and fill all low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains.
Immediately after leveling, refloat the surface to a uniform, smooth, granular
texture.
2.
Use float finish for the following:
a.
Interior exposed horizontal surfaces of liquid containers, except those to
receive grout topping.
b.
Exterior below grade horizontal surfaces.
c.
Surfaces to receive additional finishes, except as shown or specified.
B. Trowel Finish:
1.
After floating, begin the first trowel finish operation using a power-driven
trowel. Begin final troweling when the surface produces a ringing sound as
the trowel is moved over the surface.
2.
Consolidate the concrete surface by the final hand troweling operation.
Finish shall be free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and
with a surface plane tolerance not exceeding 1/8-inch in 10 feet when tested
with a 10 foot straightedge. Grind smooth surface defects that would
telegraph through applied floor covering system.
3.
Use trowel finish for the following:
a.
Interior exposed slabs unless otherwise shown or specified.
b.
Slabs to receive resilient floor finishes.
C. Non-Slip Broom Finish:
1.
Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen the concrete surface by
brooming in the direction perpendicular to the main traffic route. Use fiber
bristle broom unless otherwise directed. Coordinate the required final finish
with ENGINEER before application.
2.
Use non-slip broom finish for the following:
a.
Exterior exposed horizontal surfaces subject to light foot traffic.
b.
Interior and exterior concrete steps and ramps.
c.
Horizontal surfaces which will receive a grout topping or a concrete
equipment base slab.
3.7 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION
A. General:
1.
Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or
hot temperature, and maintain without drying at a relatively constant
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
03300-16
GMP 1
temperature for the period of time necessary for hydration of the cement and
proper hardening of the concrete.
2.
Start initial curing after placing and finishing concrete as soon as free
moisture has disappeared from the concrete surface. Keep continuously
moist for not less than 72 hours.
3.
Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and
before the concrete has dried. Continue final curing for at least seven days
and in accordance with ACI 301 procedures. For concrete sections over 30-
inches thick, continue final curing for an additional seven days, minimum.
Avoid rapid drying at the end of the final curing period.
B. Final Curing Methods:
1.
Perform curing of concrete by moist curing, or by moisture-retaining cover
curing, or curing compound.
a.
For curing, use water that is free of impurities which could etch or
discolor exposed, natural concrete surfaces.
2.
Provide moisture curing by any of the following methods:
a.
Keeping the surface of the concrete continuously wet by covering with
water.
b.
Continuous water-fog spray.
c.
Covering the concrete surface with the specified absorptive cover,
thoroughly saturating the cover with water, and keeping the absorptive
cover continuously wet with sprinklers or porous hoses. Cover shall be
Transguard 4000 or approved equal.
d.
Place absorptive cover so as to provide coverage of the concrete surfaces
and edges, with a 4-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
3.
Provide moisture retaining cover curing as follows:
a.
Cover the concrete surfaces with the specified moisture retaining cover
for curing concrete, placed in the widest practical width with sides and
ends lapped at least 3-inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive.
Immediately repair any holes or tears during the curing period using
cover material and waterproof tape.
4.
Provide liquid curing compound as follows:
a.
Apply the specified curing compound to all concrete surfaces when
permitted by ENGINEER. Slabs to receive terrazzo floors, chemical
resistant heavy-duty concrete topping or ceramic tile, shall not be cured
with liquid curing compound, but shall be moisture cured. The
compounds shall be applied immediately after final finishing in a
continuous operation by power spray equipment in accordance with the
manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas which are subjected to heavy
rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain the
continuity of the coating and repair damage to the coat during the entire
curing period. For concrete surfaces which will be in contact with raw
or potable water, the manufacturer shall certify that the curing
compound used is EPA approved.
C. Curing Formed Surfaces:
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
03300-17
GMP 1
1.
Cure formed concrete surfaces, including the undersides of girders, beams,
supported slabs, and other similar surfaces with the forms in place for the full
curing period. If forms are removed earlier, continue curing by methods
specified above, as applicable.
D. Curing Unformed Surfaces:
1.
Final cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and other flat
surfaces by using the appropriate method specified above.
E. Temperature of Concrete During Curing:
1.
When the atmospheric temperature is 40° F and below, maintain the concrete
temperature between 50° F and 70° F continuously throughout the curing
period. When necessary, make arrangement before concrete placing for
heating, covering, insulation or housing as required to maintain the specified
temperature and moisture conditions continuously for the concrete curing
period. Provide cold weather protection complying with the requirements of
ACI 306.
2.
When the atmospheric temperature is 80° F and above, or during other
climatic conditions which will cause too rapid drying of the concrete, make
arrangements before the start of concrete placing for the installation of wind
breaks or shading, and for fog spraying, wet sprinkling, or moisture-retaining
covering. Protect the concrete continuously for the concrete curing period.
Provide hot weather protection complying with the requirements of ACI 305,
unless otherwise specified.
3.
Maintain concrete temperature as uniformly as possible, and protect from
rapid atmospheric temperature changes. Avoid temperature changes in
concrete which exceed 5° F in any one hour and 50° F in any 24-hour period.
F. Protection from Mechanical Injury:
1.
During the curing period, protect concrete from damaging mechanical
disturbances including load stresses, heavy shock, excessive vibration, and
from damage caused by rain or flowing water. Protect all finished concrete
surfaces from damage by subsequent construction operations.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. CONTRACTOR shall employ a testing laboratory to perform field quality control
testing. ENGINEER will make slump tests and will direct the number of tests and
cylinders required. CONTRACTOR shall make standard compression test
cylinders and entrained air tests as specified below, under the direct inspection by
ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR shall furnish all necessary assistance required by
ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR shall also furnish all labor, material, and
equipment required, including cones, rods, molds, air tester, thermometer, curing
in a heated storage box, and all other incidentals required. Above will be subject
to approval by ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR shall furnish all necessary storage,
curing, and transportation required by the testing.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
03300-18
GMP 1
B. Quality Control Testing During Construction:
1.
Perform sampling and testing for field quality control during the placement
of concrete, as follows:
a.
Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C172.
b.
Slump: ASTM C143; one test for each concrete load at point of
discharge; and one for each set of compressive strength test specimens.
c.
Air Content: ASTM C231; one for every other concrete load at point of
discharge, or when required by an indication of change.
d.
Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39; one set of compression
cylinders for each 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof, of each mix design
placed in any one day or for each 2,500 square feet of surface area
placed; one specimen tested at seven days, and two specimens tested at
28 days.
1) Adjust mix if test results are unsatisfactory and resubmit for
ENGINEER'S approval.
2) Concrete which does not meet the strength requirements is subject
to rejection and removal from the Work, or to other such corrective
measures as directed by ENGINEER, at the expense of
CONTRACTOR.
e.
Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31; make one set of four
standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise
directed.
1) Cast, store, and cure specimens as specified in ASTM C31.
f.
Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40° F and
below, and when 80° F and above; and each time a set of compression
test specimens is made.
2.
The testing laboratory shall submit certified copies of test results directly to
ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR within 24 hours after tests are made.
C. Evaluation of Quality Control Tests:
1.
Do not use concrete delivered to the final point of placement which has
slump or total air content outside the specified values.
2.
Compressive strength tests for laboratory-cured cylinders will be considered
satisfactory if the averages of all sets of three consecutive compressive
strength tests results equal or exceed the 28 day design compressive strength
of the type or class of concrete; and, no individual strength test falls below
the required compressive strength by more than 500 psi.
a.
Where questionable field conditions may exist during placing concrete
or immediately thereafter, strength tests of specimens cured under field
conditions will be required by ENGINEER to check the adequacy of
curing and protecting of the concrete placed. Specimens shall be
molded at the same time and from the same samples as the laboratory
cured specimens.
1) Provide improved means and procedures for protecting concrete
when the 28 day compressive strength of field-cured cylinders is
less than 85% of companion laboratory-cured cylinders.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
03300-19
GMP 1
2) When laboratory-cured cylinder strengths are appreciably higher
than the minimum required compressive strength, field-cured
cylinder strengths need not exceed the minimum required
compressive strength by more than 500 psi even though the 85%
criterion is not met.
3) If individual tests of laboratory-cured specimens produce strengths
more than 500 psi below the required minimum compressive
strength, or if tests of field-cured cylinders indicate deficiencies in
protection and curing, provide additional measures to assure that the
load-bearing capacity of the structure is not jeopardized. If the
likelihood of low-strength concrete is confirmed and computations
indicate the load-bearing capacity may have been significantly
reduced, tests of cores drilled from the area in question will be
required at CONTRACTOR'S expense.
b.
If the compressive strength tests fail to meet the minimum requirements
specified, the concrete represented by such tests will be considered
deficient in strength and subject to replacement, reconstruction or to
other action approved by ENGINEER.
D. Testing Concrete Structure for Strength:
1.
When the OWNER employed testing laboratory results indicate that the
strength of the in-place concrete does not meet Specification requirements,
CONTRACTOR shall employ, at his expense, the services of a concrete
testing service to take cores drilled from hardened concrete for compressive
strength determination. Tests shall comply with ASTM C42 and the
following:
a.
Take at least three representative cores from each member or suspect
area at locations directed by ENGINEER.
b.
Strength of concrete for each series of cores will be considered
satisfactory if their average compressive strength is at least 85% and no
single core is less than 75% of the 28 day required compressive strength.
c.
Report test results in writing to ENGINEER on the same day that tests
are made. Include in test reports the Project identification name and
number, date, name of CONTRACTOR, name of concrete testing
service, location of test core in the structure, type, or class of concrete
represented by core sample, nominal maximum size aggregate, design
compressive strength, compression breaking strength and type of break
(corrected for length-diameter ratio), direction of applied load to core
with respect to horizontal plane of the concrete as placed, and the
moisture condition of the core at time of testing.
2.
Fill core holes solid with non-shrink, high strength grout, and finish to match
adjacent concrete surfaces.
3.
Conduct static load test and evaluations complying with ACI 318 if the
results of the core tests are unsatisfactory, or if core tests are impractical to
obtain, as directed by ENGINEER.
4.
OWNER, at his own expense, may also conduct the same tests using the
laboratory of OWNER'S choice when the test results show that the concrete
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
03300-20
GMP 1
does not meet the specifications. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with
the OWNER and ENGINEER prior to taking any representative samples and
beginning the testing process.
3.9 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Filling-In:
1.
Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for the passage of work
by other contractors, unless otherwise shown or directed, after the work of
other contractors is in place. Mix, place and cure concrete as herein
specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide all other
miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete the Work.
B. Curbs:
1.
Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete
is still green and steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners,
intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.
2.
Exterior curbs shall have rubbed finish for vertical surfaces and a broomed
finish for top surfaces.
C. Equipment Bases:
1.
Unless specifically shown otherwise, provide concrete bases for all pumps
and other equipment. Construct bases to the dimensions shown, or as
required to meet manufacturer's requirements and drawing elevations. Where
no specific elevations are shown, bases shall be 6-inches thick and extend 3-
inches outside the metal equipment base or supports. Bases to have smooth
trowel finish, unless a special finish such as terrazzo, ceramic tile or heavy-
duty concrete topping is required. In those cases, provide appropriate
concrete finish.
2.
Include all concrete equipment base work not specifically included under
other Sections or other contracts.
3.
In general, place bases up to 1-1/2-inches below the metal base. Properly
shim equipment to grade and fill 1-1/2-inch void with non-shrink grout, as
specified in Section 03600, Grout.
3.10
CONCRETE ENCASEMENT OF ELECTRICAL DUCT BANKS
A. Mix red dye into concrete to be used for encasement.
B. Provide a minimum covering of 3-inches of concrete over the top and sides of the
conduit and conduit supports.
C. Conduit shall be firmly fixed in place before pouring concrete. Vibrate the
concrete to ensure filling of all spaces between conduits.
D. Where duct banks pass under paved or unpaved roadways, concrete encasement
shall be reinforced with No. 4 longitudinal steel bars placed at each "corner" and
at 18-inches o.c. along the top and sides of the duct bank. Place No. 3 tie-bars
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
03300-21
GMP 1
placed tranversely at 18-inches o.c. Maintain a minimum cover of 2-inches of
concrete over the reinforcing bars.
E. Install a bare stranded copper duct bank ground in each duct bank. Make the
ground electrically continuous throughout the entire duct bank system and
connect to switchgear and motor control center ground busses and to steel conduit
extension of the underground duct system.
3.11
CONCRETE REPAIRS
A. Repair of Formed Surfaces:
1.
Repair exposed-to-view formed concrete surfaces, that contain defects which
adversely affect the appearance of the finish. Surface defects that require
repair include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles,
honeycomb, rock pockets, and holes left by the rods and bolts; fins and other
projections on the surface; and stains and other discolorations that cannot be
removed by cleaning.
2.
Repair concealed formed concrete surfaces that may contain defects that
adversely affect the durability of the concrete. Surface defects that require
repair include cracks in excess of 0.01-inch wide, cracks of any width and
other surface deficiencies which penetrate to the reinforcement or completely
through non-reinforced sections, honeycomb, rock pockets, holes left by tie
rods and bolts, and spalls except minor breakage at corner.
B. Repair structural cracks and cracks in water-holding structures. Method of Repair
of Formed Surfaces:
1.
Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after
removal of forms and as directed by ENGINEER.
2.
Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/2-inch diameter, and holes
left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but, in no case, to a depth of
less than 1-inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface.
Before placing the cement mortar, thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and
brush-coat the area to be patched with the specified bonding agent.
a.
For exposed-to-view surfaces, blend white Portland cement and standard
Portland cement so that, when dry, the patching mortar color will match
the color of the surrounding concrete. CONTRACTOR shall impart
texture to repaired surfaces to match texture of existing adjacent
surfaces. Provide test areas at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture,
texture and color match before proceeding with the patching. Compact
mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than the surrounding
surface.
3.
Cracks which require repair shall be pressure grouted using one of the
following. Apply in accordance with the manufacturer's directions and
recommendations.
a.
Sikadur 35, Hi-Mod L.V., and Sikadur 31, Hi-Mod Gel, as manufactured
by Sika Corporation Company.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
03300-22
GMP 1
b.
Euco Epoxy #452 Epoxy System, as manufactured by The Euclid
Chemical Company.
c.
Or approved equal.
4.
Fill holes extending through concrete by means of a plunger-type gun or
other suitable device from the least exposed face, using a flush stop held at
the exposed face to ensure completely filling.
5.
Sandblast exposed-to-view surfaces that require removal of stains, grout
accumulations, sealing compounds, and other substances marring the
surfaces. Use sand finer than No. 30 and air pressure from 15 to 25 psi.
C. Repair of Unformed Surfaces:
1.
Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and to
verify surface plane to the tolerances specified for each surface and finish.
Correct low and high areas as herein specified.
2.
Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope, in addition to
smoothness, using a template having the required slope. Correct high and
low areas as herein specified.
3.
Repair finish of unformed surfaces that contain defects which adversely
affect the durability of the concrete. Surface defects as such, include crazing,
cracks in excess of 0.01-inch wide or which penetrate to the reinforcement or
completely through non-reinforced sections regardless of width, spalling,
popouts, honeycomb, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions.
4.
Repair structural cracks and cracks in water-holding structures.
D. Methods of Repair of Unformed Surfaces:
1.
Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after the concrete has
cured sufficiently so that repairs can be made without damage to adjacent
areas.
2.
Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after
completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out the low areas and
replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent
concrete. Use one of the following. Apply in accordance with the
manufacturer's directions and recommendations.
a.
Euco Poly-Patch, as manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Company.
b.
Sikatop 122, as manufactured by Sika Corporation.
c.
Or approved equal.
3.
Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding
1-inch diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove
defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square cuts, and expose
reinforcing steel with at least 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen all
concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and brush with the
specified bonding agent. Place patching concrete before grout takes its initial
set. Mix patching concrete of the same materials and proportions to provide
concrete of the same type or class as the original adjacent concrete. Place,
compact and finish as required to blend with adjacent finished concrete.
Cure in the same manner as adjacent concrete.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
03300-23
GMP 1
4.
Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1-inch diameter, by
the dry-pack method. Groove the top of cracks, and cut out holes to sound
concrete and clean of dust, dirt and loose particles. Dampen all cleaned
concrete surfaces and brush with the specified bonding agent. Place dry pack
before the cement grout takes its initial set. Mix dry-pack, consisting of one
part Portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh
sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing.
Compact dry pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete.
Keep patched areas continuously moist for not less than 72 hours.
5.
Cracks which require repair shall be pressure grouted using one of the
following. Apply in accordance with the manufacturer's directions and
recommendations.
a.
Sikadur 35, Hi-Mod L.V., and Sikadur 31, Hi-Mod Gel, as manufactured
by Sika Corporation.
b.
Euco Epoxy #452 Epoxy System, as manufactured by The Euclid
Chemical Company.
c.
Or approved equal.
6.
Assure that surface is acceptable for flooring material to be installed in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
E. Other Methods of Repair:
1.
Repair methods not specified above may be used if approved by
ENGINEER.
END OF SECTION
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
09900-1
GMP 1
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following:
1.
Exposed exterior items and surfaces.
2.
Exposed interior items and surfaces.
3.
Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in
addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or
material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not
specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as
similar adjacent materials or surfaces, whether or not schedules indicate colors. If
the schedules do not indicate color or finish that is mentioned, the ENGINEER
will select from standard colors and finishes available.
1.
Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts
(including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed
metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment.
C. Unless indicated otherwise, do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces,
finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels.
1.
Prefinished items include, but are not limited to, the following factory-
finished components:
a.
Architectural woodwork and casework.
b.
Motor nameplates.
c.
Instrumentation and electrical mounting hardware such as nuts, bolts,
screws, U-bolts, handles, latches, and hinges.
d.
Analyzers, probes, nuts, bolts, and screws or any mounting hardware.
e.
Metal toilet enclosures.
f.
Acoustical ceiling panels.
g.
Metal lockers.
h.
Ceramic tile, windows, glass, resilient flooring; other architectural
features, such as "finish" hardware, furnished in aluminum, bronze or
plated ferrous metal, prefinished panels, or other items installed
prefinished.
i.
Finished mechanical and electrical equipment, except as indicated in the
Specifications or on the Plans.
j.
Light fixtures.
k.
Interior distribution cabinets and switch gear, except as indicated.
2.
Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally
inaccessible spaces:
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
09900-2
GMP 1
a.
Foundation spaces, unless noted otherwise.
b.
Surfaces behind furred areas.
c.
Ceiling plenums.
d.
Utility tunnels.
e.
Pipe spaces.
f.
Duct shafts.
3.
Finished metal surfaces include the following:
a.
Stainless steel or chromium plated items.
b.
Chromium plate.
c.
Copper.
d.
Bronze and brass.
e.
Buried cast and ductile iron pipe encased with a protective polyethylene
sleeve.
f.
Anodized aluminum, aluminum gratings, and floor plates.
1) Paint aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete, grout, masonry,
wood, or dissimilar materials as described below:
a)
Surface must be clean, dry, and free of oil, grease, and other
contaminants. Surface preparation with SSPC-SP7 brush-off
abrasive blast cleaning. Apply two coats of Tnemec Series 20
Pota-Pox or approved equal; each coat shall be 3-5 mils.
Coating must be NSF 61 approved.
g.
Prefinished louvers, except those in doors, unless otherwise noted and
acoustical ceiling panels.
4.
Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the
following:
a.
Valve and damper operators or handles.
b.
Linkages.
c.
Sensing devices.
d.
Motor and fan shafts.
5.
Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual
(FM), fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, or other
code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating,
nomenclature plates, and equipment identification plates.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 1, General Requirements, Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.3 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surface preparation.
B. Field application of paints and other coatings.
C. Pipe identification markers.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
09900-3
GMP 1
D. Surfaces to Be Finished are provided in the schedule at end of Section and in the
Contract Documents.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ANSI A13.1, Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; 1981 (revised
1993).
B. ASTM D16, Standard Terminology Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and
Related Products; 1995.
C. OSHA 1910.144, Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 29.
D. SSPC (PM2), Steel Structures Painting Manual, Vol. 2, Systems and
Specifications; Steel Structures Painting Council; 1995.
1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D16 apply to this Section.
1.
Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when
measured at an 85 degree meter.
2.
Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20
when measured at a 60-degree meter.
3.
Satin refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when
measured at a 60 degree meter.
4.
Semi-gloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and
65 when measured at a 60 degree meter.
5.
Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when
measured at a 60 degree meter.
6.
Buried refers to covered with earth.
7.
Exposed or exposed surfaces refers to areas visible when permanent or built-
in fixtures, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in
these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired
protection.
8.
Submerged refers to materials which are permanently or intermittently below
the maximum water or liquid surface elevation in open top structures, unless
otherwise noted or otherwise shown; materials within liquid or residual solids
carrying structures that are covered, including materials on the underside of
the covers, whether in contact with liquids or not, unless otherwise noted or
otherwise shown; materials within an enclosed process structure, whether in
contact with liquids or not.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300, Submittals, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
09900-4
GMP 1
1.
Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials.
Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system,
and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number
and general classification.
2.
Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information,
including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying
each coating material proposed for use.
a.
Identify manufacturer's recommended, published spreading rate, and dry
film thickness of each coating material proposed for use.
b.
Indicate manufacturer's instructions on surface and special surface
preparation procedures.
c.
Include the following: Mixing instructions, shelf life, method of
application, recommended number of coats, drying time of each coat
including prime coat, required prime coat, compatible and non-
compatible prime coats, and recommended thinners when required.
C. Pipe Identification Markers: Submit product data and marker sample for each
type of pipe identification required.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and
coated surfaces.
E. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range
of colors available for each type of finish-coat material indicated. Submit two
paper chip samples, 3-inch by 3-inch in size.
F. Before supplying any material to the site, the painting subcontractor and the paint
manufacturer's area representative shall prepare a complete schedule showing the
materials proposed to be used for each treatment specified, and submit same to
ARCHITECT and ENGINEER for review/approval.
G. Paint colors will be specified by the ARCHITECT for the architectural paint
system specified herein, who, before any Work is done, will furnish color chips
and schedule showing where the various colors shall go.
H. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in Paragraph 1.9 to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects
with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Engineers or Architects
and Owners, and other information specified.
I.
Manufacturer's Certification: Submit in accordance with Paragraph 3.8 at the
completion of the Work.
J.
A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all
referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each
paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to
indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks ()
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
09900-5
GMP 1
shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the
specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the CONTRACTOR, each
deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right
of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the
reasons for requesting the deviation. The ENGINEER shall be the final authority
for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The CONTRACTOR shall
furnish equipment and/or services as specified if an exception and/or deviation is
rejected. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify
compliance on the part of the CONTRACTOR with the specifications. Failure to
include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s)
for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal
shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further
consideration.
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke rating and VOC requirements
for products and finishes.
B. Lead, heavy metals, cadmium, and chromate content of painting materials shall
not exceed amount permitted by Federal, State, and local authorities.
C. Coatings for surfaces in contact with potable water or water being treated for
potable use shall not impart any taste or odor to the water or result in any organic
or inorganic content in excess of the maximum contaminant level established by
applicable laws or regulations.
D. Comply with governing code requirements for air quality and material disposal
regulations.
1.8 MOCK-UP
A. Provide stepped-down job mock-ups for all painting and coating systems showing
all components of the preparation and installation before any Work shall
commence. Verify all dry film thicknesses, surface preparations, and methods of
installation in addition to color and texture of the finished work.
B. Provide mock-ups for each of the following substrates, illustrating painting and
coating colors and finishes:
1.
Ferrous Metal: Provide panel equal to 4 square feet in size for each color and
finish.
2.
Provide door and frame assembly for each paint coating color and finish.
C. Locate where directed by ENGINEER.
D. Mock-up(s) may remain as part of the Work.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
09900-6
GMP 1
E. Work advanced without approved job mock-ups shall be completely removed and
re-installed without additional compensation to the OWNER.
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed
painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for
this Project with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for
each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
C. Products shall be of best grade or first line.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages
and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following
information:
1.
Product name or title of material.
2.
Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3.
Manufacturer's stock number, lot number, brand code, and date of
manufacture.
4.
Contents by volume for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5.
Thinning instructions.
6.
Application instructions.
7.
Coverage and surface preparation.
8.
Drying time.
9.
Cleanup requirements.
10. Instructions for mixing and reducing.
11. Color name and number.
12. Material Safety Data Sheets.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at
a minimum ambient temperature of 45º F (7º C). Maintain containers used in
storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
1.
Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags
and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work
areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling,
mixing, and application.
2.
Provide fire extinguishers and post caution signs warning against smoking
and open flame when working with flammable materials.
C. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by
painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, or replacing and repainting, as
approved by the ENGINEER. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
09900-7
GMP 1
finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect
their work after completing painting operations.
1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air temperatures are between 50º F and 120º F (10º C and 48.9º C).
B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted
and surrounding air temperatures are between 45º F and 120º F (7.2º C and 48.9º
C).
C. Provide lighting level of 80 foot candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.
D. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity
exceeds 85%; or at temperatures less than 5º F (3º C) above the dew point; or to
damp or wet surfaces.
1.
Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be
painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by
manufacturer during application and drying periods.
1.12 UNUSED MATERIALS
A. Furnish unused materials in unopened or opened and resealed containers for
storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver materials to the
OWNER.
1.13 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Supply one gallon of each color; store where directed.
B. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in the
paint schedules.
B. Manufacturers Names: The following manufacturers are referred to in the paint
schedules by use of shortened versions of their names, which are shown in
parentheses:
1.
Benjamin Moore & Co. (Moore).
2.
PPG Industries, Inc. (PPG).
3.
Tnemec Co. (Tnemec).
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
09900-8
GMP 1
4.
Frazee Paint.
5.
Ameron.
6.
Valspar.
2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Paint exposed surfaces, except as indicated in Paragraph 1.4 and/or in
Drawings/Specifications. If an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint
the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials of surfaces whether or
not the schedule indicates color(s). If the schedule does not indicate color(s) or
finish(es), the ENGINEER will select from standard colors and finishes available.
B. Equipment supplied with a finished coat by the manufacturers shall be touched-up
by the CONTRACTOR.
C. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, except field-catalyzed coatings. Prepare
pigments:
1.
To a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed
to a homogeneous coating.
2.
For good flow and brushing properties.
3.
Capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
D. Metals encased in concrete shall only receive a primer compatible with the
covering material.
E. All items under and around the metal canopies shall be considered exterior and
painted with materials conforming to those specified in this Specification.
F. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish coat
materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under
conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on
testing and field experience.
G. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the
various coating types specified. Paint-material containers not displaying
manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.
1.
Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to
designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are
required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other
manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of
performance for proposed substitutions.
H. Color Coding: Unless otherwise specified, all color coding of piping, ducts, and
equipment shall comply with applicable standards of the following:
1.
ANSI A13.1.
2.
OSHA 1910.144.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
09900-9
GMP 1
I.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch-up and restore
damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
J.
Architectural Color Schedule: Colors indicated are by Tnemec Company, Inc.:
www.tnemec.com.
1.
Shading Devices: Match existing colors at existing Administration Building
located on site.
2.
Exterior Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Match existing colors at existing
Administration Building located on site.
3.
Exposed CMU, Interior: 11WH White.
4.
Interior Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 33GR Grey.
5.
Exposed Gypsum Board, Interior: 07WH Winter Mist.
K. Colors: All colors as selected by ENGINEER from manufacturer's standards
except as follows:
1.
Color of safety stripe at bollards match PPG 6-330 Safety Yellow.
2.3 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR
A. Field Primed Steel and Ferrous Metal:
1.
Exterior Exposure, Hot Air Carbon Steel Pipe:
a.
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP6/NACE 3 Commercial Blast Cleaning
with a minimum angular anchor profile of 1.5 mils.
b.
Prime Coat: Prime Coat: Series 69-1255 (beige) H.B. Epoxoline II; one
coat; 4-6 mils DFT (dry film thickness).
c.
Finish Coat: Series 75 Endura-Shield II; one coat; 3-5 mils DFT.
2.
Exterior Exposure:
a.
Surface Preparation: SSPC SP6 Commercial Abrasive Blast Cleaning.
b.
Prime Coat: Series 69-1255 (beige) H.B. Epoxoline II; one coat; 4-6
mils DFT (dry film thickness).
c.
Finish Coat: Series 73 Endura-Shield; one coat; 3-4 mils DFT.
3.
Interior Exposure:
a.
Surface Preparation: SSPC SP6 Commercial Abrasive Blast Cleaning.
b.
Prime Coat: Series 69-1255 (beige) H.B. Epoxoline II; one coat; 3-5
mils DFT.
c.
Finish Coat: Series 69 H.B. Epoxoline; one coat; 4-6 mils DFT.
4.
Immersion or Partial Immersion Exposure:
a.
Surface Preparation: SSPC SP10 Near-White Metal Abrasive Blast
Cleaning.
b.
Prime Coat: Series 66 H.B. Epoxoline; one coat; 4-6 mils DFT.
c.
Finish Coat: Series 69 H.B. Epoxoline II; one coat; 4-6 mils DFT.
B. Shop and Factory Primed Steel:
1.
Exterior Exposure:
a.
Field Prime Coat (over factory prime coat): Series 135 (beige)
Chembuild; one coat; 3-4 mils DFT.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
09900-10
GMP 1
b.
Finish Coat: Series 73 Endura-Shield; one coat; 3-4 mils DFT.
2.
Interior Exposure:
a.
Field Prime Coat (over factory prime coat): Series 135 (beige)
Chembuild; one coat; 3-4 mils DFT.
b.
Finish Coat: Series 69 H.B. Epoxoline; one coat; 4-6 mils DFT.
3.
Immersion or Partial Immersion Exposure:
a.
Surface Preparation: Brush off abrasive blast cleaning if required for
recoat of the shop primer. Coating surface to be clean, dry, and free of
contaminants prior to application of the field coats.
b.
Prime Coat: Series 66 H.B. Epoxoline; one coat; 2.5-3 mils DFT.
c.
Finish Coat: Series 69 H.B. Epoxoline II; one coat; 4-6 mils DFT.
C. Galvanized Steel and Non-Ferrous Metals:
1.
Exterior Exposure:
a.
Surface Preparation: Brush-off abrasive blast cleaning.
b.
Prime Coat: Series 69-1255 (beige) H.B. Epoxoline II; one coat; 3-4
mils DFT.
c.
Finish Coat: Series 73 Endure-Shield; one coat; 3-4 mils DFT.
2.
Interior Exposure:
a.
Surface Preparation: Clean, dry and free of contaminants.
b.
Prime Coat: Series 135 (beige) Chembuild; one coat; 3-4 mils.
c.
Finish Coat: Series 69 H.B. Epoxoline II; one coat; 4-6 mils DFT.
3.
Immersion or Partial Immersion Exposure:
a.
Surface Preparation: Brush-off abrasive blast cleaning.
b.
Prime Coat: Series 66 H.B. Epoxoline; one coat; 4-6 mils DFT.
c.
Finish Coat: Series 69 H.B. Epoxoline II; one coat; 4-6 mils DFT.
D. Ductile and Cast Iron:
1.
Exterior Exposure:
a.
Surface Preparation: Solvent scrub with stiff bristle brush, followed by
brush-off abrasive blast cleaning to a minimum surface profile depth of
1.5 mils DFT.
b.
Prime Coat: Series 69-1255 (beige) H.B. Epoxoline II; one coat; 3-5
mils DFT.
c.
Finish Coat: Series 73 Endura-Shield; one coat; 3-4 mils DFT.
2.
Interior Exposure:
a.
Surface Preparation: Clean, dry, and free of contaminants.
b.
Prime Coat: Series 135 Chembuild; one coat; 4-6 mils DFT.
c.
Finish Coat: Series 69 H.B. Epoxoline II; one coat; 4-6 mils DFT.
3.
Buried:
a.
Surface Preparation: Solvent scrub with stiff bristle brush followed by
brush-off abrasive blast cleaning to a minimum surface profile depth of
1.5 mils DFT.
b.
Prime Coat: Series 69-1255 (beige) H.B. Epoxoline II; one coat; 3-5
mils DFT.
c.
Finish Coat: Series 69 H.B. Epoxoline II; one coat; 4-6 mils DFT.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
09900-11
GMP 1
4.
Immersion:
a.
Surface Preparation: Solvent scrub with stiff bristle brush, followed by
brush-off abrasive blast cleaning to a minimum surface profile depth of
1.5 mils.
b.
Prime Coat: Series 66 H.B. Epoxoline; one coat; 4-6 mils DFT.
c.
Finish Coat: Series 69 H.B. Epoxoline II; one coat; 4-6 mils DFT.
E. Masonry:
1.
Interior Exposed CMU:
a.
Surface Preparation: Clean, dry, and free of contaminants.
b.
Block Filler: Series 130 Envirofill; one coat; 60-80 square foot per
gallon.
c.
Finish Coats: Series 69 H.B. Epoxoline II; two coats; 4-6 mils DFT per
coat.
F. PVC:
1.
Exterior Exposure:
a.
Surface Preparation: Clean, dry, and free of contaminants.
b.
Prime Coat: Series 66 H.B. Epoxoline; one coat; 3-5 mils DFT.
c.
Finish Coat: Series 73 Endure-Shield; one coat; 3-4 mils DFT.
2.
Interior Exposure:
a.
Surface Preparation: Clean, dry, and free of contaminants.
b.
Finish Coat: Series 66 H.B. Epoxoline; two coats; 3-5 mils DFT per
coat.
G. Wood (Except Preservative-Treated Wood):
1.
Interior and Exterior Exposure:
a.
Surface Preparation: Clean, dry, and free of contaminants.
b.
Prime Coat: Series 36 Undercoater; one coat; 2-3.5 mils DFT.
c.
Finish Coat: Series 23 Enduratone; two coats; 1.5-3.5 mils DFT per
coat.
2.4 ARCHITECTURAL PAINT SYSTEMS
A. Concrete Gloss Epoxy:
1.
Surface Preparation: All surfaces to be clean and free of contaminants prior
to application of the coating system.
2.
Prime Coat: Series 104 H.S. Epoxy; one coat; 4-5 mils DFT.
3.
Finish Coat: Series 104 H.S. Epoxy; one coat; 4-5 mils DFT.
B. Interior Gypsum Wallboard and Plaster: Ducts/Pipes:
1.
Surface Preparation: Clean dry and free of contaminants prior to application
of coating system.
2.
Prime Coat: Series 51-792 PVA Sealer; one coat; 1-2 mils DFT.
3.
Finish Coats: Series 113 Tufcoat; two coats; 4-5 mils DFT per coat.
C. Insulated Ducts/Pipes:
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
09900-12
GMP 1
1.
Surface Preparation: All surfaces to be clean and free of contaminants prior
to application of the coating system.
2.
Prime Coats: Series 6 Tneme-Cryl; one coat; 2-3 mils DFT.
D. Concrete Semi-Gloss Latex:
1.
Surface Preparation: All surfaces to be clean and free of contaminants prior
to application of the coating system.
2.
Prime Coat: Series 7 Tneme-Cryl; one coat; 2-3 mils DFT.
3.
Finish Coat: Series 7 Tneme-Cryl; one coat; 2-3 mils DFT.
2.5 PIPE IDENTIFICATION MARKERS
A. Manufacturers: Provide products by one of the following:
1.
Seton Name Plate Company.
2.
W.H. Brady Company.
3.
Or equal.
B. General: The size of lettering and marker shall conform to ANSI A13.1.
C. Provide brass tags for pipes under 3/4-inch outside diameter. Provide plastic pipe
markers for pipes over 3/4-inch.
D. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed
to fit around pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow
direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed.
1.
Markers for piping up to 6-inch diameter shall be preformed to completely
wrap around the pipe requiring no adhesive. Markers for pipes over 6-inch
diameter shall be preformed to the contour of the pipe and attached with
stainless steel spring fasteners.
E. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2-inch diameter
with smooth edges.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Inspect substrates, areas, and conditions, with the applicator present, under which
painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements.
Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product
manufacturer.
1.
Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
2.
Start of painting will be construed as the applicator's acceptance of surfaces
and conditions within a particular area.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
09900-13
GMP 1
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to
ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request,
furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of
compatible primers.
1.
Notify the ENGINEER about anticipated problems using the materials
specified over substrates primed by others.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Perform all preparation and cleaning procedures as specified herein and in strict
accordance with the paint manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate
and atmospheric condition.
B. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove
oil and grease with clean cloths and cleaning solvents prior to mechanical
cleaning. Program the cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants
from the cleaning process will not fall in wet, newly painted surfaces.
C. Furnish sufficient drop cloths, shields, and protective equipment to prevent spray
or droppings from fouling surfaces not being painted and, in particular, surfaces
within storage and preparation area.
D. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting
fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal
is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide
surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1.
After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items
removed using workers skilled in the trades involved.
E. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect Work of this Section.
Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects.
F. Marks: Seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes with barrier coat
compatible with paint.
G. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew in accordance with paint manufacturer's
recommendations.
H. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates
of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and
grease before cleaning.
1.
Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the
cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
I.
Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to
manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as
specified.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
09900-14
GMP 1
1.
Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
2.
Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement
plaster, and mineral fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted.
Remove stains, loose mortar, scale, salt, efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt,
grease, oils, release agents, and other foreign matter in accordance with paint
manufacturers's recommendations. Do not use wire brushes for preparation
or cleaning. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers
have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface
preparation.
a.
Use abrasive blast cleaning methods if recommended by paint
manufacturer.
b.
Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing
appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish
paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do
not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in
manufacturer's written instructions.
c.
Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5% solution of muriatic acid
or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove
acid, neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before
painting.
3.
Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers,
mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed-to-view
smooth and dust off.
a.
Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of
white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer.
After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty
or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
b.
Seal pitch streaks and sappy sections with sealer. Seal cracks, pitch
streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks with
caulking compound after prime coat has been applied; sand between
coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation.
c.
Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime
edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including
cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling.
d.
When transparent finish is required, back prime with spar varnish.
e.
Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy
coat of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery.
4.
Gypsum Board Surfaces to Be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler
compound. Spot prime defects after repair.
5.
Zinc Coated Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and prepare
for priming in accordance with metal manufacturer's recommendations.
6.
Plaster Surfaces to Be Painted: Allow new plaster surfaces to cure 28 days.
Remove grease, dirt, loose mortar, scale or alkali powder, high alkali
surfaces, and other foreign matter in accordance with paint manufacturer's
recommendation. Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
09900-15
GMP 1
patching plaster that is compatible with paint. Make smooth and flush with
adjacent surfaces. Do not use wire brushes for preparation or cleaning.
7.
Aluminum: Remove surface contamination by steam or high pressure water.
Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing.
8.
Copper: Remove surface contamination by steam or high pressure water.
9.
Ferrous Metals: Clean and remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and
other foreign substances from ungalvanized ferrous metal surfaces that have
not been shop coated as outlined in Paragraph 2.3. Use solvent or
mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting
Council's (SSPC) recommendations.
a.
Blast steel surfaces clean, as recommended by paint system
manufacturer.
b.
Touch-up bare areas and shop applied prime coats that have been
damaged. Wire brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint
manufacturer, and touch-up with the same primer as the shop coat.
c.
For shop-primed ferrous metal surfaces, clean and prepare in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations. Feather edges to make touch-up
patches inconspicuous. Prime bare steel surfaces. Provide barrier coat
over entire shop primed items.
10. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based
solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove
pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by
mechanical methods.
11. Ductile Iron Pipe: All new ductile iron pipe (DIP) intended for immersion
service shall be prepared per coating manufacturer's specifications and as
specified herein.
a.
Remove grease, rust scale, rust and touch-up any chipped or abraded
areas on items that have been shop coated. Items intended for
immersion service that have not been shop coated shall be sandblasted to
"Near White Blast Cleaning" condition per SSPC SP-10 prior to
receiving coating.
b.
All new DIP intended for non-immersion service shall be sandblasted to
"Commercial Blast Cleaning" condition per SSPC SP-6 prior to
receiving coating.
J.
Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition,
free of foreign materials and residue.
2.
Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir
as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If
necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using.
3.
Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within
recommended limits.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
09900-16
GMP 1
K. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each
coat when multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to
match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of
undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use
applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being
applied.
1.
Any spot measurement found below the required minimum dry film
thickness shall be repainted by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions, at no additional cost to the OWNER.
2.
Do not apply finishes on surfaces that are not sufficiently dry. Allow each
coat of finish to dry before following coat is applied, unless directed
otherwise by the manufacturer.
3.
Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant
is applied.
4.
Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and
particles just prior to applying next coat.
5.
Install piping identification markers after painting has been completed
according to the color coding schedule indicated.
6.
Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules
located at the end of this Section.
7.
Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or
conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
8.
Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
9.
Finish edges, tops and bottoms of all doors the same as door faces. Both
sides and all edges of doors to be finished simultaneously.
10. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-
in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and
similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required,
to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection.
11. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar
exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of movable equipment, paint
surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat
only.
12. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where
visible through registers or grilles.
13. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior
faces.
14. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework
to match exterior.
15. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
09900-17
GMP 1
B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pre-
treated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation
and before subsequent surface deterioration.
1.
The number of coats required are the same regardless of application method.
Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured, as
recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a
smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand
between applications.
a.
Apply each coat in film thicknesses as recommended by the
manufacturer.
2.
Unless recommended by the manufacturer, omit primer on factory finished
metal surfaces indicated to be field painted or metal surfaces that have been
shop primed and touch-up painted.
3.
If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint,
apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and
appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds,
and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat
surfaces.
4.
Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do
not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not
deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application
of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or
other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush
of appropriate size for the surface or item being painted.
2.
Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool, as
recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required.
3.
Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size and
pressure, as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture
required.
D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than
manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness
of each coat and of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.4 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Electrical and mechanical items to be painted include the following, whether
factory prefinished or not, with color selected by the ENGINEER:
1.
Exterior mechanical and electrical equipment and accessories including, but
not limited to, the following:
a.
Electrical and instrument panels, motor control centers, and switch gear.
b.
Electrical conduit and accessories.
c.
Transformers.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
09900-18
GMP 1
d.
Brackets.
e.
Meter enclosures.
f.
Conduit.
g.
Components that are visible or exposed to the weather.
h.
Exhaust fans and blowers.
2.
Exterior roof mounted mechanical and electrical equipment, any component
of which is above adjacent parapets, including but not limited to, the
following:
a.
Roof mounted HVAC units.
b.
Exhaust stacks, blowers, vents, etc.
c.
Miscellaneous steel support components for mechanical equipment
screens.
B. Paint interior factory finished mechanical and electrical components selected by
the ENGINEER from the manufacturer's standards, including, but not limited to,
the following:
1.
Piping (per color code and schedule), pipe hangers, and supports.
2.
Duct work.
3.
Duct throats behind grilles, registers, louvers, baffles, etc., shall be given one
coat of flat acrylic latex (copolymer) black paint wherever visibility of the
interior of the duct is allowed.
4.
Switchboards.
5.
Disconnect switches.
6.
Pumps, motors, and mechanical equipment.
7.
Gear reducers.
8.
Accessory items.
9.
Conduit and fittings (per color code and schedule).
10. Switchgear.
11. Panelboards.
C. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure
complete coverage with pores filled.
D. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as
recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or
finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed
surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to
ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient
sealing.
E. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide
a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage.
Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other
surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
09900-19
GMP 1
F. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass smooth
surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color
irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.
G. Provide satin finish for final coats.
H. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture.
Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or
other surface imperfections.
I.
Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and
electrical components and paint separately.
J.
Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and
fittings removed prior to finishing.
K. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical equipment before
installing backboards and mounting equipment on them.
L. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage.
Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements.
3.5 FINISHING PROCESS EQUIPMENT AND FACILITIES
A. The following process equipment and facilities shall be painted according to this
Specification, including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
Headworks Building: Paint control panels, disconnects, transmitters, all new
above ground, buried, and immersed piping and fittings, all new valves, pipe
supports, exposed ductwork, interior CMU walls, gypsum board walls and
ceilings, ladders, hallow metal doors and frames, etc.
2.
Headworks odor control scrubber: Paint all new above ground, buried, and
immersed piping and fittings, all new valves, and pipe supports, etc.
3.
Chemical storage and containment area: Paint new above ground, buried and
immersed piping and fittings, all new valves and pipe supports, chemical
metering pumps and appurtenances, etc.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and
other discarded paint materials from the site.
1.
After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove
spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage
adjacent finished surfaces.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
09900-20
GMP 1
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by
painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, or replacing and repainting, as
approved by ENGINEER.
B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary
protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing
painting operations.
1.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch-up and restore
damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in
PDCA P1.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. CONTRACTOR shall provide a written report from the manufacturer certifying
that paint has been applied in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements
B. Provide ENGINEER with suitable testing materials in order for ENGINEER to
carry out alkalinity and moisture tests prior to preparation and application.
C. Provide ENGINEER with the following testing equipment, accurately calibrated,
for use by the ENGINEER prior to surface preparation and application.
1.
Tinker and Rasor Model M-1, K-D "Bird Dog", or equal, holiday detector,
complete with necessary accessories.
2.
Microtest, Elcometer, or equal, magnetic dry film thickness gauge.
3.
Wet mil paint gauge for use during application.
D. The ENGINEER reserves the right to test surfaces, film thicknesses, and paint
products at any time and as often as the ENGINEER deems necessary during the
period when paint is being applied.
1.
Any spot measurement found below the required minimum dry film
thickness shall be repainted by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions, at no additional cost to the OWNER.
2.
Do not paint unsatisfactory surfaces until they have been corrected and are in
accordance with paint manufacturer's recommendations.
3.9 PIPE COLOR CODING AND IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install tags with corrosion resistance chain.
C. Locate identification markers and tags at the following locations:
1.
At each branch and riser takeoff.
a.
At each pipe passage through a wall, floor, or ceiling.
b.
On each horizontal and vertical pipe run at 25 foot intervals.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
09900-21
GMP 1
D. Exposed, non-submerged, interior piping shall be color coded and provided with
identification markers as follows, unless directed otherwise by the ENGINEER:
Exposed Pipe Labels
Background Colors
Color of
Letters
Air Piping:
John Deere Green (AWRF)
Black (AWRF)
Water Lines:
Water - Potable
Water - Non-Potable
Light Blue
Tan (AWRF)
Purple (OWRF)
Black
Black (AWRF)
White (OWRF)
Exposed Electrical Conduits:
120 V / 480 V / 4,160 V (no label)
Match Background Color
None
Fire Quenching Materials:
Water, Foam, CO2, Halon, Fire
Hydrants, including sections of
potable water for Fire Dept. access
(no label)
Red
None
HVAC Duct Work:
Match Background Color
None
Sample Lines Piping:
Dark Blue
Black
Piping:
IMLR
Return Activated Sludge
Odor Control Piping
Backwash Washwater
Tank Drain / Sump Drain
Tan (OWRF)
Dark Brown (OWRF)
White (OWRF)
Dark Brown
Black (AWRF)
Grey (OWRF)
Black (OWRF)
White (OWRF)
Black (OWRF)
White
White (AWRF)
White (OWRF)
Chemical Piping:
Sodium Hypochlorite
Yellow
Black
E. Exposed piping, as defined earlier in this Specification, shall be color coded as
listed above, except submerged pipes and pipes less than 3/8-inch diameter shall
be painted the same as the wall or piece of equipment to which it is attached.
F. Positive identification of the contents of a piping system shall be lettered legibly,
giving the name of the contents in full or abbreviated form at no greater than 25
foot intervals between markings. Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of
flow at no greater than 10 foot intervals. Contents shall be identified by
additional details required by the ENGINEER, such as temperature, pressure, etc.,
as necessary to identify the hazard.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
09900-22
GMP 1
G. Legend shall be brief and applied close to valves or flanges and adjacent to
changes in direction, branches, and where pipes pass through walls or floors.
H. Where two or more pipes run parallel, markings shall be applied in the same
relative location on each as to be in vertical or horizontal line and present a neat
appearance.
I.
In case a pipe is in such location that it can be seen only from one direction, such
as pipes near a wall, two sets of the code designation shall be applied at each
location, placed in two visible quadrants with respect to normal viewing positions.
Minimum Letter Sizes
O.D. of Pipe
(inches)
3/4 - 1-1/4
1-1/2 - 2
2-1/2 - 6
8 - 10
Over 10
Height of Letters
(inches)
1/2
3/4
1-1/4
2-1/2
3-1/2
END OF SECTION
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11285-1
GMP 1
SECTION 11285
HYDRAULIC GATES AND STOP LOGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as
shown, specified, and required to furnish and install stainless steel gates, and
appurtenances.
B. Gate mountings shall be supplied by the gate manufacturer and all other
appurtenances shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Slide Gates.
B. Sluice Gates
C. Stop Logs.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
1.
Section IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Welding and Brazing
Qualifications.
B. American Water Works Association (AWWA)
1.
AWWA C 561 - Fabricated Stainless Steel Gates.
C. American Welding Society (AWS)
1.
D1.6 - Structural Welding Code-Stainless Steel.
D. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
1.
A 276 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes, Type 304 and Type
316.
2.
B 584 - Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Application.
3.
D 1248 - Standard Specification for Polyurethane Plastics Extrusion Materials
for Wire and Cable.
4.
D 2000 - Standard Classification for Rubber Products in Automotive
Applications.
5.
D 4020 - Standard Specification for Ultra-High Molecular-Weight Polyethylene
Molding and Extrusion Materials.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11285-2
GMP 1
1.4 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01300, Submittals.
B. Section 01640, Materials and Equipment.
C. Section 01650, Starting of Systems.
D. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete.
E. Section 03600, Grout.
F. Section 09900, Painting (Specifications for surface preparation and shop priming
required under Section 11285, Hydraulic Gates, are to be done in conformance with
Section 09900, Painting).
G. Section 13447, Electric Motor Actuators.
H. Division 16, Electrical.
I.
Division 17, Instrumentation.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications:
1.
Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five years of experience in the
production of substantially similar equipment and shall show evidence of
satisfactory operation in at least five installations.
2.
All gates shall be the product of one manufacturer.
B. Shop Tests:
1.
Test each gate fully assembled in the vertical position for proper seating.
2.
Fully open and close gate disc in its guide system to ensure that it operates
freely.
3.
Operate and test floor stands, bench stands, and motor operators to ensure proper
assembly and operation. Motor operators shall be tested by the operator
manufacturer prior to shipment.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Descriptive Submittals shall be made in accordance with the Data Reference Symbols
defined in Section 01300, Submittals.
1.
Shop Drawings:
a.
Letters of Certification of Compliance on materials, equipment, etc.
b.
Final Certified Drawings showing outline dimensions, foundation layout or
mounting information, and other pertinent dimensions.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11285-3
GMP 1
c.
Shop Detail Drawings showing individual sub-assemblies and fabricated
pieces with material specifications and other applicable data.
d.
Schematic and wiring diagrams of power, control, and piping systems. A
detailed description of operation shall be included for each diagram to
describe all modes of operation of the system indicated. Where the
integrated system requires interlocking and control of other components in
normal operation, these components shall be included in the description of
operation.
e.
General bulletins and catalog cuts describing complete apparatus, including
operating principles and fundamentals.
f.
Materials of construction of all components.
g.
Renewal parts list with diagrammatic or cross-section drawings showing
part identification. Material analysis or trades designation for each
significant part is to be noted on parts lists or on a separate sheet.
h.
Stuffing box sizes; packing sizes; specifications and arrangement; and
mechanical seal details, specifications, etc., if furnished in equipment.
i.
Deviations from the Contract Documents.
2.
O&M Manuals:
a.
Final Certified Drawings showing outline dimensions, foundation layout or
mounting information, and other pertinent dimensions.
b.
Shop Detail Drawings showing individual sub- assemblies and fabricated
pieces with material specifications and other applicable data.
c.
Installation instructions, operating and/or service manuals, and all other
data pertinent to operating or servicing the complete apparatus.
Preventative maintenance instructions and recommended frequency.
d.
General bulletins and catalog cuts describing complete apparatus, including
operating principles and fundamentals.
e.
Materials of construction of all components.
f.
Renewal parts list with diagrammatic or cross-section drawings showing
part identification. Material analysis or trades designation for each
significant part is to be noted on parts lists or on a separate sheet.
g.
Stuffing box sizes; packing sizes; specifications and arrangement; and
mechanical seal details, specifications, etc., if furnished in equipment.
h.
Test reports, maintenance data and schedules, description of operation, and
spare parts information.
i.
Furnish Operation and Maintenance Manuals in conformance with the
requirements of Section 01300, Submittals.
B. Field Test Results:
1.
Submit a written report giving the results of the field tests required.
C. Lubricant Specification: Furnish a lubricant specification for the type and grade
necessary to meet the requirements of the equipment.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11285-4
GMP 1
D. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all
referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each
paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate
requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks () shall denote
full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are
indicated, and therefore requested by the CONTRACTOR, each deviation shall be
underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified
paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting
the deviation. The ENGINEER shall be the final authority for determining
acceptability of requested deviations. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish equipment
and/or services as specified if an exception and/or deviation is rejected. The
remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the
part of the CONTRACTOR with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the
marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested
deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient
cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.
E. The CONTRACTOR shall submit the preventive maintenance information
package as part of the shop drawing submittal package to the ENGINEER for
review and approval. SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL PACKAGE WILL
NOT BE APPROVED WITHOUT ACCEPTANCE OF PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION.
1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the site to insure uninterrupted progress of the Work.
1.
Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices which are to be embedded in
cast-in-place concrete in ample time to maintain the construction schedule.
B. Handle all gates and appurtenances properly, in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Gates which are distorted or otherwise damaged will not be
acceptable. Protect all steam threads, bolt threads and ends from damage.
C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification.
D. Store all mechanical equipment in covered storage off the ground and prevent
condensation.
1.8 GATE SCHEDULE
A. The Gate Schedule is included at the end of this Section. This schedule is provided
for general information on specific gates. In the event of discrepancies between this
schedule and the Plans and Specifications, the information on the Plans shall govern.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11285-5
GMP 1
PART 2 - PPRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Whipps, Inc., Athol, MA
B. Fontaine
C. Golden Harvest, Inc., Burlington, WA.
D. Waterman Industries
E. Or, Approved Equal.
F. The naming of a manufacturer in this Specification is not an indication that the
manufacturer's standard equipment is acceptable in lieu of the specified component
features. Naming is only an indication that the manufacturer may have the capability
of engineering and supplying a system as specified.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. All materials used in the manufacturing of the gates shall be of the best quality used
for the purpose of commercial production.
B. General: Design equipment to be suitable for the process and service conditions
described below and in the Gate & Stop Log Schedule.
1.
Design gates to safely withstand conditions listed in the Gate and Stop Log
Schedule.
2.
Gates and stop logs shall be substantially watertight with leakage less than 0.5
gpm per foot of seating perimeter at design head.
3.
Manual operators shall turn right to close, unless otherwise specified. Operators
shall indicate the direction of operation.
4.
Bolts, studs, cap screws, and adjusting screws shall be of ample section to
withstand the force created by operation of the gate under a full head of water.
5.
Downward opening gates and stop logs shall be capable of being lowered to an
elevation below the invert of the channel or opening.
6.
Gates and stop logs shall open to not less than 6-inches above the maximum
water level in the channel in which they are installed.
C. Materials of Construction for Gates:
1.
Stainless Steel: For frame, slide, slide stiffeners, rail, yoke, pedestals, wall
brackets, and wall thimbles ASTM A276, Type 316 stainless steel. All metal for
gate and wall thimble parts shall have a minimum thickness of 1/4-inch.
2.
Frame, top stiffener, vertical stiffener, center stiffener, seal landing, seal retainer,
and stop log lifter shall be made of stainless steel consistent with ASTM A240.
3.
Bronze Casting: For operating nut, thrust nut and lift nut; ASTM B 584 Alloy
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11285-6
GMP 1
4.
Bronze Casting: For operating nut, thrust nut, and lift nut, ASTM B584 Alloy
865.
5.
All bolts, studs, cap screws, and adjusting screws shall be of Type 316 stainless
steel.
6.
Bolts and nuts shall have hexagon heads.
7.
Gasket material and installation shall conform to manufacturer's
recommendations.
8.
Disc:
a.
Stainless Steel: Fabricate the slide or disc of ASTM A276, Type 316L
stainless steel plate reinforced with structural shapes attached by welding.
b.
Provide reinforcing to limit deflection under full head to not more than
1/360 of the span, or 1/16-inch maximum at seal points, whichever is less.
c.
Extend reinforcing ribs into the guides overlapping the seating surface of
the guide.
d.
Disc shall be sized to engage into the guides a minimum of 1-inch on each
side.
e.
Weld stem mounting guides to the disc.
9.
Disc Guides:
a.
Stainless Steel: Guides shall be of Type 316L stainless steel formed and
welded to create a one-piece type construction. using formed plate. Gussets
shall be provided to accommodate the load on the frame in unseating head
conditions.
b.
Guides shall be designed for maximum rigidity in accordance with the
latest revision of AWWA C561 to take the load developed at maximum
design head and the thrust developed during gate operation, including the
stall torque of the electric actuator, under maximum head.
c.
Guides shall extend beneath the opening a sufficient amount to completely
support the disc in the fully open or closed position.
10. Stop Log Guides:
a.
Guides shall be of stainless steel and incorporating a sandwich type
construction using plates and structural angles.
b.
Guides shall be designed for maximum rigidity as columns to take the
thrust developed during gate operation under maximum head.
c.
Frame design shall allow for embedded mounting with stainless steel
anchor bolts and grout. Mounting style shall be as shown on the Contract
Drawings.
d.
The gussets shall be provided as necessary to support the guide members in
an unseating head condition. The gussets shall extend to support the outer
portion of the frame guides and shall be positioned to ensure that the load is
transferred to the anchor bolts.
e.
An invert member shall be provided across the bottom of the guides. The
invert member shall be of the flushbottom type. Frame mounted seals are
not acceptable.
11. Stem:
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11285-7
GMP 1
a.
Operating stems shall be of Type 316 stainless steel and designed as
specified below. Stems shall have a minimum diameter of 1-1/2 inches.
b.
Design stem to transmit in compression at least 2-1/2 times the rated output
of the operating mechanism with an 80 lb effort on the crank or handwheel.
c.
Determine the critical buckling load using the Euler column formula, using
C = 2. Where hydraulic cylinder lifts are used, the stem design force shall
not be less than 1.25 times the output thrust of the hydraulic cylinder with a
pressure equal to the maximum working pressure of the hydraulic fluid
supply. Where electric motor driven lifts are used, the stem design force
shall not be less than 1.25 times the output thrust of the unit in the stalled
motor condition.
d.
Stems shall have a slenderness ratio (L/R) less than 200.
e.
Threaded portion of the stem shall have machined cut or machine rolled
threads of the Acme type, having a surface roughness finish of 16 micro-
inches or less. Join stems of more than one section by stainless steel
couplings threaded and keyed, or bored and pinned, to the stems. All
threaded and keyed couplings of the same size shall be interchangeable.
Provide rising stems with an adjustable stop collar on the stem on manually
operated gates.
f.
Connect the stem to the disc by means of a bolted connection with a
minimum of two attachment bolts.
12. Yoke (For Self Contained Type Gates):
a.
Furnish tops of the extended guides with a yoke for mounting of the lifting
device.
b.
Construct the yoke of structural shapes of sufficient strength to take the full
thrust created by operating the gate under the maximum specified head.
c.
Attach the yoke to the framework by bolting or welding so as to permit
removal of the gate slide and stem.
13. Lower Seals:
a.
Mount a specially shaped resilient neoprene seal on the bottom of the disc
or guide frame to provide flush-bottom closure for gates.
b.
Shape of the seal shall produce a seating surface having a minimum width
of 3/4-inch, and the seal will extend beyond the seating surface of the gate
frame.
c.
Vertical face of the seal shall be in contact with the seating surface of the
guide to provide a proper seal at the corners.
14. Side and Upper Seals:
a.
Side and upper seals shall be self-adjusting seals with compression cord
fabricated from ultra high molecular weight (UHMW) polyethylene or
UHMW polymer. Weir gates to have the self-adjust seal on the bottom
versus top for slide gates. UHMW bearing strips shall be mechanically
retained to lock seat in place. Elastomeric seals such as J-Seals and Crown
seals or adjust seal designs are not acceptable.
15. Stop Log Seals:
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11285-8
GMP 1
a.
Each stop log shall be outfitted with a continuous resilient lip seal along the
bottom and both sides to restrict leakage in accordance with the
requirements listed in this specification.
b.
Vertical face of the seal shall be in contact with the seating surface of the
guide to provide a proper seal at the corners.
c.
The continuous lip seal shall be constructed of urethane or rubber and shall
mechanically retained to the stop log.
d.
The lip seal shall be activated by a combination of the weight of the stop
log and the differential water pressure, which pushes the seal against the
inside the groove assembly.
e.
Stop logs that utilize rubber “J” seals or “P” seals are not acceptable.
f.
Seals shall be place at the invert of each stop log providing a leak proof
barrier. Seal retainers shall be made of 316 stainless steel.
16. Lifters:
a.
One stop log lifter shall be provided for each different guide frame width
b.
the lifter shall be constructed of stainless steel and shall be outfitted with
UHMW guide bars and stainless steel fasteners.
c.
The lifter shall be provided with lifting hooks designed to engage the slots
in the top of the stop logs. A lanyard release will be incorporated into the
design.
d.
The lifter shall be capable of installing and removing all stop logs of the
same width whether they are installed or at the operating floor level.
2.3 APPURTENANCES
A. Stem Guides:
1.
Guides shall be adjustable in two directions and shall be spaced so that stems
have a maximum unsupported length of 84-inches.
2.
Anchor bolts for stem guides shall be Type 316 stainless steel.
B. Anchor Bolts:
1.
Provide Type 316 stainless steel anchor bolts as required for stem guides,
floorstands, and all equipment or appurtenances which must be secured to
concrete walls or floors. Anchor bolts shall be of ample size and strength for the
purpose intended, and shall be furnished by the manufacturer. Anchor bolts
shall be hooked, and provided for direct embedment during placement of
concrete. Anchor bolts shall conform to the requirements of Section 05051,
Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts and Concrete Inserts.
C. Stem Cover:
1.
Furnish all stems with a clear polycarbonate or butyrate plastic pipe stem cover.
Covers shall be furnished with a cast aluminum adaptor for mounting covers to
floor stands. Stem covers shall be designed and furnished with gasketing and
breathers to eliminate water intrusion into operators and condensation within the
covers.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11285-9
GMP 1
2.
Stem covers shall have with legible markings showing as a minimum the gate
position at 1/4 open, 1/2 open, 3/4 open and full open.
D. Electric Operators:
1.
Electric motor operators shall be furnished as shown on the Slide Gate Schedule,
in accordance with the requirements of Section 11200, 480 Volt Motor-Operated
Valve and Gate Actuators.
E. Identification: Identify each gate with a stainless steel manufacturer’s nameplate
stamped with the approved designation as shown in the Gate Schedule, below.
Manufacturer’s nameplate shall be permanently fastened to the gate at the factory.
2.4 SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING
A. Clean, prime coat, and finish coat ferrous metal surfaces of equipment in the shop in
accordance with the requirements of Section 01600, General Equipment Provisions,
and Section 09900, Painting.
B. Coat machined, polished and non-ferrous surfaces bearing surfaces and similar
unpainted surfaces with corrosion prevention compound which shall be maintained
during storage and until equipment begins operation.
C. Surface preparation and painting shall conform to Section 09900, Painting.
D. Certify, in writing, that the shop primer and coating system conforms to the
requirements of Section 09900, Painting.
2.5 SPECIAL TOOLS
A. Furnish two sets of any special tools required for normal operation and maintenance.
2.6 LUBRICANTS
A. Furnish Food grade oil and grease meeting NSF 61 for water applications as required
for initial operation. Use products recommended by the manufacturer.
2.7 GATE AND STOP LOG SCHEDULE
A. Schedule 11285 is the Gate and Stop Log Schedule. Conform to type, size, operation
and other data specified, unless otherwise approved by ENGINEER.
B. Provide all gates as shown on the Drawings and listed in the Gate Schedule.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11285-10
GMP 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Gates shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Gates shall be installed at the respective location as shown on the Plans.
C. Gate stems shall be plumb and vertical. Each gate shall be adjusted for smooth and
easy operation.
D. Brace guides and frames during placement of concrete.
E. Set anchor bolts in accord with approved manufacturers drawings.
F. Provide minimum of 1-inch of non-shrink grout below all floor stands and between
gate frame and wall on wall mounted gates.
G. Adjust all parts and components as required to provide correct operation.
3.2 FIELD TESTS
A. After CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER have mutually agreed that the equipment
installation is complete and ready for continuous operation, CONTRACTOR and a
qualified field service representative of the manufacturer shall conduct a functional
field test and a leakage test of each gate in the presence of ENGINEER to
demonstrate that each gate furnished will function correctly and that maximum
permissible leakage is not exceeded.
1.
Functional Tests:
a.
Each gate with appurtenances shall be field tested. Tests shall demonstrate
to ENGINEER that each part and all parts together function in the manner
intended. All necessary testing equipment and manpower shall be provided
by CONTRACTOR at his expense. OWNER will furnish all power, and
incidental material and labor required for the tests.
2.
Leakage Tests:
a.
Maximum permissible leakage shall be in accordance with the requirements
of Paragraph 2.2.B.2. Excess leakage shall be reduced to meet specified
requirements by adjusting the gate or replacement will be required.
3.
In the event that the manufacturer is unable to demonstrate to ENGINEER that
his equipment meets the requirements of the tests, the deficient equipment will
be rejected and CONTRACTOR shall adjust and/or modify and retest the
equipment as often as necessary to meet the specified requirements. No separate
payments shall be made for adjustments and/or modifications.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11285-11
GMP 1
3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICE
A. A factory employed and trained representative of the manufacturer shall visit the site
and provide installation and start-up services, as specified in Section 01650, Starting
of Systems. The factory employed representative shall make six visits to the site.
The six visits will be split as needed between installation assistance and supervision,
checking the completed installation and start-up of the system, and for training on the
operation and maintenance of the gates. Trips to include:
1.
Installation supervision: 2 trips, 1 day per plant (AWRF and OWRF).
2.
Dry wall installation inspection and operation: 2 trips, 4 days per plant (AWRF
and OWRF).
3.
Wet wall functional and leakage testing: 2 trips, 4 days per plant (AWRF and
OWRF).
4.
Training and remaining startup: 2 trips, ½ day per plant (AWRF and OWRF).
B. Equipment Start-up: A factory employed representative of the manufacturer shall
visit the site and provide installation and start-up services as specified in Section
01650, Starting of Systems.
C. Training: A factory employed and trained representative of the manufacturer shall
visit the site and provide operator training services, in addition to equipment start-up
services, as specified in Section 01650, Starting of Systems. A minimum of one day
of training and of training will be required.
D. All costs, including travel, lodging, meals, and incidentals, shall be considered as
included in the CONTRACTOR'S lump sum bid price.
(The rest of this page left intentionally blank.)
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11285-12
GMP 1
GATE / STOP LOGS SCHEDULE
WM = WALL MOUNTED; SC = SELF CONTAINED; NSC = NON-SELF CONTAINED; FB = FLUSH BOTTOM; STD = STANDARD; DO = DOWNWARD; EO = ELECTRIC OPERATOR; MO = MANUALLY OPERATOR
Equipment Number
Gate / Stop
Logs Location
Mounting
Style /
Frame
Type
Shape of Wall
Opening / Top Seal
(Y/N)
Invert (ft)
/
Operating
Floor
Elevation
(ft)
Size
(WxH, in)
Gate
Opening
Direction
Min
Gate
Travel
(ft)
Seating /
Unseating
(ft)
Type of
Closure
Operator
AIRPORT WRF
FIT-XXX-SLG
DISC FILTER NO.1
INFLUENT SLIDE
GATE
WM / NSC
RECTANGULAR / Y
1218.08 /
1224.58
48 x 24
UPWARD
2
4 / 4
STD
EO
FIT-XXX-SLG
DISC FILTER NO.2
INFLUENT SLIDE
GATE
WM / NSC
RECTANGULAR / Y
1218.08 /
1224.58
48 x 24
UPWARD
2
4 / 4
STD
EO
FIT-XXX-SLG
DISC FILTER NO.3
INFLUENT SLIDE
GATE
WM / NSC
RECTANGULAR / Y
1218.08 /
1224.58
48 x 24
UPWARD
2
4 / 4
STD
EO
FIT-XXX-SLG
DISC FILTER NO.4
INFLUENT SLIDE
GATE
WM / NSC
RECTANGULAR / Y
1218.08 /
1224.58
48 x 24
UPWARD
2
4 / 4
STD
EO
FIT-XXX-SLG
DISC FILTER NO.5
INFLUENT SLIDE
GATE
WM / NSC
RECTANGULAR / Y
1218.08 /
1224.58
48 x 24
UPWARD
2
4 / 4
STD
EO
FIT-XXX-SLG
DISC FILTER NO.6
INFLUENT SLIDE
GATE
WM / NSC
RECTANGULAR / Y
1218.08 /
1224.58
48 x 24
UPWARD
2
4 / 4
STD
EO
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11285-13
GMP 1
GATE / STOP LOGS SCHEDULE
WM = WALL MOUNTED; SC = SELF CONTAINED; NSC = NON-SELF CONTAINED; FB = FLUSH BOTTOM; STD = STANDARD; DO = DOWNWARD; EO = ELECTRIC OPERATOR; MO = MANUALLY OPERATOR
Equipment Number
Gate / Stop
Logs Location
Mounting
Style /
Frame
Type
Shape of Wall
Opening / Top Seal
(Y/N)
Invert (ft)
/
Operating
Floor
Elevation
(ft)
Size
(WxH, in)
Gate
Opening
Direction
Min
Gate
Travel
(ft)
Seating /
Unseating
(ft)
Type of
Closure
Operator
FIT-XXX-SLG
DISC FILTER
EFFLUENT SLIDE
GATE
WM / NSC
RECTANGULAR / Y
1212.33 /
1224.58
60 x 48
UPWARD
4
10 / 10
STD
EO
OCOTILLO WRF
AB-XXX-SLG
IMLR DISCHARGE
CHANNEL GATE 1
WM / SC
RECTANGULAR / Y
1189.60 /
1196.60
30 X 36
UPWARD
3
5 / 5
STD
MO
AB-XXX-SLG
IMLR DISCHARGE
CHANNEL GATE 2
WM / SC
RECTANGULAR / Y
1189.60 /
1196.60
30 X 36
UPWARD
3
5 / 5
STD
MO
AB-XXX-SUG
ANOXIC
INFLUENT
CHANNEL GATE 1
WM (on
existing
thimble) / NSC
RECTANGULAR / Y
1174.85 /
1196.60
36 X 36
UPWARD
3
20 / 20
STD
MO
AB-XXX-SUG
ANOXIC
INFLUENT
CHANNEL GATE 2
WM (on
existing
thimble) / NSC
RECTANGULAR / Y
1174.85 /
1196.60
36 X 36
UPWARD
3
20 / 20
STD
MO
AB-XXX-SLG
IMLR DISCHARGE
CHANNEL
EXPANSION GATE
1
WM / SC
RECTANGULAR / Y
1189.10 /
1196.60
60 X 72
UPWARD
6
6 / 6
STD
MO
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11285-14
GMP 1
GATE / STOP LOGS SCHEDULE
WM = WALL MOUNTED; SC = SELF CONTAINED; NSC = NON-SELF CONTAINED; FB = FLUSH BOTTOM; STD = STANDARD; DO = DOWNWARD; EO = ELECTRIC OPERATOR; MO = MANUALLY OPERATOR
Equipment Number
Gate / Stop
Logs Location
Mounting
Style /
Frame
Type
Shape of Wall
Opening / Top Seal
(Y/N)
Invert (ft)
/
Operating
Floor
Elevation
(ft)
Size
(WxH, in)
Gate
Opening
Direction
Min
Gate
Travel
(ft)
Seating /
Unseating
(ft)
Type of
Closure
Operator
AB-XXX-SLG
IMLR DISCHARGE
CHANNEL
EXPANSION GATE
2
WM / SC
RECTANGULAR / Y
1189.10 /
1196.60
60 X 72
UPWARD
6
6 / 6
STD
MO
AB-XXX-SUG
48” DIA MLR
INFLUENT PIPE
WM (on
existing
thimble) / SC
ROUND / Y
1182.60 /
1196.60
48 X 48
UPWARD
4
12 / 12
STD
MO
AB-XXX-SUG
PROPOSED IMLR
PUMP FEED
CHANNEL
WM (on
existing
thimble) / SC
RECTANGULAR / Y
1181.10 /
1196.60
42 X 42
UPWARD
3.5
13 / 13
STD
MO
AB-XXX-SUG
PROPOSED MLR
FROM FUTURE
OXIC BASINS
WM (on
existing
thimble) / SC
RECTANGULAR / Y
1174.60 /
1196.60
42 X 42
UPWARD
3.5
19 / 19
STD
MO
AB-XXX-SUG
ANOXIC NORTH
EFFLUENT TRAIN
1 GATE 1
WM (on
existing
thimble) / NSC
RECTANGULAR / Y
1188.85 /
1196.60
60X 72
DOWNWARD
6
6 / 6
STD
MO
AB-XXX-SUG
ANOXIC
EFFLUENT TRAIN
2 GATE 1
WM (on
existing
thimble) / NSC
RECTANGULAR / Y
1188.85 /
1196.60
60X 72
DOWNWARD
6
6 / 6
STD
MO
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11285-15
GMP 1
GATE / STOP LOGS SCHEDULE
WM = WALL MOUNTED; SC = SELF CONTAINED; NSC = NON-SELF CONTAINED; FB = FLUSH BOTTOM; STD = STANDARD; DO = DOWNWARD; EO = ELECTRIC OPERATOR; MO = MANUALLY OPERATOR
Equipment Number
Gate / Stop
Logs Location
Mounting
Style /
Frame
Type
Shape of Wall
Opening / Top Seal
(Y/N)
Invert (ft)
/
Operating
Floor
Elevation
(ft)
Size
(WxH, in)
Gate
Opening
Direction
Min
Gate
Travel
(ft)
Seating /
Unseating
(ft)
Type of
Closure
Operator
AB-XXX-SUG
OWRF - ANOXIC
EFFLUENT TRAIN
1 GATE 2
WM (on
existing
thimble) / NSC
RECTANGULAR / Y
1174.10 /
1196.60
60 X 72
UPWARD
6
18 / 18
STD
MO
AB-XXX-SUG
OWRF - ANOXIC
EFFLUENT TRAIN
2 GATE 2
WM (on
existing
thimble) / NSC
RECTANGULAR / Y
1174.10 /
1196.60
60 X 72
UPWARD
6
18 / 18
STD
MO
AB-XXX-XXX
OWRF - ANOXIC
EFFLUENT
CHANNEL STOP
LOG 1
WM (in
channel)
RECTANGULAR / N
1188.10 /
1196.60
84 X 96
(12” x7;
6” x2)
N/A
N/A
6 / 6
N/A
N/A
AB-XXX-XXX
OWRF - ANOXIC
EFFLUENT
CHANNEL STOP
LOG 2
WM (in
channel)
RECTANGULAR / N
1188.10 /
1196.60
84 X 96
(12” x7;
6” x2)
N/A
N/A
6 / 6
N/A
N/A
SC-XXX-SLG
SPLITTER BOX
INVERTED WEIR
GATE 1
WM / SC
RECTANGULAR / N
1190.89 /
1194.60
60 X 30
DOWNWARD
2.5
2.5 / 2.5
STD
MO
SC-XXX-SLG
SPLITTER BOX
INVERTED WEIR
GATE 2
WM / SC
RECTANGULAR / N
1190.89 /
1194.60
60 X 30
DOWNWARD
2.5
2.5 / 2.5
STD
MO
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11285-16
GMP 1
GATE / STOP LOGS SCHEDULE
WM = WALL MOUNTED; SC = SELF CONTAINED; NSC = NON-SELF CONTAINED; FB = FLUSH BOTTOM; STD = STANDARD; DO = DOWNWARD; EO = ELECTRIC OPERATOR; MO = MANUALLY OPERATOR
Equipment Number
Gate / Stop
Logs Location
Mounting
Style /
Frame
Type
Shape of Wall
Opening / Top Seal
(Y/N)
Invert (ft)
/
Operating
Floor
Elevation
(ft)
Size
(WxH, in)
Gate
Opening
Direction
Min
Gate
Travel
(ft)
Seating /
Unseating
(ft)
Type of
Closure
Operator
SC-XXX-SLG
SPLITTER BOX
INVERTED WEIR
GATE 3
WM / SC
RECTANGULAR / N
1190.89 /
1194.60
60 X 30
DOWNWARD
2.5
2.5 / 2.5
STD
MO
SC-XXX-SLG
SPLITTER BOX
INVERTED WEIR
GATE 3
WM / SC
RECTANGULAR / N
1190.89 /
1194.60
60 X 30
DOWNWARD
2.5
2.5 / 2.5
STD
MO
SC-XXX-SLG
SPLITTER BOX
WM / NSC
RECTANGULAR / Y
1184.60 /
1194.60
24 X 24
UPWARD
2
8 / 8
STD
MO
FIT-XXX-SLG
DISC FILTER NO. 1
INFLUENT
CHANNEL
WM / NSC
RECTANGULAR / Y
1183.20 /
1188.41
48 X 24
UPWARD
2
4 / 4
STD
EO
FIT-XXX-SLG
DISC FILTER NO. 2
INFLUENT
CHANNEL
WM / NSC
RECTANGULAR / Y
1183.20 /
1188.41
48 X 24
UPWARD
2
4 / 4
STD
EO
FIT-XXX-SLG
DISC FILTER NO. 3
INFLUENT
CHANNEL
WM / NSC
RECTANGULAR / Y
1183.20 /
1188.41
48 X 24
UPWARD
2
4 / 4
STD
EO
FIT-XXX-SLG
DISC FILTER NO. 4
INFLUENT
CHANNEL
WM / NSC
RECTANGULAR / Y
1183.20 /
1188.41
48 X 24
UPWARD
2
4 / 4
STD
EO
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11285-17
GMP 1
GATE / STOP LOGS SCHEDULE
WM = WALL MOUNTED; SC = SELF CONTAINED; NSC = NON-SELF CONTAINED; FB = FLUSH BOTTOM; STD = STANDARD; DO = DOWNWARD; EO = ELECTRIC OPERATOR; MO = MANUALLY OPERATOR
Equipment Number
Gate / Stop
Logs Location
Mounting
Style /
Frame
Type
Shape of Wall
Opening / Top Seal
(Y/N)
Invert (ft)
/
Operating
Floor
Elevation
(ft)
Size
(WxH, in)
Gate
Opening
Direction
Min
Gate
Travel
(ft)
Seating /
Unseating
(ft)
Type of
Closure
Operator
FIT-XXX-SLG
COMMON FILTER
INFLUENT
CHANNEL 1
WM / SC
RECTANGULAR / N
1179.10 /
1188.41
48 X 84
UPWARD
7
7 / 7
FB
MO
FIT-XXX-SLG
COMMON FILTER
INFLUENT
CHANNEL 2
WM / SC
RECTANGULAR / N
1179.10 /
1188.41
48 X 84
UPWARD
7
7 / 7
FB
MO
FIT-XXX-SLG
FILTER BYPASS
CHANNEL GATE
WM / SC
RECTANGULAR / N
1179.10 /
1188.41
48 X 60
UPWARD
5
5 / 5
FB
MO
FIT-XXX-SLG
FILTER BYPASS
STOP LOGS
WM (in
channel)
RECTANGULAR / N
1184.00 /
1188.41
48 X 48
(12” x3;
6” x2)
N/A
N/A
4 / 4
N/A
N/A
FIT-XXX-SLG
COMMON FILTER
EFFLUENT
CHANNEL STOP
LOGS
WM (in
channel)
RECTANGULAR / N
1172.92 /
1188.41
48 X 120
(12” x9;
6” x2)
N/A
N/A
10 / 10
N/A
N/A
END OF SECTION
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11400-1
GMP 1
SECTION 11400
DISC FILTER SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The CONTRACTOR shall supply all tools, equipment, materials, and supplies,
and shall perform all labor required to complete the installation of the Disc Filter
System as indicated on the Contract Drawings and specified herein to provide a
fully operational Disc Filter System. The Disc Filter System shall be rated for an
average flow of 27 MGD with a peak flow of 33 MGD at the Airport WRF and an
average flow of 11.4 MGD with a peak flow of 18 MGD at the Ocotillo WRF.
B. Filter units to be installed in concrete tank(s) as shown on the Drawings and/or
specified within include the following components:
1.
Disc Filter System including, but not limited to, the following:
a.
Centertube Assembly with Cloth Media Discs.
b.
Drive Assembly.
c.
Influent Weir.
d.
Basin Mounting Brackets and Hardware.
e.
Electrical Controls and Internal Components.
2.
Filter Backwash and Solids Wasting Assembly including, but not limited to,
the following:
a.
Backwash/Solids Waste Pump Assembly.
b.
Valves.
c.
Pressure Transducer Assembly.
d.
Float Switch.
e.
Vacuum Transmitter.
f.
Vendor Control Panel.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01010, Summary of Work.
B. Section 01300, Submittals.
C. Section 01640, Materials and Equipment.
D. Section 01650, Starting of Systems.
E. Section 01660, Field Tests of Equipment.
F. Section 11285, Hydraulic Gates.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11400-2
GMP 1
G. Section 11295 – Hydraulic valves.
H. Section 13447, Electric Motor Actuators.
I.
Division 16, Electrical.
J.
Division 17, Instrumentation.
K. Section 17454, Operation and Control Description.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except
as otherwise shown or specified.
1.
American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA).
2.
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):
a.
841 – IEEE Standard from Petroleum and Chemical Industry – Severe
Duty Totally Enclosed Fan-Cooled (TEFC) Squirrel Cage Induction
Motors – Up to and Including 370 kW (500 hp).
3.
National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA).
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide a Disc Filter System that operates with an outside-in flow pattern to
remove solids from the incoming secondary effluent wastewater stream. Each
filter unit shall be capable of performing the backwash cycle without interrupting
the filtration process. Each filter unit shall consist of the filter centertube and disc
assembly, filter drive assembly, two backwash/solids waste pumps, vendor
supplied control panel, and necessary valves, piping, and other appurtenances.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following (one copy per plant – AWRF
and OWRF)):
1.
Letters of Certification of Compliance on materials, equipment, etc.
2.
Detailed specifications and drawings as specified in Section 01300
containing complete piping and flow diagrams of the proposed installation,
including dimensions, weights, and complete parts lists. Drawings shall show
proposed anchorage of equipment and appurtenances and equipment
relationship to other parts of the work including clearances for installation.
3.
Field assembly instructions, assembly drawings and/or diagrams, detailed
reference drawing lists, and lists of assembly details.
4.
List of materials, list of equipment (with model number, size, weight),
including a complete list of parts and supplies with current unit prices and
sources of supply. List of parts recommended by the Manufacturer to be
replaced after 1 and 3 year(s) service. List of special tools for each type of
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11400-3
GMP 1
equipment furnished including special tools necessary for adjustment,
operation, maintenance, and disassembly.
5.
Installation instructions, operating and/or service manuals, and all other data
pertinent to operating or servicing the complete apparatus. Preventative
maintenance instructions and recommended frequency.
6.
Wiring and control schematics and control logic diagrams for all electrical
and control components furnished.
7.
A complete process description detailing all process parameters.
8.
Documentation that the manufacturer has produced, supplied, and placed into
satisfactory service, equipment similar to that specified herein.
9.
Recommended list of spare parts and safety equipment, along with price and
ordering information.
10. Complete data sheet (ISA data sheet) for each instrument supplied.
11. Process and instrumentation diagrams (P&IDs) of the cloth media disc filter
system.
12. CONTRACTOR shall submit specification section with check marks next to
each section denoting submittal complies with section, or an “X” next to the
section denoting a deviation from the specification. Justification for any
deviations must also be included.
B. Seismic structural calculations:
1.
Submit seismic structural calculations in conformance with the following
requirements:
a.
Design spectral acceleration at short periods. SDS = 0.19.
b.
Design spectral acceleration at period of 1-second, SD1 = 0.09.
c.
Risk Category: III
d.
Component amplification factor, ap = in accordance with ASCE 7,
Tables 13.5-1 and 13.6-1.
e.
Component response modification factor, Rp = in accordance with
ASCE 7, Tables 13.5-1 and 13.6-1.
f.
Component importance factor, Ip = in accordance with ASCE 7 Chapter
13.
g.
Seismic Design Category: Category B.
h.
The calculations shall be prepared and stamped by a structural engineer
registered in the State of Arizona.
C. Manufacturer’s installation instructions:
1.
Installation and checkout instructions including lubrication and initial start-
up procedures.
2.
Do not install equipment until all installation instructions have been supplied.
D. No equipment shall be shipped until the ENGINEER approves the Shop
Drawings.
E. Shop Test Results: Submit results of routine factory motor tests.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11400-4
GMP 1
F. Field Test Results: Submit a written report giving the results of the required field
tests.
G. Manufacturer's Reports: Submit written report of the results of each visit by a
manufacturer's serviceman, including purpose and time of visit, personnel present,
tasks performed, and results obtained.
H. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit complete Operation and
Maintenance Manuals in conformance with the Operation and Maintenance
Manuals Section of Section 01300, Submittals.
I.
The MANUFACTURER shall provide a written guarantee detailing filtrate
quality. This guarantee shall be based upon laboratory filtration test, and past
operating experience. The guarantee is based on past operating experience;
documentation of that experience shall be submitted with the proposal.
J.
A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all
referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each
paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to
indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks ()
shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the
specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the CONTRACTOR, each
deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right
of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the
reasons for requesting the deviation. The ENGINEER shall be the final authority
for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The CONTRACTOR shall
furnish equipment and/or services as specified if an exception and/or deviation is
rejected. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify
compliance on the part of the CONTRACTOR with the specifications. Failure to
include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s)
for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal
shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further
consideration.
K. The CONTRACTOR shall submit the preventive maintenance information
package as part of the shop drawing submittal package to the ENGINEER for
review and approval. SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL PACKAGE WILL
NOT BE APPROVED WITHOUT ACCEPTANCE OF PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in the manufacture of products specified in
this Section with minimum five years documented experience and at least 15
similar-sized filtration installations in service.
B. Inspection and Testing Requirement: The ENGINEER reserves the right to reject
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11400-5
GMP 1
delivery of any or all pieces of equipment found, upon inspection, to have any or
all of the following: tear, cracks, chips, rust, foreign matter, non-standard
welding.
C. Shop Tests:
1.
Motor Tests: Perform a routine test on each drive motor at the manufacturer’s
factory. The test shall consist of: Running Light Current; Locked Rotor
Current; Winding Resistance; High Potential; and Bearing Inspection.
D. Responsibility: To ensure that all the equipment required for the installation of
the Disc Filter System is properly coordinated and will function as a unit in
accordance with the intent of these Specifications, the CONTRACTOR shall
obtain all the equipment specified under this Section, from a single supplier in
whom the responsibility for the proper function of all the equipment, regardless of
manufacturer, as an integrated and coordinated system shall be vested. The intent
of this paragraph is to establish unit responsibility for all the equipment with the
Disc Filter equipment supplier. The use of the word "responsibility" relating to
the equipment supplier is in no way intended to relieve the CONTRACTOR'S
ultimate responsibility for equipment coordination, installation, operation, and
guarantee.
E. The CONTRACTOR shall guarantee the Disc Filter System as required under the
General Conditions, and as specified herein. If, during the guarantee period, the
Disc Filter System fails or does not meet any of the specified requirements or test
criteria herein, the CONTRACTOR shall correct such deficiencies as may be
necessary to meet these requirements and criteria, and at no additional cost to the
OWNER. The ENGINEER must first review any proposed remedial measures
before any work is done.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. The manufacturer shall warrant the Disc Filter System being supplied to the
OWNER against defects in workmanship and material for a period of one year
under normal use, operation, and service after acceptance of the system
installation by the OWNER. The warranty shall cover parts and labor and shall
be in printed form.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. The Disc Filter System equipment covered by these Specifications shall call
attention to certain features but may not cover all details of the construction of the
media filter system. Ancillary and accessory devices, within the confines of the
manufacturer's scope, necessary for the treatment system performance shall be
included by the manufacturer whether specified or not.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11400-6
GMP 1
B. Concrete tanks as shown on the Drawings and/or specified within.
C. All structural steel shall conform to "Standard Specifications for Structural Steel
of the A.S.T.M.".
D. All equipment shall be designed for continuous, 24 hour operation, and all parts
of the mechanism shall be amply proportioned for all stresses, which may occur
during fabrication, assembly, and operation.
E. All anchor bolts shall be 316 SS stainless steel and shall be of ample size and
strength of the purpose intended. The disc filter manufacturer shall furnish with
the equipment all anchor bolts. The CONTRACTOR shall install the anchor bolts
in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
F. All wetted parts to be 316 stainless steel, FRP, polyacetal, or polypropylene. No
carbon steel allowed.
G. All parts above the water line associated with the support steel, platforms, and
handrails to be aluminum. No painted carbon steel allowed.
H. Aluminum grating and Aluminum Checker Plate shall conform to Sections 05530
Aluminum Grating and 05532 Aluminum Checkered Plate, Respectively.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.
Aqua-Aerobic Systems,
2.
Five Star Filtration,
3.
Or approved equal.
B. The naming of a manufacturer in this Specification is not an indication that the
manufacturer's standard equipment is acceptable in lieu of the specified
component features. Naming is only an indication that the manufacturer may
have the capability of engineering and supplying a system as specified.
2.3 DESIGN CRITERIA & REQUIREMENTS
A. Design Criteria:
1.
Treatment capacity:
Parameter
AWRF
OWRF
Number of Units
(5+1)
(3+1)
Total Average Daily Flow (MGD)
27
11.4
Total Peak Hourly Flow (MGD)
33
18
Rated Peak Flow for Each Unit (MGD)
6.6
6.0
Capacity per Filter:
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11400-7
GMP 1
a) Average Daily Flow (MGD)
5.4
3.8
b) Peak Hourly Flow (MGD)
6.6
6.0
Filter Loading Rate:
a) Average Daily Flow (gpm/ft2)
4.98
4.09
b) Peak Hourly Flow (gpm/ft2)
6.1
6.5
Maximum Headloss through Filter (in.)
18
18
2.
Influent Characteristics:
Parameter
AWRF
OWRF
Maximum Total Suspended Solids (mg/l)
20
20
Average Total Suspended Solids (mg/l)
10
10
3.
Effluent Characteristics:
a.
The effluent characteristics from the Disc Filter units shall meet the
following average day limit under stated treatment capacity and influent
characteristic conditions:
1) State of Arizona Class A+ Reclaimed Water.
2) 24-hour composite average turbidity: 2 NTU or less.
3) Anytime Maximum Turbidity: 5 NTU.
4) Total suspended solids: 5 milligrams per liter or less (24-hour
composite average).
B. Design Requirements:
1.
Manufacturer will provide the following components as listed in his proposal.
The CONTRACTOR shall provide any additional items required for a
complete functioning filters.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11400-8
GMP 1
Component
AWRF
OWRF
Center Tube Assemblies
6
4
Drive System Assemblies
6
4
Cloth Filter Media Assemblies
6
4
Influent Weir Boxes
6
4
Backwash Pumps (2 per Filter), vacuum
gauge and transducer, pressure gauge, 3-
inch ball valves
12
8
Backwash System Assemblies
6
4
External Piping Assembly Kits
6
4
Pressure Transducer Assemblies
6
4
Float Switch and Brackets
6
4
Backwash Valves with Electric Actuators
7 per filter (total of
42 backwash valves)
6 per filter (total of
24 backwash valves)
Solids Valves with Electric Actuators
2 per filter (total of
12 solids valves)
1 per filter (total of 4
solids valves)
Vendor Control Panels
6
4
Vendor Power Panels
6
4
2.
Additional equipment and appurtenances required by the manufacturer.
3.
Fit in space as indicated on the Drawings.
4.
Align with piping as indicated on the Drawings.
5.
All components shall be suitable for outdoor installation, including, but not
limited to, controls, wiring and electrical devices, valve operators, materials,
piping, and valves.
C. Prefabrication:
1.
Manufacturer and CONTRACTOR shall coordinate all instrumentation and
other device supports to be fabricated with the cloth media filter system and
include these supports on the submittal drawings to the ENGINEER.
2.
Submittal shall include preliminary program sequences for PLC as described
herein. Final program sequences shall be submitted for acceptance prior to
installation.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11400-9
GMP 1
D. Provide supports for piping, instrumentation, and other equipment mounted
within, against or adjacent to the cloth disc filter units. Piping supports external to
the filter units shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR.
2.4 COMPONENTS OF CLOTH MEDIA DISC FILTER SYSTEM
A. Material:
1.
Stainless steel components shall be 316 stainless steel as specified in this
Section. Use 316L for welded stainless steel.
2.
Surface treatment of stainless steel: All stainless steel components and
subassemblies shall be acid passivated after fabrication and welding per
Section 05500, Metal Fabrications for corrosion resistance and to provide a
superior finish.
B. Drive assembly:
1.
The drive assembly shall consist of gearbox, drive sprocket, drive chain, and
a chain guard. Belt drive systems or systems with multiple drive units per
filter shall not be acceptable.
2.
Gearbox: Parallel in-line helical-type, AGMA Class I drive motor rated for
460 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hertz. See table below and Refer to Section 16225,
Electric Motors 250 Horsepower or Less for additional motor requirements.
Gearbox Parameter
AWRF
OWRF
Power (HP)
1
0.75
Output Speed (RPM)
4.4
4.8
3.
Drive sprocket: Nylon.
4.
Chain: Acetal with Type 316 stainless steel link pins.
5.
Chain guard: Type 316L stainless steel.
C. Centertube assembly:
1.
Each center tube assembly shall include a Type 316L minimum 3/16-inch
thick stainless steel center tube weldment, driven sprocket, wheel assemblies,
and frame and cloth assemblies.
2.
Effluent port seal: Include a chlorine resistant Viton V-ring effluent port seal,
or equal.
3.
Drive sprocket: Multi-segment U.H.M.W. polyethylene.
4.
Fasteners: Type 316 stainless steel.
D. Mounting brackets and hardware:
1.
Each filter basin shall be fitted with Type 316 stainless steel mounting
brackets to accommodate attachment of the filter components to the basin.
2.
All mounting brackets shall be attached to the basin wall with Type 316
stainless steel wedge anchors and hardware.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11400-10
GMP 1
3.
Through-the-wall spool piping and all filter external piping shall be provided
by the CONTRACTOR.
E. Filter cloth assemblies:
1.
General:
a.
AWRF:
1) Each of the 6 concrete filter basins shall include 14 disc assemblies.
b.
OWRF:
1) Each of the 4 concrete filter basins shall include 12 disc assemblies.
c.
Each cloth disc assembly shall be comprised of 6 individual segments;
each consisting of a cloth media sock supported by an injection molded
polypropylene co-polymer frame.
d.
During filtration, the filter assemblies shall operate in a static condition
with no moving parts. The filter system shall provide for the collection
of filtered solids on the outside of the cloth media surface to allow for
the direct contact of cleaning systems. Filtered effluent shall be used for
backwash. The filter flow path shall be from the outside of the disc to
the inside. Systems with flow paths from the inside to the outside of the
disc that collect filtered solids and plastic debris on the interior surfaces
of the disc will not be acceptable.
2.
Cloth/frame assemblies:
a.
Shall be constructed such that each segment is easily removable from
the center tube, without special tools, to allow for removal and
replacement of the cloth at the point of installation. Systems requiring
special tools and/or the return of media segments to the factory for
replacement shall not be considered.
b.
AWRF:
1) Each cloth disc assembly shall have a minimum of 53.8 square feet
of effective submerged filtration area. Each filter unit shall have a
total of 753.2 square feet of minimum effective submerged filtration
area.
c.
OWRF:
1) Each cloth disc assembly at shall have a minimum of 53.8 square
feet of effective submerged filtration area. Each filter unit shall
have a total of 645.6 square feet of minimum effective submerged
filtration area.
d.
Effluent filtration area is defined as only the portion of the disc that is
submerged during filtration. Any disc area that is not submerged shall
not be considered as effective area.
e.
Each disc shall be divided into no more than 6 segments and shall be
easily removable for service.
3.
Cloth Media:
a.
Cloths shall be of chlorine-resistant polyester (PES) fiber pile
construction with polyester backing material having a nominal filtration
rating of 10 microns to withstand a sodium hypochlorite dosage of 10
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11400-11
GMP 1
milligrams per liter. Granular media and screens having structured
identical openings shall not be allowed.
b.
The cloth media shall have an active filter depth of 3 to 5 millimeters to
provide additional collisions between solids particles and the media
within the media depth, resulting in capture of solids across a broader
particle range. The cloth depth shall also provide storage of captured
solids, reducing backwash volumes while maintaining an operational
headloss. Woven mesh or microstrainer type disc media with no
filtration depth are not acceptable.
F. Influent Weir Box:
1.
Each filter shall include a Type 316 stainless steel influent weir box. The
weir box shall be mounted to the filter basin interior using Type 316 stainless
steel wedge anchors and hardware. The basin wall must be smooth and
plumb to facilitate a quality installation.
G. Influent Gates:
1.
Each filter shall include 1 influent gate to be provided by CONTRACTOR.
Refer to Section 11285 for gate specification and schedule.
2.
Each gate shall include a gate stem extension to raise the actuator
approximately 42 inches above the top of the wall. The extension shall be
constructed of painted steel. CONTRACTOR shall provide intermediate
support bracket and hardware required for mounting of the extension.
H. Backwash/Solids Wasting Assembly:
1.
General:
a.
The backwash function shall incorporate a pump that draws filter
effluent through the cloth, thereby removing accumulated solids from
the cloth surface.
b.
Each backwash/sludge discharge assembly shall include a backwash
system assembly, an external piping assembly, and 2 backwash pumps.
2.
Backwash system assembly:
a.
Number: 1 assembly per filter.
b.
Each assembly includes.
1) Backwash shoe assemblies.
2) Backwash shoe support weldment(s).
3) 1-1/2-inch wire reinforced flexible hose.
4) Stainless steel backwash shoe springs.
5) Stainless steel hose clamps.
6) Type 316 stainless steel backwash collection manifolds.
7) Type 316 stainless steel threaded unions.
8) PVC sludge collection manifolds.
9) Type 316 stainless steel backwash floor plate(s).
3.
External Piping Assembly:
a.
Number: 1 assembly per filter.
b.
The external piping assembly shall include:
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11400-12
GMP 1
1) 0 to 15 psi pressure gauge(s).
2) 0 to 30 inches mercury vacuum gauge(s).
3) Throttling gate valve(s).
4) 2-inch manual ball valve(s).
4.
Backwash Pumps:
a.
Manufacturer: Gorman Rupp, model G-R 12B20-B, or equal.
b.
Type: Externally mounted centrifugal pump.
c.
Number: 2 per filter.
d.
Tag Numbers:
1) AWRF:
a)
Disc Filter No. 1 – BWP-DS1-A
b) Disc Filter No. 1 – BWP-DS1-B
c)
Disc Filter No. 2 – BWP-DS2-A
d) Disc Filter No. 2 – BWP-DS2-B
e)
Disc Filter No. 3 – BWP-DS3-A
f)
Disc Filter No. 3 – BWP-DS3-B
g) Disc Filter No. 4 – BWP-DS4-A
h) Disc Filter No. 4 – BWP- DS4-B
i)
Disc Filter No. 5 – BWP-DS5-A
j)
Disc Filter No. 5 – BWP-DS5-B
k) Disc Filter No. 6 – BWP-DS6-A
l)
Disc Filter No. 6 – BWP-DS6-B
2) OWRF:
a)
Disc Filter No. 1 – BWP-539-130
b) Disc Filter No. 1 – BWP-539-140
c)
Disc Filter No. 2 – BWP-539-230
d) Disc Filter No. 2 – BWP-539-240
e)
Disc Filter No. 3 – BWP-539-330
f)
Disc Filter No. 3 – BWP-539-340
g) Disc Filter No. 4 – BWP-539-430
h) Disc Filter No. 4 – BWP-539-440
e.
Pump shall be provided with a 2 horsepower, 460 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hertz
TEFC motor, and operate at maximum 1,740 revolutions per minute.
f.
Pump shall be rated for 130 gallons per minute at 23 feet total dynamic
head.
I.
Backwash valves and sludge valve(s):
1.
The 2-inch backwash valves shall be 2 piece, flanged end, ASTM A351
Grade CF8M stainless steel body, 316 stainless steel ball and stem, fullport,
with a 115 volt, single phase, 60 Hz, open / close service electric actuator.
Valve / actuator combination shall be TCI / RCI (RCI, a division of Rotork),
Nibco, or equal. Valve actuator shall include a compartment heater and limit
switch feedback to the microprocessor in both the open and closed positions
2.
The 2-inch solids waste valve(s) shall be 2 piece, flanged end, ASTM A351
Grade CF8M stainless steel body, 316 stainless steel ball and stem, fullport,
with a 115 volt, single phase, 60 Hz, open / close service electric actuator.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11400-13
GMP 1
Valve / actuator combination shall be TCI / RCI (RCI, a division of Rotork),
Nibco, or equal. Valve actuator shall include a compartment heater and limit
switch feedback to the microprocessor in both the open and closed positions.
J.
Anchor Bolts:
1.
The CONTRACTOR shall provide anchor bolt calculations per Section
05051, Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts, and Concrete Inserts.
2.
The CONTRACTOR shall provide and install anchor bolts for the filters and
backwash pumps. Anchor bolts shall be Type 316 stainless steel and conform
to Section 05051, Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts, and Concrete Inserts.
K. Piping:
1.
Provide all piping, supports, bracing and fitting as required and as shown on
submittal Drawings.
2.
Piping shall conform to Section 15065 Thermoplastic Pipe and Accessories
requirements.
L. Finishes:
1.
CONTRACTOR shall provide field finishes under provision of Section
09900.
2.5 VENDOR POWER PANEL (VPP) and VENDOR CONTROL PANEL (VCP)
A. Each VPP shall be powered from a separate 480 volt, 3-phase 60 Hertz power
source.
1.
VPP shall be rated to withstand the available fault current as indicated on the
Single Line Diagrams and the power system study provided by the
CONTRACTOR in accordance with Section 16951, Short Circuit,
Coordination, and Arc-Flash Hazard Report.
B. VPP Components:
1.
Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors:
a.
In accordance with Section 16476, Low Voltage Circuit Breakers and
16474, Motor Control Equipment.
2.
Enclosure and associated components:
a.
In accordance with Section 16160, Enclosures.
b.
NEMA Type 4X enclosure, stainless steel:
1) Enclosure shall be suitable for floor mounting.
c.
Provide flange-mounted disconnect handle:
1) Door-mounted rotary handle disconnects are not acceptable.
d.
Provide a 480V/120V 1ph control power transformer (CPT) rated for the
applicable loads.
1) Control power transformer shall be the source of power for the
Vendor Control Panel (VCP).
e.
Doors shall have corrosion resistant hinges and latches.
f.
Starter shall be in accordance with Section 16482, Solid State Motor
Controllers.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11400-14
GMP 1
g.
Provide heat load calculations for the VPP enclosure. Derate all
components as required by the calculations.
C. The VCP shall be powered from the control power transformer installed in the
VPP.
1.
Rated to withstand the available fault current as indicated in the power
system study provided by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with Section
16951, Short Circuit, Coordination, and Arc-Flash Hazard Report.
a.
Assume a minimum available short circuit current of 10kA.
b.
2.
Provide heat load calculations for the VCP enclosure. Derate all
components as required by the calculations.
D. VCP Components:
1.
Front panel controls: Refer to P&IDs
a.
Provide in accordance with Section 16161, Control Panels.
b.
HAND/OFF/AUTO switches.
c.
START and STOP pushbuttons.
d.
RESET pushbuttons.
e.
Status and Alarm pilot lights.
f.
Elapsed Time Meters.
2.
Provide an Allen-Bradley MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Logic Controller
(PLC), or approved equal. Submit the following for the proposed PLC
system:
a.
Modbus TCP/IP addressing scheme.
b.
PLC I/O and communication configuration.
1) System interconnection diagram drawing for PLCs, Modbus Plus
data highway, Ethernet data highway, and field instrumentation.
2) The ladder logic control programs shall reside in the PLCs. The
program shall consist of software relay and attendant logic control
c.
Panel and enclosure plans, sections, and details.
d.
Access opening locations and required clearances for each panel and
enclosure.
e.
Mounting plates and details for input and output chassis.
c.
Enclosure internal wiring and terminal blocks.
1) Tabular Input and Output (I/O) listing, including the following data:
a)
Each I/O point, chassis number, module number, module I/O
point number, name of I/O device.
b) Instrumentation tag number of the I/O device in the Contract
Documents.
c)
Electrical characteristics of the I/O signal.
d) PLC internal address of each I/O.
3.
I/O Expansion Modules:
a.
Per signal requirements shown in the P&IDs, submit details of required
quantities of DI, DO, AI & AO expansion modules.
b.
Analog inputs shall have a minimum of 12 bits resolution. Analog
outputs
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11400-15
GMP 1
c.
shall have a minimum of 12 bits resolution. Analog input modules shall
be configurable for 4 to 20 mA DC, or 1 to 5 VDC signals. Analog
output modules shall be selectable for 4 to 20 mA DC, or 1 to 5 volt DC
signals. Provide external or user power as needed.
d.
Provide a minimum of 10% spare I/O of each type connected to
terminals for future expansion.
4.
Power Supply: The power supply shall provide power for the processor and
I/O modules.
a.
Power Supply shall be rated for (100-240) VAC, 60 Hz.
b.
Based on the heat load calculations of the VCP enclosure submit
derating calculations of the power supply module.
c.
Power supply module shall be rated for a minimum inrush current of
25A for 8ms @ 120VAC, and 40A for 4ms @240VAC.
d.
The power supply shall have a hold-up time (the time the system is
operational during a brief power loss), typically between 20 milliseconds
and 3 seconds.
5.
Provide a 6.5-inch Allen Bradley PanelView Plus 7 700, or approved equal
Operator Interface Terminal (OIT). For the OIT, submit the following:
a.
Manufacturer’s literature showing:
1) Physical characteristics, dimensions, and weights.
2) Mounting and installation requirements.
3) Wiring
information
including
power
requirements
and
communication capabilities and cabling information.
4) Available memory and screen storage information.
5) Recommended spare parts.
6) OIT screen development software information including:
a)
Minimum computer memory requirements for installation and
use.
b) Communication ports and cables to download OIT programs.
b.
Proposed OIT screens showing the following:
1) Number of proposed screens.
2) Proposed color and graphics standards for OIT screen development.
3) Menu tree showing how the operator will access all screens.
4) Description of each screen listing control and display points and
indicating what actions the operator may perform on the screen.
6.
Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors:
a.
In accordance with Section 16476, Low Voltage Circuit Breakers and
16474, Motor Control Equipment.
7.
Enclosure and associated components:
a.
In accordance with Section 16160, Enclosures
b.
NEMA Type 4X enclosure, stainless steel.
1) Enclosure shall be suitable for wall mounting.
c.
Provide flange-mounted disconnect handle:
1) Door-mounted rotary handle disconnects are not acceptable.
d.
Doors shall have corrosion resistant hinges and latches.
8.
Remote monitoring and control. Refer to P&IDs for additional requirements.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11400-16
GMP 1
a.
Provide isolated 120VAC dry relay contact outputs for the following:
1) Filter Drive Unit.
2) Backwash Pumps.
3) Backwash Valves Open & Close Commands
4) Solids Waste Valves Open & Close Commands
b.
Accept 120VAC inputs for the following:
1) Filter Drive Unit Statuses and Alarms.
2) Backwash Pump Statuses and Alarms.
3) Valve Statuses.
4) Filter Basin Level High.
5) Inlet Gate Closed.
6) Filter Turbidity Level High
c.
Accept 4-20 mA (or 1-5 VDC) inputs for the following:
1) Filter Basin Level.
2) Filter Turbidity Level.
3) Backwash Pumps Inlet Pressure
9.
Storage and Downloading of PLC Programs:
a.
The PLC shall be programmable through an USB port or Ethernet/IP
connected to a personal computer through a standard cable. The PLC
programming software shall be provided to the OWNER with the user's
manuals, original diskettes, and licensing agreement for registration.
Cables, adapters, connectors, or other hardware required to connect to
the PLC shall be provided to the OWNER.
b.
The PLC programming software shall enable the user to write the PLC
c.
program on-line or off-line. The software shall include utilities to
manage PLC program files, document and print the programs, configure
the programming environment, monitor and force the PLC addresses
while on-line, and configure the PLC memory and addressing structure.
d.
Provide software support and debugging time for a period of 30 days
after start-up of the equipment under PLC control.
2.6 INSTRUMENTATION
A. Manufacturer shall furnish the following components as a part of the Disc Filter
System:
1.
Pressure based level transducer (1 per filter): Manufacturer standard supply.
2.
High-level float (1 per filter): Manufacturer standard supply.
3.
Pressure gauge (2 each per filter): Manufacturer standard supply.
4.
Vacuum gauge and transducer (2 each per filter): Manufacturer standard
supply.
2.7 CONTROLS
A. The cloth media disc filter system vendor supplied control panel(s) shall be
supplied by the cloth media disc filter system manufacturer, conform to the
requirements of Section 16161, Control panels, provide for the functionality
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11400-17
GMP 1
described in Section 17454 Control Descriptions and as shown on the Electrical
and Instrumentation sheets, and conform to the requirements as described herein.
1.
Dry contacts shall be provided for the signals as shown on the control
schematics in the electrical sheets.
2.
Provide six additional spare dry contacts.
3.
Provide main breaker disconnect, fuse, fuse block, and starters.
4.
Provide engraved nameplates for all devices on each vendor supplied control
panel.
5.
Provide an engraved nameplate that identifies each local control panel with
the panel name and equipment number as listed in Section 01800, Equipment
Schedule.
6.
Provide engraved nameplates that identify each piece of equipment to be
controlled by each local control panel, with the name and equipment number
as listed in Section 01800, Equipment Schedule.
7.
The Disc Filter System manufacturer shall submit, during Shop Drawing
review, an engraved nameplate legend that must be approved by the
ENGINEER. The ENGINEER shall approve or reject the nameplate legend
at the ENGINEER'S discretion.
8.
Provide all required wiring, electrical interlocks, relays, and other
miscellaneous devices.
B. The vendor supplied control panel shall be factory tested prior to shipment.
C. The Disc Filter System vendor supplied control panels shall be mounted at
locations in accordance with the Electrical Drawings.
D. Provide the following panel drawing documentation:
1.
Provide drawing copies in the following format:
a.
Hard Copy - B Size - 11” X 17”.
b.
Soft Copy in .DWG.
2.
The panel drawing documentation package consists of the following
drawings types arranged in the following order. a. Cover Sheet.
a.
Symbols and Legends 1 – Exterior and Interior Panel Symbols.
b.
Symbols and Legends 2 – Schematic Symbols.
c.
Front Panel Elevation.
d.
Interior/Sub Panel Layout.
e.
Terminal Strip Drawings.
f.
Control Schematics.
g.
Analog Loop Diagrams.
h.
Point to Point Discrete Wiring Diagrams.
3.
Drawing Scale:
a.
Provide Front Elevation and Interior/Sub Panel Layout Drawings
proportionately correct and to scale. Create all drawings on a D Size
layout.
4.
Border and Title Block:
a.
Provide each drawing with a border and title block information.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11400-18
GMP 1
b.
Utilize the border and title block as provided in the Drawing Templates
referenced in Section 3.03.A.1
2.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Materials are to be marked or tagged with part number and order number for field
assembly requirements.
B. All supports, members, and miscellaneous parts shall be packaged for shipment in
such manner to prevent abrasion or scratching.
2.9 SPARE PARTS
A. Furnish and deliver the following spare parts to each facility, carefully boxed or
packaged and plainly marked for reordering:
1.
Two filter frame and cloth assemblies.
2.
One backwash/solids waste valve and actuator.
3.
One Viton V-ring effluent port/center tube seal, or equal.
4.
One of each PLC I/O module.
a.
One of each:
1) Fuse.
2) Control Relay.
3) Indicating Light Replacement Bulb.
5.
One cloth repair kit.
B. Special tools: The Manufacturer shall provide special tools if required for normal
operation and maintenance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install Disc Filter System equipment in complete accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.
B. The Disc Filter Systems shall be installed under the direction of the system
Supplier in strict conformance with the manufacturer's installation instructions
and with favorable review of shop drawings. An authorized representative of the
Manufacturer shall perform final installation inspection, start-up, calibration, and
instruction of operating personnel.
C. The manufacturer shall inspect the installation of all equipment in this Section
before start-up in order to verify that the equipment has been properly installed
and operates properly as a system and individually. The CONTRACTOR shall
coordinate with manufacturer the scheduling of this activity.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11400-19
GMP 1
D. Installation of all conduits and related components shall adhere to Section 16111,
Conduits.
E. Make up piping with a sufficient number of unions to permit ready breaking of
lines for maintenance.
F. Support and brace plastic pipe to prevent sagging or overstressing of pipe and
connections, and, furthermore, support piping so that no item of piping system
transfers load or strain to equipment.
G. Adequately support piping so that operation of valves will not cause pipe to show
appreciable movement.
H. Field coat as specified in Section 09900, Painting.
I.
Furnish and install all required oil and grease for initial operation.
J.
Inspection and testing:
1.
Upon completion of equipment installation by the CONTRACTOR, and prior
to equipment testing and start-up, the Manufacturer shall inspect the
equipment installation and provide the Owner a letter of certification stating
that the equipment has been installed in accordance with manufacturer
instruction and recommendations.
3.2 FIELD TESTS
A. After CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER have mutually agreed that the equipment
installation is complete, cleaned, and ready for continuous operation,
CONTRACTOR and a qualified field service representative of the manufacturer
shall conduct a running test of the equipment and controls in the presence of the
ENGINEER to demonstrate that the units and their controls will function
correctly.
B. All testing shall be performed under the supervision of the Disc Filter System
manufacturer's representative. The CONTRACTOR shall conduct all specified
tests and shall furnish all power, material, instrumentation, equipment, personnel,
etc., for conducting tests as specified herein. The CONTRACTOR shall give the
ENGINEER sufficient advance notice of the testing to enable the ENGINEER to
witness the tests.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER a minimum of 14 days prior
to the proposed testing date, testing procedures for all tests describing the type of
test, test set-ups, procedures, instrumentation, flow rates and all other data and
information necessary to describe proposed testing plan.
1.
Running Tests:
a.
Field test each unit together with its controls. Test shall demonstrate to
ENGINEER that each part and all parts together function in the manner
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11400-20
GMP 1
intended. All necessary testing equipment and manpower shall be
provided by CONTRACTOR at his expense.
b.
Prior to applying electrical power to any motor driven equipment, the
drive motor shall be rotated by an external source to demonstrate free
operation of all mechanical parts.
c.
In the event that CONTRACTOR is unable to demonstrate to
ENGINEER that his equipment meets the requirements of the above
described test, the equipment will be rejected and CONTRACTOR shall
adjust and/or modify and retest the equipment as often as necessary to
meet the specified requirements, including but not limited to:
1) Repair any visible leaks.
2) Test and calibrate all controls, switches, automatic valves, and other
instrumentation and control equipment associated with the cloth
media filter units as specified in this Section, in accordance with the
Manufacturer's printed instruction over the full operating range of
the equipment.
d.
After equipment, piping, and other necessary incidentals are completed,
conduct functional testing and operational testing of the system as
specified in Section 01650, Starting of Systems and provide certified test
report. Performance test includes:
1) Demonstrate filters performance per Performance Design Criteria.
The sampling information and results shall include the influent
characteristics (TSS and NTU) and effluent characteristics (TSS
and NTU) to demonstrate that the equipment meets the required
performance.
e.
Do not affect warranty of the systems by testing.
f.
Coordinate testing with functional testing of other equipment.
D. Verify networking communication between the OWNER's control system and the
filter network.
E. Upon completion of testing, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER
two copies of full and complete test reports for all tests. Reports shall include
description of the units tested, test procedures, test flow rates, backwash cycles,
levels and all other data and results as required demonstrating that all items tested
meet specified requirements.
F. Compliance with the performance requirements shall be demonstrated through a
performance test of 48 hours minimum duration. The test shall be performed with
all discs on-line and hydraulic loading rates specified herein. Any filter that fails
to operate continuously during the 48 consecutive hour period because of
malfunction shall be retested until it completes a continuous 48 hour test.
3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICE
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
11400-21
GMP 1
A. A factory employed and trained representative shall be provided for installation
supervision, start-up and test services and operation and maintenance personnel
training services. The representative shall make a minimum of three visits per
plant (AWRF and OWRF). The first visit shall be a minimum of one day (8 hours
on site), for sampling, testing and classifying filter effluent prior to installation of
the disc filter equipment. The representative shall bring their own portable
composite sampler. The second visit shall be a minimum of two days (8 hours
each day), for assistance in the installation of equipment and provide written
certification that the installation meets the manufacturer’s recommendations. The
third visit shall be a minimum of three days (8 hours each day), for checking the
completed installation and start-up of the system and for instruction of operations
and maintenance personnel. The third visit shall also include sampling, testing
and classifying filter effluent after start-up and commissioning of the Disc Filter
System to illustrate conformance to the performance requirements identified in
this Specification under Section 2.3. Manufacturer's representative shall test
operate the system in the presence of the ENGINEER and verify that the Disc
Filter System, and Backwash/Solids Waste Assembly conform to requirements.
Manufacturer's representative shall revisit the job site as often as necessary until
all trouble is corrected and the installation is entirely satisfactory leading to
compliance of performance requirements. Sales representatives shall not be
acceptable to perform start-up and training functions.
B. Reports: Submit report by manufacturer of each visit to the site that provides
complete information on time, schedule, tasks performed, persons contacted,
problems corrected, test results, training, instruction, and all other pertinent
information.
C. All costs, including travel, lodging, meals, and incidentals shall be considered as
included in the CONTRACTOR'S bid price.
END OF SECTION
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
13447-1
GMP 1
SECTION 13447
ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Electric motor-driven actuators for valves and gates as identified
in the valves and gate schedule as MOV or EDR (Electric Discrete Run Open / Run
Close Valve Actuator), except for specialty actuators specified with individual
valves.
B. Related sections:
1.
The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2.
It is the Contractor’s responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work
of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or
furnishing any of Contractor’s Work.
3.
The following Sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This
list of Related Sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended
to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the
completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents.
a.
Section 11285 - Hydraulic Gates.
b.
Section 11295 - Hydraulic Valves.
c.
Section 11400 - Disc Filters.
d.
Section 16225 – Electric Motors 250 Horsepower or Less.
e.
Section 09900 - Painting.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
1.
AWWA C504 - Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves.
2.
AWWA C542 - Electric Motor Actuators for Valves and Slide Gates.
B. FM Global (FM).
C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1.
MG-1 Standard for Electrical motors.
D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) - UL 674, UL 1004.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. NEMA:
1.
Type 4 enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
13447-2
GMP 1
2.
Type 4X enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250.
3.
Type 7 enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data:
1.
Electrical ratings:
a.
Voltage and number of phases.
b.
Starting and running current.
c.
Voltage levels and source for control and status.
2.
Description of integral control interface.
3.
Integral and remote control station components.
4.
Environmental ratings, including NEMA enclosure rating and submergence
capabilities.
5.
Gear ratios for both manual and motorized actuation.
6.
Opening and closing directions.
7.
Allowable starts per hour.
8.
List of all included options and accessories.
9.
Full travel times.
10. Gearbox data including gear ratio, and gearbox efficiency.
11. Affidavit in accordance with AWWA C542.
B. Shop drawings:
1.
Wiring diagrams:
a.
Include all options and expansion cards furnished with each actuator.
2.
Dimensioned drawings of each valve and actuator combination.
3.
Dimensioned drawings of each valve gearbox.
4.
Electric motor data.
C. Calculations: Submit the following for each valve/gate size and class:
1.
Operating torque calculations.
2.
Maximum torque calculations for seating and unseating.
3.
Maximum operating torque at starting and normal operation.
4.
Indicate factor of safety for all torque calculations.
D. Test reports:
1.
Factory test report and certificate.
E. Manufacturer's instructions:
1.
Include manufacturer's instructions, description of system operation, start-up
data and troubleshooting check lists.
F. Operations and maintenance data:
1.
Include manufacturer's literature; cleaning procedures, replacement part lists,
wiring diagrams, and repair data.
2.
Include a list of all configurable parameters, and the final values for each.
3.
List of recommended spare parts.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
13447-3
GMP 1
4.
List of special tools necessary for proper operation and/or maintenance.
5.
Exploded view drawings that illustrate all assemblies, sub-assemblies, and
components.
6.
Routine test procedures for all electronic and electrical circuits.
7.
Troubleshooting chart covering the complete valve and controls/electrical
power systems, showing description of trouble, probable cause, and suggested
remedy.
8.
Certified factory and field-test results.
G. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all
referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each
paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate
requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks () shall
denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the
specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the CONTRACTOR, each
deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of
the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons
for requesting the deviation. The ENGINEER shall be the final authority for
determining acceptability of requested deviations. The CONTRACTOR shall
furnish equipment and/or services as specified if an exception and/or deviation is
rejected. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify
compliance on the part of the CONTRACTOR with the specifications. Failure to
include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s)
for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal
shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further
consideration.
H. The CONTRACTOR shall submit the preventive maintenance information
package as part of the shop drawing submittal package to the ENGINEER for
review and approval. SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL PACKAGE WILL
NOT BE APPROVED WITHOUT ACCEPTANCE OF PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Obtain required information from the valve/gate supplier, including but not limited
to:
1.
Interface to gate or valve.
2.
Operating range:
a.
Quarter turn or multi-turn.
b.
Required turns for full travel on multi-turn applications.
3.
Direction of rotation for opening and closing.
4.
Maximum and normal torque requirements.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
13447-4
GMP 1
B. All motorized, intelligent actuators shall be the product of a single manufacturer
for all valve and gate applications on this project, regardless of gate or valve type,
manufacturer, or supplier.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Refer to Contract Documents.
1.7 SPARE PARTS
A. Provide the following spare parts (minimum 10 percent of total number of actuators
of each model type furnished, but not less than 1 for each model of actuator
furnished):
1.
Stem nut.
2.
Worm shaft subassembly.
3.
Drive sleeve subassembly.
4.
Complete actuator seal kit.
5.
Actuator gearbox oil (sufficient quantity to fill 4 gearboxes).
6.
Encoder.
7.
Control module.
B. Provide 1 spare motor for each size motor furnished.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable manufacturers for lines 3 inches and smaller:
1.
RCI:
a. RCEL-005L, with Receptacle (quarter-turn)
2.
Hayward:
a. Series EJM (quarter-turn).
3.
Rotork:
a. ROM Series (quarter turn).
4.
Rotork:
CVA Series (multi- turn).
B. Acceptable Manufacturers for lines 4 inches and larger:
1.
Rotork Controls, Inc.:
a.
IQ (multi-turn).
b.
IQT (quarter-turn).
2.
Limitorque Corporation:
a.
Accutronix MX (multi-turn).
b.
Accutronix QkX (quarter-turn).
3.
Auma:
a.
SA /SAR (multi-turn) with Aumatic AC controls.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
13447-5
GMP 1
b.
SG (quarter-turn) with Aumatic AC controls.
4.
EIM Corporation.
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Actuators for valves 3 inches and smaller:
1.
Provide actuators complete and operable with all components and accessories
required for operation.
2.
Power supply:
a.
120 VAC.
b.
Valve motion independent of power supply phase rotation.
3.
Size actuator to move valves from full open to closed position within the time
indicated in the Motorized Actuator Schedule:
a.
If an operating time is not indicated on the Schedule, size the actuator to
move valves at minimum 12 inches per minute under maximum load.
Measure rate of closure for valves at maximum diameter of disc, plug, or
ball.
4.
Control inputs:
a.
Capable of using discrete 120 VAC.
b.
Isolated inputs capable of operating from external control voltage source
c.
Provide for the following control inputs:
1) OPEN.
2) CLOSE.
5.
Status outputs:
a.
Dry contact outputs configured for the functions indicated on the
Drawings. Provide the following outputs for all actuators:
1) FULLY CLOSED.
2) FULLY OPEN.
b.
All output contacts rated for minimum 3 amps, 120 VAC.
6.
Analog input:
a.
Provide a 4-20 milliamp analog input for analog modulating valves when
indicated on the Drawings.
b.
Modulate valve to maintain position based on analog input value.
c.
Maximum input impedance 250 ohms.
7.
Analog output:
a.
Provide an isolated 4-20 milliamp analog output when indicated on the
Drawings.
8.
Materials:
a.
Construct motorized actuators of materials suitable for the environment
in which the valve or gate is to be installed.
9.
Components:
a.
Motors:
1) Specifically designed for valve actuator service with high starting
torque, totally enclosed non-ventilated construction.
2) Torque ratings equal to or greater than that required for valve seating
and dynamic torques with a 25 percent factor of safety.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
13447-6
GMP 1
3) Rated for operating under the following conditions without
exceeding temperature limits with ambient temperature of 40 degrees
Celsius.
a)
Continuous operation for 15 minutes or twice the open-to-close
operating time (whichever is greater) at normal operating torque
or 33 percent of maximum torque (whichever is greater).
b) 60 starts per hour for open/close service or 1,200 starts per hour
for modulating service.
b.
Enclosures:
1) Actuator housing ratings as indicated in the Motorized Actuator
Schedule.
2) Stainless steel external fasteners.
3) Provide the following minimum enclosure ratings:
a)
NEMA Type 4X for outdoor, wet or corrosive area applications.
b) NEMA Type 7 certified by FM for Class I, Division 1, Groups
C, D, E, F and G, for actuators installed in Class I, Division 1
and 2 areas.
c.
Manual Override:
1) Allen key operation.
d.
Gearing: Hardened alloy steel spur or helical gears and self-locking, alloy
bronze worm gear set:
1) Accurately cut to assure minimum backlash.
e.
Bearings:
1) Anti-friction bearing with caged balls or rollers throughout.
2) Sealed-for-life type thrust bearings housed in a separate thrust base.
f.
Drive bushing:
1) Easily detachable for machining to suit the valve stem or gearbox
input shaft.
2) Positioned in a detachable base of the actuator.
B. Actuators for valves 4 inch and larger:
1.
Provide actuators complete and operable with all components and accessories
required for operation.
2.
Power supply:
a.
Voltage and phases as indicated on the Valve and Gate Actuator Schedule.
b.
Valve or gate motion independent of power supply phase rotation.
3.
Size actuator to move gates or valves from full open to closed position within
the time indicated in the Valve and Gate Actuator Schedule:
a.
If an operating time is not indicated on the Schedule, size the actuator to
move gates or valves at minimum 12 inches per minute under maximum
load.
b.
Measure rate of closure for valves at maximum diameter of disc, plug, or
ball.
4.
Control interface:
a.
Configuration:
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
13447-7
GMP 1
1) Provide a non-intrusive, non-contacting interface for configuring all
input and output settings, control values, ranges, torque switch
settings, valve positions switch settings, and options.
a)
Configurable from a hand-held configuring tool or input devices
on the actuator.
b.
Local interface, integral to actuator:
1) Selector switches:
a)
Local-Off-Remote:
i.
Motor actuator operation is prevented with the switch in
OFF.
b) Open-Close:
i.
Controls the valve when Local-OFF-Remote is in
LOCAL.
ii. Spring return to center.
iii. Configurable between maintained (actuator runs until end
of travel, high torque, or a local-stop-remote is switched to
STOP) and momentary (actuator stops when lever is
released).
c.
Control inputs:
1) Capable of using 120 VAC or 24 VDC inputs.
2) Controls the valve when local-stop-remote is in REMOTE.
3) Isolated inputs capable of operating from external control voltage
source or internal power supply:
a)
Furnish control power supplies within the actuator.
4) Provide the following inputs:
a)
OPEN.
b) CLOSE.
c)
OFF.
d) OPEN and CLOSE inputs configurable between maintained
(actuator runs until end of travel, high torque, or a OFF input)
and momentary (actuator stops when command is removed).
d.
Status outputs:
1) Monitor relay output: Dry contact, normally closed, opens when
actuator is not in REMOTE or in the event of any internal fault or
alarm condition.
2) Dry contact outputs configured for the functions indicated on the
Drawings. Provide the following outputs for all actuators:
a)
FULLY CLOSED.
b) FULLY OPEN.
c)
Local-Off-Remote in REMOTE position.
3) All output contacts rated for 5 amps, 120 VAC and 24 VDC.
e.
Analog input:
1) Provide a 4-20 milliampere analog input for analog modulating
valves when indicated on the Drawings.
2) Modulate valve to maintain position based on analog input value.
3) Maximum input impedance 250 ohms.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
13447-8
GMP 1
f.
Analog output(s):
1) Provide an isolated 4-20 milliampere analog outputs when indicated
on the Drawings:
a)
Loop power sourced from the actuator power supply.
b) Capable of driving into a load up to 500 ohms.
c)
Output proportional to process value(s) indicated on the
Drawings.
d) Valve or gate position.
e)
Operating torque.
2.3 FEATURES
A. Time delay on reversal: Incorporate time delay between stopping actuator and
starting in opposite direction to limit excessive current, torque, and heating from
instantaneous reversal.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Construct motorized actuators of materials suitable for the environment in which
the valve or gate is to be installed.
2.5 COMPONENTS
A. Motors:
1.
Specifically designed for valve actuator service with high starting torque,
totally enclosed non-ventilated construction.
2.
Torque ratings equal to or greater than that required for valve seating and
dynamic torques with a minimum of 25 percent factor of safety:
a.
Design requirements for rubber-seated AWWA butterfly valves:
1) Design valves and actuators for maximum operating torque, in
accordance with and using safety factors required in AWWA C504
and AWWA C542:
a)
Valve actuator torque requirement for open-close service: Not
less than the required valve-seating and dynamic torques under
design operating conditions in accordance with AWWA C504.
b) Valve actuator torque requirement for modulating service: Not
less than twice the required valve dynamic torque under design
operating conditions in accordance with AWWA C504.
b.
Design requirements for slide gates, gate valves, knife gate valves, globe
valves, and diaphragm valves:
1) Design valves and actuators for maximum operating torque, in
accordance with and using safety factors required in AWWA C542.
2) Design for the maximum torque and thrust running load over the full
cycle.
3) Maximum torque or thrust rating: The actuator stall torque or
maximum thrust output shall not exceed the torque or thrust
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
13447-9
GMP 1
capability of the valve or gate, as determined by the valve or gate
manufacturer.
3.
Capable of being removed and replaced without draining the actuator gear
case.
4.
Motor bearings shall be amply proportioned of the anti-friction type and
permanently lubricated.
5.
Rated for operating under the following conditions without exceeding
temperature limits with ambient temperature of 40 degrees Celsius:
a.
Continuous operation for 15 minutes or twice the open-to-close operating
time (whichever is greater) at normal operating torque or 33 percent of
maximum torque (whichever is greater).
b.
60 starts per hour for open/close service or 1,200 starts per hour for
modulating service.
6.
Provide the following motor protection features:
a.
Jammed valve (no valve motion detected through a time delay).
b.
High motor temperature (sensed by embedded thermostats).
c.
High torque.
d.
Single phasing protection for 3-phase motors.
B. Enclosures:
1.
Actuator housing ratings as indicated in the Valve and Gate Actuator Schedule.
2.
Stainless steel external fasteners.
3.
Provide seals for each of the following areas:
a.
Between the terminal compartment and the internal electrical elements.
b.
Between the mechanical and electrical portions to protect from the ingress
of oil, and to protect the mechanical components of oil from dust and
moisture when the electrical terminal is open.
4.
Provide the following minimum enclosure ratings:
a.
NEMA Type 4X for general applications.
C. Position sensing:
1.
Integral with valve actuator.
2.
Gearing: Intermittent type; bronze or stainless steel; grease lubricated; totally
enclosed.
3.
Contacts: Heavy duty and silver-plated with wiping action or encoder wheel.
1.
Remote indication contacts: As indicated on the Drawings.
4.
Switches: Adjustable; allowing for trip points from fully open to closed
positions of valve travel; not subject to breakage or slippage due to over travel;
permits visible verification of switch position without disassembly.
5.
Capable of retaining position and monitoring valve or gate motion when valve
is manually actuated and when main power is not present.
6.
Valve range and position switch outputs field adjustable.
D. Torque sensing:
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
13447-10
GMP 1
1.
Capable of interrupting control circuit in both opening and closing when valve
torque overload occurs.
2.
Silver-plated contacts.
3.
Graduated dials for both open and close directions of travel, each
independently adjustable or 0-100 LTD display.
4.
Positive means to limit adjustability to avoid exceeding actuator output torque
capability with solid-state sensor embedded within the torque transducer.
5.
Permits visible verification of switch position without disassembly.
6.
Torque shutdown setting: 40 percent to 100 percent rated torque:
a.
Adjustable in 1 percent increments.
7.
Capable of interrupting control circuit during both opening and closing and
when valve torque overload occurs.
8.
Independent of variations in frequency, voltage, or temperature.
9.
Provide a temporary inhibit of the torque sensing system during unseating or
during starting in mid-travel against high inertia loads.
E. Manual actuators:
1.
Hand wheel for manual operation:
a.
Maximum 80-pound pull on rim when operating gate or valve under
maximum load.
b.
Provide pull chain when motorized actuator is located more than 6 feet
above floor surface.
1) Chain shall be of sufficient length to reach approximately 4 feet
above the operating level.
2) Where the chain obstructs an aisle or walkway, provide holdback or
other means to ensure chain does not create a nuisance or hazard to
operating personnel.
2.
Declutch lever: With padlock, capable of mechanically disengaging motor and
related gearing and freeing hand wheel for manual operation.
F. Gearing: Hardened alloy steel spur or helical gears and self-locking, alloy bronze
worm gear set:
1.
Accurately cut to assure minimum backlash.
G. Bearings:
1.
Anti-friction bearing with caged balls or rollers throughout.
2.
Sealed-for-life type thrust bearings housed in a separate thrust base.
H. Drive bushing:
1.
Easily detachable for machining to suit the valve stem or gearbox input shaft.
2.
Positioned in a detachable base of the actuator.
I.
Lubrication:
1.
Provide totally enclosed actuator gearing with oil filled gear case suitable for
operation at any angle.
a.
Suitable for standard SAE80EP gear oil.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
13447-11
GMP 1
2.
Actuators requiring special or exotic lubricants are not acceptable.
3.
Provide seals for all shafts.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Setting tool:
1.
If required for setting or configuring the actuator, provide a hand-held setting
tool.
a.
Furnish 1 setting tool for every 10 actuators.
b.
Capable of communicating with PC-based configuration software, and
transferring the following in either direction between the computer and
programmer and setting tool, and between the setting tool and actuator.
c.
Actuator configurations:
1) Capable or storing up to ten different configurations.
d.
Diagnostic data.
1) Capable of storing 4 complete sets of diagnostic data.
2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory test:
1.
Test each actuator in the factory, and submit an individual test certificate for
each actuator.
2.
Perform a high potential test and record the following information:
a.
Test voltage.
3.
Simulate a maximum and typical valve loads and record the following
information:
a.
Current and power factor at maximum and set torque values.
b.
Torque as measured by the actuator.
c.
Actuator output speed or operating time.
4.
Performance testing: Conduct performance test for each actuator simulating
valve operating torque from full-open to full-close and from full-close to
full-open. The following information shall be recorded during each
performance test:
a.
Torque at maximum torque setting.
b.
Current at maximum torque setting.
c.
Test voltage and frequency.
d.
Actuator output speed and operating time for full-open to full-close.
e.
Amperage draw on motors at breakaway and under normal operation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install actuators in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
13447-12
GMP 1
3.2 MOTORIZED ACTUATOR SCHEDULE
A. Provide all actuators required by the Drawings. Major process actuators are listed
in the Valve and Gate Actuator Schedule. The schedule does not include all number
and types of actuators required for the Project.
B. Abbreviations relating to type:
1.
BFV = Butterfly Valve.
2.
BV = Ball Valve.
3.
PV = Plug Valve.
4.
SG = Slide Gate.
5.
KGV = Knife Gate Valve.
6.
TSV = Telescoping Valve.
C. Abbreviations relating to actuator type:
1.
O/C = Open and Close Service.
D. Abbreviations relating to controls:
1.
MB = Modbus RTU (RS-485).
2.
NET = Manufacturer’s proprietary network.
3.
A = Analog (4-20 mA) control, modulating duty.
4.
D = Discrete control, modulating duty.
5.
D-O/C = Discrete Open/Close.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
13447-13
GMP 1
VALVE AND GATE ACTUATOR SCHEDULE
Equipment Number
Location
Reference
DWG
Type
Size
Actuator
Type
NE
MA
Rati
ng
Volta
ge
Open
Time
Cont
rols
AWRF
EDR-DS1
DISC FILTER NO.1
INFLUENT SLIDE GATE
M-1.64
SLG
48”W
X 24”H
O/C
4
480/3
/60
TBD
A
EDR-DS2
DISC FILTER NO.2
INFLUENT SLIDE GATE
M-1.64
SLG
48”W
X 24”H
O/C
4
480/3
/60
TBD
A
EDR-DS3
DISC FILTER NO.3
INFLUENT SLIDE GATE
M-1.64
SLG
48”W
X 24”H
O/C
4
480/3
/60
TBD
A
EDR-DS4
DISC FILTER NO.4
INFLUENT SLIDE GATE
M-1.64
SLG
48”W
X 24”H
O/C
4
480/3
/60
TBD
A
EDR-DS5
DISC FILTER NO.5
INFLUENT SLIDE GATE
M-1.64
SLG
48”W
X 24”H
O/C
4
480/3
/60
TBD
A
EDR-DS6
DISC FILTER NO.6
INFLUENT SLIDE GATE
M-1.64
SLG
48”W
X 24”H
O/C
4
480/3
/60
TBD
A
TBD
DISC FILTER COMMON
EFFLUENT CHANNEL
SLIDE GATE
M-1.64
SLG
48”W
X 60”H
O/C
4
480/3
/60
TBD
A
MOV-DS1-BW1
DISC FILTER NO. 1
BACKWASH VALVE 1
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
13447-14
GMP 1
MOV-DS1-BW2
DISC FILTER NO. 1
BACKWASH VALVE 2
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS1-BW3
DISC FILTER NO. 1
BACKWASH VALVE 3
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS1-BW4
DISC FILTER NO. 1
BACKWASH VALVE 4
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS1-BW5
DISC FILTER NO. 1
BACKWASH VALVE 5
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS1-BW6
DISC FILTER NO. 1
BACKWASH VALVE 6
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS1-BW7
DISC FILTER NO. 1
BACKWASH VALVE 7
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS1-SW2
DISC FILTER NO. 1 SOLIDS
WASTE VALVE 1
M-1.64
MUV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS1-SW2
DISC FILTER NO. 1 SOLIDS
WASTE VALVE 2
M-1.64
MUV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS2-SW1
DISC FILTER NO. 2
BACKWASH VALVE 1
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS2-BW1
DISC FILTER NO. 2
BACKWASH VALVE 2
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS2-BW2
DISC FILTER NO. 2
BACKWASH VALVE 3
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS2-BW3
DISC FILTER NO. 2
BACKWASH VALVE 4
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
13447-15
GMP 1
MOV-DS2-BW4
DISC FILTER NO. 2
BACKWASH VALVE 5
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS2-BW5
DISC FILTER NO. 2
BACKWASH VALVE 6
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS2-BW6
DISC FILTER NO. 2
BACKWASH VALVE 7
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS2-BW7
DISC FILTER NO. 2 SOLIDS
WASTE VALVE 1
M-1.64
MUV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS2-SW2
DISC FILTER NO. 2 SOLIDS
WASTE VALVE 2
M-1.64
MUV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS3-BW1
DISC FILTER NO. 3
BACKWASH VALVE 1
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS3-BW2
DISC FILTER NO. 3
BACKWASH VALVE 2
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS3-BW3
DISC FILTER NO. 3
BACKWASH VALVE 3
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS3-BW4
DISC FILTER NO. 3
BACKWASH VALVE 4
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS3-BW5
DISC FILTER NO. 3
BACKWASH VALVE 5
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS3-BW6
DISC FILTER NO. 3
BACKWASH VALVE 6
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS3-BW7
DISC FILTER NO. 3
BACKWASH VALVE 7
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
13447-16
GMP 1
MOV-DS3-SW1
DISC FILTER NO. 3 SOLIDS
WASTE VALVE 1
M-1.64
MUV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS3-SW2
DISC FILTER NO. 3 SOLIDS
WASTE VALVE 2
M-1.64
MUV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS4-BW1
DISC FILTER NO. 4
BACKWASH VALVE 1
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS4-BW2
DISC FILTER NO. 4
BACKWASH VALVE 2
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS4-BW3
DISC FILTER NO. 4
BACKWASH VALVE 3
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS4-BW4
DISC FILTER NO. 4
BACKWASH VALVE 4
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS4-BW5
DISC FILTER NO. 4
BACKWASH VALVE 5
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS4-BW6
DISC FILTER NO. 4
BACKWASH VALVE 6
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS4-BW7
DISC FILTER NO. 4
BACKWASH VALVE 7
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS4-SW1
DISC FILTER NO. 4 SOLIDS
WASTE VALVE 1
M-1.64
MUV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS4-SW2
DISC FILTER NO. 4 SOLIDS
WASTE VALVE 2
M-1.64
MUV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS5-BW1
DISC FILTER NO. 5
BACKWASH VALVE 1
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
13447-17
GMP 1
MOV-DS5-BW2
DISC FILTER NO. 5
BACKWASH VALVE 2
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS5-BW3
DISC FILTER NO. 5
BACKWASH VALVE 3
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS5-BW4
DISC FILTER NO. 5
BACKWASH VALVE 4
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS5-BW5
DISC FILTER NO. 5
BACKWASH VALVE 5
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS5-BW6
DISC FILTER NO. 5
BACKWASH VALVE 6
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS5-BW7
DISC FILTER NO. 5
BACKWASH VALVE 7
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS5-SW1
DISC FILTER NO. 5 SOLIDS
WASTE VALVE 1
M-1.64
MUV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS5-SW2
DISC FILTER NO. 5 SOLIDS
WASTE VALVE 2
M-1.64
MUV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS6-BW1
DISC FILTER NO. 6
BACKWASH VALVE 1
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS6-BW2
DISC FILTER NO. 6
BACKWASH VALVE 2
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS6-BW3
DISC FILTER NO. 6
BACKWASH VALVE 3
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS6-BW4
DISC FILTER NO. 6
BACKWASH VALVE 4
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
13447-18
GMP 1
MOV-DS6-BW5
DISC FILTER NO. 6
BACKWASH VALVE 5
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS6-BW6
DISC FILTER NO. 6
BACKWASH VALVE 6
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS6-BW7
DISC FILTER NO. 6
BACKWASH VALVE 7
M-1.64
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS6-SW1
DISC FILTER NO. 6 SOLIDS
WASTE VALVE 1
M-1.64
MUV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
MOV-DS6-SW2
DISC FILTER NO. 6 SOLIDS
WASTE VALVE 2
M-1.64
MUV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
TBD
OCOTILLO WRF
EDR-539-101
DISC FILTER NO.1
INFLUENT SLIDE GATE
M-3.44
SLG
48”W
X 24”H
O/C
4
480/3
/60
TBD
A
EDR-539-201
DISC FILTER NO.2
INFLUENT SLIDE GATE
M-3.44
SLG
48”W
X 24”H
O/C
4
480/3
/60
TBD
A
EDR-539-301
DISC FILTER NO.3
INFLUENT SLIDE GATE
M-3.44
SLG
48”W
X 24”H
O/C
4
480/3
/60
TBD
A
EDR-539-401
DISC FILTER NO.4
INFLUENT SLIDE GATE
M-3.44
SLG
48”W
X 24”H
O/C
4
480/3
/60
TBD
A
MOV-539-121
DISC FILTER NO. 1
BACKWASH VALVE 1
M-3.44
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
MOV-539-122
DISC FILTER NO. 1
BACKWASH VALVE 2
M-3.44
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
13447-19
GMP 1
MOV-539-123
DISC FILTER NO. 1
BACKWASH VALVE 3
M-3.44
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
MOV-539-124
DISC FILTER NO. 1
BACKWASH VALVE 4
M-3.44
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
MOV-539-125
DISC FILTER NO. 1
BACKWASH VALVE 5
M-3.44
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
MOV-539-126
DISC FILTER NO. 1
BACKWASH VALVE 6
M-3.44
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
MOV-539-111
DISC FILTER NO. 1 SOLIDS
WASTE VALVE 1
M-3.44
MUV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
MOV-539-221
DISC FILTER NO. 2
BACKWASH VALVE 1
M-3.44
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
MOV-539-222
DISC FILTER NO. 2
BACKWASH VALVE 2
M-3.44
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
MOV-539-223
DISC FILTER NO. 2
BACKWASH VALVE 3
M-3.44
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
MOV-539-224
DISC FILTER NO. 2
BACKWASH VALVE 4
M-3.44
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
MOV-539-225
DISC FILTER NO. 2
BACKWASH VALVE 5
M-3.44
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
MOV-539-226
DISC FILTER NO. 2
BACKWASH VALVE 6
M-3.44
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
MOV-539-211
DISC FILTER NO. 2 SOLIDS
WASTE VALVE 1
M-3.44
MUV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
13447-20
GMP 1
MOV-539-321
DISC FILTER NO. 3
BACKWASH VALVE 1
M-3.44
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
MOV-539-322
DISC FILTER NO. 3
BACKWASH VALVE 2
M-3.44
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
MOV-539-323
DISC FILTER NO. 3
BACKWASH VALVE 3
M-3.44
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
MOV-539-324
DISC FILTER NO. 3
BACKWASH VALVE 4
M-3.44
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
MOV-539-325
DISC FILTER NO. 3
BACKWASH VALVE 5
M-3.44
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
MOV-539-326
DISC FILTER NO. 3
BACKWASH VALVE 6
M-3.44
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
MOV-539-311
DISC FILTER NO. 3 SOLIDS
WASTE VALVE 1
M-3.44
MUV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
MOV-539-421
DISC FILTER NO. 4
BACKWASH VALVE 1
M-3.44
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
MOV-539-422
DISC FILTER NO. 4
BACKWASH VALVE 2
M-3.44
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
MOV-539-423
DISC FILTER NO. 4
BACKWASH VALVE 3
M-3.44
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
MOV-539-424
DISC FILTER NO. 4
BACKWASH VALVE 4
M-3.44
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
MOV-539-425
DISC FILTER NO. 4
BACKWASH VALVE 5
M-3.44
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
13447-21
GMP 1
END OF SECTION
MOV-539-426
DISC FILTER NO. 4
BACKWASH VALVE 6
M-3.44
BAV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
MOV-539-411
DISC FILTER NO.4 SOLIDS
WASTE VALVE 1
M-3.44
MUV
2-IN
O/C
TBD 120/1
/60
TBD
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16160-1
GMP 1
SECTION 16160
ENCLOSURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This Specification includes enclosures to house electrical controls, instruments,
terminal blocks, and serve a junction boxes where shown on the Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Products shall be submitted in accordance with Section 16000, General Electrical
Requirements, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents, prior to installation.
1.3 MANUFACTURERS
A. Enclosures shall be manufactured by Hammond, Hoffman, Rittal, or equal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL
A. Enclosures shall be fabricated from 14 gauge steel with seams that are
continuously welded. Doors shall have full length piano hinges with the door
removable by pulling the hinge pin.
B. A rolled lip shall be provided around three sides of the door and around all sides
of the enclosure opening. The gasket shall be attached with oil-resistant adhesive
and held in place with steel retaining strips. Exterior hardware, such as clamps,
screws, and hinge pins, shall be of stainless steel for outdoor installations. A hasp
and staple shall be provided for padlocking. Each enclosure shall have a print
pocket. All wires entering or leaving the enclosure shall terminate on terminal
strips. All wires and terminals shall be clearly identified as specified elsewhere in
these Specifications.
C. Finish shall be white enamel interior, light gray enamel, ANSI 61 exterior, over
phosphatized surfaces. Special finishes and colors shall be furnished for wet
locations. Drawings should be checked for special conditions.
2.2 NEMA RATING
A. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, enclosures shall be NEMA 12 for
indoors and NEMA 4X for corrosive areas and outdoor installations. NEMA 4X
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16160-2
GMP 1
enclosures shall be 316 stainless steel, unless noted otherwise. NEMA 4X
enclosures shall also be used in wet or wash down areas.
B. Hazardous locations as indicated on plans shall be Nema 7.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Enclosures shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and according to
manufacturer's instructions.
B. Enclosures shall be properly grounded and shall include ground straps connected
to hinged doors and accessories.
END OF SECTION
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16161-1
GMP 1
SECTION 16161
CONTROL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 COPE
A. Contract Documents illustrate and specify functional and general construction
requirements of the panel components and do not necessarily show or specify all
components, wiring, and accessories required for a completely integrated system.
B. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, documentation including drawings and
incidentals as shown on the Drawings, specified and required to design, furnish,
install, calibrate, test, start-up, program, configure, commission and place into
satisfactory operation all panels, intermediate termination panels and/or enclosures
including panel components and instruments.
C. Conform the design and construction of panels to the specifications herein.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the installation of all items specified herein and required to ensure the
complete and proper interfacing of all the components and systems.
B. All control loops to function as described in Section 17000, Control Descriptions
and depicted on the CONTRACT DRAWINGS.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Intermediate Termination Panel (ITP): An Intermediate Termination Panel is any
junction box that has terminals to terminate wires and no electrical or electronic
powered devices. These panels act as interim termination points for field wiring to
be connected to the control systems equipment. Please note that junction boxes and
pull boxes are different. ITP’s are sometimes referred to as junction boxes.
However, pull boxes are not allowed to have any wire splicing devices, including
terminal blocks.
B. Local Control Panel (LCP): A Local Control Panel is an industrial piece of
equipment that contains electrical or electronic devices, in addition to wire
terminals. Typically, it is a local panel connected to a specific piece of equipment
to provide control and/or monitoring of that equipment. A local control panel
contains voltages of 120VAC or below.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16161-2
GMP 1
C. Motor Control Panel (MCP): A Motor Control Panel is an industrial piece of
equipment that houses components for the power distribution and starting of
motors. The components may include motor starters and variable frequency drives.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Construction of panels and the installation and
interconnection of all equipment and devices mounted within also comply with
applicable provisions of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified.
1.
National Fire Protection Association 79
2.
National Electrical Code (NEC) current adoption.
3.
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association Standards (NEMA).
4.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
5.
Operational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Regulations.
6.
State and local code requirements.
7.
Where any conflict arises between codes or standards, the more stringent
requirement applies.
8.
All panel devices shall bear the label of the Underwriters’ Laboratory (UL),
Inc. or be UL Recognized. Some products certified by UL are components
that are intended to be used in the manufacture of a complete listed product.
These components cannot bear the UL symbol, but may use a special
Recognized Component Mark.
a.
The UL/UR listed number shall be documented on the Bill of Materials
on the drawings.
9.
The assembled LCP’s and MCP’s are to be conformed to meet UL 508A
requirements and labeling.
B. Panel to be designed, schematics drawn and assembled by the manufacturer. Utilize
one of the following Panel Manufacturers:
1.
Zak Controls, 4970 East Beverly Rd., Phoenix AZ 85044 – (602) 267-0100.
2.
RDC Electrical, 3411 South 44th St., Phoenix, AZ 85308 – (602) 437-0760.
3.
Keller Electrical Industries, Inc., 1881 East University Dr., Phoenix AZ 85034
(602) 437-3015.
4.
Vertech Industrial Systems, 4409 East Baseline Rd., Phoenix, AZ 85042, Tel:
(480) 756-2300.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General:
1.
Reference Section 01330, Submittals Procedures.
2.
Panels shall be furnished in accordance with the requirements as shown on the
Drawings, and as specified in Division 16, Section 16050 and Division 17000,
Sections 17456, 17453, 17460 and 1761.
3.
Generate drawing package utilizing AutoCAD versions 2004 through 2008. If
utilizing a newer AutoCAD version, submit files saved at version 2008.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16161-3
GMP 1
4.
Drawing package shall contain complete wiring and schematic diagrams,
control diagrams loop drawings, a complete Bill of Material, and any other
details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will
properly function as a unit. Drawings shall show proposed layout, anchorage,
support and appurtenances of equipment and equipment relationship to other
parts of the work including clearances for maintenance and operations.
5.
Submit legible hard copies of the panel drawing package printed on 11” x 17”
sheets.
6.
Submit manufacturer’s technical data sheets and product literature for the
panel and all components utilized. Cleary identify exact equipment and
material that is being supplied on the manufacturer’s data sheets.
7.
Submit a sample nameplate with the submittal.
8.
Identify general location of all conduit entry points on the Front Elevation
drawing of the documentation package.
9.
Submit calculations and recommended cooling and heating load requirements.
10.
Utilize the
Hoffman
Temperature Calculation
tool
at:
11. http://www.hoffmanonline.com/product_catalog/tools/index.aspx?cat_1=34&
cat _2=375&SelectCatID=375&CatId=375.
12. Submit location and tube routing details for air conditioner drain line.
Coordinate drain location with ENGINEER.
1.6 O&M MANUALS
A. Comply with the requirements of Section 01782, Operation and Maintenance Data.
B. Provide an electronic copy of the panel drawing package on a separate CD. Panel
Drawings are to be provided electronically in AutoCAD version 2004 through
2008. If utilizing a newer AutoCAD version, submit files saved at version 2008.
1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Comply with manufacturers requirements for Transportation and Handling of
Materials and Equipment.
B. Comply with manufacturers requirements for Storage of Materials and Equipment.
C. Provide a hard copy of the panel drawings, size 11” x 17”, inside the panel upon
delivery.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PANEL ENCLOSURES
A. General:
1.
Conform panels and enclosures to the NEMA requirements as stated in
Specification 16160, Enclosures.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16161-4
GMP 1
2.
All outdoor panels shall be provided with sunshade structures. Sunshade
structures shall be constructed as shown on CONTRACT DRAWINGS.
3.
Sizes shown on contract drawings are estimates. Furnish panels and enclosures
sized to house all equipment, instruments, front panel mounted devices, power
supplies, power distribution panels, wiring and other components installed
within.
4.
Size the panel to provide 20% spare free space capacity.
5.
Use stainless steel fasteners throughout.
6.
Provide interior mounting panels and shelves constructed of minimum 12 gage
steel.
7.
Provide 12”x12’ print pocket in panels with a 24” or larger door. Mount on
inside door where no door mounted devices are located. If there is not enough
room for a 12”x12” print pocket, provide a sized pocket to fit available room.
8.
Provide enclosure mounting supports as required for floor, frame, or wall
mounting. Indoor wall mount panels utilizing stainless steel unistrut. Outdoor
wall mount panels utilizing PVC-coated Unistrut.
B. Construction Features:
1.
General Construction Features - Provide the following convenience
accessories inside of each panel.
a.
One or more 120 VAC light fixtures with a minimum 40 watt lamp or
LEDs with a snap switch for on/off control.
b.
Provide grounding studs or lugs for metal panels and doors.
c.
Provide all electrical components and devices, support hardware,
fasteners, and interconnecting wiring required to make the panels and/or
enclosures complete and operational.
d.
Provide oil resistant gasket completely around each door or opening.
e.
For panels located in the field or outdoors that have door mounted devices
which do not meet the NEMA rating for the area, provide a window kit
that includes a hinged door with a clear plastic window and an oil resistant
gasket to encompass all non-NEMA rated panel instruments for this area.
f.
Provide full height doors.
g.
Provide panels with no extra holes or knockouts unless shown on Contract
DRAWINGS.
C. Environment:
1.
General:
a.
Provide the following panel(s) with an air conditioner, heat exchanger or
ventilation fan based on the submitted calculations for cooling and/or
heating load requirements.
1) 1) As Required by cooling and/or heating calculations.
b.
Provide a heater for all panels located outdoors to maintain a minimum
temperature of 68°F.
c.
Provide a separate supplementary protector for the cooling or heating
equipment.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16161-5
GMP 1
d.
Provide thermostats to automatically control heating and cooling
requirements.
e.
Provide a high temperature switch, for alarm purposes, in all panels that
require air conditioners, heat exchangers or ventilation fans. The contact
shall be wired to alarm to the Process Control Information System.
1) Products and Manufacturers:
a)
Hoffman ATEMNC.
b) Or Equal.
2.
Air Conditioner:
a.
Coordinate utilization of air conditioners with the ENGINEER.
b.
Provide an automatically controlled closed loop air conditioner with
filtered and adjustable air louvers to maintain temperature inside each
enclosure below the maximum operating temperature rating of the lowest
rated component.
c.
Provide a condensation drain line for each air conditioner.
d.
Coordinate space requirements for maintenance.
e.
Provide NEMA 4X for outdoor locations.
f.
Coat heating and cooling elements including external housing that are in
contact with Plant’s ambient environment with Heresite, or equal, for
protection from hydrogen sulfide corrosion with hydrogen sulfide levels
up to seven ppm.
1) Coordinate application of coating with the ENGINEER.
g.
Product and Manufacturer:
1) Hoffman (McClean).
3.
Heat Exchanger:
a.
Coordinate utilization of heat exchangers with the ENGINEER.
b.
Provide an automatically controlled heat exchanger to maintain
temperature inside each enclosure below the maximum operating
temperature rating of the lowest rated component.
c.
Coordinate space requirements for maintenance.
d.
Products and Manufacturers: 1) Hoffman.
4.
Ventilation Fan:
a.
Coordinate utilization of ventilation fans with the ENGINEER.
b.
Provide automatically controlled ventilation fans with filter to maintain
temperature of indoor enclosures below the maximum operating
temperature of the lowest rated component.
c.
Products and Manufacturers: 1) Hoffman. 2) Or Equal.
5.
Heater:
a.
Provide adequately sized automatically controlled 120 VAC heaters to
maintain temperature inside each enclosure above 40°F to a maximum of
80°F when the outside temperature is 0°F through 40°F.
b.
Maintain a minimum four inch clearance or minimum clearance
recommendations from the manufacturers from any device.
c.
Product and Manufacturer: 1) Hoffman. 2) Or Equal.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16161-6
GMP 1
D. Identification:
1.
Provide laminated plastic nameplates with a white background and black
lettering for identification of panels and components.
2.
Construct nameplates with 1/16” plastic and with beveled edges.
3.
Nameplate Mounting:
a.
Indoor panels: Mount nameplates to the panel utilizing glue.
b.
Outdoor panels: Mount nameplates to the panel utilizing glue and with
two self-sealing ¼” stainless steel screws by APM Hexseal.
c.
Glue Product and Manufacturer:
1) Gorilla Glue.
2) Or Equal.
3) Provide nameplates according to Table 2.1.C.5 and Section 3.1.B:
Nameplate Specifications
Type
Size
Font
Font
Size
Manufacturer
Nameplate
*1½” x 6”
Arial 1/8“
Panel Nameplate
*2” x 7”
Arial 1/2“
Device Nameplate *1½”x 2½”
Arial 3/16“
Table 2.1.C.5 Nameplate Specifications
* This is a minimum height size requirement. Size nameplates large enough to display the
information required to clearly identify the panel.
2.2 PANEL DEVICES
A. General:
1.
Provide DIN rail mounted devices where practical.
2.
All devices mounted on the exterior of the panel shall match the NEMA rating
of the panel.
B. Internal Component Labeling:
1.
Provide a device label for devices mounted inside the panel that conforms to
the criteria below:
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16161-7
GMP 1
a.
Instruments: Provide label with the instrument loop number as shown on
the CONTRACT DRAWINGS. Place label below the instrument on the
backplane.
b.
Supplementary Protector: Label each supplementary protector with CB
and the number assigned in the supplementary protector schedule. Place
label on the backplane.
c.
Fuses: Label each fuse with FU and the number assigned in the fuse
schedule. Place a label on the backplane that includes the fuse number and
the fuse size.
d.
Control Relays: Label each relay with CR and the number assigned in the
panel drawings. Place label below the relay on the backplane.
e.
Terminal Strips: Label each terminal strip with the terminal strip type.
(ex. TB1, TB2, ATB). Place label above the terminal block or at first
terminal on the backplane.
f.
Door Mounted Devices: Provide a label on the interior of the front panel
door for every panel device. The label should contain the same
information as shown on the front panel nameplate. Place the label below
the device.
g.
Wireway Covers: Label wireways with the voltage that is being routed
through it. For example; “24 VDC” for DC voltage or “120VAC” for AC
voltage. Place label on wireway cover. Coordinate label size to fit on
wireway cover.
h.
Identify internal components with permanent adhesive plastic labels.
1) Product and Manufacturer:
a)
Brady USA Inc.
b) Or Equal.
2) Provide device label size and fonts per Table 2.2.B.1:
Device
Label Size
Font Size
# Points
Brady Part #
(Wireways) 24VDC 1”x 4”
Arial
48 Points PTL-42-422
(Wireways) 120VAC 1”x 4”
Arial
48 Points PTL-42-422
Misc. Device Labels 1”x 1”
Arial
16 Points PTL-19-423
Panel Door Devices 1” x 1.5”
Arial
8 Points
PTL-31-423
Table 2.2.B.1 Panel Interior Device Label
C. DIN Rail:
1.
General: DIN rail is the metal rail used to mount various electrical components
in a panel.
2.
Mount all internal components on DIN Rail.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16161-8
GMP 1
3.
DIN Rail for terminal blocks shall be raised DIN rail to match the height of the
wireways.
4.
Product and Manufacturer, Provide one of the following:
a.
Phoenix Contact.
b.
Or Equal.
D. Control Circuit – Supplementary Protectors:
1.
Provide single pole supplementary circuit protectors with the following
features, 120 Volt AC, DIN rail mounted and UL 1099 listed with auxiliary
contacts.
2.
Provide end caps, marking strips, insulated side jumpers and other accessories.
3.
Product and Manufacturer, Provide one of the following models where “xx” is
the appropriate rating.
a.
Phoenix Contact, TMC 1-M1-xxA.
b.
Allen-Bradley, 1492-SP1Bxxx.
c.
Idec, NRC-11-0-L-xxA-AA.
E. Air Conditioner or Heater Supplementary Protectors:
1.
Provide supplementary protectors with the following features, 120 Volt AC,
DIN rail mounted and UL 489 listed with auxiliary contacts.
2.
Product and Manufacturer, Provide one of the following:
a.
Allen-Bradley, Bulletin 1489.
b.
Or Equal.
F. Control Relays:
1.
Type: General purpose, plug-in socket base type rated for continuous duty.
2.
Construction Features:
a.
Coil Voltages: 120 VAC.
b.
Contacts:
1) Silver cadmium oxide rated not less than ten amperes resistive at 120
VAC or 28 VDC continuous.
2) For switching low energy circuits (less than 200 ma) fine silver, gold
flashed contacts rated not less than three amperes resistive at 120
VAC or 28 VDC continuous shall be provided.
3) Number of contacts:
a)
Minimum: Two double pole/double throw contact sets
b) Maximum: Four double pole/double throw contact sets.
c)
Socket type to be blade.
d) Relay Enclosure: Dust-proof plastic enclosure.
e)
Relays shall have an LED indicating lamp to show energized
state.
3.
Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a.
Type R and/or Type K, as manufactured by Square D Company.
b.
Type RH and/or Type RY, as manufactured by IDEC.
c.
Potter & Brumfield.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16161-9
GMP 1
G. Time Delay Relay:
1.
Type: Dial adjustable, plug-in type time delay relay providing delay-on-make,
delay-on-break one shots or interval operation.
2.
Construction Features:
a.
MOS digital circuit with transformer coupled power.
b.
Switch selectable ranges.
c.
Minimum Setting: Three percent of range; except 50 ms for one second
range.
d.
Contacts:
1) Type: DPDT.
2) Rating: Seven amps resistive at 120 VAC, seven amps at 24 VDC.
e.
Housing:
1) Plug-in design with dust and moisture resistant molded plastic case.
f.
Power Input: 120 VAC.
3.
Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a.
Manufactured by Automatic Timing and Controls Company.
b.
Manufactured by IDEC.
H. Selector Switches, Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights:
1.
General:
a.
Selector switches, pushbuttons and indicating lights shall be supplied by
one manufacturer and be of the same series or model type.
b.
Type: 30mm, Heavy duty industrial, oil tight, corrosion resistant, with
interchangeable pilot lights, plug-in construction, double break silver
contacts, chrome plated lock rings, and modular contacts.
c.
Mounting: Flush mounted on panel front, unless otherwise noted.
d.
NEMA rated to match panel in which mounted.
e.
Provide individual legend plates for indication of switch, pushbutton, and
light function (e.g., Open, Closed, Hand-Off-Auto). A list shall be
submitted for review and approval.
I.
Selector Switches:
a.
Type: Provide selector switches with number of positions as required to
perform intended functions as shown on the Drawings and as specified.
b.
Contacts:
1) Provide number and arrangement of contacts as required to perform
intended functions specified, but not less than one double pole,
double throw contact per switch.
2) Type: Double break, silver contacts with movable contact blade
providing scrubbing action.
3) Rating: Compatible with AC or DC current with devices
simultaneously operated by the switch contacts, but not less than ten
amperes resistive at 120 volts AC or DC continuous.
c.
Switch Operator: Standard black knob.
2.
Pushbuttons (Standard or Illuminated):
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16161-10
GMP 1
a.
Momentary Type: Provide momentary, booted type pushbuttons as
required to perform intended functions specified and shown on the
Drawings. Boot color to be red for stop buttons and black for other
functions.
1) Provide extended head pushbuttons for all stop functions. 2) Provide
flush head pushbuttons for all other functions.
b.
Maintained Type: Provide maintained, push/pull, “Mushroom” type, red
in color, to perform intended functions as specified, and as shown on the
drawings.
1) Emergency Stop button shall be red and the base of the button shall
be yellow.
c.
Contacts: Comply with the requirements specified for selector switches.
d.
Lock-out: Provide locking mechanism for all lock-out functions.
3.
Indicating Lights:
a.
Type: Compact, integral non-transformer type.
b.
Lamps: 120 VAC, high-intensity LED type (20,000 hours minimum).
Indicating lights shall have clear lenses and LED lamps colored as shown
on the Drawings.
c.
Common, push-to-test circuitry shall be provided for each panel to
simultaneously test all indicating lights on the panel using a single
pushbutton when there are 10 or more lights on the panel. Control panels
with less than 10 lights shall utilize individual push-to-test lights and
control circuitry.
d.
Button and Lamp Colors:
1) Red for indication of open, on, or running.
2) Green for indication of closed, off (ready), or stopped.
3) YELLOW for indication of equipment malfunction, process trouble
or alarms.
4) White for indication of electrical control power on.
4.
Rotary Cam Switches:
a.
Provide rotary cam switches with number of positions and poles as
required performing the signal switching function specified and shown on
the Drawings.
b.
Contacts:
1) Gold-flashed contacts housed in mechanical contact blocks with
number and arrangement of contacts as required performing intended
function.
2) Contact Rating: Compatible with AC or DC through-put current of
signals and devices simultaneously operated by the switch contacts,
but not less than 20 amperes at 600 VAC or 250 VDC continuous.
c.
Switch Operator: Standard black knob.
5.
Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a.
Square D.
b.
Allen-Bradley Co.
c.
Eaton.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16161-11
GMP 1
J.
Potentiometer:
1.
Type: Industrial potentiometer operator, direct acting, 3/4 to full turn; and
standard 3-wire potentiometer.
2.
Required Features:
a.
NEMA rated to match panel in which mounted.
b.
Resistance Range: 0 to 10,000 Ohms.
c.
Resistance Element: Wire wound or conductive plastic.
d.
Power Rating: Two watts.
e.
Mounting: Flush mounted on panel front, unless otherwise noted.
f.
Provide legend plate for indication of position (0 to 100 percent).
3.
Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a.
Square D.
b.
Allen-Bradley Co.
c.
Eaton.
K. Power Supply:
1.
General:
a.
Panel power supply source, type, voltage, number of circuits and circuit
ratings shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings.
b.
Panels shall be provided with an internal 120 VAC with number of
circuits and separate supplementary protectors sized as required to
distribute power to the panel components.
L. 24VDC Power Supplies:
1.
General:
a.
Single unit and multiple unit power supplies, located in panels, as
required.
b.
Single Unit Required Features:
1) Solid state circuitry.
2) Surface mounting.
3) Input Power: 120 VAC, ± 10 percent, 60 Hz.
4) Output Power: 24 VDC or as required.
5) Line/Load Regulation: 0.05 percent.
6) Ripple: 0.25 mv RMS.
7) Overload Protection: Internal preset or fused.
2.
Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a.
Acopian Corporation.
b.
Power One.
c.
Lambda.
d.
Sola.
3.
If redundant power supplies are required: Provide one of the following:
a.
Lambda DPL-PU/E.
b.
Phoenix Contact Quint-Diode/40.
c.
Puls.
d.
Or Equal.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16161-12
GMP 1
M. Wire:
1.
General:
a.
Provide internal wiring of Type MTW stranded copper wire with
thermoplastic insulation with no nylon jacket rated for 600 V at 90°C for
single conductors.
b.
No utilization of Type THHN for panel wiring.
c.
For DC panel signal wiring, use #16 AWG shielded minimum.
d.
For AC power wiring, use #14 AWG minimum. For AC signal and
control wiring, use #16 AWG minimum. For wiring carrying more than
15 amps, use sizes required by NEC and NFPA 79 Standards.
e.
Identify wires at each end using heat shrink labels with permanent number
codes using a Brady LS2000 Labeling System, or equal.
f.
Panels conform to the wire color code as shown in Table 2.2.K.1.f Wire
Color Code and NFPA 79 Standards.
2.
Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a.
Carol.
b.
Belden.
c.
Anixter.
WIRE COLOR CODE TABLE (Inside Panels)
TYPE
FUNCTION
INSULATION
COLOR
WIRE
SIZE
AC POWER - HOT
120VAC
**BLACK
#14
AC POWER -
NEUTRAL
120VAC
WHITE
#14
AC GROUND
120VAC
GREEN
#14
AC CONTROL
120VAC
**RED
#16
ISOLATED DC
GROUND
GROUND
GREEN
W/YELLOW
#16
DC POWER
SOURCE
BLUE
#16
DC POWER
COMMON
WHITE /BLUE
#16
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16161-13
GMP 1
CONTROL
FOREIGN VOLTAGES
YELLOW
#16
LOW VOLTAGE
AC
24 VAC SOURCE
BROWN
#16
LOW VOLTAGE
AC
24 VAC
COMMON
BROWN
W/WHITE
#16
*AC POWER
480 VAC
PHASE A
BROWN
Size to FLA
*AC POWER
480 VAC
PHASE B
ORANGE
Size to FLA
*AC POWER
480 VAC
PHASE C
YELLOW
Size to FLA
TEMPORARY
TEMPORARY
PURPLE
Size to FLA
Table 2.2.K.1.f Wire Color Code * - For Motor Control Panels (MCP’s) that are
permitted to contain 480 VAC
** - Black 120 VAC wires are hot unless powered down via supplementary circuit
protector. Red 120 VAC wires are hot based on the control logic state.
N. Single Shielded Pair Cable:
1.
Tinned copper, nineteen strand, PVC insulated conductors, No. 16 AWG
minimum, twisted with aluminum-polyester shield, stranded tinned 16 AWG
copper drain wire and PVC black or gray outer jacket. Wire conductor colors
shall be black (-neg) and red (+pos). 600 Volt Tray Cable (TC) rated.
2.
Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a.
Belden Company (No. 9342).
b.
Okonite Company.
c.
Dekoron Wire and Cable Company.
O. Wire Terminations:
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16161-14
GMP 1
1.
Terminate all field and internal component wiring using insulated ferruled
connectors attached with manufacturer’s recommended tool.
2.
Excessive stripping of the wire so as to allow bare wire outside the insulated
ferrule is not permitted.
3.
Utilize insulated double ferruled connectors wherever two wires terminate on
the same terminal block connection.
4.
Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a.
Phoenix Contact – Clipline.
b.
Thomas & Betts.
c.
Weidmuller.
P. Terminal Blocks:
1.
General:
a.
Numerically code terminals utilizing terminal block manufacturer’s
marking system. Information must be printed directly on the terminal
label. Sticky back labels are not permitted.
b.
Terminal blocks must be DIN rail mountable with screw clamp
connections. Spring cage connections are not permitted.
c.
Double level terminal blocks are permitted for use with signals on Analog
Terminal Block (ATB) only.
d.
Terminals used for analog signals on ATB shall be colored blue.
e.
Terminal block jumpers must be connected via screw clamp. Screw
clamped comb jumpers are permitted. Plug in jumpers are not permitted.
2.
Product and Manufacturer: For each terminal strip type provide one of the
following:
a.
Power Terminal Block (PTB).
1) Phoenix Contact, Type UK 5 N, Color Gray, Model # 30 04 36 2.
2) Allen Bradley, Type 1492-J4, Color Gray, Model # 1492-J4.
3) Weidmuller, Type WSU 4, Color Dark Beige, Model # 1020100000.
b.
Field Wiring Discrete Signal Terminal Blocks (TB1 and TB2).
1) Phoenix Contact, Type UDK 3, Double Connection, Color Gray,
Model # 27 75 37 5.
c.
Weidmuller, Type WDK 2.5V, Double Connection, Double Level,
Internal Connection, Color Dark Beige, Model # 1905060000.
d.
Field Wiring Analog or Internal Wiring DC Power (ATB) - Single Level
Terminal Blocks:
1) Phoenix Contact, Type UK 3N BU, Color Blue, Model # 30 01 51 4.
2) Allen Bradley, Type 1492-J3-B, Color Blue, Model # 1492-J3-B.
3) Weidmuller, Type WDU 2.5 BL, Color Blue, Model # 1020080000.
e.
Field Wiring Analog or Internal Wiring DC Power (ATB) - Double Level
Terminal Blocks. Alternating double and single level ATB terminal
blocks are permitted.
1) Phoenix Contact, Type MBKKB 2,5 BU, Double Level, Color Blue,
Model # 27 71 09 4.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16161-15
GMP 1
2) Allen Bradley, Type 1492-JD3-B, Double Level, Color Blue, 3)
Model # 1492-JD3-B.
3) Weidmuller, Type WDK 2.5 BL, Double Level, Color Blue, 5)
Model # 1021580000.
Q. Surge Protection:
1.
Provide DC surge protection with integrated varistor for all analog signal loops
that are terminated to Programmable Logic Controllers.
2.
Provide maintenance free, self-restoring surge protection to protect the
electronic instrumentation system from surges propagating along the signal
and power supply lines. Device shall be removable without interrupting the
circuit.
3.
Provide a separate surge protector for the positive and a separate surge
protector for the negative polarity of each loop.
4.
Mount the surge protectors on the ATB.
5.
Ground the surge protectors to the panel DC ground bus.
6.
Label the surge protectors in sequential order starting with the ATB signals.
7.
Required Features:
a.
Amp Rating: Compatible with working voltage and current of device
being protected.
b.
Voltage Rating: Compatible with the working voltage of protected device.
c.
Reaction Time: nanosecond range.
8.
Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a.
Phoenix Contact.
b.
Advanced protection Technologies.
c.
EDCO.
d.
Or Equal.
R. Wireways:
1.
General:
a.
Mount wireways using stainless steel bolts. Drill and tap the sub-panel to
accommodate the bolts.
b.
Color to be Gray or White throughout the entire panel. Provide only one
color.
c.
All wireways to include cover.
d.
Wireway covers to be labeled as per section 2.2.B.
2.
Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a.
Panduit.
b.
Thomas & Betts.
c.
Or Equal.
S. Alarms:
1.
Audible alarms shall be UL listed, 120VAC, with solid state circuitry,
vibrating horn, non-metallic corrosion resistant housing, with required
mounting hardware, suitable for outdoor use capable of producing 100 dB at
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16161-16
GMP 1
10 feet. The audible alarm shall be manufactured by Federal Signal model
350, Edwards Model 870-EX, or equal.
2.
Rotating beacons for interior and/or exterior locations shall be UL listed,
120VAC, with motor and cooling fan, rotating lights at 60 times per minute
minimum, capable of producing 36,000 candlepower with required mounting
hardware. Lens color shall be verified at the time of construction. The rotating
beacons shall be manufactured by Federal Signal Model 371L or equal.
3.
Rotating beacons for corrosive and/or hazardous locations shall be UL listed,
120VAC, with solid state circuitry, rotating lights at 60 times per minute
minimum, suitable for outdoor use capable of producing 36,000 candlepower
with required mounting hardware. Lens color shall be verified at the time of
construction. The rotating beacons shall be manufactured by Edwards Model
52EX, or equal.
4.
Strobe beacons shall be UL listed, NEMA 4X, 120VAC, flashing at 80 times
per minute minimum, producing peak candlepower of 520,000, effective
candlepower of 165, with required mounting hardware. Lens color shall be
verified at the time of construction. The rotating beacons shall be
manufactured by Federal Signal model 151XST, Edwards Model 92EX, or
equal.
T. Intrinsically Safe Barriers:
1.
Intrinsic safety barriers shall permit connection of devices located in a
hazardous area to other devices located in a safe area. Intrinsic safety barriers
shall be EMC compliant, 10 to 35VDC, 35mA output current, hazardous area
terminals identified by blue labels, terminals accommodating conductors up to
12AWG, ambient temperature rating of -20° C to +60° C. The intrinsic safety
barriers shall be manufactured by MTL Inc., Ronan Engineering Co., R. Stahl
Inc., A.T.C., or equal.
U. Elapsed Time Meters and Time Clocks:
1.
Elapsed time meters shall be self powered, non-reset, solid state counter which
provides silent, accurate and noise immune operation. Elapsed time meters
shall require no external power, five year minimum battery life, 120VAC
power, accessories for panel mounting, nameplate below LCD display reading
"HOURS", liquid crystal display with 6 digits approximately 2-inches high
with 50,000 hour minimum display life and indication of sufficient battery
power. The elapsed time meters shall be manufactured by Durant, Automatic
Timing and Controls, a Division of Sycon Corp., or equal.
2.
Time clocks shall be microprocessor based, have 24 hour time control, up to
24 operations per day, programmable from panel face keys, skip-a-day feature
allowing schedule to be skipped for one to seven days, SPDT switch contact
rated at 15 amps at 120VAC, with battery carryover to maintain time and
program during power outage for 275 hours. The time clocks shall be
manufactured by Tork, Paragon Electric Company, or equal.
V. Motor Starters and Overload Relays:
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16161-17
GMP 1
1.
Refer to Specification Section 16480, Motor Controllers.
PART 3 - PEXECUTION:
3.1 EXTERIOR PANEL:
A. Component Layout:
1.
Arrange associated control and indication devices for a particular part of the
process in close proximity to each other.
2.
Mount indicating lights above control switches and push buttons.
3.
Standard component spacing is 3 ½” center to center and 3 ½” above and
below. It is acceptable to use more space if required, but spatial consistency
must be maintained.
4.
Maximum height for panel exterior-mounted devices is 6’-0” from the floor.
Minimum height for panel exterior-mounted devices is 3’-0” from the floor.
5.
Locate alarm horn at the top of the panel. The alarm horn may be located
above 6’-0” device height limitation.
6.
Unless otherwise noted; route field wiring through the bottom of the enclosure.
Provide watertight conduit openings.
B. Exterior Panel Nameplates:
1.
General:
a.
Refer to Section 2.1.D for material and size requirements.
b.
Provide specific panel identification on nameplates derived from the
contract specifications and drawings.
c.
Obtain ENGINEER approval for panel identification for panels that are
not identified in the contract specifications and drawings.
2.
Panel Manufacturer Identifier and Power Requirements Nameplate (NP-1):
a.
Mount nameplate in the upper left corner of the panel front.
b.
Provide the following information for each circuit feeding the panel:
1) The first line indicates the name of the manufacturer, location and
phone number of who assembled the panel.
2) The following lines:
a)
Include panel voltage, current, phase, frequency, short circuit
current rating for each panel feed.
b) Provide switchboard name and circuit number for each circuit
feeding the panel.
c)
Refer to figure 3.1.B.2.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16161-18
GMP 1
WILSON & Sons, CHANDLER, AZ 85226 - (480) 555-1234
120 VAC, 0.5 AMPS, 1Ø, 60HZ, SCCR 5KA, FED FROM LP-34, CIRCUIT 6
120 VAC, 7.5 AMPS, 1Ø, 60HZ, SCCR 8KA, FED FROM LP-34, CIRCUIT 8
Figure 3.1.B.2
Panel Manufacturer Identifier and Power Requirements Nameplate (NP-1)
3.
Panel Identification Nameplate (NP-2)
a.
Mount panel identification nameplate in the top, center of the panel.
b.
Provide the following information:
1) The first line of text is an abbreviation of the panel as shown on the
CONTRACT drawings.
2) The second line of text on the nameplate is used to spell out the
process abbreviation.
Panel Identification Nameplate (NP-2)
4.
Panel Component Nameplates
a.
Mount nameplates above all control and indicating devices.
b.
Provide the following information:
1) The first line indicates the instrument device loop identifier and
number as shown on the DRAWINGS.
2) The second line identifies the system equipment that the component
is associated with.
3) The third line identifies the control position, condition of the
equipment or the alarm state being monitored.
4) Refer to figure 3.1.B.4.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16161-19
GMP 1
3.2 INTERIOR PANEL
A. General:
1.
All Wall Mounted Panels - Where conduit enters the panel, maintain a
minimum of 4” clearance from any device or wireway to allow room for
routing of field wiring.
2.
Concrete Pad or Floor Mounted LCP’s and MCP’s – Where conduits enter the
panel through the concrete pad, maintain a minimum of 6” clearance from any
device or wireway to allow room for routing of field wiring. Where conduit
enters the panel sides or top, maintain a minimum of 4” clearance from any
device or wireway to allow room for routing of field wiring.
3.
Elevated Floor Mounted LCP’s and MCP’s - Where conduit enters the panel,
maintain a minimum of 4” clearance from any device or wireway to allow
room for routing of field wiring.
4.
Concrete Pad, Floor Mounted or Elevated Floor Mounted ITP’s - Where
conduits enter the panel through the top or bottom, maintain a minimum of 6”
clearance from any device or wireway to allow room for routing of field
wiring.
5.
Locate and install all devices and components so that connections can be easily
made and that there is ample room for servicing each item.
6.
Maintain a minimum 2’0” clearance between components mounted on side
panels and components mounted on the opposing side panel.
7.
Components mounted on the back panel are to be unobstructed by any
components mounted on side panels.
8.
Adequately support and restrain all devices and components mounted on or
within the panel to prevent any movement.
B. Panel Incoming Power:
1.
Panel power fed from lighting panels, or other sources with fused or circuit
breaker protection, shall be wired to the Power Terminal Blocks (PTBs).
Power sources entering the panel are to be provided with a separate neutral and
ground. The PTBs shall have a separate terminal for the hot and neutral for
each circuit. The ground to be terminated to the AC ground bar.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16161-20
GMP 1
2.
Mount the PTBs near the top left corner of the panel.
3.
Multiple power sources may be required for each panel. Power requirements
are identified on the CONTRACT DRAWINGS. The following additional
power sources may be required for the panel.
a.
Control Logic Power and Light Fixture.
b.
Air Conditioning.
4.
Arrange the terminal strip in an orderly manner with circuit conductors
grouped together. For instance, terminate the hot and neutral conductors on
consecutive terminals. Label terminals and internal wiring as H1 and N1
(Control Logic), H2 and N2 (Air Conditioning). Identify each additional
source in sequential order beginning with H3 and N3.
5.
Terminate all incoming power on one side of the terminal strip.
C. AC Power Distribution:
1.
Identify the wire extending from the PTB to the supplementary protector as H1
and H2, etc. Using H1 as an example; the wire terminated to the line side of
the supplementary protector is labeled H1, the wire terminated to the load side
of the supplementary protector is labeled as L1-1.
2.
If L1-1 passes through an additional supplementary protector to feed panel
components, this supplementary protector can be shown on the drawings in a
horizontal or vertical position on a schematic rung and the wire terminated to
the line side of the supplementary protector is labeled L1-1. The wire
terminated to the load side of the supplementary protector is labeled L1 – (the
Supplementary Protector #) and the wire color is black.
3.
If the panel controls multiple pieces of equipment, such as two pumps with
separate control circuits, provide a supplementary protector for each control
circuit.
4.
Powering 120 VAC field 4-wire instruments from the panel is not permitted.
D. DC Power Distribution:
1.
Mount DC power supplies near the top right of the panel. Mount fuses
associated with the power supply in close proximity to the power supplies.
2.
Identify terminals used for DC power distribution as PTB-DC.
3.
Provide a fuse for each analog loop that loop power is provided by a power
supply located in the panel.
E. Grounding:
1.
AC Ground:
a.
Provide the AC ground bus bar with cage type or screw terminals installed
near the bottom of the back panel with extended mounting bolts.
b.
Provide adequate metal to metal contact between the AC ground bus bar
and the back plane.
c.
Connect all AC power sources and devices to ground at this ground bus.
d.
Connect all panel enclosure doors to the AC ground bus.
e.
Connect all side panels to the AC ground bus.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16161-21
GMP 1
f.
Provide a connection point on the ground bus for connection to the ground
grid system.
2.
DC Ground:
a.
Install the isolated DC grounding bus bar with cage type or screw
terminals installed near the bottom of the back panel at a minimum
distance of 6” from the AC ground bus.
b.
The isolated grounding bus bar consists of two non-conductive mounting
blocks with a single copper grounding bar attached between them.
c.
Connect all shields (SH) requiring loop grounding in the panel from the
analog signal terminals to the DC grounding bus bar.
d.
To avoid ground loops, connect analog cable signal shields to ground at
one location only, preferably in the LCP, MCP or ITP; not in the field.
Maintain consistency for the termination point of signal shield for all
analog signals.
e.
Provide a connection point on the ground bus for connection to the ground
grid system.
f.
Figure 3.2 illustrates a typical ground system within a panel. The
illustration depicts the physical terminations of the ground wires in the
panel. Ground Conductor AWG size to ground grid system shall be as
stated in Specification 16170, Grounding and Bonding.
Figure 3.2 Typical Grounding Systems
F. Circuit Protection:
1.
Provide an isolating supplementary protector for each group of control logic.
For example: the start, stop and reset control circuit for Pump #1 has a
dedicated supplementary protector supplying power to the control logic. Pump
#2 requires a separate isolating supplementary protector for the control logic.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16161-22
GMP 1
2.
Provide an isolating supplementary protector for each component requiring
120 VAC power.
3.
A supplementary protector is not required for control circuits powered from a
fused control power transformer in an MCP.
4.
Size supplementary protector to handle the connected load.
5.
Mount supplementary protector next to the PTBs near the top left corner of the
panel.
6.
Provide an auxiliary contact for each supplementary protector. Wire each
auxiliary contact from the supplementary protector in series to one “Power fail’
relay. Send one Power Fail status to the Process Control Information System.
G. Internal Panel Wiring:
1.
Route all internal wiring using wireways. Terminate all internal wires on one
side of the terminal blocks. The opposite side of the terminal block shall
remain available for field wires.
2.
Where wires pass through panel walls, provide suitable bushings to prevent
cutting or abrading of insulation.
3.
Adequately support and restrain all wiring runs to prevent sagging or other
movement. Wires extended from the control logic to the panel door devices
are to be wrapped in plastic protective wire wrap designed for this purpose.
4.
Wire splicing is not allowed at any time.
5.
Utilize two wires (hot and return leg) with field wiring for each field input. It
is not acceptable to utilize one common Hot for multiple field inputs.
6.
Terminate wires with a non-insulated ferrule type crimp connector. Excessive
stripping of the insulation to allow bare wire strands between the insulation
and the ferrule is not permitted.
7.
Orientate wire labels on the individual conductor or cable so that wire labels
are legible without having to twist or move the connectors. Securely heat
shrink the labels around the conductor. Label wires or cables with the number
assigned in the panel documentation. Refer to Section 2.2.K.1.e for wire label
materials.
8.
DC wiring for analog and discrete field or Process Control Information System
signals that enter or leave the panel are to be terminated on the Analog
Terminal Block (ATB).
9.
AC wiring for discrete field signals that enter or leave the panel are to be
terminated on the Terminal Block 1 (TB1).
10. AC wiring for discrete Process Control Information System signals that enter
or leave the panel are to be terminated on Terminal Block 2 (TB2).
11. The terminal blocks (TB1, TB2 or ATB) can be mounted on the left or right
side panels.
12. Provide a minimum of 10% spare terminal DIN rail space per terminal strip.
13. Signals from the field that enter the panel and only pass through the panel from
the field to the Process Control Information System require internal wiring
from TB1 to TB2.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16161-23
GMP 1
14. Arrange all control wiring associated with a particular piece of process
equipment together on adjacent terminal blocks.
15. Identify wire number by the schematic rung numbers. Label TB1 and TB2
terminals with the rung number associated with the internal wire number
connected to the terminal. Label ATB terminals in sequential order starting
with the number 1. Identify analog shield terminations with an “SH” on the
terminal block.
16. Multi-conductor cables of two pair or more shall have the outer cable
insulation removed before entering the wireway.
17. Route all DC power and analog signals at a minimum of six inches from AC
power and controls. When the six inch minimum distance is not available,
provide a metallic barrier that extends 3” beyond the tallest wireway between
the analog and discrete wireways.
H. Wireways:
1.
Mount wireways from the internal panel components and terminal blocks with
a minimum 2” spacing.
2.
Arrange wireways to maintain a six inch minimum distance between analog
and discrete circuit wiring.
3.
Provide wireways for all field wiring. Arrange wireways to allow field wiring
to enter from the top or bottom of the panel.
4.
Align wireways between back and side panels.
5.
Install a wireway on both sides of each terminal strip.
6.
Size wireways to prevent conductor fill from exceeding 50% of the interior
cross-sectional area of the wireway.
7.
In addition to the above requirements, for ITP’s, wireways are not to be
common for two terminal strips. Each terminal strip shall have a dedicated
wireway on each side of the strip.
I.
Control Logic:
1.
The Start commands are to be designed utilizing normally open contacts from
pushbuttons and/or the Process Control Information System and shall be of a
momentary signal that will require a seal circuit to maintain operation.
Constant signals from positions switches are not allowed unless noted on the
CONTRACT DRAWINGS.
2.
All system failure, safety logic control devices or normal operations that are
intended to cause the equipment to stop are to be wired in series with the start
seal circuit. The unsealing of the start command on any fault or normal
operation that causes the equipment to stop will require another start command
to reseal.
3.
Provide interlocks for the control functions of Local and Computer Modes in
series with the Start and Stop logic. Provide a closed switch or relay contact
to the Process Control Information System to identify when the equipment is
in Computer Mode.
4.
Provide control logic of voltage 120 VAC.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16161-24
GMP 1
5.
Use power relays when control relay contacts are insufficient for the
designated load.
6.
Terminate the “Hot” conductor on the common of the switch or relay contact.
7.
Control alarm logic shall be wired in a fail safe mode from the field device to
the panel circuitry to alarm when a field wire has failed.
3.3 3.3 PANEL DRAWING DOCUMENTATION
A. General:
1.
Files of the title block, panel symbols for front and internal sub-panel
elevations, terminal strips, control schematics, analog loops, etc. are available
in hard copy and AutoCAD .dwg format from the OWNER upon request
through the ENGINEER via Example Panel Drawing Packages and Drawing
Templates.
2.
Provide drawing copies in the following format:
a.
Hard Copy - B Size - 11” X 17”.
b.
Hard Copy - D Size - 22” X 34”.
c.
Soft Copy in .DWG.
3.
The panel drawing documentation package consists of the following drawings
types arranged in the following order. a. Cover Sheet.
a.
Symbols and Legends 1 – Exterior and Interior Panel Symbols.
b.
Symbols and Legends 2 – Schematic Symbols.
c.
Front Panel Elevation.
d.
Interior/Sub Panel Layout.
e.
Terminal Strip Drawings.
f.
Control Schematics.
g.
Analog Loop Diagrams.
h.
Point to Point Discrete Wiring Diagrams.
4.
Drawing Scale:
a.
Provide Front Elevation and Interior/Sub Panel Layout Drawings
proportionately correct and to scale. Create all drawings on a D Size
layout.
5.
Border and Title Block:
a.
Provide each drawing with a border and title block information.
b.
Utilize the border and title block as provided in the Drawing Templates
referenced in Section 3.03.A.1.
B. Panel Drawing Types:
1.
General:
a.
Provide a complete documentation package for each panel consisting of
the drawings in the order listed in Section 3.03.A.3.
2.
Cover:
a.
Cover sheet for the panel documentation shall include the following
information.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16161-25
GMP 1
1) Located on the left half of the sheet to include the manufacturers
name, address, phone number, web address, project reference
number and ul508a certification number.
2) On the right half of the sheet include the following, “customer name”
“department” and the project title, project number, the panel full title,
the panel abbreviation, the facility area in which the panel exists,
submittal date, volume number and sheet count.
3.
Symbols & Legends:
a.
Utilize the Symbols and Legend sheets as provided by the OWNER upon
request from the ENGINEER.
b.
Additional symbols may be added if an existing symbol on the Symbol
and Legend sheets does not exist.
4.
Front Elevation Drawing:
a.
The Front Elevation drawing illustrates the arrangement of the panel and
position of the devices on the front face of the panel.
b.
Provide panel dimensions in inches. Provide dimensions for height,
width, and depth. If the panel is small in size, the Front Elevation Drawing
and Internal layout Drawing can be combined on one drawing.
c.
Provide the nameplate schedule on the Front Elevation drawing.
d.
Device Callouts:
1) Device callout hexagons are utilized to reference a device to the bill
of materials. Place the bill of material item number inside the
hexagon.
2) Provide a leader from the hexagon that will point to the device.
3) For a typical of multiple devices of the same type, only one device
callout is necessary.
e.
Provide air conditioning heating and cooling information as provided by
the Hoffman
Temperature Calculation
tool
at:
http://www.hoffmanonline.com/product_catalog/tools/index.aspx?cat_1
=3 4&cat_2=375&SelectCatID=375&CatId=375.
5.
Interior Sub Panel Layout:
a.
General:
1) The Interior Sub Panel Layout drawing identifies the individual
interior components and their physical location.
2) Draw all components within the panel to scale.
3) Include all interior sub panels if the panel has sub panels on the side
walls.
b.
Provide the following information on the Interior Sub Panel Layout
Drawing. Utilize the formats provided on the Drawing Templates. The
information can be shown on a second sheet if needed to drawing clutter.
1) Bill of Materials:
a)
Include the devices on the Front Panel Elevation and the Interior
Sub Panel(s) Elevation.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16161-26
GMP 1
b) Include items that are not specifically shown on the Front Panel
Elevation or the Interior Sub Panel Layout drawing, such as wire
size, color and type, on the bill of materials.
c)
The utilization or insertion of Microsoft Excel files for the Bill
of Materials is not allowed.
2) Fuse Schedule.
3) Supplementary Protector Schedule.
c.
Label and identify all devices, including terminal strips, relays, fuses,
timers, power supplies and other special components on the drawing.
d.
For unique devices not shown on the Symbols and Legend Sheets, use
rectangles and squares with the appropriate dimensions of the device.
e.
Device Callouts:
1) Device callout hexagons are utilized to reference a device to the bill
of materials. Place the bill of material item number inside the
hexagon.
2) Provide a leader from the hexagon that will point to the device.
3) For a typical of multiple devices of the same type, only one device
callout is necessary.
6.
Terminal Strip Drawing:
a.
General:
1) Terminal Strip Drawings provides locations for wiring terminations
from field devices and other equipment external to the panel.
2) Display the wiring connections exactly as they are physically
installed. For example, if field wiring is terminated to the left side of
the terminal strip, the terminal strip drawing displays the wiring
connections to the left side of the terminal block.
3) There are 5 different types of terminal strips and each has a specific
function. The following is a brief description of each: a) For LCP’s
and MCP’s:
a)
Power Terminal Block (PTB) – Power supply/supplies to the
panel (120 VAC or higher). Identify terminal block number
with the wire number assigned in the control logic drawings.
Identify power sources with the originating panel, voltage and
circuit number.
b) Field Wiring Discrete Signal Terminal Blocks (TB1) – Discrete
field inputs and outputs to/from the panel. Identify terminal
block number with the rung number assigned in the control logic
drawings.
c)
Field Wiring Discrete Signal Terminal Blocks (TB2) – Discrete
inputs and outputs to/from the Process Control Information
System. Identify terminal block number with the rung number
assigned in the control logic drawings.
d) Field Wiring Analog (ATB) or Internal Wiring DC Power
e)
Terminal Blocks - Field or Process Control Information System
Analog inputs and outputs to/from the panel, including 4-20 mA,
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16161-27
GMP 1
1-5 VDC, thermocouple or Resistance Temperature Detectors
(RTD’s). Identify terminal block number with consecutive
numbers starting with number 1.
f)
The shield wire terminal block is to be label “SH”.
g) For ITP’s:
i.
TB-A thru Z – Discrete field inputs and outputs to/from the
panel.
ii.
ATB-A thru Z – Analog inputs and outputs to/from the
panel.
4) It is acceptable, if space available, to combine TB1, TB2, ATB and
PTB on a single terminal strip drawing.
5) Identify spare terminals with an “SP” inside the rectangle.
6) Display terminals in the order they appear in the panel.
7) Place field wire labels on each line extending toward the terminal.
Obtain this information from the cable and conduit schedules. If wire
labels are unavailable, place seven “X’s” where wire tag normally
resides. Provide this information prior to final deliverable of the
Operations & Maintenance Manuals.
8) Signal description consists of 3 lines of text. Center the text next to
the terminals.
a)
The 1st line of text lists the Equipment Name.
b) The 2nd line of text is for the Signal Function.
c)
The 3rd line of text is the Signal Loop Number, if applicable.
7.
Control Schematic:
a.
General:
1) Control Schematics show the controls associated with pieces of
process equipment and provide a visual depiction of the majority of
control wiring.
b.
Control Schematic Components:
1) Power Rail:
a)
Represent the power rail with two parallel vertical lines that
extend vertically down the schematic.
b) Each drawing includes two sets of power rails separated by 2.5”.
c)
Identify each power rail with the wire number such as L1 at the
top and bottom of each power rail.
d) The left power rail represents the “Hot” side of the power source.
The right power rail represents the “Neutral” side of the power
source.
2) Power Source:
a)
Identify power source(s) with the originating panel, voltage and
circuit number between the “Hot” terminal and “Neutral”
terminal on the first rung of the portion of the schematic for each
source.
b) Indicate the terminals from the PTB providing the source and
neutral powering the rail.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16161-28
GMP 1
c)
A supplementary protector or fuse is displayed in the power rail
directly below the power source (Hot) terminal. Label the
supplementary protector or fuse with the supplementary
protector or fuse number and current rating.
d) Power layout for LCP’s:
i.
In the first portion of the schematic, display power to the
general purpose receptacle and panel light.
ii.
In the second portion of the schematic, display power to the
air conditioner and/or heater.
iii. In the third portion of the schematic, display the power to the
control logic.
iv. See Sections 3.2.B Panel Incoming Power and 3.2.C AC
Power Distribution.
e)
Power layout for MCP’s:
i.
The first portion is for the typical 480 VAC motor control
circuit with starter and disconnect, the next sections are the
same as for the LCP’s.
f)
Rung Number:
3) Rung Number:
a)
Rung numbers are used to identify the location and cross
referencing of devices within the schematic and provide a
practical means of labeling conductors and terminals within the
panel.
b) Rung numbers are a sequential series of numbers starting with
number 1. Locate the numbers vertically along the left side of
the “Hot” power rail.
c)
Rungs are to be spaced on 0.5” centers based on a D Sized
drawing.
4) Wire Numbering:
a)
On the downstream side of the first device on a rung, the wire
number takes the rung number appearing to the left of the power
rail. If a second device is located in the circuit, the wire number
to the right of the second device takes the rung number, but is
appended with an “A”. The wire number to the right of the third
device is appended with a “B”, and so on.
b) When the electrical connection originated on the previous rung,
the wire numbers continue to use the previous rung number as
the base.
c)
Connections to the power neutral rail take on the power neutral
rail’s wire number N#.
5) Electrical Connections:
a)
Represent electrical connections as a solid small circle where
two or more wires interconnect.
b) Represent electrical connections as a hollow small circle where
wires terminate to a device.
6) Electrical Wiring:
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16161-29
GMP 1
a)
Electrical wires or circuits are represented by horizontal rungs
that connect terminal blocks, relays, contacts and all other
components used in the electrical schematic.
b) Space the schematic electrical wiring every other rung at a
minimum.
c)
Identify each wire with the rung number as the wire number.
d) Label each wire with the conductor insulation color below each
electrical wire. Refer to Table 2.2.K.1.f.
e)
Indicate electrical wiring that is external to the panel with dashed
lines.
7) Device Labeling:
a)
symbols in the schematic for field devices, pilot lights, switches,
push buttons etc. requires two lines of text above the device and
one line of text below the device to describe the usage of the
device.
i.
The first line of text above the device is the name of the
equipment the device is associated with.
ii.
The second line of text above the device is the control
function of the device.
iii. The line of text under the device is the loop number.
b) Relay and timer symbol labels are to be identified with
consecutive number starting with the number 1 or the rung
number. For relay coils and contacts, identify the relay base
terminal connection. Normally open or normally closed
contacts refer to the de-energized or “off the shelf” state.
c)
Symbols in the schematic for contacts of relays, timers, etc.
require two lines of text above the contact and two lines of text
below the contact to describe the usage and coil reference of the
contact.
i.
The first line of text above the contact is the name of the
equipment the device is associated with.
ii.
The second line of text above the device is the control
function of the device.
iii. The first line of text under the device is the relay or timer
number to reference the relay or timer in the schematic.
iv. The second line of text under the device is the rung number
of the relay or timer to reference where the relay or timer is
located in the schematic. If using the rung number for the
relay or timer coil, the rung number under the contact is not
required.
v.
For relays and timer contact references, at the right of the
neutral power rail, the schematic rung number location of all
associated contacts is shown. If the contact is normally
closed, underline the reference number. If a contact is
unused, “SP” is shown.
8) Field Contacts:
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16161-30
GMP 1
a)
Show Field Contacts connected to their respective TB1 or TB2
Terminals.
b) The connection lines from the contact to the terminal are dashed
to designate they originate from outside the panel.
9) Selector Switches:
a)
Always show the switch in the far-left position, the switch
contacts are shown as either opened or closed in this state. If
they’re in the closed state, the contact is shown closed, indicated
by a line shown below and touching the two side small circles.
If the contact is open in this position, a line is drawn above the
two side small circles, but not touching them.
b) Show each position of the switch directly above its respective
location on the switch. This indicates whether it is a two, three,
four, or more position (pole) switch, and shows what the
nameplate on each position will read.
c)
To indicate which positions the contact is closed, show a contact
legend in parenthesis below and to the right of the contact. If
the contact is closed in a position, an “X” is shown in the order
of the contact position in which it is closed. If the contact is
open in a position, an “O” is shown.
d) When a selector switch is continued onto another sheet or further
down on the same sheet, the continuation note is shown below
the selector switch. Where the switch is continued, the same
note appears, but on the top of the contact.
10) Push Buttons:
a)
Represent the push button contact in its “off the shelf” state.
11) Terminals:
a)
Terminal numbers are dependent upon the specific rung number
that they appear in the schematic logic. As a horizontal electrical
connection is followed from left to right, the first terminal
number takes on the number of the rung. The second terminal
number also takes the rung number but is appended by the letter
A, the third by the letter B, and so on.
12) Programmable Logic Controller:
a)
Panels that contain a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)
require connection information for the PLC I/O modules.
i.
Utilize the PLC drawings as provided in the Drawing
Templates referenced in Section 3.03.A.1.
b) Module Layout:
i.
Represent the module with a 1 1/2” wide vertical rectangle
with a length suitable to encompass a maximum of 16
channels or 8 analog per section based on type of module.
ii.
Two cards can be shown per sheet.
iii. Display field wiring (inputs) including TB1 and field device
connections with a description on the left side of the module
symbol.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16161-31
GMP 1
iv. Label the module with model number, input voltage, rack
number and slot number above the module symbol. iv.
Number each screw terminal per manufacturer’s data.
v.
Display the associated PLC register address with each signal.
vi. Identify the positive and negative legs of the analog cable.
vii. Include all required jumpers for signal type and all 120VAC
and 24VDC power requirements.
13) 480 Volt Equipment:
a)
a) Provide the motor horsepower, full load amps and motor
identification.
14) Contact Development:
a)
The last sheet of the control schematic displays contacts for
internal panel relay contacts that connect with external field
equipment or the Process Control Information System (PCIS).
b) Organizes into two sections. The first section lists all contacts
extending to the PCIS. Title this section “Contacts to PCIS”.
The second section lists all contacts extending into the field
equipment external to the panel. Title this section “Contacts to
Field”. Group multiple contacts related to a single piece of
equipment together.
c)
Each contact includes a signal description and its associated
relay number and relay rung number location. Device signals
require the appropriate symbol from the Schematic Legend
Sheet.
8.
Analog Loop Diagrams:
a.
General:
1) The analog loop diagram only displays the portion of the instrument
loop that passes through a particular panel.
2) The analog loop diagram displays the connections between field
instruments, panels and the PCIS.
3) Analog loop diagrams are reserved for analog signals and control
loops, but may be used to show complex connections for a particular
instrument or device.
4) Divide each loop into three different segments.
a)
The left segment is “FIELD” connections. This segment
provides information on terminations external to the panel (i.e.,
connected panels, instrument transmitters). If the first segment
is another panel, the panel name replaces the “FIELD” label.
b) The center segment is the internal panel wiring and controls.
c)
The right segment information represents output or input signals
to downstream panels or the PCIS.
5) Identify shield grounding location.
6) Identify surge protection devices for each signal. Include surge
protection for positive and negative leads. Utilize the surge
protection block symbol from the legends and symbols sheet.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16161-32
GMP 1
7) Identify the cable number, wire color and polarity for each cable in
the loop.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment in conformance with NEC. Mounting panels on handrails is not
allowed.
B. Unless otherwise noted, install indoor free standing panels on 4-inch concrete pad.
Extend pad 4-inches beyond outside dimensions of base, all sides. Lay grout after
panel sills have been securely fastened down.
C. Unless otherwise noted, install outdoor free standing panels on a reinforced
concrete pedestal:
1.
Minimum Thickness: 8-inches with No. 4 steel reinforcing bars at 12-inches
on centers, each way.
2.
Minimum Size: 4-inches larger than outer dimensions of base, all sides.
3.
Provide excavation and backfill work in conformance with Section 02260,
Excavation Support and Protection.
4.
Provide concrete work in conformance with Section 03300, Cast-In-Place
Concrete.
5.
Seal the contact surface between the panel base along the outside perimeter of
the panel using RTV sealant.
6.
Install anchor bolts and anchor in accordance with Section 05190,
Mechanically Anchoring and Fastening to Concrete and Masonry.
D. Elevated Panels with floor stands:
1.
1. When installing conduits through bottom, utilize bushings to retain the
NEMA rating of the panel.
E. Install each item in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
3.5 RECORD DRAWINGS:
A. Maintain a set of red-line panel drawings to reflect changes or deviations that occur
during installation, start-up and commissioning and incorporates these deviations
into the final Operation & Maintenance Manual.
3.6 SPARE PARTS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Furnish and deliver the spare parts and test equipment as outlined below, identical
and interchangeable with similar parts furnished under this Specification.
B. Pack spare parts in containers suitable for long term storage, bearing labels clearly
designating the contents and the pieces of equipment for which they are intended.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16161-33
GMP 1
C. The following constitutes the minimum spare parts:
1.
Five of each type of control relay for each 40 or less furnished for this Contract.
2.
One replacement power supply for each type and size furnished for this
Contract.
3.
One per ten (two, if fewer than twenty) of each type of panel mounted
instrument including lights and pushbuttons.
4.
One dozen of each type and size of fuse used in panels and instruments.
D. The following constitutes the minimum test and calibration equipment:
1.
All tooling required to insert, extract and connect any internal or external
connector, including edge connectors.
2.
All special calibration equipment required for system calibration.
3.7 TESTING AND ADJUSTMENTS:
A. Perform system testing and make any adjustments necessary in accordance with
this Section and Section 17000, Instrumentation.
B. Perform power supply, voltage adjustments to tolerances required by the
appurtenant equipment.
C. A Factory Acceptance Test shall be conducted before the panel is shipped to the
site.
1.
The Factory Acceptance test shall be witnessed by the ENGINEER and
OWNER.
2.
The Factory Acceptance Test Report shall be utilized to document the test.
3.
All Control Panels require the Factory Acceptance Test to be witnessed by
ENGINEER and OWNER:
4.
Provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown on the
Drawings, specified and required to perform factory testing, before shipment,
at the manufacturer's facility to verify that system components are functioning
properly and that they meet the functional and performance requirements of
the Contract Documents.
5.
Submit information on factory testing procedures to verify that testing shall
fulfill the requirements as specified herein. Submittal shall be made at least
two months in advance of any scheduled testing and shall include dates of
scheduled tests.
6.
Notify ENGINEER, in writing, at least four weeks before expected initiation
of tests. OWNER and ENGINEER may elect to be present at
CONTRACTOR’S facilities during operational test of system equipment,
either for individual units
7.
or as an integrated system. Presence of OWNER and ENGINEER during
testing does not relieve CONTRACTOR from conforming to the requirements
of the Contract Documents and shall in no way imply acceptance of the
equipment.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16161-34
GMP 1
D. System Hardware Operational Testing:
1.
All input/output devices and components shall be tested to verify operability
and basic calibration.
2.
All system hardware components equipment shall be tested to verify proper
operation of the equipment as stand alone units. Test shall include, but not be
limited to, the following:
a.
AC/DC power checks.
b.
Power fail/restart tests.
c.
Diagnostics checks.
d.
Test demonstrating that all specified equipment functional capabilities are
working properly.
e.
All system components shall be tested to verify that communication
between units is working properly.
3.8 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICE
A. Provide the services of qualified factory-trained service representative to check and
approve the installation of the panel(s).
B. The factory trained service representative shall be provided for installation
supervision, start-up and testing services. The representative shall make a minimum
of 2 visits to the site to approve the completed installation and to perform start-up
testing of the equipment. The representative shall coordinate each visit with the
ENGINEER prior to arrival on the site. The representative shall test operate the
system in the presence of the ENGINEER and verify that the equipment conforms
to requirements. The representative shall revisit the job site as often as necessary
until the installation and testing is entirely satisfactory.
C. The factory trained service representative shall be provided for operation and
maintenance personnel training services. The representative shall make a minimum
of 1 visits to the site to perform the services as described under Section 01782,
Operations and Maintenance Data. The representative shall coordinate each visit
with the ENGINEER prior to arrival on the site.
D. For the factory trained service representative, all costs, including travel, lodging,
meals and incidentals, shall be considered as included in the bid price.
E. Warranty: Standard Manufacturers and General Contractor Warranties.
END OF SECTION
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16170-1
GMP 1
SECTION 16170
GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, Specification
Sections apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding
requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by special
requirements of systems described in other Sections.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Product Data: For the following:
1.
Ground rods.
2.
Grounding conductors and cables.
3.
Connector products.
Submit Shop Drawings identifying each ground rod location, distance
between Ground Rods and ground rod assemblies and other grounding
electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, add a key legend
including GPS coordinates.
C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in Paragaph 1.4 of this
Specification.
D. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports to include the following:
1.
Test procedures used.
2.
Test results that comply with requirements.
3.
Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that
comply with requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined
in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16170-2
GMP 1
1.
Comply with UL 467.
B. Comply with NFPA 70; for overhead-line construction and medium-voltage
underground construction, comply with IEEE C2.
C. Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning
protection system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1.
Grounding Conductors, Cables, Connectors, and Rods:
2.
Apache Grounding/Erico, Inc.
3.
Chance/Hubbell.
4.
Copperweld Corp.
5.
Dossert Corp.
6.
Erico, Inc.; Electrical Products Group.
7.
Framatome Connectors/Burndy Electrical.
8.
Galvan Industries, Inc.
9.
Kearney/Cooper Power Systems.
10. Korns: C. C. Korns Co.; Division of Robroy Industries.
11. O-Z/Gedney Co.; a business of the EGS Electrical Group.
12. Raco, Inc.; Division of Hubbell.
13. Superior Grounding Systems, Inc.
14. Thomas & Betts, Electrical.
2.2 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. For insulated conductors, comply with Sections 16123 and 16124, Conductors and
Cables.
B. Material: Copper.
C. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation.
D. Isolated Ground Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation with yellow
stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, use colored tape, alternating bands of
green and yellow tape to provide a minimum of three bands of green and two
bands of yellow.
E. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16170-3
GMP 1
F. Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned copper, stranded, unless otherwise
indicated.
G. Bare Copper Conductors: Comply with the following:
1.
Solid Conductors: ASTM B3.
2.
Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B8.
3.
Tinned Conductors: ASTM B33.
H. Copper Bonding Conductors: As follows:
1.
Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG copper conductor, 1/4-
inch in diameter.
2.
Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor.
3.
Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors,
terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8-inches wide and 1/16-inch thick.
4.
Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided copper conductors,
terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8-inches wide and 1/16-inch thick.
I.
Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed copper bars of rectangular cross-section, with
insulators.
2.3 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS
A. Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and
combinations of conductors and connected items.
B. Bolted Connectors: Bolted pressure-type connectors.
C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic welded type, in kit form, and selected per
manufacturer's written instructions.
2.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel.
1.
Size: 3/4-inch in diameter by 120-inches long.
B. Ground Rods: Sectional type; copper-clad steel.
1.
Size: 3/4-inch in diameter by 120-inches long.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in
direct contact with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials.
B. In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16170-4
GMP 1
C. Exothermic Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for
underground connections, except those at test wells.
D. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted pressure clamps.
E. Ground Rod Clamps at Test Wells: Use bolted pressure clamps with at least two
bolts.
F. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms
housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
1.
Use insulated spacer, space 1-inch from wall and support from wall 6-inches
above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
At doors, route the bus up to the top of the door frame, across the top of the
doorway, and down to the specified height above the floor.
G. Underground Grounding Conductors: Use copper conductor, No. 4/0 AWG
minimum. Bury at least 24-inches below grade or bury 12-inches above duct bank
when installed as part of the duct bank.
3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment
grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than
required by NFPA 70 are indicated.
B. Install equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and circuits.
1.
Install insulated equipment grounding conductor with circuit conductors for
the following items, in addition to those required by NEC:
2.
Feeders and branch circuits.
3.
Lighting and Receptacle circuits.
4.
Control Circuits.
5.
Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
6.
3-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
7.
Flexible raceway runs.
8.
Armored and metal-clad cable runs.
C. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from
the grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to
equipment grounding bar terminal on busway.
D. Computer Outlet Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in
branch-circuit runs from computer-area power panels or power distribution units.
E. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding
conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate grounding
conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16170-5
GMP 1
equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or
service, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a
branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply raceway with a
non-metallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway
enters enclosure, and install a separate equipment grounding conductor. Isolate
equipment grounding conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding
terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the
applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Non-metallic Raceways: Install an equipment grounding conductor in non-
metallic raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables.
H. Signal and Communication Systems: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and
other communication systems, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding
conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location,
terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location.
1.
Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate
grounding conductor on a 1/4-inch by 2-inch by 12-inch grounding bus.
2.
Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding
terminal.
I.
Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Provide a grounding
electrode in addition to installing a separate equipment grounding conductor with
supply branch circuit conductors.
3.3 COUNTERPOISE
A. Ground the steel framework of the building with a driven ground rod at the base
of every corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more
than 60 feet apart. Provide a grounding conductor (counterpoise), electrically
connected to each ground rod and to each steel column, extending around the
perimeter of the building. Use tinned-copper conductor not less than
No. 4/0 AWG for counterpoise and for tap to building steel. Bury counterpoise
not less than 18-inches below grade and 24-inches from building foundation.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Ground Rods: Install at least three rods spaced at least one rod length from each
other, and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes.
1.
Drive ground rods until tops are 2-inches below finished floor or final grade,
unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductors. Use
exothermic welds, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. Make
connections without exposing steel or damaging copper coating.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16170-6
GMP 1
B. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible,
unless otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where
they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on
vibration isolation hangers and supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted
equipment. Use exothermic welded connectors for outdoor locations, unless a
disconnect-type connection is required; then, use a bolted clamp. Bond straps
directly to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.
Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance.
D. Metal Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper grounding conductors, in
conduit, from building's main service equipment or grounding bus, to main metal
water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal
water service pipes by grounding clamp connectors. Where a dielectric main
water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor to street side of fitting.
Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.
E. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass
water meters. Connect to pipe with grounding clamp connectors.
F. Bond interior metal piping systems and metal air ducts to equipment grounding
conductors of associated pumps, fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners.
Use braided-type bonding straps.
G. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system upstream from equipment
shut-off valve.
H. Install test wells as indicated on the Contract Documents.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is
minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection
methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.
1.
Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and
to make contact points closer to order of galvanic series.
2.
Make connections with clean bare metal at points of contact.
3.
Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to
prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
B. Exothermic Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating
improper cleaning are not acceptable.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16170-7
GMP 1
C. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use
pressure-type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors
may be terminated with winged pressure-type connectors.
D. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal
housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each
conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare
grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically
non-continuous conduits at entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare
grounding conductors, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Connections at Test Wells: Use compression-type connectors on conductors and
make bolted- and clamped-type connections between conductors and ground rods.
F. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals
according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's
torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.
G. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide
correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies
recommended by connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other
standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately
compressed on grounding conductor.
H. Moisture Protection: If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground
rods or grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against
moisture penetration of insulation and cable.
3.6 UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM GROUNDING
A. Duct Banks: Install a grounding conductor with at least 50% ampacity of the
largest phase conductor in the ductbank.
B. Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod close to wall and set rod
depth to 4-inches above handhole or manhole floor. If necessary, install ground
rod before manhole is placed and provide a No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper
conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole
wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping
of pressure-sensitive tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2-inches above to
6-inches below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, non-shrink grout.
C. Connections to Manhole Components: Connect exposed-metal parts, such as
inserts, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole
or handhole, to ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with
No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded, hard-drawn copper conductor. Train conductors
level or plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16170-8
GMP 1
armor and cable shields as recommended by manufacturer of splicing and
termination kits.
D. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods and
counterpoise circling pad. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-
carrying metal items associated with substations by connecting them to
underground cable and grounding electrodes. Use tinned-copper conductor not
less than No. 4/0 AWG for counterpoise and for taps to equipment ground pad.
Bury counterpoise not less than 18-inches below grade and 6-inches from the
foundation.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Specification 16920, 3.01, Qualifications, for Independent Third Party Testing
organization requirements.
B. Testing: Perform the following field quality control testing:
1.
After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuitry
has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2.
Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground
resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding
terminal, and at ground test wells. Measure ground resistance not less than
two full days after the last trace of precipitation, and without the soil being
moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without
chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground
resistance. Perform tests by the fall-of-potential method according to
IEEE 81.
3.
Provide Drawings locating each ground rod and ground rod assembly and
other grounding electrodes, identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and
key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven
and their depth at each location and include observations of weather and
other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to
improve test results.
a.
Equipment Rated 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.
b.
Equipment Rated 500 to 1,000 kVA: 5 ohms.
c.
Equipment Rated More Than 1,000 kVA: 3 ohms.
d.
Substations and Pad-Mounted Switching Equipment: 5 ohms.
e.
Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms.
4.
Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified
values, notify Engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce
ground resistance.
END OF SECTION
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16225-1
GMP 1
SECTION 16225
ELECTRIC MOTORS 250 HORSEPOWER OR LESS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope:
1.
This Section includes alternating current induction motors, 250 horsepower or less,
to be provided with the driven equipment. Unless specified otherwise, electric
motors shall be provided by the manufacturer of the driven equipment under an
assumption of unit responsibility. This Section refers to motors by enclosure type as
defined in NEMA MG 1, except as noted.
B. Horsepower Rating:
1.
Motor horsepower ratings noted in individual equipment Specifications are estimates
only and it is the responsibility of CONTRACTOR to furnish motors, electric
circuits, and other equipment of ample horsepower capacity to operate the equipment
furnished without exceeding the manufacturer’s nameplate full-load current at rated
manufacturer’s nameplate voltage. Full-load current information shall be furnished
with the individual submittals.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Motors shall be built in accordance with UL 674, UL 1004, NEMA Standard
MG 1, and to the requirements specified.
B. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the
following, except as otherwise shown or specified. In case of conflict between the
requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this
Section shall prevail.
1.
AFBMA 9: Load Rating and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
2.
AFBMA 11: Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
3.
IEEE 112: Standard Test Procedures for Polyphase Induction Motors and
Generators.
4.
IEEE 841, Standard for Petroleum and Chemical Industry - Totally Enclosed Fan
Cooled (TEFC) Squirrel Cage Induction Motors - Up to and Including 500 HP.
5.
NEMA ICS 2: Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies.
6.
NEMA ICS 6: Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems.
7.
NEMA 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum).
8.
NEMA MG 1: Motors and Generators.
9.
NEMA MG1-31: Application Considerations for Constant Speed Motors Used on a
Sinusoidal Bus with Harmonic Content and General Purpose Motors Used with
Adjustable-Voltage or Adjustable- Frequency Controls or Both.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16225-2
GMP 1
10. UL.674: Electric Motors and Generators for Use in Class I Division I Hazardous
Locations
11. UL 1004: Electric Motors.
C. Factory Tests:
1.
The manufacturer's factory motor Prototype Tests per IEEE Standard 112 Appendix-
A on motors through 250 horsepower shall be submitted as Product Data for the
motor, and actual factory tests for motors are not required:
a.
Winding resistance in ohms and converted to 25 degree C.
b.
Resistive Unbalance and Quarter Voltage Impedance, as applicable.
c.
Locked-Rotor current (Single phase).
d.
High Potential.
e.
No-Load Excitation (volts, amperes, RPM).
f.
Bearing vibration check.
g.
Efficiency, Power Factor, Current at 115%, 100%, 75%, 50%, and no load.
D. Warranty:
1.
Motors ½ horsepower and greater shall be warranted against defects in materials and
workmanship for a period of 5 years under the specified uses and with normal
operation and service. This warranty shall be delivered, in writing, to the Owner and
shall include, as a minimum, 100 percent full payment coverage for parts and labor
during the first 60 months of operation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall include the following:
1.
A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all
referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each
paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate
requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks shall denote full
compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are
indicated, and therefore requested by the Contractor, each deviation shall be
underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified
paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting
the deviation. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify
compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. Failure to include a
copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any
requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be
sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.
2.
Manufacture completed IEEE Standard 841 Date Sheet for AC Squirrel Cage
Induction Motors with required factory data of motors supplied.
3.
Speed-Torque curve per 1.2 C Factory Tests.
4.
Factory Test Data: Including Guaranteed Minimum Efficiency for 115% load, 100%
load, 75% load, 50% load, and no load.
5.
Guaranteed vibration level when measured per MG 1, Figure 7-6:
a.
Displacement: 0.0025 inch peak-to-peak
b.
Velocity: 0.10 inches per second peak
c.
Acceleration: 1g (gravity) peak.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16225-3
GMP 1
6.
Motor heating curve for motors per 1.2 C Factory Tests.
7.
Motor outline, dimensions, and weight.
8.
Manufacturer's descriptive information relative to motor features.
9.
Response curve where a winding over-temperature device is required.
10. For all inverter duty motors: Manufacturer's certification that the motor is
compatible with the adjustable frequency drive to be used.
11. Disassembly and repair documentation.
1.4 POWER SUPPLY VARIATIONS
A. Motors shall operate successfully under running conditions at rated load with +/- 10-percent of
rated voltage with rated frequency or +/- 5-percent of rated frequency with rated voltage.
1.5 AMBIENT CONDITIONS
A. Unless specified otherwise, motors shall be suitable for continuous operation at an
elevation of approximately 1,200 feet above mean sea level. Motors to be installed
outdoors, exposed to the weather, shall be suitable for continuous operation in a 50° C
ambient temperature; motors to be installed indoors shall be suitable for continuous
operation in 50° C ambient temperature, unless otherwise noted.
1.6 NEMA WINDING TEMPERATURES
A. NEMA MG 1 Table 12-7 motors insulation system maximum winding temperatures in
degrees-Centigrade (C), with the degrees-Fahrenheit (F) insulation system class specified
herein.
1.
Forty degree-C ambient (104 degree-F) is the basis for temperature rise.
2.
For 50 degree C ambient (122F) and above, refer to the driven equipment
specifications for additional requirements.
Insulation System Class
Degrees C / F
Temperature Rise by Resistance
A
140 / 284
NA
B
165 / 329
B-rise: 40 + 80 = 120 Degrees C / 248 F
F
190 / 374
F-rise: 40 + 105 = 145 Degrees C / 293 F
H
215 / 419
H-rise: 40 + 125 = 165 Degrees C / 329 F
1.7 NEMA MOTOR TEMPERATURE PROTECTION TYPES
A. The NEMA design shall limit the temperatures of the windings without using a thermal
device:
1.
Type-1: Winding Running and Locked Rotor Over-temperature Protection.
2.
Type-2: Winding Running Over-temperature Protection.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16225-4
GMP 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER’S NAMEPLATES
A. Factory installed manufacturer’s nameplates shall be stainless steel with embossed or
pre-printed lettering and fastened to the motor frame with Type 316 stainless steel pins.
Manufacturer’s nameplates shall have stamped on them the motor manufacturer’s name,
design voltage; number of hertz and phase; horsepower rating; amperage and temperature
rise at rated load, full load speed, NEMA code letter, service factor, minimum guaranteed
efficiency, model number, AFBMA bearing number, serial number and maintenance
manual number in accordance with NEMA MGI-10.40.1.
B. A separate factory installed manufacturer’s nameplate shall provide lubrication
instructions and a separate manufacturer’s nameplate connection diagram for dual voltage
motors.
C. Additionally, factory to provide the following information on manufacturer’s nameplates
or additional manufacturer’s nameplates for:
1.
Motors 1/2 horsepower and larger: Indicate the ABMA L-10 rated life for the motor
bearings.
2.
Motors 2 to 50 horsepower: Indicate the NEMA nominal efficiency.
3.
Motors 50 horsepower and larger: Indicate NEMA guaranteed minimum efficiency.
4.
Explosion-Proof motors: Indicate UL frame temperature limit code.
5.
Space heater information.
6.
NEMA MG 1 Over Temperature Protection Type Number.
2.2 CONSTRUCTION
A. Unless specified otherwise, all motors provided under this Section shall have the
following features of construction and operation:
1.
Motor voltage, speed and enclosures are specified in the detailed equipment
Specifications. Motors furnished with equipment shall comply with this Section.
2.
All motors shall be of the motor manufacturer’s premium energy-efficient design,
different from manufacturer’s standard product through the use of premium
materials, design and improved manufacturing process that reduces motor losses
approximately 40 percent from standard efficient designs.
3.
Motor efficiency shall be determined in accordance with NEMA Standard
MG1-12.54.1 and guaranteed minimum full load efficiency labeled on
manufacturer’s motor nameplate in accordance with NEMA Standard MG1-12.54.2
or MG1-10.40.1 below.
4.
Minimum efficiencies shall not be less than those listed in Paragraph 2.4.E., below.
5.
All motors shall successfully operate under power supply variations in accordance
with NEMA MG1-14.30.
6.
All motors shall be NEMA Design B with torque and starting currents in accordance
with NEMA MG1-12.35 and 12.37, except in special applications requiring higher
starting torques where NEMA Design C is permitted.
7.
All motors shall have a 1.15 service factor. Polyphase integral horsepower motors
shall be sized so that, under maximum load conditions imposed by the driven
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16225-5
GMP 1
equipment, for the conditions specified, the manufacturer’s motor nameplate rated
horsepower and Class B temperature rise will not be exceeded. Motors with a
service factor of 1.15 shall be selected for operation within their full load rating
without applying the service factor.
8.
Each motor shall be of the speed and horsepower specified or required to properly
operate the driven equipment, torque characteristics as required by the drive load and
suitable for direct coupling or V-belt drive, as shown on the Drawings and specified
herein. Motors shall be designed for full voltage starting, unless otherwise specified.
9.
Frames shall be of corrosion-resistant cast iron with integrally cast feet or bases. End
bells, conduit box and cover and bases shall be cast iron, with precision machined
bearing fits, ASTM Type A-48, Class 25 or better. UL approved automatic stainless
steel breather drains shall be provided in the lowest part of front and back brackets to
allow drainage of condensation on TEFC and explosion proof motors.
10. Each stator core assembly shall consist of stacked lamination made from specially
selected electrical sheet silicon steel.
11. Insulation materials shall be non-hygroscopic and meet or exceed Class H definition,
utilizing materials and insulation systems evaluated in accordance with IEEE 117
classification tests. Motor temperature rating shall not exceed Class F temperature
limits as measured by resistance method when the motor is operated at full load at
1.0 service factor continuously in a maximum ambient temperature of 50° C.
Windings shall be copper.
12. Rotor cages for motors 50 HP or less shall be die cast aluminum or fabricated
copper. Shafts shall be made from carbon steel. Rotor cages for motors larger than
50 HP shall be copper only.
13. Rotors on frames 213T and above shall be keyed shrunk or welded to shaft and
rotating assembly dynamically balanced to NEMA limits in accordance with
MG1-12.06. Balance weights, if required, shall be secured to the rotor resistance
ring or fan blades by rivets. Machine screws and nuts are prohibited. The entire
rotating assembly between bearing inner caps shall be coated with a
corrosion-resistant epoxy.
14. Bearings shall be ball, open, single row, deep groove, Conrad type, and shall have a
Class 3 internal fit conforming to AFBMA Std. 20. For belted duty applications,
drive end bearing may be cylindrical roller type. Bearings shall be selected to
provide L-10 rating life of 100,000 hours minimum. Calculations shall be based on
external loads using NEMA applications limits in accordance with MG1-14.41 and
typical sheave weights and internal loads defined by the manufacturer, including
magnetic pull and rotating assembly weight.
15. Bearing temperature rise at rated load shall not exceed 60° C. Temperature rise shall
be measured by RTD or thermocouple at bearing outer race. Bearing AFBMA
identification number shall be stamped on manufacturer’s motor nameplate.
16. Motor lubrication system shall consist of a sealed bearing or a grease inlet on motor
bracket with capped grease fitting on inlet, grease relief plug 180 degrees from inlet,
grease reservoir in bracket and grease reservoir in cast inner cap. Motor shall be
greased by manufacturer with a premium moisture resistant polyuria thickened
grease containing rust inhibitors and suitable for operation over temperatures from
-25° C to 120° C.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16225-6
GMP 1
17. All bolt and cap screws shall be of high strength, SAE Grade 5 zinc-plated and
chromatic steel. Screwdriver slot fasteners are unacceptable.
18. All motor parts including frame, brackets, fan cover and terminal box shall receive a
minimum of two coats of high grade USDA accepted epoxy paint. Motor assembly
shall successfully withstand salt spray tests for corrosion in accordance with ASTM
B-117 for 96 hours.
19. All motors shall be painted the same color as the driven equipment.
20. Two-speed motors shall be two-winding motors. Two-speed, one-winding
consequential-pole motors that require special motor starters are prohibited.
2.3 MOTORS LESS THAN 1/2 HORSEPOWER
A. General:
1.
Unless otherwise specified, motors less than 1/2 horsepower shall be squirrel cage,
single phase, capacitor start, induction run type. Construction features listed in
Paragraph 2.2, above, shall be as normally supplied by the equipment manufacturer.
Single phase motors shall have Class B insulation, minimum. Small fan motors may
be split-phase or shaded pole type. Windings shall be copper.
B. Rating:
1.
Unless otherwise specified, motors shall be rated for operation at 115 volts, single
phase, 60 Hz, and shall be continuous-time rated in conformance with NEMA
Standard MG 1, Paragraph 10.35. Dual voltage (115/230) rated motors are
acceptable if all leads are brought out to the conduit box. Motors shall be non-
overloading at all points of the equipment operation.
C. Enclosures:
1.
Unless otherwise specified, motors shall have totally enclosed fan cooled or totally
enclosed non-ventilated enclosures.
2.4 MOTORS 1/2 HORSEPOWER THROUGH 250 HORSEPOWER
A. General:
1.
Unless otherwise specified, motors 1/2 horsepower through 250 horsepower shall be
three phase, squirrel cage, full voltage start induction type. Unless otherwise
specified, motors shall have a NEMA MG 1-1.16 design letter B or C torque
characteristic as required by the driven equipment’s starting torque requirements.
B. Rating:
1.
Unless otherwise specified, motors shall be rated for operation at 460 volts, 3 phase,
60 Hz, and shall be continuous time rated in accordance with NEMA Standard MG
1, Paragraph 10.35.
2.
Motors for variable frequency systems shall not be required to deliver more than 80
percent of the motor’s service factor rating by any load imposed by the driven
machine at any specified operating condition or any condition imposed by the driven
machine’s performance curve at maximum operating speed.
C. Enclosure and Insulation:
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16225-7
GMP 1
1.
General: Motors shall be classified as Type 1 (Process) and Type 2 (Explosion
proof). Enclosures and insulation systems shall be as specified in the following
paragraphs. Temperature rise for all motor types shall not exceed that permitted by
Note II, Paragraph 12.42, NEMA MG 1. The insulation shall be non-hygroscopic.
a.
Type 1 Motors (Process): Type 1 motors shall be premium energy efficient
motors, totally enclosed, fan cooled. All motors shall have Class H insulation
with Class B temperature rise. Motors shall conform to IEEE 841. All internal
surfaces shall be coated with an epoxy paint. Motors shall be rated for
corrosive atmosphere duty.
b.
Type 2 Motors (Explosion proof): Explosion proof motors shall be UL listed in
accordance with UL 674 for Class I, Group D hazardous atmospheres. The
motor shall have Class H insulation and shall conform to IEEE 841. Steel
frame motors will not be permitted. A UL-approved Type 316 stainless steel
breather/drain device shall be provided in the motor drain hole. The motor shall
be provided with a frame temperature thermostat which meets the UL frame
temperature limit code T2A (280°C). The thermostat shall contain an
automatically reset, normally closed contact rated two amperes at 115 volts AC.
D. Motors for Variable Frequency Drives:
1.
Motors intended for use with variable frequency drives shall be compatible with the
characteristics of the intended variable frequency inverters. Motors shall be Type 1
or Type 2 as specified in the detailed Specification. Insulation for all motors
operating with variable frequency drives shall be Class H with Class F temperature
rise. Variable frequency drive motors shall be premium energy-efficient motors.
Motors shall be capable of withstanding a pulse voltage of at least 1750 volts with a
rate of rise up to 750V/micro second. The motors shall be certified by the
manufacturer as suitable for inverter duty.
2.
All motors connected to variable frequency drives shall be equiped with shaft
grounding rings. Shaft grounding devices must be factory installed or installed by a
reputable motor shop with the expertise in the proper installation of the devices. If
the shaft grounding devices are not factory installed, a third party shall be engaged to
test the installation to ensure no damaging shaft currents are present.
E. Minimum Manufacturer’s Nameplate Efficiency: Motor minimum manufacturer’s
nameplate efficiency, determined in accordance with IEEE 112B testing procedures,
when operating on a sinusoidal power source shall conform to the following:
HORSEPOWER
RANGE
SPEED, RPM
1200
1800
3600
1-2
82.5
84.5
82.5
3-5
89.5
88.5
86.5
7-25
90.2
90.2
89.5
30-60
92.4
92.4
89.8
75-250
94.1
93.7
91.7
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16225-8
GMP 1
F. Vertical Motors:
1.
Unless otherwise specified, vertical motors shall be full voltage with a Type P base
specifically designed for vertical installation. Universal position motors are not
acceptable. Vertical motors shall have solid shafts, unless otherwise specified.
Vertical motors shall conform to either Type 1 or Type 2 motor requirements as
specified under Paragraph 2.4.C., above. Thrust bearing rating shall be compatible
with the loads imposed by the driven equipment.
G. Conduit Boxes:
1.
CAUTION: External conduit boxes on motors shall be sized to accommodate
oversized feeder conductors and as shown on the Drawings shall, in any case, not be
less than one size larger than NEMA standards. The conduit boxes shall be
diagonally split and rotatable in 90 degree steps. A gasket shall be furnished
between the conduit box and frame. Motor leads shall be stranded copper wire,
Class H or better insulated, non-wicking, with permanent identifications spaced
1-1/2-inches maximum. Clamp type grounding terminals shall be provided in the
conduit boxes.
H. Lifting Eyes:
1.
Motors weighing more than 50 pounds shall be fitted with at least one lifting eye.
I.
Current Imbalance:
1.
Current imbalance shall not exceed the values tabulated below when the motor is
operating at any load within its service factor rating and is supplied by a balanced
voltage system.
a.
Under five horsepower: Ten percent
b.
Five horsepower and above: Ten percent
2.
Imbalance criteria shall be based upon the lowest value measured.
2.5 MOTOR TYPES
A. The following Standard motor types shall conform to the following requirements:
1.
Horizontal Dripproof: Provide horizontal motors with an enclosure that meets
NEMA Standard MG 1 for open, dripproof construction. Provide screen over all air
openings.
2.
Horizontal Totally Enclosed Fan-Cooled: Provide totally enclosed fan-cooled
(TEFC) motors with frame sizes 182 and larger with cast iron frames and end
shields. Smaller frame sizes may be constructed of rolled steel with cast metal end
shields. Provide motors with condensate drain holes. For frame size 286 and larger,
provide automatic breather/drain device in drain hole.
3.
Vertical Weather Protected Type I: Provide vertical motors with an enclosure that
meets NEMA Standard MG 1 for weather protected Type I (WP-I) enclosure.
Provide screens over all air openings.
4.
Vertical Totally Enclosed Fan-Cooled: Provide vertical motor with an enclosure
identical to the requirements for the horizontal TEFC motors.
5.
Explosion proof: Provide all horizontal and vertical motors with TEFC explosion
proof enclosures, UL listed for Class 1, Division 1, Group D hazardous atmosphere.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16225-9
GMP 1
6.
Submersible: Submersible motors UL listed for explosion proof atmospheres in
accordance with subsequent sections of this specification. In addition, provide
submersible motors with two mechanical seals; the lower one outside the motor and
protecting the upper one, which is in an oil filled chamber. Provide moisture detector
probes in the oil filled seal chamber to indicate the presence of moisture in the seal
chamber. Provide a temperature detector and switch rated 3 amperes, 120 volts
minimum, set to operate when the internal motor temperature exceeds a preset limit.
Provide any relays or solid state controls for separate mounting.
7.
Horizontal, Totally Enclosed, Fan-Cooled, Severe Duty: Provide horizontal (TEFC),
severe duty motors suitable for contaminated environments, including gasketed
conduit box, stainless steel drains, double-shielded bearings, and corrosion resistant
paint. Provide motors manufactured by Reliance Electric SXT-XT-XE, Century
Type SCE E-Plus, or equal.
8.
Vertical, Totally Enclosed, Fan-Cooled, Severe Duty: Provide vertical (TEFC),
severe duty motors with the requirements identical to horizontal (TEFC), severe duty
motors, above.
2.6 PRODUCT DATA
A. The following information shall be provided for each motor in accordance with the
individual equipment specification.
1.
Motor outline, dimensions and weight.
2.
Manufacturer’s general descriptive information relative to motor features.
3.
Where a winding overtemperature device is required, provide a response curve for
the temperature device.
4.
Applicable operation and maintenance information specified in Section 01782,
Operation and Maintenance Data. Provided overhaul instructions for each motor
five HP and over.
2.7 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS
A. The following manufacturer's motors generally meet the class and performance
requirements of this specification when furnished with appropriate modifications and
additional features as specified:
1.
General Electric Inc.
2.
Emerson US Motors.
3.
Siemens.
PART 3 - EXECUTIONGROUNDING AND BONDING
A. Verify the circuit ground cable (green) is identified and connected to the grounding lug
terminal in the conduit box.
B. Provide supplementary grounding by installing a bond from the motor frame to the
grounding electrode system as indicated on the drawings.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16225-10
GMP 1
4.2 FIELD TESTING
A. Verify breather/drain fittings have been installed as specified herein.
B. Provide winding insulation resistance testing for motors to be witnessed by owner or
engineer before connection is complete. Winding insulation resistance shall be not less
than 10-megohm measured with a 1000-VAC megohmmeter at 1-minute at or corrected
to 40-degree C.
C. Provide motor phases current imbalance testing to be witnessed by owner or engineer.
D. Test motors in accordance with Specification 16920, Electrical Acceptance Testing.
END OF SECTION
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16474-1
GMP 1
SECTION 16474
MOTOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes separately mounted combination motor starters (including those
supplied with equipment), manual motor starters, separately mounted circuit
breakers, and control equipment.
B. Related Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1.
Division 0 ,Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract.
2.
Division 1, General Requirements.
3.
Section 16000,Electrical: Basic Requirements.
4.
Section 16170, Grounding.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards:
1.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
a.
C62.41, Guide for Surge Voltages in Low Voltage AC Power Circuits.
2.
Canadian Standards Association (CSA).
3.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).
4.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a.
ICS 2, Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies.
b.
250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volt Maximum).
5.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a.
70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
6.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
a.
845, Electric Motor Control Centers.
B. Miscellaneous:
1.
Verify motor horsepower loads, other equipment loads, and controls from
approved shop drawings and notify ENGINEER of any discrepancies.
2.
Verify the required instrumentation and control wiring for a complete system
and notify ENGINEER of any discrepancies.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1.
See Section 01300, Submittals, and Section16000, General Electrical
Requirements.
2.
Typical wiring diagrams for all control equipment.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16474-2
GMP 1
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1.
See Section 01300, Submittals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers
are acceptable:
1.
Combination Motor Starters:
a.
General Electric.
b.
Square D.
c.
Cutler Hammer/Westinghouse.
d.
Siemens.
2.
Control Relays:
a.
General Electric.
b.
Square D.
c.
Cutler Hammer/Westinghouse.
d.
Siemens.
3.
Electronic Timers:
a.
Allen-Bradley 700-HR Dial Multifunction Timer.
4.
Timing Relays:
a.
Agastat.
b.
General Electric.
c.
Square D.
d.
Cutler Hammer/Westinghouse.
e.
Siemens.
5.
Enclosures:
a.
Hoffman.
b.
Hammond.
c.
Rittal.
6.
Manual Motor Starters:
a.
General Electric.
b.
Square D.
c.
Cutler Hammer/Westinghouse.
d.
Siemens.
7.
Separately Mounted Circuit Breakers:
a.
General Electric.
b.
Siemens.
c.
Square D.
d.
Cutler Hammer/Westinghouse.
8.
Terminal Blocks:
a.
Entrelec.
b.
Phoenix Contact.
c.
Weidmuller.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16474-3
GMP 1
d.
Or equal.
9.
Surge Protection Blocks (SPB):
a.
TELEMATIC, Series SD.
b.
Or equal.
B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with the General Conditions.
2.2 COMPONENTS
A. Main and Feeder Circuit Breakers in MCC and Separately Mounted:
1.
Molded case thermal magnetic or solid state trip type, with minimum
interrupting rating equal to the main bus fault current rating:
2.
Circuit breaker frame sizes 150 A and less:
a.
Non-interchangeable, non-adjustable thermal magnetic trip units.
3.
Circuit breaker frame sizes 225 A and higher:
a.
Interchangeable and adjustable thermal magnetic trip units.
4.
Circuit breaker frame sizes 600 A and greater:
a.
Solid state trip units, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.
b.
Current sensor or rating plug.
c.
Adjustable current setting: Minimum range 70% to 100% of current
sensor or rating plug.
d.
Adjustable instantaneous pickup: Minimum range 3 to 8 times.
e.
On circuit breakers 1,000 A and larger provide integral ground fault
protection.
1) Adjustable pick-up.
2) Adjustable delay.
5.
All circuit breakers to be provided with padlocking provision in the OFF
position for up to three padlocks.
6.
Thermal capability:
a.
Frame size 800 amp continuous and below:
b.
Shall be provided for use at 80% of their continuous rating unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
c.
Frame size 1,000 amp continuous and above:
1) Shall be UL listed for application in their intended enclosure for
100% of their continuous rating.
2) Wiring associated with these circuit breakers shall have a dry
location maximum operating temperature of 90° C.
B. Provide ambient compensated devices.
C. Combination Motor Starters:
1.
Circuit breaker shall be motor circuit protector (MCP) type.
2.
Contactor shall be NEMA rated.
a.
One-half size and IEC sized starters not permitted.
3.
Operating handle shall clearly indicate whether circuit breaker is ON, OFF, or
TRIPPED.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16474-4
GMP 1
a.
Provide means to lock each circuit breaker handle in OFF position with
cover closed by means of up to three padlocks.
b.
Interlock so that circuit breaker must be in OFF position before door can
be opened. Provide defeater mechanism for use by authorized
personnel.
4.
Provide starter unit with ambient compensated, external manually resettable,
three bimetallic type overload relays. Coordinate size with actual motor full
load current.
a.
For motors with power factor correction capacitors size heater elements
to compensate for the capacitors effect on load current.
5.
Provide heavy-duty oil tight selector switches, pushbuttons, push-to-test pilot
lights, or other devices, as indicated on the Drawings. These devices will be
accessible with the door closed.
6.
Provide each starter with two extra field reversible NO auxiliary contacts for
future use and as shown on the Drawings.
7.
Provide each starter with 480/120 V control power transformer fused on
primary and secondary side, and rated for 140% of required load.
8.
Provide six-digit readout elapsed time meter where indicated on Drawings.
9.
Starter units will have the same fault current withstand rating as the MCC
main bus fault current withstand rating from which they are fed.
10. Provide each starter with the following status signals, wired to terminal
boards.
a.
Motor run contact (N.O.).
b.
Motor stop contact (N.C.).
c.
Auxiliary overload relay contact (N.O.).
D. Selector Switches, Indicating Lights, and Pushbuttons:
1.
Heavy-duty oiltight/watertight for unclassified or wet areas.
2.
NEMA 4 for outdoor applications or panels specified WP.
3.
NEMA 4X for corrosive areas.
4.
NEMA 7 and 9 for Class I, Division I, Groups C and D, and Class II,
Division I, Groups E, F, and G, hazardous locations.
5.
Selector switches shall have standard gloved operator.
6.
Pushbuttons shall have standard flush operator.
7.
Provide switch positions and contacts:
a.
As specified on Contract Drawings or as necessary for proper control.
8.
Switch contacts shall be NEMA A600 rated.
9.
Full voltage indicating lights, unless specified otherwise.
10. Provide 100% replacement lamps for indicating lights.
11. Provide one replacement lens for each color indicating light.
E. Control Relays:
1.
Provide industrial control relays as specified on the Drawings and as required
for proper operation and control of supplied equipment.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16474-5
GMP 1
2.
All control relays shall have 120 V coils capable of operating on line voltage
fluctuations of ±10%, unless specified otherwise.
3.
Provide contacts for all required control, plus two spares.
F. Time Delay Relays:
1.
Provide time delay relays with delayed pickup or release as specified on
Drawings. All time delay relays shall operate at 115 VAC ±10%.
2.
Heavy duty, solid state construction.
3.
Contact Rating: 5A/250V.
4.
Provide external adjust dial with 0-30 second range unless specified
otherwise.
5.
Operating temperature ranges: -18° C to +50° C.
6.
Repeat accuracy: ±3% plus ±10ms over specified voltage range.
7.
Provide all required contacts plus two N.O.spares.
8.
Provide auxiliary relays as required to perform functions specified on
Drawings.
G. Terminal Blocks:
1.
Terminal blocks shall mount on standard DIN rail, and be of the size required
for conductors therein. A minimum of 25% spares shall be provided in each
terminal box. No more than two conductors shall be allowed per termination.
Jumper bar assemblies shall be installed for interconnecting terminal blocks,
distributing power, and signal commons. Terminal blocks shall be UL rated
for 600 volts, and 20 aAmps, minimum.
2.
Grounding terminal blocks shall be provided for instrumentation cable
shields. The terminal blocks shall have distinctive two-color bodies, and
shall be mounted to the DIN rail with metal screw down type clamps,
providing a positive ground connection. One grounding terminal block shall
be installed for every two instrument cables terminated. Grounding terminal
blocks shall be UL rated for 600 volts, and 20 amps, minimum.
3.
Terminal blocks shall be available in a variety of colors, including red, green,
blue, gray, black, yellow, and orange.
4.
DIN mount fuse holders shall have blown fuse indicators for DC and AC
circuits. Fuse holders shall be of the compression clamp type. Fuse holders
shall be UL listed, and rated for 600 volts. Fuse sizes shall not exceed the
UL current rating for the fuse holders.
5.
DIN rail shall be pre-punched, zinc bichromate plated steel. Symmetrical
DIN rail shall be 35 mm x 7.5 mm, minimum.
6.
Terminal blocks for 4-20 milliamp signals shall have knife disconnect
switches, and accessible test points for testing and measurement of current
loop signals, without the need for removing wire terminations.
H. Surge Protection Blocks (SPB):
1.
Analog inputs and outputs shall be terminated at surge protection blocks
(SPB). The SPBs shall be designed for a working voltage of 32 volts and
shall be fused.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16474-6
GMP 1
2.
SPBs shall provide full hybrid line to line protection, and shall have a GDT
rating of 10,000 A (8/20µs pulse waveform).
3.
SPBs shall be UL 94 V-2 listed.
I.
Enclosures and Control Panels:
1.
NEMA 12 for unclassified areas.
2.
NEMA 4 for outdoor or wet areas.
3.
NEMA 4X for corrosive areas.
4.
NEMA 7 for Class I hazardous locations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and
instructions.
B. Mount other equipment as shown on the Drawings and per NEC.
C. Ground all equipment per NEC.
3.2 TESTING
A. Test in accordance with Specification 16920, electrical acceptance testing.
END OF SECTION
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16476-1
GMP 1
SECTION 16476
LOW VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install low voltage circuit breakers, as
indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Products shall be submitted in accordance with Section 16000, General Electrical
Requirements, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents, prior to installation.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The breaker manufacturer’s facilities shall be ISO 9001 certified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Circuit breakers shall be as manufactured by Square D, Cutler-Hammer, Allen-
Bradley, General Electric, or equal.
B. Circuit breaker frame, trip, short circuit, and interruption ratings shall be as
indicated on the Drawings, except that they shall be coordinated with the ratings
of the equipment actually furnished, and shall be modified where necessary to
suit the equipment. Circuit breakers to be used in motor control centers shall be
as indicated on the Drawings. Where no indication of type is given on the
Drawings, circuit breakers protecting motors shall be motor circuit protectors and
other circuit breakers shall be molded case type.
C. Circuit breaker for mounting in motor control centers or for separate mounting
shall be of the air-break type, quick-make and quick-break, 600 volt, with
number of poles as indicated on the Drawings.
D. Each pole of the circuit breaker shall provide inverse time delay and
instantaneous circuit protection.
E. The breakers shall be operated by a handle and shall have a switching mechanism
that is mechanically trip free from the handle, so that the contacts cannot be held
closed against short circuits, and abnormal currents. Tripping due to overload, or
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16476-2
GMP 1
short circuit shall be clearly indicated by the handle automatically assuming a
position between the manual ON and OFF positions. Latch surfaces shall be
ground and polished. Poles shall be constructed so that they open, close, and trip
simultaneously.
F. Breakers must be completely enclosed in a molded case. Non-interchangeable
trip breakers shall have their covers sealed; interchangeable trip breakers shall
have the trip unit sealed to prevent tampering. Ampere ratings shall be clearly
visible. Contacts shall be non-welding silver alloy. Arc extinction must be
accomplished by means of arc chutes. The minimum interrupting ratings of the
circuit breakers shall be at least equal to the available short circuit current at the
line terminals.
G. Circuit breakers shall conform to the applicable requirements of NEMA
Standards Publication No. AB1.
H. Molded case circuit breakers shall be ambient temperature compensating that
provides inverse time delay overload and instantaneous short circuit protection
by means of a thermalmagnetic element. Compensation shall be accomplished
by a secondary bi-metal that will allow the breaker to carry rated current between
25° C and 50° C with tripping characteristics that are approximately the same
throughout this temperature range.
I.
On breakers with interchangeable, thermal, adjustable magnetic trip, the
accessibility and position of the adjustment knob shall not be changed from those
on the standard breaker.
J.
Unless mounted in a switchboard, or panelboard, circuit breakers shall be housed
in a NEMA rated enclosure as described elsewhere in these specifications.
K. Provide circuit breakers with shunt trip mechanisms where shown on the
Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Circuit breakers shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and per
manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16482-1
GMP 1
SECTION 16482
SOLID STATE MOTOR CONTROLLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.
Solid state motor controllers (SSMC)* for use with NEMA Design "B" 460
VAC motors to reduce the current inrush as well as mechanical shocks that
can result from starting or stopping a motor across the line.
2.
This section pertains to stand-alone solid state motor controllers in addition
to those provided as part of a Motor Control Center.
3.
Provide SSMC fully assembled as part of a Motor Control Center or as a
standalone controller, ready for field installation, testing, and startup.
*The terms SSMC and SSS (Solid State Starters) can be used
interchangeably.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Specification 16000, General Electrical
Requirements:
1.
Complete electrical data on the SSMC and all accessories.
2.
Dimensional and weight information on the enclosure (if applicable).
3.
Fully developed ladder style elementary diagrams complete with terminal and
wire designations. Label or tag all control devices.
4.
Comprehensive bill of material for all components used to assemble the
finished product.
5.
Anticipated heat load for sizing of building HVAC system.
6.
Verification that unit is listed by an independent testing laboratory in
accordance with Electric Industrial Control Equipment Specification UL 508.
7.
List of recommended spare parts for one year operation.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Final assembly to be provided with a UL 508 label installed at the point of
manufacturer.
B. The manufacturer shall be a certified ISO 9002 facility.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16482-2
GMP 1
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Package unit to protect against shipping damage.
B. Store unit in a clean, dry, controlled environment until scheduled installation.
C. Handle units in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and in such a
manner as to prevent damage.
D. Replace any unit damaged as a result of improper shipping, storage, or handling.
1.5 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Unit shall be designed specifically for the environment into which it will be
installed.
B. Provide weather protection, space heating to prevent condensation, and cooling or
ventilation as recommended by SSMC manufacturer.
C. Provide sufficient clearance and housekeeping pads to allow air circulation and to
prevent damage from standing water.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Provide a one year warranty on materials and workmanship from date of start up
or 18 months from date of shipment.
B. An optional extended warranty shall be available for up to an additional two years.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Square D Company
B. Eaton.
C. Allen-Bradley.
2.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
A. Provided in a configuration suitable for panel mounting.
B. Uses a thyristor bridge consisting of at least two SCRs per phase to control the
starting and stopping of industry standard motors. A soft start/current limit will
be obtained by a timed voltage ramp of the thyristors. The thyristors will be
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16482-3
GMP 1
controlled in such a manner that a smooth and stable acceleration ramp is ensured,
independent of motor load.
C. Controlled by a microprocessor that continuously monitors the current and
thyristor phasing of the starter.
D. All soft start power ratings shall use the same control module.
2.3 RATINGS
A. Designed to operate in an ambient temperature of 0° C to 40° C.
B. Storage temperature range shall be -25° C to 70° C.
C. Maximum relative humidity shall be 93% at 40° C, non-condensing.
D. Designed to operate in attitudes up to 3,300 feet. For higher altitudes, de-rate by
1.2% for each additional 330 feet.
E. Capable of operation within -15% to +10% of nominal voltage rating and
automatically adapt for 50 Hz or 60 Hz.
F. Capable of supplying 300% of rated full load current for 60 seconds at maximum
ambient temperature.
G. The SCRs shall have a minimum P.I.V. rating of 1,400 V. Lower rated SCRs
with "protection" by MOVs will not be acceptable.
2.4 ADJUSTMENTS AND CONFIGURATIONS
A. All dialog functions, display units, remote functions, terminal blocks,
configuration switches and adjustment potentiometers shall be accessible on the
front of the control module. Exposure to control circuit boards or electrical power
devices during routine adjustments shall be prohibited.
B. Dialog indication shall provide, as a minimum, the following conditions:
1.
Soft start ready for start.
2.
Soft start starting/stopping motor.
3.
Soft start running at full voltage.
4.
Thermal pre-alarm condition.
5.
Thermal fault.
6.
Soft start internal fault.
7.
Power supply fault.
C. Dip switches shall be used for configuring the soft start and will select:
1.
Manual or automatic reset.
2.
Freewheel or controlled stopping.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16482-4
GMP 1
3.
Stop by deceleration ramp or DC injection braking.
4.
Full voltage boost on start (on or off).
D. Potentiometers or keypads shall be used for adjusting the operating parameters
and will provide:
1.
Motor full load amps adjustable from 50% to 100% of the controller's current
rating.
2.
Current limitation on starting adjustable from 2 to 5 times rated motor
current.
3.
Voltage ramp adjustable from 1 to 30 seconds.
4.
Deceleration ramp or DC injection time adjustable from 2 to 60 seconds.
E. Output relays shall provide the following status indications:
1.
Fault Trip or Soft Start: One Form A and one Form B, minimum.
2.
Thermal Pre-alarm: One Form A and one Form B or one Form C, minimum.
3.
End of Start (voltage ramp complete and current below 130% motor FLA):
One Form A.
4.
Brake (for control of braking contactor if this function is specified): One
Form A.
F. Relay functions listed above must be isolated with respect to common.
2.5 PROTECTION
A. A microprocessor controlled thermal protection system shall be included, which
continuously calculates the temperature-rise of the motor and soft start and
provides:
1.
An overload pre-alarm which indicates by relay contact that the motor has
exceeded its rated temperature rise by 100%. This function shall be
annunciated only without resulting in fault trip of the motor.
2.
A thermal fault condition which stops the motor if the temperature-rise
exceeds 120% of the motor thermal capability.
3.
An analog electronic circuit with a time constant adjustable to the motor's
thermal cooling time constant ensuring the memorization of the thermal state
even after power supply disconnection or shorting out of the power
semiconductors.
B. The soft start shall have phase loss, phase unbalance, and under voltage
protection.
2.6 CONTROL OPTIONS
A. Provide lockable disconnecting means to isolate the SSMC from incoming power.
Disconnect may be either fused or circuit breaker style as shown on the Contract
Drawings.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16482-5
GMP 1
B. Provide lights, pushbuttons, selector switches, indicators, run time meters, and
other accessories as shown on the Contract Documents in accordance with Section
16161, Control Panels.
C. Provide control relays in accordance with Section 16161, Control Panels.
D. Provide a control power transformer, 480:120 V, sized to accommodate all the
control circuit requirements in addition to 25% spare capacity.
E. The soft start shall accept control logic either by operator devices (pushbuttons,
selector switches, etc.) wired directly into the unit or from external relay logic.
F. Provide warning label in accordance with the NEC if power is available from
more than one source.
G. Provide nameplates identifying all panel mounted equipment and operator
controls.
2.7 SHORTING CONTACTOR
A. A microprocessor shall control the operation of the shorting contactor via an
output relay.
B. The shorting contactor shall close, shorting the thyristors after the motor current is
below 130% of motor FLA and voltage is below nominal voltage (indicating the
acceleration ramp is complete), and open on a stop command to allow a
deceleration ramp or DC injection stop.
C. Overload protection shall continue to protect the motor when shorting is used.
2.8 BRAKING CONTACTOR
A. If required by Contract Drawings, a microprocessor shall control the operation of
the braking contactor via an output relay.
B. If an overload condition occurs during the injection brake period, braking shall
continue as set. When braking is complete, restart shall be prohibited until the
motor has cooled.
2.9 ISOLATION AND BYPASS CONTACTORS
A. If required by contract drawings, provide NEMA rated 3-pole isolation contactor
to completely isolate the SSMC from the incoming power in the event of a shorted
SCR or another defined fault condition.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16482-6
GMP 1
B. If required by contract drawings, provide NEMA rated 3-pole reversing style
contactor to both isolate the output of the SSMC, as well as allow across-the-line
starting of the motor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Mount the SSMC in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Provide sufficient clearance for air circulation and operation of any vent fans or
cooling equipment.
C. Install conduit, pull and terminate all power and control conductors.
3.2 TESTING
A. Test in accordance with Specification 16920, Electrical Acceptance Testing.
END OF SECTION
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16951-1
GMP 1
SECTION 16951
SHORT CIRCUIT, COORDINATION, AND ARC-FLASH HAZARD REPORT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1.
Prepare a short circuit analysis, protective device coordination study, and an
arc flash hazard analysis for the project electrical power source and
distribution system for the new facility and any modified existing electrical
equipment.
2.
The short circuit, coordination study, and arc flash hazard report shall
provide an evaluation of the electrical power system with the model numbers
and settings of the protective devices.
B. Scope:
1.
Perform and provide a complete short circuit analysis with equipment
interrupting or withstand rating evaluation and a protective device
coordination study for the electrical power distribution system serving the
facility.
2.
Include all portions of the electrical power distribution system from the
utility primary service drop through 12.47 kV, 480 V (including motor loads)
and 120/208 V lighting panels.
3.
Electrical equipment bus impedance shall be assumed to be zero. Short
circuit momentary duties and interrupting duties shall be calculated on the
basis of maximum available fault current at each project power source or
power distribution equipment including switchgear, switchboard, motor
control center, and branch circuit panelboards.
4.
A protective device coordination study shall be performed to determine
proper selection of power fuse ratings, protective relay characteristics and
settings, ratios and characteristics of associated voltage and current
transformers, and circuit breaker trip characteristics and settings.
5.
The coordination study shall include all voltage classes of equipment from
the utility's closest upstream protective device to existing and new equipment
including switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers, and 120 volt
panelboards main circuit protection.
6.
120 /208 V panelboard branch circuit devices need not be considered. The
phase overcurrent and ground-fault protection shall be included, settings for
the adjustable protective devices, and electrical metering and monitoring
devices.
7.
Provide an arc flash hazard analysis to warn personnel of the dangers of live
exposed electrical equipment. Provide appropriate labeling for electrical
equipment per NFPA 70E that indicates the flash hazard boundaries, incident
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16951-2
GMP 1
energy available, and the required PPE (Personal Protective Equipment)
level.
8.
An equipment evaluation study shall be performed to determine the adequacy
of existing or proposed electrical equipment by tabulating and comparing the
short circuit ratings with the available fault currents.
9.
Problem areas or inadequacies in the proposed equipment shall be identified
in the report.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. This Section contains references to the following documents and they are part of
this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the
requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements
of this section shall prevail.
1.
IEEE 141, Recommended Practice for Electrical Power Distribution for
Industrial Plants.
2.
IEEE 242, Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of
Industrial and Commercial Power Systems.
3.
IEEE 1584, IEEE Guide for Performing Arc Flash Hazard Calculations.
4.
NFPA 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee
Workplaces.
1.3 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A. The report shall be submitted with the major electrical distribution equipment and
switchgear detailed product submittal.
B. The ENGINEER reviewed report shall be corrected, revised, and resubmitted as
required. The report will be reviewed along with the electrical distribution and
switchgear product submittal.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall distribute the ENGINEER accepted report to the major
electrical distribution equipment and switchgear manufacturers before the
electrical distribution equipment and switchgear is manufactured.
D. Provide an electronic copy, on CD-Rom, of the protective device coordination
study results and model files, as generated by the study software
E. The report specified herein shall be provided in accordance with Contract
Documents.
F. Provide arc flash hazard warning labels for all electrical distribution equipment as
indicated in section 1.1.B.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16951-3
GMP 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REPORT
A. The report shall be sealed and signed by the responsible electrical engineer,
summarize the short circuit analysis, protective device coordination study, arc
flash
hazard
analysis,
potential
problem
issues,
conclusions,
and
recommendations that may affect the integrity of the project power distribution
system. As a minimum, the report shall include the following.
1.
The equipment manufacturer's information used to prepare the study.
2.
Assumptions made during the study.
3.
Short circuit calculations listing short circuit levels at each bus.
4.
Simplified single line diagrams generated by the study software.
5.
Coordination study time-current curves including the instrument transformer
ratios, model numbers of the protective relays, relay settings, and trip unit
settings associated with each breaker.
6.
Arc flash hazard analysis calculations.
7.
Comparison of short circuit duties of each bus to the withstand and
interrupting capacity of the equipment protecting that bus.
8.
Data used as input to the report including cable impedance, source
impedance, equipment ratings, equipment time-current curves etc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Provide the short circuit analysis, coordination study, and arc flash hazard
analysis for the electrical power distribution system using SKM System Analysis,
Inc. Power Tools, or equal.
B. The studies shall be performed in accordance with IEEE Standards 141, 242,
1584, and NFPA 70E and shall utilize the ANSI; method of short circuit analysis
in accordance with ANSI C37.010.
C. The studies shall be performed using actual equipment data for the new
equipment. The analysis and study shall use the equipment and protective device
data provided by the electrical distribution equipment manufacturer for the
Project.
3.2 SHORT CIRCUIT ANALYSIS
A. The Short Circuit Analysis and Report shall include the following.
1.
One-Line Diagram:
a.
Location and function of each protective device in the system, such as
relays, direct-acting trips, fuses, etc.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16951-4
GMP 1
b.
Type designation, current rating, range or adjustment, manufacturer's
style and catalog number for all protective devices.
c.
Power, voltage ratings, impedance, primary and secondary connections
of all transformers.
d.
Type, manufacturer, and ratio of all instrument transformers energizing
each relay.
e.
Sources of short circuit currents such as utility ties, generators,
synchronous motors, and induction motors.
2.
Impedance Diagram:
a.
Available MVA or impedance from the power utility company.
b.
Local generated capacity impedance.
c.
Bus impedance.
d.
Transformer and/or reactor impedance.
e.
Cable impedance.
f.
Equipment impedance.
g.
System voltages.
h.
Grounding scheme (resistance grounding, solid grounding, or no
grounding).
3.
Calculations:
a.
Determine the paths and situations where short circuit currents are the
greatest.
b.
Assume bolted faults and calculate the 3-phase and line-to-ground short
circuits of each case.
c.
Calculate the maximum and minimum fault currents.
3.3 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
A. The time-current characteristics of the specified and indicated protective devices
shall be plotted on 5-cycle, log-log graph paper with a maximum of eight
protective devices per plot. The coordination study time-current plots shall, at a
minimum, include the following:
1.
Time-current for each protective relay or fuse showing graphically that the
settings will provide protection and selectivity within industry standards.
Each curve shall be identified, and the tap and time settings shall be
specified.
2.
Time-current curves for each device shall be positioned to provide for
maximum selectivity to minimize system disturbances during fault clearing.
Reasonable coordination intervals and separation of characteristic curves
shall be maintained.
3.
Where selectivity cannot be achieved, the report shall indicate the cause and
recommend alternative solutions. Time-current curves and points for cable
and equipment damage and symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents.
4.
Circuit interrupting device operating and interrupting times.
5.
Indicate maximum fault values on the graph.
6.
Sketch of bus and breaker arrangement.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
16951-5
GMP 1
3.4 ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS
A. Calculated arc flash boundaries, incident energies, and PPE requirements shall be
published in the study report as well as displayed on the report one-line diagrams.
Study Engineer needs to evaluate settings, make recommendations and evaluate
impact to process operations. Coordinate with Owner.
B. Provide a direct printout of warning signs and labels using the study software.
3.5 STUDY FIRM
A. The report for the short circuit analysis and protective device coordination study
indicating results shall be performed, stamped, and signed by an Electrical
Engineer registered in the State where the Project is located.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the ENGINEER with submittal information
for the electrical products used for the Project.
C. The ENGINEER performing the study must visit the Project site after equipment
is installed and modify the study as required, and resubmit the study.
END OF SECTION
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17325-1
GMP 1
SECTION 17325
TURBIDITY AND TSS ANALYZER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Turbidity and suspended solids sensor for monitoring water and sludge
concentrations and turbidity values.
1.2 MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES
A. The method of measuring turbidity and suspended solids will be with a dual-beam
infrared/scattered light photometer. LED light source transmits light at 45 degrees
to the sensor face.
1.
Nephelometric photoreceptors will detect scattered light at 90 degrees to the
transmitted beam for turbidity.
2.
Back-scatter photoreceptors will detect scattered light at 140 degrees to the
transmitted beam for suspended solids.
1.3 ALTERNATES
A. Other methods of turbidity and suspended solids measurement, such as four-beam
or surface scatter methods, are not acceptable.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements:
1.
Measurement range:
a.
Turbidity: 0.001 to 4000 NTU.
b.
Suspended solids: 0.001 mg/l to 50 g/L (ts-line or inline), or 0.001 mg/l
to 500 g/L (hs line or highline).
2.
Accuracy:
a.
Turbidity: Less than 1% of reading or ±0.001 NTU, whichever is greater.
b.
Suspended solids: Less than 5% of reading (depends on homogeneity of
municipal activated sludge).
3.
Repeatability:
a.
Turbidity: Less than 1% of reading.
b.
Suspended solids: Less than 3% of reading (depends on homogeneity of
municipal activated sludge).
4.
Detection limit:
a.
Turbidity: 0.001 NTU.
b.
Suspended solids: 0.001 mg/L.
5.
Response time: Initial response 1 second.
6.
Signal Averaging Time: User selectable ranging from 1 to 300 seconds.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17325-2
GMP 1
7.
Units of measure:
a.
Turbidity: User Selectable NTU, FNU, EBC, FTU and TE/F.
b.
Suspended Solids: User Selectable g/L, mg/L, ppm, or % solids.
1.5 CERTIFICATIONS
A. Safety: Listed by ETL to UL 61010A-1: Certified by ETL to CSA C22.2 No.
1010.1.
B. EMC Emissions & Immunity: CE certified to EN 61326-1/A1, /A2 & EN 61010-
1/A1, /A2.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Operational Criteria:
1.
Sample flow velocity: 3 m/s (9.8 ft./s) maximum.
2.
Sample pressure: 6 bar (87 psi) maximum.
3.
Sample temperature: 0 to 40 degrees C.
4.
Operating temperature: 0 to 40 degrees C.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. The product includes a one-year warranty from the date of shipment.
1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Scheduled maintenance:
1.
Clean measurement windows: as experience dictates.
2.
Change wiper blades: from 3 to 6 months (depending on the application).
3.
Replace probe seals: every two years.
B. Unscheduled maintenance: Clean instrument enclosure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Hach Company, Loveland, CO.
1.
Model SOLITAX ts-line sc Turbidity and Suspended Solids Sensor for
immersion in open tanks.
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNIT
A. The SOLITAX Turbidity and Suspended Solids Sensor consists of a sensor
contained in stainless steel or PVC, depending on model, with a silicon wiper
blade and integral cable.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17325-3
GMP 1
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. The SOLITAX sensor is a digital sensor designed to connect to a universal
controller (the sc100 or sc1000 controller, 120VAC rated).
B. The sensor provides sample color-independent measurement.
C. The sensor is equipped with a self-cleaning device to prevent erroneous values and
maintenance problems caused by biological activity, scum build-up, and gas
bubbles.
D. The signal average time for the sensor is user-selected from 1 to 300 seconds.
E. The sensor measures turbidity or turbidity and suspended solids (depending on the
sensor).
F. The sensor must be serviceable.
G. The sensor is factory calibrated and needs no calibration prior to use. The sensor
shall be capable of immersion in tank or insertion in pipe.
2.4 COMPONENTS
A. Standard equipment:
1.
Sensor with 33 ft. (10m) cable.
2.
Manual.
B. Dimensions:
1.
Models t-line sc, ts-line sc, and hs-line sc for immersion:
a.
Length: 7.87 inches (200 mm).
b.
Diameter: 2.36 inches high (60 mm).
2.
Models inline sc and highline sc for insertion:
a.
Length: 12.40 inches (315 mm).
b.
Diameter: 2.36 inches high (60 mm) C. Weight.
3.
Models inline sc and highline sc for insertion: 5.3 lb. (2.4 kg).
4.
Models t-line sc, ts-line sc, and hs-line sc for immersion:
a.
Stainless steel: 3.0 lb. (1.38 kg).
b.
PVC: 1.2 lb. (0.52 kg).
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Calibration kit.
B. Wiper blades.
C. Sun shield for controller.
D. Installation:
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17325-4
GMP 1
1.
Fixed point installation kit for immersion.
2.
Insertion mounting kit.
3.
Sensor adapters.
4.
Handrail mounting kit.
E. Extension cables.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Immersion sensors: Install the sensor with the optical window facing downstream
in the direction of the flow to protect the sensor against the oncoming flow of
large objects.
B. Insertion sensors:
1.
Pipe diameter: minimum 4 inches (100 mm) diameter in carbon or stainless
steel.
2.
Install minimum 5 ft. (1.5 m) or three times the pipe diameter (whichever is
greater) downstream of pumps, valves, or pipe elbows.
C. Locate the sensor 33 ft. (10 m) from the controller with the standard sensor cable.
(Maximum distance between sensor and controller of 328 ft. (100 m) with optional
extension cables.)
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Contractor will install the analyzer in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions and recommendation.
B. Manufacturer’s representative will include a half-day of start-up service by a
factory-trained technician, if requested.
1.
Contractor will schedule a date and time for start-up.
2.
Contractor will require the following people to be present during the start-up
procedure.
a.
General contractor.
b.
Electrical contractor.
c.
Hach Company factory trained representative.
d.
Owner’s personnel.
e.
Engineer.
3.3 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICE AND START-UP
A. Contractor will include the manufacturer’s services to perform start-up on
instrument to include basic operational training and certification of performance
of the instrument.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17325-5
GMP 1
B. Contractor will include a manufacturer’s Service Agreement that covers all the
manufacturer’s recommended preventative maintenance, regularly scheduled
calibration and any necessary repairs beginning from the time of equipment
startup through to end user acceptance / plant turnover and the first 12 months of
end-user operation post turnover.
C. Items A and B are to be performed by manufacturer’s factory-trained service
personnel. Field service and factory repair by personnel not employed by the
manufacturer is not allowed.
D. Use of manufacturer’s service parts and reagents is required. Third-party parts and
reagents are not approved for use.
END OF SECTION
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17454-1
GMP 1
SECTION 17454
OPERATIONS AND CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Operation and control descriptions.
B. New SCADA programming and graphic screens shall follow the conventions of the
existing SCADA application.
C. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the ENGINEER during SCADA programming of
the process control descriptions. Any deviation from the following Specification shall be
approved by the ENGINEER before programming. Any programming that is required
and not specified herein shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. All
additional SCADA programming logic shall be approved by the ENGINEER before
programming.
D. See additional OIT screen development under Operator Interface Terminal Software
and Hardware specification 17455.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 17000, Instrumentation.
B. Section 11400, Disc Filtration System.
C. Section 11221, Mixers and Accessories.
1.3 COMMON CONTROL FUNCTIONS
A. Alarms:
1.
Discrepancy Alarms: Each device capable of being controlled by SCADA in
REMOTE mode shall have a discrepancy alarm, which shall be displayed at the
SCADA workstations. The discrepancy alarms shall be derived as follows:
a.
Device is commanded to start, and the starter auxiliary contact or VFD
does not echo the command after an operator-adjustable time delay.
b.
Device is commanded to stop, and the starter auxiliary contact or VFD
does not echo the command after an operator-adjustable time delay.
c.
Device is commanded to open, and the open limit switch does not echo the
opened condition after an operator-adjustable time delay. An initial setting
of two times the normal full travel time shall be used.
d.
Device is commanded to close, and the closed limit switch does not echo
the closed condition after an operator-adjustable time delay. An initial
setting of two times the normal full travel time shall be used.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17454-2
GMP 1
e.
For modulating valves or gates, the alarm shall activate if the valve
position is not within 2 percent of scale of the set point position after an
operator-adjustable time delay.
f.
The discrepancy alarms shall only be active if the LOCAL/REMOTE
selector switch at the device is in REMOTE mode.
g.
Once a discrepancy alarm occurs, the SCADA shall terminate the
command to the device. The command to the device cannot be reinitiated
until the discrepancy alarm is acknowledged by the operator from the
SCADA workstation.
2.
Alarms Based on Analog Measurements shall be derived by the SCADA
workstation as follows:
a.
The SCADA workstation shall derive alarms by comparing the process
measurement to an operator-adjustable set point.
3.
Within SCADA program logic, configure each alarm to eliminate nuisance
alarms that would otherwise activate when equipment is not in operation. For
example, a low flow alarm on a pump discharge shall not be activated if the
pump is off.
4.
All alarms derived in the SCADA, whether from analog measurements, discrete
inputs, or discrepancy alarms, shall have a proving timer to limit nuisance
alarms. The SCADA shall start the timer when it first detects an alarm
condition, and shall only activate the alarm after the timer has expired. If the
alarm condition clears while the timer is running, the timer shall be reset, and
the alarm shall not be activated.
5.
Flow Totalizers: Each liquid flow rate transmitted to the SCADA shall have a
flow total calculated by the SCADA as follows:
6.
The current day's total flow shall be calculated by the SCADA and displayed at
the SCADA workstation.
7.
These flow totals shall be calculated and displayed even if they are not shown
on the P&IDs (Process and Instrumentation Drawings).
8.
PID Control Algorithms:
9.
Each PID control algorithm shall have a faceplate that shall be displayed at the
DCS workstation. The face plate shall have the following functions:
10. Display process variable.
11. Display set point.
12. Display output.
13. Allow for operator selection of automatic or manual control of output.
14. Under manual control of output allow the operator to enter the desired output
value.
15. Allow for input of the three PID tuning parameters.
16. The PID algorithm shall include set point and output tracking to provide
bumpless control when switching between control modes.
17. Data Validation:
18. The SCADA workstation graphic screens shall accept manually entered set
point data only if it is within valid process range.
19. The SCADA workstation shall require low-low set point to be lower than a low
set point, high-high set point higher than a high set point, etc.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17454-3
GMP 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS.
A. Submit software and program in accordance with Section 17000, Instrumentation.
1.5 DISC FILTER SYSTEM (AWRF)
A. Summary:
1.
The Airport WRF will be updated with a Disc Filter System upstream of the
Chlorine Contact Basins (CCB’s). Refer to Specification Section 11400, Disc
Filter System.
a.
Effluent from the secondary clarifiers flows via gravity through a 42” pipe
to the rapid mix basins, flocculation basins, and then to the common filter
influent channel. Flow is then distributed to the disc filter basins. The filter
influent enters the filter basins by flowing over an influent weir,
submerging the disks. Under normal operation, the disks are stationary.
b.
The cloth media filters are designed to continuously remove particulates
from the flow steam. As the influent passes through the cloth on each side
of the disc, solids are built up on the cloth surface, creating a mat. Other,
heavier solids settle to the bottom of the filter basin. The filtrate is
conveyed via the center tube to the effluent chamber and over an effluent
weir, into the common filter effluent channel. The filter effluent is then
conveyed to the chlorine contact basins.
c.
As the amount of particulates on and within the pile cloth media increases,
the static pressure required to pass water through the pile cloth media
increases. This results in an increased water level within the filter basin and
increased differential pressure (headloss) on the pile cloth media.
Backwash mode cleans the pile cloth media by drawing from the filtered
side of the pile cloth media. This reverse flow dislodges particulates
embedded in the pile cloth media and restores it to a clean condition
d.
Upon reaching a specific number of backwash cycles performed, or an
elapsed time, the solids waste mode will be automatically initiated. Solids
on the floor of the filter basin are collected via a perforated manifold that is
attached to the backwash/waste pump.
e.
Backwash and solids wastewater are transported back to the IPS.
f.
The filter manufacturer shall be responsible for implementing all the
detailed control strategies for each filter in each vendor supplied LCP/PLC.
P&ID: See Sheets I-1.61 to I-1.79.
B. Components:
1.
Equipment:
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17454-4
GMP 1
Associated
Disc Filter
Unit(s)
Item Description
Item Tag
DS1
Control Panel
VCP-DS1
DS1
Power Panel
VPP-DS1
DS1
Drive Unit
FDU-DS1
DS1
Drive Unit Disconnect Switch
DSC-FDU-DS1
DS1
Motorized Inlet Gate
EDR-DS1
DS1
Solids Waste Valve 1
MOV-DS1-SW1
DS1
Backwash Valve 1
MOV-DS1-BW1
DS1
Backwash Valve 2
MOV-DS1-BW2
DS1
Backwash Valve 3
MOV-DS1-BW3
DS1
Backwash Valve 4
MOV-DS1-BW4
DS1
Backwash Valve 5
MOV-DS1-BW5
DS1
Backwash Valve 6
MOV-DS1-BW6
DS1
Backwash Valve 7
MOV-DS1-BW7
DS1
Solids Waste Valve 2
MOV-DS1-SW2
DS1
Backwash Pump A
BWP-DS1-A
DS1
Backwash Pump A Disconnect Switch
DSC-BWP-DS1A
DS1
Backwash Pump B
BWP-DS1-B
DS1
Backwash Pump B Disconnect Switch
DSC-BWP-DS1B
DS2
Control Panel
VCP-DS2
DS2
Power Panel
VPP-DS2
DS2
Drive Unit
FDU-DS2
DS2
Drive Unit Disconnect Switch
DSC-FDU-DS2
DS2
Motorized Inlet Gate
EDR-DS2
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17454-5
GMP 1
DS2
Solids Waste Valve 1
MOV-DS2-SW1
DS2
Backwash Valve 1
MOV-DS2-BW1
DS2
Backwash Valve 2
MOV-DS2-BW2
DS2
Backwash Valve 3
MOV-DS2-BW3
DS2
Backwash Valve 4
MOV-DS2-BW4
DS2
Backwash Valve 5
MOV-DS2-BW5
DS2
Backwash Valve 6
MOV-DS2-BW6
DS2
Backwash Valve 7
MOV-DS2-BW7
DS2
Solids Waste Valve 2
MOV-DS2-SW2
DS2
Backwash Pump A
BWP-DS2-A
DS2
Backwash Pump A Disconnect Switch
DSC-BWP-DS2A
DS2
Backwash Pump B
BWP-DS2-B
DS2
Backwash Pump B Disconnect Switch
DSC-BWP-DS2B
DS3
Control Panel
VCP-DS3
DS3
Power Panel
VPP-DS3
DS3
Drive Unit
FDU-DS3
DS3
Drive Unit Disconnect Switch
DSC-FDU-DS3
DS3
Motorized Inlet Gate
EDR-DS3
DS3
Solids Waste Valve 1
MOV-DS3-SW1
DS3
Backwash Valve 1
MOV-DS3-BW1
DS3
Backwash Valve 2
MOV-DS3-BW2
DS3
Backwash Valve 3
MOV-DS3-BW3
DS3
Backwash Valve 4
MOV-DS3-BW4
DS3
Backwash Valve 5
MOV-DS3-BW5
DS3
Backwash Valve 6
MOV-DS3-BW6
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17454-6
GMP 1
DS3
Backwash Valve 7
MOV-DS3-BW7
DS3
Solids Waste Valve 2
MOV-DS3-SW2
DS3
Backwash Pump A
BWP-DS3-A
DS3
Backwash Pump A Disconnect Switch
DSC-BWP-DS3A
DS3
Backwash Pump B
BWP-DS3-B
DS3
Backwash Pump B Disconnect Switch
DSC-BWP-DS3B
DS4
Control Panel
VCP-DS4
DS4
Power Panel
VPP-DS4
DS4
Drive Unit
FDU-DS4
DS4
Drive Unit Disconnect Switch
DSC-FDU-DS4
DS4
Motorized Inlet Gate
EDR-DS4
DS4
Solids Waste Valve 1
MOV-DS4-SW1
DS4
Backwash Valve 1
MOV-DS4-BW1
DS4
Backwash Valve 2
MOV-DS4-BW2
DS4
Backwash Valve 3
MOV-DS4-BW3
DS4
Backwash Valve 4
MOV-DS4-BW4
DS4
Backwash Valve 5
MOV-DS4-BW5
DS4
Backwash Valve 6
MOV-DS4-BW6
DS4
Backwash Valve 7
MOV-DS4-BW7
DS4
Solids Waste Valve 2
MOV-DS4-SW2
DS4
Backwash Pump A
BWP-DS4-A
DS4
Backwash Pump A Disconnect Switch
DSC-BWP-DS4A
DS4
Backwash Pump B
BWP-DS4-B
DS4
Backwash Pump B Disconnect Switch
DSC-BWP-DS4B
DS5
Control Panel
VCP-DS5
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17454-7
GMP 1
DS5
Power Panel
VPP-DS5
DS5
Drive Unit
FDU-DS5
DS5
Drive Unit Disconnect Switch
DSC-FDU-DS5
DS5
Motorized Inlet Gate
EDR-DS5
DS5
Solids Waste Valve 1
MOV-DS5-SW1
DS5
Backwash Valve 1
MOV-DS5-BW1
DS5
Backwash Valve 2
MOV-DS5-BW2
DS5
Backwash Valve 3
MOV-DS5-BW3
DS5
Backwash Valve 4
MOV-DS5-BW4
DS5
Backwash Valve 5
MOV-DS5-BW5
DS5
Backwash Valve 6
MOV-DS5-BW6
DS5
Backwash Valve 7
MOV-DS5-BW7
DS5
Solids Waste Valve 2
MOV-DS5-SW2
DS5
Backwash Pump A
BWP-DS5-A
DS5
Backwash Pump A Disconnect Switch
DSC-BWP-DS5A
DS5
Backwash Pump B
BWP-DS5-B
DS5
Backwash Pump B Disconnect Switch
DSC-BWP-DS5B
DS6
Control Panel
VCP-DS6
DS6
Power Panel
VPP-DS6
DS6
Drive Unit
FDU-DS6
DS6
Drive Unit Disconnect Switch
DSC-FDU-DS6
DS6
Motorized Inlet Gate
EDR-DS6
DS6
Solids Waste Valve 1
MOV-DS6-SW1
DS6
Backwash Valve 1
MOV-DS6-BW1
DS6
Backwash Valve 2
MOV-DS6-BW2
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17454-8
GMP 1
DS6
Backwash Valve 3
MOV-DS6-BW3
DS6
Backwash Valve 4
MOV-DS6-BW4
DS6
Backwash Valve 5
MOV-DS6-BW5
DS6
Backwash Valve 6
MOV-DS6-BW6
DS6
Backwash Valve 7
MOV-DS6-BW7
DS6
Solids Waste Valve 2
MOV-DS6-SW2
DS6
Backwash Pump A
BWP-DS6-A
DS6
Backwash Pump A Disconnect Switch
DSC-BWP-DS6A
DS6
Backwash Pump B
BWP-DS6-B
DS6
Backwash Pump B Disconnect Switch
DSC-BWP-DS6B
NA
Monorail Hoist Disconnect Switch
DSC-CRN-500
NA
Monorail Hoist E-Stop
ES-CRN-500
DS1/DS2
Sump Pump Motor Control Panel No. 1
MCP-SP-1
DS1/DS2
Sump Pump No. 1
PMP-SP-1
DS1/DS2
Sump 1 Low Level Switch
LSL-710
DS1/DS2
Sump 1 High Level Switch
LSH-710
DS1/DS2
Sump 1 High High Level Switch
LSHH-710
DS3/DS4
Sump Pump Motor Control Panel No. 2
MCP-SP-2
DS3/DS4
Sump Pump No. 2
PMP-SP-2
DS3/DS4
Sump 2 Low Level Switch
LSL-720
DS3/DS4
Sump 2 High Level Switch
LSH-720
DS3/DS4
Sump 2 High High Level Switch
LSHH-720
DS5/DS6
Sump Pump Motor Control Panel No. 3
MCP-SP-3
DS5/DS6
Sump Pump No. 3
PMP-SP-3
DS5/DS6
Sump 3 Low Level Switch
LSL-730
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17454-9
GMP 1
DS5/DS6
Sump 3 High Level Switch
LSH-730
DS5/DS6
Sump 3 High High Level Switch
LSHH-730
2.
Instruments:
Associated
Disc Filter
Unit(s)
Item Description
Item Tag
DS1
Pressure Transducer
LIT-DS1-100
DS1
High Level Float Switch
LSH-DS1-100
DS1
Effluent Chamber Turbidity Probe
AE-DS1-100
DS1
Vacuum Transmitter No. 1
VT-DS1-101
DS1
Vacuum Transmitter No. 2
VT-DS1-102
DS1
Vacuum Indicator No. 1
VT-DS1-101
DS1
Pressure Indicator No. 1
PI-DS1-133
DS1
Vacuum Indicator No. 2
VT-DS1-102
DS1
Pressure Indicator No. 2
PI-DS1-143
DS1
Effluent Chamber Turbidity Analyzer
AIT-DS1-100
DS2
Pressure Transducer
LIT-DS2-200
DS2
High Level Float Switch
LSH-DS2-200
DS2
Effluent Chamber Turbidity Probe
AE-DS2-200
DS2
Vacuum Transmitter No. 1
VT-DS2-201
DS2
Vacuum Transmitter No. 2
VT-DS2-202
DS2
Vacuum Indicator No. 1
VI-DS2-232
DS2
Pressure Indicator No. 1
PI-DS2-233
DS2
Vacuum Indicator No. 2
VI-DS2-242
DS2
Pressure Indicator No. 2
PI-DS2-243
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17454-10
GMP 1
DS2
Effluent Chamber Turbidity Analyzer
AIT-DS2-200
DS3
Pressure Transducer
LIT-DS3-300
DS3
High Level Float Switch
LSH-DS3-300
DS3
Effluent Chamber Turbidity Probe
AE-DS3-300
DS3
Vacuum Transmitter No. 1
VT-DS3-301
DS3
Vacuum Transmitter No. 2
VT-DS3-302
DS3
Vacuum Indicator No. 1
VI-DS3-332
DS3
Pressure Indicator No. 1
PI-DS3-333
DS3
Vacuum Indicator No. 2
VI-DS3-342
DS3
Pressure Indicator No. 2
PI-DS3-343
DS3
Effluent Chamber Turbidity Analyzer
AIT-DS3-300
DS4
Pressure Transducer
LIT-DS4-100
DS4
High Level Float Switch
LSH-DS4-400
DS4
Effluent Chamber Turbidity Probe
AE-DS4-400
DS4
Vacuum Transmitter No. 1
VT-DS4-401
DS4
Vacuum Transmitter No. 2
VT-DS4-402
DS4
Vacuum Indicator No. 1
VI-DS4-432
DS4
Pressure Indicator No. 1
PI-DS4-433
DS4
Vacuum Indicator No. 2
VI-DS4-442
DS4
Pressure Indicator No. 2
PI-DS4-443
DS4
Effluent Chamber Turbidity Analyzer
AIT-DS4-400
DS5
Pressure Transducer
LIT-DS5-500
DS5
High Level Float Switch
LSH-DS5-500
DS5
Effluent Chamber Turbidity Probe
AE-DS5-500
DS5
Vacuum Transmitter No. 1
VT-DS5-501
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17454-11
GMP 1
DS5
Vacuum Transmitter No. 2
VT-DS5-502
DS5
Vacuum Indicator No. 1
VI-DS5-532
DS5
Pressure Indicator No. 1
PI-DS5-533
DS5
Vacuum Indicator No. 2
VI-DS5-542
DS5
Pressure Indicator No. 2
PI-DS5-543
DS5
Effluent Chamber Turbidity Analyzer
AIT-DS5-500
DS6
Pressure Transducer
LIT-DS6-600
DS6
High Level Float Switch
LSH-DS6-600
DS6
Effluent Chamber Turbidity Probe
AE-DS6-600
DS6
Vacuum Transmitter No. 1
VT-DS6-601
DS6
Vacuum Transmitter No. 2
VT-DS6-602
DS6
Vacuum Indicator No. 1
VI-DS6-632
DS6
Pressure Indicator No. 1
PI-DS6-633
DS6
Vacuum Indicator No. 2
VI-DS6-642
DS6
Pressure Indicator No. 2
PI-DS6-643
DS6
Effluent Chamber Turbidity Analyzer
AIT-DS6-600
C. Hard-Wired Safety Interlocks:
1.
The Filter Drive will automatically stop on motor overload.
2.
The Backwash/Solids Waste Pump will automatically stop on low-level alarm.
3.
The Backwash/Solids Waste Pump will automatically stop on motor overload.
4.
The Backwash high water level set elevation will not go above 1220.68’.
D. Control Modes:
1.
Remote Auto (DCS):
a.
Disc Filter Influent Gate:
1) Place all disc filter influent gates in the REMOTE position at the
respective gate LCP.
2) The disc filter inlet gate will open by pressing the OPEN button from
individual filter control page at DCS.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17454-12
GMP 1
3) The disc filter influent gate will close by pressing the CLOSE button
from individual filter control page at DCS.
b.
Backwash/Solids Waste Cycle
1)
Place all vendor control panels, VCP-DS1, VCP-DS2, VCP-DS3,
VCP-DS4, VCP-DS5 and VCP-DS6, H-O-A switches in the AUTO
position. Place the LEVEL or TIMED selector switch, at the vendor control
panels, VCP-DS1, VCP-DS2, VCP-DS3, VCP-DS4, VCP-DS5 and VCP-
DS6 in the proper position dependent on operations.
2)
Place all backwash valves/solids waste valve(s) in the REMOTE
position.
3)
Place all backwash/solids wasting pump(s) in the REMOTE position.
4)
Place the filter drive unit in the REMOTE position.
5)
The disc filter system will start operation in normal filtration mode
when set to ENABLE.
6)
The backwash/solids waste pump(s) will start automatically when a
backwash is initiated by either LEVEL or TIME, dependent on operations.
7)
The backwash/solids waste valve(s) will operate automatically during
backwash/solids wasting.
8)
Backwash interval is set on the Individual Filter Control page from
DCS.
9)
Backwash high water level for automatic backwash is set on the
Individual Filter Control page from DCS.
10) Backwash count to initiate sludge wasting is set on the Individual
Filter Control page from DCS.
11) Solids wasting interval (time) is set on the Individual Filter Control
page from DCS.
12) The disc filter system will stop operation when set to DISABLE.
2.
Remote Hand
a.
Disc Filter Influent Gate:
1) Place all disc filter influent gates in the REMOTE position at the
respective gate LCP.
2) The disc filter inlet gate will open by pressing the OPEN button from
individual filter control page at DCS.
3) The disc filter influent gate will close by pressing the CLOSE button
from individual filter control page at DCS.
b.
Backwash/Solids Waste Cycle:
1) Place all vendor control panels, VCP-539-100, VCP-539-200, VCP-
539-300, and VCP-539-400, LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE switches in the
REMOTE position.
2) Place all backwash/solids wasting pump(s) in the REMOTE position.
3) The Backwash/Solids Waste Pump(s) will start by pressing the
START BACKWASH button from individual filter control page at
SCADA.
4) The
Backwash/Solids
Waste
Pump(s)
will
stop
when
the
backwash/solids waste cycle is complete.
5) Place all backwash valves/solids waste valve(s) in the AUTO position.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17454-13
GMP 1
6) The Backwash/Solids Waste Valves(s) will open automatically during
a backwash/solids waste cycle.
7) The Backwash/Solids Waste Valve(s) will close automatically during
a backwash/solids waste cycle.
8) Place the filter drive unit in the AUTO position.
9) The Filter Drive Motor will start by pressing the START
BACKWASH button from individual filter control page at SCADA.
10) The Filter Drive Motor will stop when the backwash/solids waste
cycle is complete.
11) Backwash interval is set on the Individual Filter Control page from
SCADA.
12) Backwash high water level for automatic backwash is set on the
Individual Filter Control page from SCADA.
13) Backwash count to initiate sludge wasting is set on the Individual
Filter Control page from SCADA.
14) Solids wasting interval (time) is set on the Individual Filter Control
page from SCADA.
3.
Local Auto:
a.
Disc Filter Influent Gate:
1) Place all disc filter influent gates in the LOCAL position at the
respective gate LCP.
2) The disc filter inlet gate will open by pressing the OPEN button from
the gate LCP.
3) The disc filter influent gate will close by pressing the CLOSE button
from the gate LCP.
b.
Backwash/Solids Waste Cycle:
1)
Place all vendor control panels, VCP-DS1, VCP-DS2, VCP-DS3,
VCP-DS4, VCP-DS5 and VCP-DS6, H-O-A switches in the AUTO
position. Place the LEVEL or TIMED selector switch, at the vendor control
panels VCP-DS1, VCP-DS2, VCP-DS3, VCP-DS4, VCP-DS5 and VCP-
DS6 in the proper position dependent on operations.
2)
Place all backwash valves/solids waste valve(s) in the LOCAL
position.
3)
Place all backwash/solids wasting pump(s) in the LOCAL position.
4)
Place the filter drive unit in the LOCAL position.
5)
The disc filter system will start operation in normal filtration mode
when the disc filter influent gate is open.
6)
The backwash/solids waste pump(s) will start automatically when a
backwash is initiated by either LEVEL or TIME, dependent on operations.
7)
The backwash/solids waste valve(s) will operate automatically during
backwash/solids wasting.
8)
Backwash interval is set locally at the vendor control panels, VCP-
DS1, VCP-DS2, VCP-DS3, VCP-DS4, VCP-DS5 and VCP-DS6.
9)
Backwash high water level for automatic backwash is set locally at
the vendor control panels, VCP-DS1, VCP-DS2, VCP-DS3, VCP-DS4,
VCP-DS5 and VCP-DS6.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17454-14
GMP 1
10) Backwash count to initiate sludge wasting is set locally at the vendor
control panels, VCP-DS1, VCP-DS2, VCP-DS3, VCP-DS4, VCP-DS5 and
VCP-DS6.
11) Solids wasting interval (time) is set locally at the vendor control
panels, VCP-DS1, VCP-DS2, VCP-DS3, VCP-DS4, VCP-DS5 and VCP-
DS6.
12) The disc filter system will stop operation when the disc filter influent
gate is closed.
4.
Local Hand
a.
Disc Filter Influent Gate:
1) Place all disc filter influent gates in the LOCAL position.
2) The disc filter influent gates will open by placing the panel L-O-R
switch in the LOCAL position and pressing the OPEN pushbutton.
3) The disc filter influent gates will close by placing the panel L-O-R
switch in the HAND position and pressing the CLOSE pushbutton.
b.
Backwash/Solids Waste Pump(s):
1) The backwash/solids waste pump(s) is controlled locally at the vendor
control panel, VCP-DS1, VCP-DS2, VCP-DS3, VCP-DS4, VCP-DS5
and VCP-DS6.
2) The Backwash/Solids Waste Pump(s) START/STOP button is located
at the vendor control panel, VCP-DS1, VCP-DS2, VCP-DS3, VCP-
DS4, VCP-DS5 and VCP-DS6.
3) The Backwash/Solids Waste Pump(s) will start by placing the panel
H-O-A switch in the HAND position and pressing the START
pushbutton.
4) The Backwash/Solids Waste Pump(s) will stop by placing the panel H-
O-A switch in the HAND position and pressing the STOP
pushbutton.
c.
Backwash/Solids Waste Valve(s):
1) The backwash/solids waste valve(s) is controlled locally at the vendor
control panel, VCP-DS1, VCP-DS2, VCP-DS3, VCP-DS4, VCP-DS5
and VCP-DS6.
2) The Backwash/Solids Waste Valve(s) OPEN/CLOSE button is located
at the vendor control panel, VCP-DS1, VCP-DS2, VCP-DS3, VCP-
DS4, VCP-DS5 and VCP-DS6.
3) The Backwash/Solids Waste valve(s) actuator will open and close the
valve using the OPEN/STOP/CLOSE controls at the valve actuator
when the LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE switch is set to LOCAL.
d.
Filter Drive Unit
1) The Filter Drive Motor is controlled locally at the vendor control
panel, VCP-DS1, VCP-DS2, VCP-DS3, VCP-DS4, VCP-DS5 and
VCP-DS6.
2) The Filter Drive Motor is started by placing the panel H-O-A switch in
the HAND position and pressing the START pushbutton.
3) The Filter Drive Motor is stopped by placing the panel H-O-A switch
in the HAND position and pressing the STOP pushbutton.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17454-15
GMP 1
E. Monitor: The following data will be monitored by DCS:
1.
Disc Filter System No. 1 High Level Status
2.
Disc Filter System No. 1 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) in AUTO/HAND status
3.
Disc Filter System No. 1 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) in OFF status
4.
Disc Filter System No. 1 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) RUN status
5.
Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Duration (time) status
6.
Disc Filter System No. 1 Solids Wasting Duration (time) status
7.
Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 in AUTO/HAND
status.
8.
Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 in OFF status
9.
Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 RUN status
10. Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 2 in OFF status
11. Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 2 RUN status
12. Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 1 Open Status
13. Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 1 Closed Status
14. Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 2 Open Status
15. Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 2 Closed Status
16. Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 3 Open Status
17. Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 3 Closed Status
18. Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 4 Open Status
19. Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 4 Closed Status
20. Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 5 Open Status
21. Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 5 Closed Status
22. Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 6 Open Status
23. Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 6 Closed Status
24. Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 7 Open Status
25. Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 7 Closed Status
26. Disc Filter System No. 1 Solids Waste Valve 1 Open Status
27. Disc Filter System No. 1 Solids Waste Valve 1 Closed Status
28. Disc Filter System No. 1 Solids Waste Valve 2 Open Status
29. Disc Filter System No. 1 Solids Waste Valve 2 Closed Status
30. Disc Filter System No. 2 Disc Filter Influent Gate Open Status
31. Disc Filter System No. 2 High Level Status
32. Disc Filter System No. 2 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) in AUTO/HAND status
33. Disc Filter System No. 2 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) in OFF status
34. Disc Filter System No. 2 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) RUN status
35. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Duration (time) status
36. Disc Filter System No. 2 Solids Wasting Duration (time) status
37. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 in AUTO/HAND
status.
38. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 in OFF status
39. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 RUN status
40. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 2 in OFF status
41. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 2 RUN status
42. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 1 Open Status
43. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 1 Closed Status
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17454-16
GMP 1
44. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 2 Open Status
45. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 2 Closed Status
46. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 3 Open Status
47. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 3 Closed Status
48. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 4 Open Status
49. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 4 Closed Status
50. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 5 Open Status
51. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 5 Closed Status
52. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 6 Open Status
53. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 6 Closed Status
54. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 7 Open Status
55. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 7 Closed Status
56. Disc Filter System No. 2 Solids Waste Valve 1 Open Status
57. Disc Filter System No. 2 Solids Waste Valve 1 Closed Status
58. Disc Filter System No. 2 Solids Waste Valve 2 Open Status
59. Disc Filter System No. 2 Solids Waste Valve 2 Closed Status
60. Disc Filter System No. 3 Disc Filter Influent Gate Open Status
61. Disc Filter System No. 3 High Level Status
62. Disc Filter System No. 3 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) in AUTO/HAND status
63. Disc Filter System No. 3 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) in OFF status
64. Disc Filter System No. 3 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) RUN status
65. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Duration (time) status
66. Disc Filter System No. 3 Solids Wasting Duration (time) status
67. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 in AUTO/HAND
status.
68. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 in OFF status
69. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 RUN status
70. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 2 in OFF status
71. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 2 RUN status
72. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 1 Open Status
73. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 1 Closed Status
74. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 2 Open Status
75. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 2 Closed Status
76. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 3 Open Status
77. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 3 Closed Status
78. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 4 Open Status
79. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 4 Closed Status
80. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 5 Open Status
81. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 5 Closed Status
82. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 6 Open Status
83. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 6 Closed Status
84. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 7 Open Status
85. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 7 Closed Status
86. Disc Filter System No. 3 Solids Waste Valve 1 Open Status
87. Disc Filter System No. 3 Solids Waste Valve 1 Closed Status
88. Disc Filter System No. 3 Solids Waste Valve 2 Open Status
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17454-17
GMP 1
89. Disc Filter System No. 3 Solids Waste Valve 2 Closed Status
90. Disc Filter System No. 4 Disc Filter Influent Gate Open Status
91. Disc Filter System No. 4 High Level Status
92. Disc Filter System No. 4 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) in AUTO/HAND status
93. Disc Filter System No. 4 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) in OFF status
94. Disc Filter System No. 4 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) RUN status
95. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Duration (time) status
96. Disc Filter System No. 4 Solids Wasting Duration (time) status
97. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 in AUTO/HAND
status.
98. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 in OFF status
99. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 RUN status
100. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 2 in OFF status
101. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 2 RUN status
102. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 1 Open Status
103. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 1 Closed Status
104. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 2 Open Status
105. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 2 Closed Status
106. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 3 Open Status
107. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 3 Closed Status
108. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 4 Open Status
109. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 4 Closed Status
110. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 5 Open Status
111. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 5 Closed Status
112. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 6 Open Status
113. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 6 Closed Status
114. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 7 Open Status
115. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 7 Closed Status
116. Disc Filter System No. 4 Solids Waste Valve 1 Open Status
117. Disc Filter System No. 4 Solids Waste Valve 1 Closed Status
118. Disc Filter System No. 4 Solids Waste Valve 2 Open Status
119. Disc Filter System No. 4 Solids Waste Valve 2 Closed Status
120. Disc Filter System No. 5 Disc Filter Influent Gate Open Status
121. Disc Filter System No. 5 High Level Status
122. Disc Filter System No. 5 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) in AUTO/HAND status
123. Disc Filter System No. 5 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) in OFF status
124. Disc Filter System No. 5 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) RUN status
125. Disc Filter System No. 5 Backwash Duration (time) status
126. Disc Filter System No. 5 Solids Wasting Duration (time) status
127. Disc Filter System No. 5 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 in AUTO/HAND
status.
128. Disc Filter System No. 5 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 in OFF status
129. Disc Filter System No. 5 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 RUN status
130. Disc Filter System No. 5 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 2 in OFF status
131. Disc Filter System No. 5 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 2 RUN status
132. Disc Filter System No. 5 Backwash Valve 1 Open Status
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17454-18
GMP 1
133. Disc Filter System No. 5 Backwash Valve 1 Closed Status
134. Disc Filter System No. 5 Backwash Valve 2 Open Status
135. Disc Filter System No. 5 Backwash Valve 2 Closed Status
136. Disc Filter System No. 5 Backwash Valve 3 Open Status
137. Disc Filter System No. 5 Backwash Valve 3 Closed Status
138. Disc Filter System No. 5 Backwash Valve 4 Open Status
139. Disc Filter System No. 5 Backwash Valve 4 Closed Status
140. Disc Filter System No. 5 Backwash Valve 5 Open Status
141. Disc Filter System No. 5 Backwash Valve 5 Closed Status
142. Disc Filter System No. 5 Backwash Valve 6 Open Status
143. Disc Filter System No. 5 Backwash Valve 6 Closed Status
144. Disc Filter System No. 5 Backwash Valve 7 Open Status
145. Disc Filter System No. 5 Backwash Valve 7 Closed Status
146. Disc Filter System No. 5 Solids Waste Valve 1 Open Status
147. Disc Filter System No. 5 Solids Waste Valve 1 Closed Status
148. Disc Filter System No. 5 Solids Waste Valve 2 Open Status
149. Disc Filter System No. 5 Solids Waste Valve 2 Closed Status
150. Disc Filter System No. 6 Disc Filter Influent Gate Open Status
151. Disc Filter System No. 6 High Level Status
152. Disc Filter System No. 6 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) in AUTO/HAND status
153. Disc Filter System No. 6 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) in OFF status
154. Disc Filter System No. 6 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) RUN status
155. Disc Filter System No. 6 Backwash Duration (time) status
156. Disc Filter System No. 6 Solids Wasting Duration (time) status
157. Disc Filter System No. 6 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 in AUTO/HAND
status.
158. Disc Filter System No. 6 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 in OFF status
159. Disc Filter System No. 6 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 RUN status
160. Disc Filter System No. 6 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 2 in OFF status
161. Disc Filter System No. 6 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 2 RUN status
162. Disc Filter System No. 6 Backwash Valve 1 Open Status
163. Disc Filter System No. 6 Backwash Valve 1 Closed Status
164. Disc Filter System No. 6 Backwash Valve 2 Open Status
165. Disc Filter System No. 6 Backwash Valve 2 Closed Status
166. Disc Filter System No. 6 Backwash Valve 3 Open Status
167. Disc Filter System No. 6 Backwash Valve 3 Closed Status
168. Disc Filter System No. 6 Backwash Valve 4 Open Status
169. Disc Filter System No. 6 Backwash Valve 4 Closed Status
170. Disc Filter System No. 6 Backwash Valve 5 Open Status
171. Disc Filter System No. 6 Backwash Valve 5 Closed Status
172. Disc Filter System No. 6 Backwash Valve 6 Open Status
173. Disc Filter System No. 6 Backwash Valve 6 Closed Status
174. Disc Filter System No. 6 Backwash Valve 7 Open Status
175. Disc Filter System No. 6 Backwash Valve 7 Closed Status
176. Disc Filter System No. 6 Solids Waste Valve 1 Open Status
177. Disc Filter System No. 6 Solids Waste Valve 1 Closed Status
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17454-19
GMP 1
178. Disc Filter System No. 6 Solids Waste Valve 2 Open Status
179. Disc Filter System No. 6 Solids Waste Valve 2 Closed Status
F. Alarms: The following alarms and indications are available in all control modes:
1.
Disc Filter System No. 1 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) FAIL
2.
Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 FAIL
3.
Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 2 FAIL
4.
Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 1 FAIL
5.
Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 2 FAIL
6.
Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 3 FAIL
7.
Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 4 FAIL
8.
Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 5 FAIL
9.
Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 6 FAIL
10. Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 7 FAIL
11. Disc Filter System No. 1 Solids Waste Valve 1 FAIL
12. Disc Filter System No. 1 Solids Waste Valve 2 FAIL
13. Disc Filter System No. 1 Level alarm high
14. Disc Filter System No. 1 Emergency Stop Activated
15. Disc Filter System No. 1 High turbidity alarm
16. Disc Filter System No. 2 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) FAIL
17. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 FAIL
18. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 2 FAIL
19. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 1 FAIL
20. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 2 FAIL
21. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 3 FAIL
22. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 4 FAIL
23. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 5 FAIL
24. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 6 FAIL
25. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 7 FAIL
26. Disc Filter System No. 2 Solids Waste Valve 1 FAIL
27. Disc Filter System No. 2 Solids Waste Valve 2 FAIL
28. Disc Filter System No. 2 Level alarm high
29. Disc Filter System No. 2 Emergency Stop Activated
30. Disc Filter System No. 2 High turbidity alarm
31. Disc Filter System No. 3 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) FAIL
32. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 FAIL
33. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 2 FAIL
34. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 1 FAIL
35. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 2 FAIL
36. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 3 FAIL
37. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 4 FAIL
38. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 5 FAIL
39. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 6 FAIL
40. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 7 FAIL
41. Disc Filter System No. 3 Solids Waste Valve 1 FAIL
42. Disc Filter System No. 3 Solids Waste Valve 2 FAIL
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17454-20
GMP 1
43. Disc Filter System No. 3 Level alarm high
44. Disc Filter System No. 3 Emergency Stop Activated
45. Disc Filter System No. 3 High turbidity alarm
46. Disc Filter System No. 4 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) FAIL
47. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 FAIL
48. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 2 FAIL
49. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 1 FAIL
50. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 2 FAIL
51. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 3 FAIL
52. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 4 FAIL
53. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 5 FAIL
54. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 6 FAIL
55. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 7 FAIL
56. Disc Filter System No. 4 Solids Waste Valve 1 FAIL
57. Disc Filter System No. 4 Solids Waste Valve 2 FAIL
58. Disc Filter System No. 4 Level alarm high
59. Disc Filter System No. 4 Emergency Stop Activated
60. Disc Filter System No. 4 High turbidity alarm
61. Disc Filter System No. 5 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) FAIL
62. Disc Filter System No. 5 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 FAIL
63. Disc Filter System No. 5 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 2 FAIL
64. Disc Filter System No. 5 Backwash Valve 1 FAIL
65. Disc Filter System No. 5 Backwash Valve 2 FAIL
66. Disc Filter System No. 5 Backwash Valve 3 FAIL
67. Disc Filter System No. 5 Backwash Valve 4 FAIL
68. Disc Filter System No. 5 Backwash Valve 5 FAIL
69. Disc Filter System No. 5 Backwash Valve 6 FAIL
70. Disc Filter System No. 5 Backwash Valve 7 FAIL
71. Disc Filter System No. 5 Solids Waste Valve 1 FAIL
72. Disc Filter System No. 5 Solids Waste Valve 2 FAIL
73. Disc Filter System No. 5 Level alarm high
74. Disc Filter System No. 5 Emergency Stop Activated
75. Disc Filter System No. 5 High turbidity alarm
76. Disc Filter System No. 6 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) FAIL
77. Disc Filter System No. 6 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 FAIL
78. Disc Filter System No. 6 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 2 FAIL
79. Disc Filter System No. 6 Backwash Valve 1 FAIL
80. Disc Filter System No. 6 Backwash Valve 2 FAIL
81. Disc Filter System No. 6 Backwash Valve 3 FAIL
82. Disc Filter System No. 6 Backwash Valve 4 FAIL
83. Disc Filter System No. 6 Backwash Valve 5 FAIL
84. Disc Filter System No. 6 Backwash Valve 6 FAIL
85. Disc Filter System No. 6 Backwash Valve 7 FAIL
86. Disc Filter System No. 6 Solids Waste Valve 1 FAIL
87. Disc Filter System No. 6 Solids Waste Valve 2 FAIL
88. Disc Filter System No. 6 Level alarm high
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17454-21
GMP 1
89. Disc Filter System No. 6 Emergency Stop Activated
90. Disc Filter System No. 6 High turbidity alarm
END OF AWRF FILTER SECTION
1.6 DISC FILTER SYSTEM (OWRF)
A. Summary:
1.
The Ocotillo WRF will be updated with a Disc Filtration System upstream of
the Chlorine Contact Basins (CCB’s). Refer to Specification Section 11400,
Disc Filtration System.
a.
Effluent from the secondary clarifiers upstream flows via gravity through a
42” pipe to the common influent channel. Flow is then distributed between
the four filter units (three in operation, one standby) and the filter influent
enters the filter basins by flowing over an influent weir and submerging the
discs. Under normal operation, the discs are stationary.
b.
The cloth media filters are designed to continuously remove particulates
from the flow steam. As the influent passes through the cloth on each side
of the disc, solids are built up on the cloth surface, creating a mat. Other,
heavier solids settle to the bottom of the filter basin. The filtrate is collected
in the center tube and flows through to an effluent chamber and over an
effluent weir, into the effluent channel. The filter effluent is then conveyed
to the chlorine contact basin.
c.
As the amount of particulates on and within the pile cloth media increases,
the static pressure required to pass water through the pile cloth media
increases. This results in an increased water level within the filter basin and
increased differential pressure (headloss) on the pile cloth media.
Backwash mode cleans the pile cloth media by drawing from the filtered
side of the pile cloth media. This reverse flow dislodges particulates
embedded in the pile cloth media and restores it to a clean condition
d.
Upon reaching a specific number of backwash cycles performed, or an
elapsed time, the solids waste mode will be automatically initiated. Solids
on the floor of the filter basin are collected via a perforated manifold that is
attached to the backwash/waste pump.
e.
Backwash and solids wastewater are transported back to the IPS.
f.
The filter manufacturer shall be responsible for implementing all the
detailed control strategies for each filter in each vendor supplied LCP/PLC.
g.
Each LCP will be equipped with an OIT.
B. P&ID: See Sheets I-3.41 to I-3.53.
C. Components:
1.
Equipment
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17454-22
GMP 1
Associated Disc Filter
Unit(s)
Item Description
Item Tag
DS1
Control Panel
VCP-539-100
DS1
Power Panel
VPP-539-100
DS1
Drive Unit
FDU-539-100
DS1
Drive Unit Disconnect Switch
DSC-539-100
DS1
Motorized Inlet Gate
EDR-539-101
DS1
Solids Waste Valve 1
MOV-539-111
DS1
Backwash Valve 1
MOV-539-121
DS1
Backwash Valve 2
MOV-539-122
DS1
Backwash Valve 3
MOV-539-123
DS1
Backwash Valve 4
MOV-539-124
DS1
Backwash Valve 5
MOV-539-125
DS1
Backwash Valve 6
MOV-539-126
DS1
Backwash Pump A
BWP-539-130
DS1
Backwash Pump A Disconnect Switch
DSC-539-130
DS1
Backwash Pump B
BWP-539-140
DS1
Backwash Pump B Disconnect Switch
DSC-539-140
DS1
Power Pullbox
PPB-539-100
DS1
Control Pullbox
CPB-539-100
DS1
Analog Pullbox
APB-539-100
DS2
Control Panel
VCP-539-200
DS2
Power Panel
VPP-539-200
DS2
Drive Unit
FDU-539-200
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17454-23
GMP 1
DS2
Drive Unit Disconnect Switch
DSC-539-200
DS2
Motorized Inlet Gate
EDR-539-201
DS2
Solids Waste Valve 1
MOV-539-211
DS2
Backwash Valve 1
MOV-539-221
DS2
Backwash Valve 2
MOV-539-222
DS2
Backwash Valve 3
MOV-539-223
DS2
Backwash Valve 4
MOV-539-224
DS2
Backwash Valve 5
MOV-539-225
DS2
Backwash Valve 6
MOV-539-226
DS2
Backwash Pump A
BWP-539-230
DS2
Backwash Pump A Disconnect Switch
DSC-539-230
DS2
Backwash Pump B
BWP-539-240
DS2
Backwash Pump B Disconnect Switch
DSC-539-240
DS2
Power Pullbox
PPB-539-200
DS2
Control Pullbox
CPB-539-200
DS2
Analog Pullbox
APB-539-200
DS3
Control Panel
VCP-539-300
DS3
Power Panel
VPP-539-300
DS3
Drive Unit
FDU-539-300
DS3
Drive Unit Disconnect Switch
DSC-539-300
DS3
Motorized Inlet Gate
EDR-539-301
DS3
Solids Waste Valve 1
MOV-539-311
DS3
Backwash Valve 1
MOV-539-321
DS3
Backwash Valve 2
MOV-539-322
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17454-24
GMP 1
DS3
Backwash Valve 3
MOV-539-323
DS3
Backwash Valve 4
MOV-539-324
DS3
Backwash Valve 5
MOV-539-325
DS3
Backwash Valve 6
MOV-539-326
DS3
Backwash Pump A
BWP-539-330
DS3
Backwash Pump A Disconnect Switch
DSC-539-330
DS3
Backwash Pump B
BWP-539-340
DS3
Backwash Pump B Disconnect Switch
DSC-539-340
DS3
Power Pullbox
PPB-539-300
DS3
Control Pullbox
CPB-539-300
DS3
Analog Pullbox
APB-539-300
DS4
Control Panel
VCP-539-400
DS4
Power Panel
VPP-539-400
DS4
Drive Unit
FDU-539-400
DS4
Drive Unit Disconnect Switch
DSC-539-400
DS4
Motorized Inlet Gate
EDR-539-401
DS4
Solids Waste Valve 1
MOV-539-411
DS4
Backwash Valve 1
MOV-539-421
DS4
Backwash Valve 2
MOV-539-422
DS4
Backwash Valve 3
MOV-539-423
DS4
Backwash Valve 4
MOV-539-424
DS4
Backwash Valve 5
MOV-539-425
DS4
Backwash Valve 6
MOV-539-426
DS4
Backwash Pump A
BWP-539-430
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17454-25
GMP 1
DS4
Backwash Pump A Disconnect Switch
DSC-539-430
DS4
Backwash Pump B
BWP-539-440
DS4
Backwash Pump B Disconnect Switch
DSC-539-440
DS4
Power Pullbox
PPB-539-400
DS4
Control Pullbox
CPB-539-400
DS4
Analog Pullbox
APB-539-400
NA
Monorail Hoist Disconnect Switch
DSC-539-300
NA
Monorail Hoist E-Stop
ES-539-300
DS1/DS2
Sump Pump Motor Control Panel No. 1
MCP-539-150
DS1/DS2
Sump Pump No. 1
PMP-539-151
DS1/DS2
Sump 1 Low Level Switch
LSL-539-153
DS1/DS2
Sump 1 High Level Switch
LSH-539-154
DS1/DS2
Sump 1 High High Level Switch
LSHH-539-155
DS3/DS4
Sump Pump Motor Control Panel No. 2
MCP-539-250
DS3/DS4
Sump Pump No. 2
PMP-539-251
DS3/DS4
Sump 2 Low Level Switch
LSL-539-253
DS3/DS4
Sump 2 High Level Switch
LSH-539-254
DS3/DS4
Sump 2 High High Level Switch
LSHH-539-255
2.
Instruments:
Associated Disc
Filter Unit(s)
Item Description
Item Tag
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17454-26
GMP 1
DS1
Pressure Transducer
LIT-539-103
DS1
High Level Float Switch
LSH-539-102
DS1
Effluent Chamber Turbidity Probe
AE-539-104
DS1
Vacuum Transmitter No. 1
VT-539-131
DS1
Vacuum Transmitter No. 2
VT-539-141
DS1
Vacuum Indicator No. 1
VI-539-132
DS1
Pressure Indicator No. 1
PI-539-133
DS1
Vacuum Indicator No. 2
VI-539-142
DS1
Pressure Indicator No. 2
PI-539-143
DS1
Effluent Chamber Turbidity Analyzer
AIT-539-104
DS2
Pressure Transducer
LIT-539-203
DS2
High Level Float Switch
LSH-539-202
DS2
Effluent Chamber Turbidity Probe
AE-539-204
DS2
Vacuum Transmitter No. 1
VT-539-231
DS2
Vacuum Transmitter No. 2
VT-539-241
DS2
Vacuum Indicator No. 1
VI-539-232
DS2
Pressure Indicator No. 1
PI-539-233
DS2
Vacuum Indicator No. 2
VI-539-242
DS2
Pressure Indicator No. 2
PI-539-243
DS2
Effluent Chamber Turbidity Analyzer
AIT-539-204
DS3
Pressure Transducer
LIT-539-303
DS3
High Level Float Switch
LSH-539-302
DS3
Effluent Chamber Turbidity Probe
AE-539-304
DS3
Vacuum Transmitter No. 1
VT-539-331
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17454-27
GMP 1
DS3
Vacuum Transmitter No. 2
VT-539-341
DS3
Vacuum Indicator No. 1
VI-539-332
DS3
Pressure Indicator No. 1
PI-539-333
DS3
Vacuum Indicator No. 2
VI-539-342
DS3
Pressure Indicator No. 2
PI-539-343
DS3
Effluent Chamber Turbidity Analyzer
AIT-539-304
DS4
Pressure Transducer
LIT-539-403
DS4
High Level Float Switch
LSH-539-402
DS4
Effluent Chamber Turbidity Probe
AE-539-404
DS4
Vacuum Transmitter No. 1
VT-539-431
DS4
Vacuum Transmitter No. 2
VT-539-441
DS4
Vacuum Indicator No. 1
VI-539-432
DS4
Pressure Indicator No. 1
PI-539-433
DS4
Vacuum Indicator No. 2
VI-539-442
DS4
Pressure Indicator No. 2
PI-539-443
DS4
Effluent Chamber Turbidity Analyzer
AIT-539-404
D. Hard-Wired Safety Interlocks:
1.
The Filter Drive will automatically stop on motor overload.
2.
The Backwash/Solids Waste Pump will automatically STOP on low-level
alarm.
3.
The Backwash/Solids Waste Pump will automatically STOP on motor overload.
4.
The Backwash high water level set elevation will not go above 1184.95’.
E. Control Modes:
1.
Remote Auto (SCADA):
a.
Disc Filter Influent Gate:
1) Place all disc filter influent gates in the REMOTE position at the
respective gate LCP.
2) The disc filter inlet gate will open by pressing the OPEN button from
individual filter control page at DCS.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17454-28
GMP 1
3) The disc filter influent gate will close by pressing the CLOSE button
from individual filter control page at DCS.
b.
Backwash/Solids Waste Cycle
1) Place all vendor control panels, VCP-539-100, VCP-539-200, VCP-
539-300, and VCP-539-400, H-O-A switches in the AUTO position.
Place the LEVEL or TIMED selector switch, at the vendor control
panels, VCP-539-100, VCP-539-200, VCP-539-300, and VCP-539-
400 in the proper position dependent on operations.
2) Place all backwash valves/solids waste valve(s) in the REMOTE
position.
3) Place all backwash/solids wasting pump(s) in the REMOTE position.
4) Place the filter drive unit in the REMOTE position.
5) The disc filter system will start operation in normal filtration mode
when set to ENABLE.
6) The backwash/solids waste pump(s) will start automatically when a
backwash is initiated by either LEVEL or TIME, dependent on
operations.
7) The backwash/solids waste valve(s) will operate automatically during
backwash/solids wasting.
8) Backwash interval is set on the Individual Filter Control page from
SCADA.
9) Backwash high water level for automatic backwash is set on the
Individual Filter Control page from SCADA.
10) Backwash count to initiate sludge wasting is set on the Individual
Filter Control page from SCADA.
11) Solids wasting interval (time) is set on the Individual Filter Control
page from SCADA.
12) The disc filter system will stop operation when set to DISABLE.
2.
Remote Hand
a.
Disc Filter Influent Gate:
1) Place all disc filter influent gates in the REMOTE position at the
respective gate LCP.
2) The disc filter inlet gate will open by pressing the OPEN button from
individual filter control page at SCADA.
3) The disc filter influent gate will close by pressing the CLOSE button
from individual filter control page at SCADA.
b.
Backwash/Solids Waste Cycle:
1) Place all vendor control panels, VCP-539-100, VCP-539-200, VCP-
539-300, and VCP-539-400, LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE switches in the
REMOTE position.
2) Place all backwash/solids wasting pump(s) in the REMOTE position.
3) The Backwash/Solids Waste Pump(s) will start by pressing the
START BACKWASH button from individual filter control page at
SCADA.
4) The
Backwash/Solids
Waste
Pump(s)
will
stop
when
the
backwash/solids waste cycle is complete.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17454-29
GMP 1
5) Place all backwash valves/solids waste valve(s) in the AUTO position.
6) The Backwash/Solids Waste Valves(s) will open automatically during
a backwash/solids waste cycle.
7) The Backwash/Solids Waste Valve(s) will close automatically during
a backwash/solids waste cycle.
8) Place the filter drive unit in the AUTO position.
9) The Filter Drive Motor will start by pressing the START
BACKWASH button from individual filter control page at SCADA.
10) The Filter Drive Motor will stop when the backwash/solids waste
cycle is complete.
11) Backwash interval is set on the Individual Filter Control page from
SCADA.
12) Backwash high water level for automatic backwash is set on the
Individual Filter Control page from SCADA.
13) Backwash count to initiate sludge wasting is set on the Individual
Filter Control page from SCADA.
14) Solids wasting interval (time) is set on the Individual Filter Control
page from SCADA.
3.
Local Auto:
a.
Disc Filter Influent Gate:
1) Place all disc filter influent gates in the LOCAL position at the
respective gate LCP.
2) The disc filter inlet gate will open by pressing the OPEN button from
the gate LCP.
3) The disc filter influent gate will close by pressing the CLOSE button
from the gate LCP.
b.
Backwash/Solids Waste Cycle:
1) Place all vendor control panels, VCP-539-100, VCP-539-200, VCP-
539-300, and VCP-539-400, H-O-A switches in the AUTO position.
Place the LEVEL or TIMED selector switch, at the vendor control
panels, VCP-539-100, VCP-539-200, VCP-539-300, and VCP-539-
400 in the proper position dependent on operations.
2) Place all backwash valves/solids waste valve(s) in the LOCAL
position.
3) Place all backwash/solids wasting pump(s) in the LOCAL position.
4) Place the filter drive unit in the LOCAL position.
5) The disc filter system will start operation in normal filtration mode
when the disc filter influent gate is open.
6) The backwash/solids waste pump(s) will start automatically when a
backwash is initiated by either LEVEL or TIME, dependent on
operations.
7) The backwash/solids waste valve(s) will operate automatically during
backwash/solids wasting.
8) Backwash interval is set locally at the vendor control panels, VCP-
539-100, VCP-539-200, VCP-539-300, and VCP-539-400.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17454-30
GMP 1
9) Backwash high water level for automatic backwash is set locally at the
vendor control panels, VCP-539-100, VCP-539-200, VCP-539-300,
and VCP-539-400.
10) Backwash count to initiate sludge wasting is set locally at the vendor
control panels, VCP-539-100, VCP-539-200, VCP-539-300, and VCP-
539-400.
11) Solids wasting interval (time) is set locally at the vendor control
panels, VCP-539-100, VCP-539-200, VCP-539-300, and VCP-539-
400.
12) The disc filter system will stop operation when the disc filter influent
gate is closed.
4.
Local Hand
a.
Disc Filter Influent Gate:
1) Place all disc filter influent gates in the LOCAL position.
2) The disc filter influent gates will open by placing the panel L-O-R
switch in the LOCAL position and pressing the OPEN pushbutton.
3) The disc filter influent gates will close by placing the panel L-O-R
switch in the LOCAL position and pressing the CLOSE pushbutton.
b.
Backwash/Solids Waste Pump(s):
1) The backwash/solids waste pump(s) is controlled locally at the vendor
control panel, VCP-539-100, VCP-539-200, VCP-539-300, and VCP-
539-400.
2) The Backwash/Solids Waste Pump(s) START/STOP button is located
at the vendor control panel, VCP-539-100, VCP-539-200, VCP-539-
300, and VCP-539-400.
3) The Backwash/Solids Waste Pump(s) will start by placing the panel
H-O-A switch in the HAND position and pressing the START
pushbutton.
4) The Backwash/Solids Waste Pump(s) will stop by placing the panel H-
O-A switch in the HAND position and pressing the STOP
pushbutton.
c.
Backwash/Solids Waste Valve(s):
1) The backwash/solids waste valve(s) is controlled locally at the vendor
control panel, VCP-539-100, VCP-539-200, VCP-539-300, and VCP-
539-400.
2) The Backwash/Solids Waste Valve(s) OPEN/CLOSE button is located
at the vendor control panel, VCP-539-100, VCP-539-200, VCP-539-
300, and VCP-539-400.
3) The Backwash/Solids Waste valve(s) actuator will open and close the
valve using the OPEN/STOP/CLOSE controls at the valve actuator
when the LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE switch is set to LOCAL.
d.
Filter Drive Unit
1) The Filter Drive Motor is controlled locally at the vendor control
panel, VCP-539-100, VCP-539-200, VCP-539-300, and VCP-539-
400.
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17454-31
GMP 1
2) The Filter Drive Motor is started by placing the panel H-O-A switch in
the HAND position and pressing the START pushbutton.
3) The Filter Drive Motor is stopped by placing the panel H-O-A switch
in the HAND position and pressing the STOP pushbutton.
F. Monitor: The following data will be monitored by SCADA
1.
Disc Filter System No. 1 High Level Status
2.
Disc Filter System No. 1 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) in AUTO/HAND status
3.
Disc Filter System No. 1 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) in OFF status
4.
Disc Filter System No. 1 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) RUN status
5.
Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Duration (time) status
6.
Disc Filter System No. 1 Solids Wasting Duration (time) status
7.
Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 in AUTO/HAND
status.
8.
Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 in OFF status
9.
Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 RUN status
10. Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 2 in OFF status
11. Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 2 RUN status
12. Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 1 Open Status
13. Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 1 Closed Status
14. Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 2 Open Status
15. Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 2 Closed Status
16. Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 3 Open Status
17. Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 3 Closed Status
18. Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 4 Open Status
19. Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 4 Closed Status
20. Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 5 Open Status
21. Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 5 Closed Status
22. Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 6 Open Status
23. Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 6 Closed Status
24. Disc Filter System No. 1 Solids Waste Valve 1 Open Status
25. Disc Filter System No. 1 Solids Waste Valve 1 Closed Status
26. Disc Filter System No. 2 Disc Filter Influent Gate Open Status
27. Disc Filter System No. 2 High Level Status
28. Disc Filter System No. 2 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) in AUTO/HAND status
29. Disc Filter System No. 2 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) in OFF status
30. Disc Filter System No. 2 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) RUN status
31. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Duration (time) status
32. Disc Filter System No. 2 Solids Wasting Duration (time) status
33. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 in AUTO/HAND
status.
34. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 in OFF status
35. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 RUN status
36. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 2 in OFF status
37. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 2 RUN status
38. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 1 Open Status
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17454-32
GMP 1
39. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 1 Closed Status
40. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 2 Open Status
41. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 2 Closed Status
42. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 3 Open Status
43. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 3 Closed Status
44. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 4 Open Status
45. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 4 Closed Status
46. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 5 Open Status
47. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 5 Closed Status
48. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 6 Open Status
49. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 6 Closed Status
50. Disc Filter System No. 2 Solids Waste Valve 1 Open Status
51. Disc Filter System No. 2 Solids Waste Valve 1 Closed Status
52. Disc Filter System No. 3 Disc Filter Influent Gate Open Status
53. Disc Filter System No. 3 High Level Status
54. Disc Filter System No. 3 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) in AUTO/HAND status
55. Disc Filter System No. 3 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) in OFF status
56. Disc Filter System No. 3 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) RUN status
57. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Duration (time) status
58. Disc Filter System No. 3 Solids Wasting Duration (time) status
59. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 in AUTO/HAND
status.
60. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 in OFF status
61. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 RUN status
62. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 2 in OFF status
63. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 2 RUN status
64. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 1 Open Status
65. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 1 Closed Status
66. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 2 Open Status
67. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 2 Closed Status
68. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 3 Open Status
69. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 3 Closed Status
70. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 4 Open Status
71. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 4 Closed Status
72. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 5 Open Status
73. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 5 Closed Status
74. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 6 Open Status
75. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 6 Closed Status
76. Disc Filter System No. 3 Solids Waste Valve 1 Open Status
77. Disc Filter System No. 3 Solids Waste Valve 1 Closed Status
78. Disc Filter System No. 4 Disc Filter Influent Gate Open Status
79. Disc Filter System No. 4 High Level Status
80. Disc Filter System No. 4 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) in AUTO/HAND status
81. Disc Filter System No. 4 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) in OFF status
82. Disc Filter System No. 4 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) RUN status
83. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Duration (time) status
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17454-33
GMP 1
84. Disc Filter System No. 4 Solids Wasting Duration (time) status
85. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 in AUTO/HAND
status.
86. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 in OFF status
87. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 RUN status
88. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 2 in OFF status
89. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 2 RUN status
90. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 1 Open Status
91. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 1 Closed Status
92. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 2 Open Status
93. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 2 Closed Status
94. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 3 Open Status
95. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 3 Closed Status
96. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 4 Open Status
97. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 4 Closed Status
98. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 5 Open Status
99. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 5 Closed Status
100. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 6 Open Status
101. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 6 Closed Status
102. Disc Filter System No. 4 Solids Waste Valve 1 Open Status
103. Disc Filter System No. 4 Solids Waste Valve 1 Closed Status
G. Alarms: The following alarms and indications are available in all control modes:
1.
Disc Filter System No. 1 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) FAIL
2.
Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 FAIL
3.
Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 2 FAIL
4.
Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 1 FAIL
5.
Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 2 FAIL
6.
Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 3 FAIL
7.
Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 4 FAIL
8.
Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 5 FAIL
9.
Disc Filter System No. 1 Backwash Valve 6 FAIL
10. Disc Filter System No. 1 Solids Waste Valve 1 FAIL
11. Disc Filter System No. 1 Level alarm high
12. Disc Filter System No. 1 Emergency Stop Activated
13. Disc Filter System No. 1 High turbidity alarm
14. Disc Filter System No. 2 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) FAIL
15. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 FAIL
16. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 2 FAIL
17. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 1 FAIL
18. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 2 FAIL
19. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 3 FAIL
20. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 4 FAIL
21. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 5 FAIL
22. Disc Filter System No. 2 Backwash Valve 6 FAIL
23. Disc Filter System No. 2 Solids Waste Valve 1 FAIL
City of Chandler
December 2020
WRF Improvements Project
19-038
17454-34
GMP 1
24. Disc Filter System No. 2 Level alarm high
25. Disc Filter System No. 2 Emergency Stop Activated
26. Disc Filter System No. 2 High turbidity alarm
27. Disc Filter System No. 3 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) FAIL
28. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 FAIL
29. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 2 FAIL
30. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 1 FAIL
31. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 2 FAIL
32. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 3 FAIL
33. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 4 FAIL
34. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 5 FAIL
35. Disc Filter System No. 3 Backwash Valve 6 FAIL
36. Disc Filter System No. 3 Solids Waste Valve 1 FAIL
37. Disc Filter System No. 3 Level alarm high
38. Disc Filter System No. 3 Emergency Stop Activated
39. Disc Filter System No. 3 High turbidity alarm
40. Disc Filter System No. 4 Filter Drive Unit (FDU) FAIL
41. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 1 FAIL
42. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash/Solids Waste Pump 2 FAIL
43. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 1 FAIL
44. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 2 FAIL
45. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 3 FAIL
46. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 4 FAIL
47. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 5 FAIL
48. Disc Filter System No. 4 Backwash Valve 6 FAIL
49. Disc Filter System No. 4 Solids Waste Valve 1 FAIL
50. Disc Filter System No. 4 Level alarm high
51. Disc Filter System No. 4 Emergency Stop Activated
52. Disc Filter System No. 4 High turbidity alarm
PART 2 -
PART 2 -
PART 2 -
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
GMP 1 12/20
ATTACHMENT TWO
GMP 1 – Figures (Preliminary – Not for Construction)
22' - 7"
16' - 5"
22' - 7"
16' - 5"
22' - 7"
A
M-1.67
B
M-1.67
C
M-1.68
G
M-1.67
NOTES
:
1
INFLUENT CHANNEL
2
2'x4' INFLUENT SLIDE GATE (TYP)
3
EFFLUENT CHAMBER (TYP)
4
COMMON FILTER EFFLUENT CHANNEL
5
BACKWASH/SOLIDS PUMP GALLERY
(TYP)
6
PUMP GALLERY ACCESS SPIRAL
STAIRCASE
7
PUMP GALLERY SUMP (TYP)
1. PORTIONS OF UPPER WALKWAY AND
HANDRAILING NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY.
2. FILTER CANOPY NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY.
1/8" = 1'-0"
PLAN
1620 West Fountainhead Pkwy
Suite 501
Tempe, Arizona 85282
Phone: (480) 893-8860
Improving Arizona's
Infrastructure Since 1942
Design:
Drawn:
Checked:
Date:
Revision
Date
Description
By
Sheet No.
VERIFY SCALES
BAR IS ONE INCH ON
ORIGINAL DRAWING
IF NOT ONE INCH ON
THIS SHEET, ADJUST
SCALES ACCORDINGLY
0
1"
CITY PROJECT NO.
Wilson Project No.
WILSON PROJECT NO.
KEYED NOTES
G:\PROJECT\_Revit\05 Chandler Airport WRF\19038\3.0 AWRF Filters and Flocculation Basins.rvt
11/11/2020 5:22:06 PM
60% SUBMITTAL
07/2020
M-1.64
19038
IMPROVEMENTS
SZ
JW
SR
CITY OF CHANDLER
WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
AWRF - FILTERS OVERALL PLAN
WW1901.201
19038
1
2
6
7
FROM BACKWASH
STORAGE TANK
TO PLANT
SEWER
FROM BLOWER
BUILDING
TO CHLORINE
CONTACT
BASINS
42" DIA DIP
FLOW METER
MANHOLE (TYP)
8
FROM
SECONDARY
CLARIFIERS
FROM
SECONDARY
CLARIFIERS
FROM EXISTING
FILTERS 9 THRU 16
8
BACKSWASH/SOLIDS WASTE PUMP (TYP)
9
DAVIT CRANE SOCKET (TYP) SEE DETAIL
408, SHEET M-7.04
10
1 TON MONORAIL HOIST ASSEMBLY, SEE
STRUCTURAL SHEETS FOR DETAILS
11
4'x5' MOTOR ACTUATED FILTER
EFFLUENT SLIDE GATE
4
3
11
5
12
SEE SHEET M-1.65 FOR DISC FILTER
DETAILS
13
SEE SHEET M-1.66 FOR PUMP GALLERY
DETAILS
FILTER BASIN 7
FILTER BASIN 6
FILTER BASIN 5
FILTER BASIN 4
FILTER BASIN 3
FILTER BASIN 2
13
12
10
9
6
PRELIMINARY - FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
60% SUBMITTAL - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION OR RECORDING
FIGURE 1
PRELIMINARY - FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
8' - 5"
6' - 7"
1' - 1"
3/4" = 1'-0"
FILTER BASIN 5 PLAN
1620 West Fountainhead Pkwy
Suite 501
Tempe, Arizona 85282
Phone: (480) 893-8860
Improving Arizona's
Infrastructure Since 1942
Design:
Drawn:
Checked:
Date:
Revision
Date
Description
By
Sheet No.
VERIFY SCALES
BAR IS ONE INCH ON
ORIGINAL DRAWING
IF NOT ONE INCH ON
THIS SHEET, ADJUST
SCALES ACCORDINGLY
0
1"
CITY PROJECT NO.
Wilson Project No.
WILSON PROJECT NO.
KEYED NOTES
G:\PROJECT\_Revit\05 Chandler Airport WRF\19038\3.0 AWRF Filters and Flocculation Basins.rvt
11/11/2020 5:22:07 PM
60% SUBMITTAL
07/2020
M-1.65
19038
IMPROVEMENTS
SZ
AJC
SR
CITY OF CHANDLER
WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
AWRF - FILTER BASIN 5 PLAN
WW1901.201
19038
1
2'x4' MOTOR ACTUATED FILTER
INFLUENT SLIDE GATE
2
FILTER INFLUENT WEIR
3
CLOTH MEDIA FILTER DISC (TYP)
4
FILTER EFFLUENT CENTERTUBE
5
FILTER DRIVE ASSEMBLY
6
3" DIA PVC SOLIDS COLLECTION
MANIFOLD
7
LEVEL SENSING PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER AND FLOAT SWITCH
8
EFFLUENT WALL AND OVERFLOW WEIR
9
EFFLUENT WEIR
10
COMMON EFFLUENT CHANNEL
11
FILTER EFFLUENT CHAMBER
12
FILTER BACKWASH SHOE ASSEMBLY
1
2
3
4
6
8
9
10
14
13
13
4" DIA MUD VALVE, SEE DETAIL 401,
SHEET M-7.04
14
4" DIA PVC DRAIN TO SUMP
FILTER
INFLUENT
CHANNEL
TO SANITARY
SEWER - SEE
YARD PIPING
FOR DETAILS
15
TURBIDITY METER
15
16
SEE SHEET M-1.66 FOR DETAILS
16
17
PIPE PENECTATION (TYP), SEE DETAIL
103, SHEET M-7.01
7
11
5
17
PRELIMINARY - FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
60% SUBMITTAL - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION OR RECORDING
FIGURE 2
PRELIMINARY - FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
1' - 11"
1' - 6"
3/4" = 1'-0"
FILTER DRY PIT 1
1
BACKWASH/SOLIDS WASTE PUMP (TYP)
1620 West Fountainhead Pkwy
Suite 501
Tempe, Arizona 85282
Phone: (480) 893-8860
Improving Arizona's
Infrastructure Since 1942
Design:
Drawn:
Checked:
Date:
Revision
Date
Description
By
Sheet No.
VERIFY SCALES
BAR IS ONE INCH ON
ORIGINAL DRAWING
IF NOT ONE INCH ON
THIS SHEET, ADJUST
SCALES ACCORDINGLY
0
1"
CITY PROJECT NO.
Wilson Project No.
WILSON PROJECT NO.
KEYED NOTES
G:\PROJECT\_Revit\05 Chandler Airport WRF\19038\3.0 AWRF Filters and Flocculation Basins.rvt
11/12/2020 8:14:53 AM
60% SUBMITTAL
07/2020
M-1.66
19038
IMPROVEMENTS
SZ
AJC
SR
CITY OF CHANDLER
WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
AWRF - FILTER PUMP GALLERY
WW1901.201
19038
2
3" DIA MOTOR ACTUATED BACKWASH
BALL VALVE (TYP)
3
3" DIA MOTOR ACTUATED SOLIDS WASTE
BALL VALVE (TYP)
4
3" DIA PVC PIPING (TYP)
5
PUMP GALLERY SUMP
7
4" PVC PIPING FROM FILTER CHAMBER
MUD VALVE (TYP)
3
2
3
4
7
5
8
SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMP (TYP)
6
PIPE PENECTRATION, SEE DETAIL 103,
SHEET M-7.01 (TYP)
WASHWATER
CHANNEL
6
8
NOTES:
1. WALKWAY NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY.
ELEVATION = 1222
8
PUMP GALLERY ACCESS SPIRAL
STAIRCASE, SEE STRUCTURAL SHEETS
FOR DETAILS
1
PRELIMINARY - FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
60% SUBMITTAL - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION OR RECORDING
FIGURE 3
PRELIMINARY - FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
1220.25'
1216.33'
1220.93
1218.83
SECTION
3/8" = 1'-0"
M-1.64
A
1
FILTER INFLUENT CHANNEL
1620 West Fountainhead Pkwy
Suite 501
Tempe, Arizona 85282
Phone: (480) 893-8860
Improving Arizona's
Infrastructure Since 1942
Design:
Drawn:
Checked:
Date:
Revision
Date
Description
By
Sheet No.
VERIFY SCALES
BAR IS ONE INCH ON
ORIGINAL DRAWING
IF NOT ONE INCH ON
THIS SHEET, ADJUST
SCALES ACCORDINGLY
0
1"
CITY PROJECT NO.
Wilson Project No.
WILSON PROJECT NO.
KEYED NOTES
G:\PROJECT\_Revit\05 Chandler Airport WRF\19038\3.0 AWRF Filters and Flocculation Basins.rvt
11/11/2020 5:22:11 PM
60% SUBMITTAL
07/2020
M-1.67
19038
IMPROVEMENTS
SZ
AJC
SR
CITY OF CHANDLER
WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
AWRF - FILTERS SECTION 1
WW1901.201
19038
2
WASHWATER CHANNEL
3
2'x4' MOTOR ACTUATED FILTER
INFLUENT SLIDE GATE
4
FILTER INFLUENT WEIR BOX
5
FILTER BASIN
6
FILTER EFFLUENT OVERFLOW
WEIR WALL
7
FILTER EFFLUENT CHAMBER
8
FILTER EFFLUENT WEIR
9
COMMON FILTER EFFLUENT CHANNEL
10
FILTER BASIN MUD VALVE, SEE DETAIL
401, SHEET M-7.04
11
3" DIA PVC SOLIDS COLLECTION
MANIFOLD
12
3" DIA PVC BACKWASH MANIFOLD
13
DRIVE ASSEMBLY
14
CLOTH MEDIA DISC FILTER (TYP)
15
FILTER EFFLUENT CENTERTUBE
16
FILTER BASIN GROUT, SEE STRUCTURAL
SHEETS FOR DETAILS
17
BACKWASH SHOE (TYP)
8
6
9
7
12
11
16
5
10
2
1
3
4
14
17
SECTION
3/8" = 1'-0"
M-1.64
B
2
1
9
18
PUMP GALLERY ACCESS STAIRS
19
FILTER BACKWASH/SOLIDS WASTE PUMP
(TYP)
20
CONCRETE PUMP PAD (TYP), SEE
STRUCTURAL SHEETS FOR DETAILS
21
3" DIA MOTOR ACTUATED BACKWASH
BALL VALVE (TYP)
22
3" DIA MOTOR ACTUATED SOLIDS WASTE
BALL VALVE (TYP)
23
3" DIA PVC BACKWASH WATER/SOLIDS
WASTE MANIFOLD
24
4" DIA PVC FROM FILTER BASIN MUD
VALVE DRAIN TO SUMP
25
PIPE PENETRATION (TYP), SEE DETAIL
103, SHEET M-7.01
18
22
21
23
24
25
26
TURBIDITY METER
26
SECTION
3/8" = 1'-0"
M-1.64
G
27
EFFLUENT WEIR PLATE, SEE DETAIL 407,
SHEET M-7.04
27
28
FILTER PLATFORM
29
FILTER ACCESS LADDER SEE DETAIL 406,
SHEET M-7.04
30
1" DIA CPVC SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE
DOSING POINT
31
MUD VALVE OPERATING NUT FLOOR BOX
SEE DETAIL 401, SHEET M-7.04
20
31
30
29
15
28
13
PRELIMINARY - FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
60% SUBMITTAL - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION OR RECORDING
FIGURE 4
PRELIMINARY - FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
o
o
o
o
FIGURE 5
PRELIMINARY - FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
FIGURE 6
PRELIMINARY - FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
FIGURE 7
PRELIMINARY - FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
D
M-3.49
C
M-3.49
A
M-3.48
E
M-3.49
B
M-3.48
1. CANOPY OVER DISC FILTERS NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY.
NOTES:
15' - 9"
1620 West Fountainhead Pkwy, Ste 501
Tempe, Arizona 85282
Phone: (480) 893-8860
Improving Arizona's
Infrastructure Since 1942
Design:
Drawn:
Checked:
Date:
Revision
Date
Description
By
Sheet No.
VERIFY SCALES
BAR IS ONE INCH ON
ORIGINAL DRAWING
IF NOT ONE INCH ON
THIS SHEET, ADJUST
SCALES ACCORDINGLY
0
1"
CITY PROJECT NO.
Wilson Project No.
WILSON PROJECT NO.
KEYED NOTES
G:\PROJECT\_Revit\04 Chandler Ocotillo WRF\19038\3.0 OWRF Filters.rvt
11/11/2020 1:25:37 PM
60% SUBMITTAL
07/2020
M-3.44
19038
IMPROVEMENTS
KG
JRW
SR
CITY OF CHANDLER
WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
OWRF - FILTERS
OVERALL TOP PLAN
ww1901.201
19038
3/16" = 1'-0"
UPPER PLAN
1
INFLUENT CHANNEL
2
FILTER BYPASS CHANNEL
3
3'-0"L x 3'-0"W x 3'-0"D SUMP
4
CLOTH MEDIA DISC FILTER (TYP)
5
TURBIDITY PROBE (TYP)
6
SUMP PUMP CONTROL PANELS (TYP OF
2)
7
DISC FILTER EFFLUENT CHANNEL
8
CONCRETE WALL FOR CHANNEL
ISOLATION
9
COMMON FILTER EFFLUENT CHANNEL
10
PUMP GALLERY (TYP)
11
4'-0"W x 2'-0" INFLUENT SLIDE GATES
WITH MOTORIZED ACTUATOR (TYP OF 4)
12
8" DIA PLANT DRAIN PIPING
13
10" DIA PVC FILTER BACKWASH DRAIN
PIPE
14
5'-0" DIA MANHOLE
15
15" DIA PLANT SEWER PIPING
16
42" DIA INFLUENT PIPING
17
FILTER BACKWASH/SOLIDS WASTE
PUMPS (TYP)
18
MONORAIL
14
13
15
17
8
7
10
16
12
TRAVELING BRIDGE FILTER NO. 4
TRAVELING BRIDGE FILTER NO. 3
11
1
18
19
STOP LOG ASSEMBLY
20
4'-0"W X 7'-0"H SLIDE GATE (TYP)
22
4'-0"W X 5'-0"H SLIDE GATE
23
EDGE OF EXISTING ROADWAY
23
2
19
4
20
23
6
5
9
19
22
24
PUMP GALLERY ACCESS STAIRS
24
25
DAVIT CRANE SOCKET (TYP)
21
DAVIT CRANE (TYP)
21
25
3
27
26
26
VENDOR CONTROL PANEL (TYP OF 4)
27
VENDOR POWER PANEL (TYP OF 4)
DISC FILTER NO. 3
DISC FILTER NO. 2
DISC FILTER NO. 1
DISC FILTER NO. 4
FROM SECONDARY CLARIFIERS
PRELIMINARY - FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
60% SUBMITTAL - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION OR RECORDING
FIGURE 8
PRELIMINARY - FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
INFLUENT
CHANNEL
1
2
3
4
6
5
7
8
9
10
11
12
14
13
14
15 16
DISC FILTER
EFFLUENT
CHANNEL
1620 West Fountainhead Pkwy, Ste 501
Tempe, Arizona 85282
Phone: (480) 893-8860
Improving Arizona's
Infrastructure Since 1942
Design:
Drawn:
Checked:
Date:
Revision
Date
Description
By
Sheet No.
VERIFY SCALES
BAR IS ONE INCH ON
ORIGINAL DRAWING
IF NOT ONE INCH ON
THIS SHEET, ADJUST
SCALES ACCORDINGLY
0
1"
CITY PROJECT NO.
Wilson Project No.
WILSON PROJECT NO.
KEYED NOTES
G:\PROJECT\_Revit\04 Chandler Ocotillo WRF\19038\3.0 OWRF Filters.rvt
11/11/2020 1:25:38 PM
60% SUBMITTAL
07/2020
M-3.46
19036
IMPROVEMENTS
KG
AJC
SR
CITY OF CHANDLER
WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
OWRF - FILTERS
FILTER BASIN 1 PLAN
ww1901.201
19036
1
4'-0"W x 2'-0"H INFLUENT SLIDE GATE
WITH MOTORIZED ACTUATOR
2
INFLUENT WEIR BOX
3
CLOTH MEDIA DISC FILTER
4
DISC FILTER CENTERTUBE
5
FILTER DRIVE ASSEMBLY
6
WASTE SOLIDS COLLECTION MANIFOLD
7
PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
8
OVERFLOW WEIR WALL
9
EFFLUENT WEIR
10
FILTER EFFLUENT CHAMBER
11
FILTER BACKWASH SHOE ASSEMBLY
12
4" DIA MUD VALVE
13
TURBIDITY PROBE
14
DISK FILTER MAINTENCE ACCESS
PLATFORM
15
REMOVABLE SECTION OF GUARDRAIL
FOR FILTER DRIVE MAINTENCE
16
FLOAT SWITCH
3/4" = 1'-0"
FILTER BASIN 4 PLAN
PRELIMINARY - FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
60% SUBMITTAL - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION OR RECORDING
FIGURE 9
PRELIMINARY - FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
1
3
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
INFLUENT
CHANNEL
DISC FILTER
EFFLUENT
CHANNEL
10
11
1620 West Fountainhead Pkwy, Ste 501
Tempe, Arizona 85282
Phone: (480) 893-8860
Improving Arizona's
Infrastructure Since 1942
Design:
Drawn:
Checked:
Date:
Revision
Date
Description
By
Sheet No.
VERIFY SCALES
BAR IS ONE INCH ON
ORIGINAL DRAWING
IF NOT ONE INCH ON
THIS SHEET, ADJUST
SCALES ACCORDINGLY
0
1"
CITY PROJECT NO.
Wilson Project No.
WILSON PROJECT NO.
KEYED NOTES
G:\PROJECT\_Revit\04 Chandler Ocotillo WRF\19038\3.0 OWRF Filters.rvt
11/11/2020 1:25:39 PM
60% SUBMITTAL
07/2020
M-3.47
19036
IMPROVEMENTS
KG
AJC
SR
CITY OF CHANDLER
WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
OWRF - FILTERS
PUMP GALLERY
ww1901.201
19036
3/4" = 1'-0"
PUMP GALLERY
1
BACKWASH / SOLIDS WASTE PUMP (TYP)
2
2" DIA MOTOR ACTUATED BACKWASH
BALL VALVE (TYP)
3
2" DIA MOTOR ACTUATED SOLIDS WASTE
BALL VALVE (TYP)
4
3" DIA PVC PIPING (TYP)
5
PUMP GALLERY SUMP
6
PUMP GALLERY ACCESS STAIRS
7
SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMP
8
SLEEVE WITH LINK SEAL (TYP) SEE
DETAIL 103, SHEET M-7.01
9
SUMP PUMP CONTROL PANEL
10
DAVIT CRANE
11
DAVIT CRANE SOCKET, SEE DETAIL 408,
SHEET M-7.04
PRELIMINARY - FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
60% SUBMITTAL - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION OR RECORDING
FIGURE 10
PRELIMINARY - FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
29
13
14
15
16
24
20
18
19
11
1
ENLARGED DETAIL 2
SEE SHEET M-3.46
31
28
3
17
34
21
23
22
25
8
ENLARGED DETAIL 1
SHEET M-3.46
26
2
3
4
9
12
17
10
5
6
7
27
33
32
30
29
35
1620 West Fountainhead Pkwy, Ste 501
Tempe, Arizona 85282
Phone: (480) 893-8860
Improving Arizona's
Infrastructure Since 1942
Design:
Drawn:
Checked:
Date:
Revision
Date
Description
By
Sheet No.
VERIFY SCALES
BAR IS ONE INCH ON
ORIGINAL DRAWING
IF NOT ONE INCH ON
THIS SHEET, ADJUST
SCALES ACCORDINGLY
0
1"
CITY PROJECT NO.
Wilson Project No.
WILSON PROJECT NO.
KEYED NOTES
G:\PROJECT\_Revit\04 Chandler Ocotillo WRF\19038\3.0 OWRF Filters.rvt
11/11/2020 1:25:41 PM
60% SUBMITTAL
07/2020
M-3.48
19038
IMPROVEMENTS
KG
JRW
SR
CITY OF CHANDLER
WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY
OWRF - FILTERS
SECTIONS AND DETAILS 1
ww1901.201
19038
SECTION
1/4" = 1'-0"
M-3.44
A
1
CLOTH MEDIA DISC FILTER BASIN
2
INFLUENT WEIR BOX
3
4'-0"W x 2'-0"H INFLUENT SLIDE GATE
WITH MOTORIZED ACTUATOR (TYP)
4
INFLUENT CHANNEL
5
OVERFLOW WEIR WALL
6
FILTER EFFLUENT CHAMBER
7
EFFLUENT WEIR
8
DISC FILTER EFFLUENT CHANNEL
9
FILTER BYPASS CHANNEL
10
TURBIDITY PROBE
11
FILTER DRIVE ASSEMBLY
12
TRAVELING BRIDGE FILTER BASIN NO. 3
13
DISC FILTER NO. 4
14
DISC FILTER NO. 3
15
DISC FILTER NO. 2
16
DISC FILTER NO. 1
17
FILTER CANOPY, SEE STRUCTURAL,
SHEET S-3.44
18
4" DIA MUD VALVE (TYP) SEE DETAIL 401,
SHEET M-7.04
19
3'-0"L X 3'-0"W X 3'-0"D SUMP
21
FILTER BASINS ACCESS LADDER
22
10" DIA PVC FILTER BACKWASH PIPING
23
5'-0" DIA MANHOLE
24
BACKWASH/SOLIDS WASTE PUMPS (TYP)
25
3" DIA PVC FILTER BACKWASH PIPING
26
MONORAIL
20
PUMP GALLERY ACCESS STAIRS
27
ELECTRICAL PANELS
28
SUMP PUMP
29
4'-0"W x 7'-0"H SLIDE GATE
30
STOP LOG ASSEMBLY
SECTION
1/4" = 1'-0"
M-3.44
B
31
3" DIA PVC RECIRCULATION
32
PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
33
FLOAT SWITCH
34
DAVIT CRANE (TYP)
35
SEE MAG DETAIL 426, TYPE A
PRELIMINARY - FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
60% SUBMITTAL - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION OR RECORDING
FIGURE 11
PRELIMINARY - FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
o
o
o
o
FIGURE 12
PRELIMINARY - FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
FIGURE 13
PRELIMINARY - FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
FIGURE 14
PRELIMINARY - FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
EXHIBIT D
City of Chandler Construction Manager at Risk Construction Services
GMP-1
Public Works & Utilities Department, Capital Projects Division
Project Name: WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS – GMP 1
Project No.: WW1901.401
Rev.12/1/2020
ACCEPTED GMP/PRICE PROPOSAL
City of Chandler Water Reclamation Facility
Improvements Project
Project No. WW1901.401
GMP #1 Proposal
January 8, 2021 Rev. February 16, 2021
City of Chandler Water Reclamation Facility Improvements Project
January 8, 2021 Rev. February 16, 2021
SECTION 1
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
SECTION 2
GMP PROPOSAL SUMMARY
- PROJECT COST SUMARY
- TAX EXEMPT SUMMARY
- LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS
SECTION 3
WORK CATEGORY SCHEDULE OF VALUES (“SOV”)
SECTION 4
GMP CLARIFICATIONS AND ASSUMPTIONS
SECTION 5
PRELIMINARY PROJECT SCHEDULE
SECTION 6
LIST OF GMP PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 7
GENERAL CONDITIONS AND RATES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
City of Chandler Water Reclamation Facility Improvements Project
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
January 8, 2021 Rev. February 16, 2021
Project Description
The overall project consists of improvements to the Airport Water Reclamation Facility (AWRF) and the
Ocotillo Water Reclamation Facility (OWRF). This GMP only includes select early work for the project as
follows:
The following Work Packages include procurement only. Installation has not been included as it
will be part of a future GMP.
-
Disc Filters
-
Stainless Steel Gates
Page 1 of 13
PROJECT COST SUMMARY
January 8, 2021 Rev. February 16, 2021
Project:
GMP #1 Proposal
Client:
City of Chandler
Location:
Chandler, AZ
City Project #
WW1901.401
Percentage
Amount
A. Direct Costs
A1 Direct Cost
$4,165,419
A2 Construction Contingency
4.0%
$166,617
TOTAL DIRECT COSTS:
$4,332,036
B. General Conditions on Direct Costs only
B
General Conditions
2.7%
$118,313
SUBTOTAL 1 (Cost of the Work):
$4,450,349
C. CM@Risks's Fee on Cost of Work only
CMAR Construction Fee
7.0%
$311,524
SUBTOTAL 2
$4,761,873
D. Bonds and Insurance
D1
Performance and Payment Bonds
0.7%
$33,333
D2
Insurance (PL/PD, Builders Risk)
1.2%
$59,047
Bonds & Insurance Allowance Total
$92,380
SUBTOTAL 3
$4,854,253
E. Sales Tax
E1
Sales Tax (65% of 7.8%)
5.07%
$246,111
E2
Tax Credits
($196,724)
TOTAL SALES TAX
$49,387
F. Allowances
F1
COVID/Force Majeure Allowance
$200,000
F2
Owner Allowance
$739,097
TOTAL GMP #1 PROPOSAL
$5,842,737
Chandler Water Reclamation Facility Improvements Project
Page 2 of 13
TAX EXEMPT SUMMARY
January 8, 2021 Rev. February 16, 2021
Project:
Chandler Water Reclamation Facility Improvements Project
GMP #1 Proposal
Client:
City of Chandler
Location:
Chandler, AZ
City Job #
WW1901.401
DESCRIPTION
Total Tax Exempt
Value
01A
General Requirements
$0
11A
Disc Filters
$3,430,560
11B
Stainless Steel Slide Gates
$449,600
Total Tax Exempt Amount
$3,880,160
Gross Receipts Tax Credit, 65% * 7.8%
5.07%
(196,724)
$
Page 3 of 13
LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS
January 8, 2021 Rev. February 16, 2021
Project:
GMP #1 Proposal
Client:
City of Chandler
Location:
Chandler, AZ
City Project #
WW1901.401
Work
Category
DESCRIPTION
Subcontractor / Supplier
Recommended Subcontractors / Suppliers
11A
Disc Filters
IES Southwest (Aqua Aerobics)
11B
Stainless Steel Slide Gates
Coombs (Whipps/Auma)
Chandler Water Reclamation Facility Improvements Project
Page 4 of 13
WORK CATEGORY SCHEDULE OF VALUES ("SOV")
January 8, 2021 Rev. February 16, 2021
Project:
Chandler Water Reclamation Facility Improvements Project
GMP #1 Proposal
Client:
City of Chandler
Location:
Chandler, AZ
City Project #
WW1901.401
Work Category
Description
Total
A. DIRECT COSTS
01A
General Requirements
$43,023
11A
Disc Filters
$3,598,173
11B
Stainless Steel Slide Gates
$524,223
Direct Cost Subtotal
$4,165,419
Page 5 of 13
City of Chandler Water Reclamation Facility Improvements Project
GMP #1 CLARIFICATIONS AND ASSUMPTIONS
January 8, 2021 Rev. February 16, 2021
General
1. Liquidated damages have been assumed to be per MAG section 108.9.
2. The cost of reuse water, sewer, power, and chemical usage during construction and start-up is not
included.
3. Transaction Privilege Tax has been included at 7.8% based on the projects being in the City of Chandler.
Tax exemptions have also been included.
4. No cost has been included for security guards.
5. The following are City of Chandler project costs and have not been included in the cost model:
a. Temporary/construction/startup use and permanent utility hookup and usage costs including
power, sewer, reuse water
b. Building and Environmental Permits, MCDES and ADEQ permitting fees, plan review fees and
impact costs
c.
Special Inspection Fees
d. Asbestos testing and Hazardous Waste removal
e. Furnishings, Fixtures, and Equipment (FFE) and design of FFE
6. Submittals have been included to be submitted in electronic format only. No hard copies of shop drawings
will be submitted.
7. Section 4.1.4 of the Construction Services Contract (Construction Manager at Risk) is rewritten as follows:
“4.1.4 CM@RISK is responsible for undertaking all necessary action contemplated under the contract
documents to construct the Project and ensure timely and quality completion of the Project at a
cost within the Guaranteed Maximum Price (GMP).”
8. General Conditions have been included for GMP 1 only through the equipment check-in period.
9. COVID-19/Force Majeure Allowance: This allowance to be used only under authorization by the City. This
allowance is available if the parties agree conditions that directly arise out of or directly result from the
COVID19 pandemic or other force majeure event as defined in General Conditions Article 6.2.14, which
may excuse a party's performance under this clause. The party who seeks to invoke this clause must give
the other party written notice 30 days after the occurrence of the event giving rise to such condition and
the parties must agree in writing to the length of excused or suspended performance. An allowance has
been established to cover increases in costs incurred by Contractor resulting from the COVID19 pandemic
or force majeure event, which allowance may be used by Contractor subject to the prior written approval
of the City, which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld.
Work Category 11A – Disc Filters
1. This Work Category includes 5 filters at the Airport Plant, and 4 filters at the Ocotillo plant.
2. The backwash and solid waste valves have been included as 2” as shown on the P&ID drawings.
Work Category 11B – Stainless Steel Slide Gates
1. The gate quantities and sizes are based on the 60% gate schedule dated November 2020.
2. Guides are to be a single piece construction.
3. A 6P NEMA box has been included in lieu of a 4X.
Page 6 of 13
Activity ID
Activity Name
Orig
Dur
Start
Finish
Chandler
Chandler Water Reclamation Facility Improveme
468d
06-Jan-20 A
03-Nov-21
Overview
Overview
468d
06-Jan-20 A
03-Nov-21
Milestones
Milestones
468d
06-Jan-20 A
03-Nov-21
MIL-100
*Milestone: Project Award
0d
06-Jan-20 A
MIL-110
*Milestone: 30% Design Documents Complete
0d
24-Jun-20 A
MIL-140
*Milestone: 60% Design Documents Complete
0d
11-Nov-20 A
MIL-160
*Milestone: GMP-1 NTP - Early Procurement Release
0d
01-Mar-21
MIL-170
*Milestone: GMP 1 Substantial Completion
0d
03-Nov-21*
Preconstruct
Preconstruction
211d
13-May-20 A
01-Mar-21
Design
Design
132d
13-May-20 A
10-Dec-20 A
PD-100
Design Development - 30% Design Documents
30d
13-May-20 A
24-Jul-20 A
PD-110
Design Development - 60% Design Documents
60d
27-Jul-20 A
11-Nov-20 A
PD-150
90% Specs for Early Equip
48d
11-Sep-20 A
10-Dec-20 A
GMP
GMP
150d
24-Jul-20 A
01-Mar-21
P-GMP-100
30% Design Estimate
40d
24-Jul-20 A
14-Sep-20 A
P-GMP-110
60% Design Estimate
40d
12-Nov-20 A
18-Dec-20 A
P-GMP-140
GMP-1 Early Procurement Development / Submit
79d
18-Nov-20 A
08-Jan-21 A
P-GMP-160
GMP-1 Early Procurement Review / Approval
34d
11-Jan-21 A
01-Mar-21
P-GMP-170
RLB Review (GMP 1)
10d
11-Jan-21 A
22-Jan-21
Contracts
Contracts
6d
02-Mar-21
09-Mar-21
P-CO-110
Contracts - Disc Filters
6d
02-Mar-21
09-Mar-21
P-CO-120
Contracts - Gates
6d
02-Mar-21
09-Mar-21
Procurement
Procurement
168d
10-Mar-21
03-Nov-21
Disc Filters
Disc Filters
168d
10-Mar-21
03-Nov-21
P-PR-160
Sub Prep Submittals: Disc Filters
25d
10-Mar-21
13-Apr-21
P-PR-170
McC Review Submittals: Disc Filters
10d
14-Apr-21
27-Apr-21
P-PR-180
ENG Rev/Aprv Submittals: Disc Filters
15d
28-Apr-21
18-May-21
P-PR-190
Submittal Review Workshop: Disc Filters
4d
19-May-21
24-May-21
P-PR-210
Fab & Deliver: Disc Filters
100d
25-May-21
14-Oct-21
MIL-200
Equipment Check-in: Disk Filters
14d
15-Oct-21
03-Nov-21
Gates
Gates
162d
10-Mar-21
26-Oct-21
P-PR-280
Sub Prep Submittals: Gates
24d
10-Mar-21
12-Apr-21
P-PR-290
McC Review Submittals: Gates
5d
13-Apr-21
19-Apr-21
P-PR-300
ENG Rev/Aprv Submittals: Gates
15d
20-Apr-21
10-May-21
P-PR-330
Fab & Deliver: Gates
95d
11-May-21
23-Sep-21
MIL-210
Equipment Check-in: Gates
23d
24-Sep-21
26-Oct-21
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
Jul
Aug
Sep
Oct
Nov
Dec
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
Jul
Aug
Sep
Oct
Nov
Dec
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
Jul
Aug
Sep
ct
2021
2022
2023
e: 60% Design Documents Complete
*Milestone: GMP-1 NTP - Early Procurement Release
*Milestone: GMP 1 Substantial Completion
ocuments
evelopment - 60% Design Documents
% Specs for Early Equip
60% Design Estimate
GMP-1 Early Procurement Development / Submit
GMP-1 Early Procurement Review / Approval
RLB Review (GMP 1)
Contracts - Disc Filters
Contracts - Gates
Sub Prep Submittals: Disc Filters
McC Review Submittals: Disc Filters
ENG Rev/Aprv Submittals: Disc Filters
Submittal Review Workshop: Disc Filters
Fab & Deliver: Disc Filters
Equipment Check-in: Disk Filters
Sub Prep Submittals: Gates
McC Review Submittals: Gates
ENG Rev/Aprv Submittals: Gates
Fab & Deliver: Gates
Equipment Check-in: Gates
Run Date - 16-Feb-21
Data Date - 13-Jan-21
Chandler Water Reclamation Facility Improvements - Detail
1 of 1
Page 7 of 13
City of Chandler Water Reclamation Facility Improvements Project
List of GMP Plans and Specifications
January 8, 2021 Rev. February 16, 2021
GMP 1 Specifications
Specification Section
# Pages
Date Issued
Section 01010- Summary of Work
3
December 2020
Section 01300- Submittals
15
December 2020
Section 01640- Materials and Equipment
5
December 2020
Section 01650- Starting of Systems
9
December 2020
Section 01660- Field Tests of Equipment
3
December 2020
Section 01730- Operation and Maintenance Data
4
December 2020
Section 01750- Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials
3
December 2020
Section 01821- Instruction of Operations and Maintenance Personnel
5
December 2020
Section 03300- Cast in Place Concrete
23
December 2020
Section 09900- Painting
22
December 2020
Section 11285- Hydraulic Gates and Stop Logs
11
December 2020
Gate/Stop Log Schedule (60% Submittal)
Pg 12- 20
November 2020
Section 11400- Disc Filters
21
December 2020
Section 13447- Electric Motor Actuators
21
December 2020
Section 16160- Enclosures
2
December 2020
Section 16161- Control Panels
34
December 2020
Section 16170- Grounding and Bonding
8
December 2020
Section 16225- Electric Motors
10
December 2020
Section 16474- Motor Control Equipment
6
December 2020
Section 16476- Low Voltage Circuit Breakers
2
December 2020
Section 16482- Solid State Motor Controllers
6
December 2020
Section 16951- Short Circuit, Coordination, and Arc-Flash Hazard Report
5
December 2020
Section 17325- Turbidity and TSS Analyzer
5
December 2020
Section 17454- Operations and Control Descriptions
34
December 2020
*This GMP only includes the procurement of the items described in Section 1 and the directly associated
specification sections. All other specification sections are supporting documents.
Page 8 of 13
GMP 1 Plans
Sheet #
Sheet Name
Sheet Version
Date of Print
Date of Issuance
M – 1.64
AWRF – Filters Overall Plan
60% Submittal
11/11/2020
@5:22:06 PM
12/10/2020
M – 1.65
AWRF – Filter Basin 5 Plan
60% Submittal
11/11/2020
@5:22:07 PM
12/10/2020
M – 1.66
AWRF – Filter Pump Gallery
60% Submittal
11/12/2020
@8:14:53 AM
12/10/2020
M – 1.67
AWRF – Filters Section 1
60% Submittal
11/11/2020
@5:22:11 PM
12/10/2020
I – 1.61
AWRF – Filter DS1 P&ID Sheet 1 of 3
60% Submittal
12/8/2020
@1:44:36 PM
12/10/2020
I – 1.62
AWRF – Filter DS1 Backwash Valves
P&ID Sheet 2 of 3
60% Submittal
12/8/2020
@1:44:38 PM
12/10/2020
I – 1.63
AWRF – Filter DS1 Backwash Valves
P&ID Sheet 3 of 3
60% Submittal
12/8/2020
@1:44:40 PM
12/10/2020
M – 3.44
OWRF – Filters Overall Top Plan
60% Submittal
11/11/2020
@1:25:37 PM
12/10/2020
M – 3.46
OWRF – Filters Filter Basin 1 Plan
60% Submittal
11/11/2020
@1:25:38 PM
12/10/2020
M – 3.47
OWRF – Filters Filter Pump Gallery
60% Submittal
11/11/2020
@1:25:39 PM
12/10/2020
M – 3.48
OWRF – Filters Sections and Details 1
60% Submittal
11/11/2020
@1:25:41 PM
12/10/2020
I – 3.41
OWRF – Disc Filter DS1 P&ID Sheet 1 of
3
60% Submittal
12/8/2020
@1:45:20 PM
12/10/2020
I – 3.42
OWRF – Disc Filter DS1 P&ID Sheet 2 of
3
60% Submittal
12/8/2020
@1:45:22 PM
12/10/2020
I – 3.43
AWRF – Disc Filter DS1 P&ID Sheet 3 of
3
60% Submittal
12/8/2020
@1:45:24 PM
12/10/2020
Page 9 of 13
City of Chandler Water Reclamation Facility Improvements Project
Project No. WW1901.401
GENERAL CONDITIONS
TOTALS
POSITION
QTY
UNIT
PRICE
TOTAL
Start
End
Hours
Wks
Months
Project Director
0.75
WKS
5,858
$
4,394
$
3/1/2021 11/3/2021
30
0.75
0.2
Project Manager
10.0
WKS
5,168
$
51,680
$
3/1/2021 11/3/2021
400
10.00
2.3
General Superintendent
5.5
WKS
5,501
$
30,256
$
3/1/2021 11/3/2021
220
5.50
1.3
Project Engineer
8.0
WKS
3,673
$
29,384
$
3/1/2021 11/3/2021
320
8.00
1.8
Project Administrator
1.0
WKS
2,600
$
2,600
$
3/1/2021 11/3/2021
40
1.00
0.2
Staff Subtotal
25.25
Subtotal
118,313
$
TOTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
118,313
$
January 8, 2021 Rev. February 16, 2021
Early Procurement
Page 10 of 13
Chandler WRF Improvements
2/3/2021
McCarthy Org Chart submitted with December 2019 proposal:
Page 2 of 2
Page 11 of 13
City of Chandler Water Reclamation Facility Improvements Project
Project No. WW1901.401
January 8, 2021 Rev. February 16, 2021
McCarthy Non-Staff Unit Rates
Hourly
General Foreman
$72.70
Foreman
$58.31
Carpenter
$54.59
Finisher
$48.92
Laborer
$39.16
Operator - Crane / Equipment
$61.80
Operator - Forklift
$57.97
Millwright
$62.57
Pipefitter / Pipelayer
$49.64
Welder
$69.19
Plumber
$49.24
HVAC Installer
$47.09
Rates include wages plus burden, cell phone, travel, safety incentive, and training. Overtime hours to be billed at 1.43
times the straight time rate.
Page 12 of 13
City of Chandler Water Reclamation Facility Improvements Project
Project No. WW1901.401
January 8, 2021 Rev. February 16, 2021
Hourly
Project Director
$146.21
Senior Project Manager
$137.90
Project Manager
$129.20
Assistant Project Manager
$108.87
Project Safety Manager
$123.83
General Superintendent
$137.53
Project Superintendent
$126.76
Area Superintendent
$124.88
Assistant Project Superintendent
$108.97
Project Engineer
$91.83
Project Administrator
$65.00
Rates include salary and burden, vehicle, fuel, oil, parts, cell phone, computer, software & maintenance, subsistence,
travel, training and relocation. Sick and Vacation are included in the rates; holidays have been included as cost of the
work.
McCarthy Staff Unit Rates
Page 13 of 13
EXHIBIT E
Rev.12/1/2020
Construction Manager at Risk Construction Services
SUB-1
[TITLE]
Project No. [####]
SUBCONTRACTOR’S LIST FORM
If Bidder intends to subcontract any portion of this contract, the bidder must submit the name, address, and contractor’s license number (if applicable) of
each subcontractor, including the work component of such subcontracting. Include the form with the bid submittal documents. Bidder may make
multiple copies of this form as needed.
Company Name:
Contact Name:
Contact Email:
Contact Phone:
Work Component:
Percentage of Total
Work Performed:
Company Name:
Contact Name:
Contact Email:
Contact Phone:
Work Component:
Percentage of Total
Work Performed:
Company Name:
Contact Name:
Contact Email:
Contact Phone:
Work Component:
Percentage of Total
Work Performed:
Company Name:
Contact Name:
Contact Email:
Contact Phone:
Work Component:
Percentage of Total
Work Performed:
Company Name:
Contact Name:
Contact Email:
Contact Phone:
Work Component:
Percentage of Total
Work Performed:
Company Name:
Contact Name:
Contact Email:
Contact Phone:
Work Component:
Percentage of Total
Work Performed: